Professional Documents
Culture Documents
-.'"
~~II
'.III
Paran~rmal
Experience
Introduction by
Marion Zimmer Bradley
Harper's
Encyclopedia
of
Mystical
&
Paranormal
Experience
HARPER'S
ENCYCLOPEDIA
of
Mystical
&
Paranormal
Experience
Foreword by
Marion Zimmer Bradley
ROSEMARY
ELLEN
GUlLEY
HarperSanFrancisco
A Di~'i5ion of HarperCollinsPublishers
ENCYCLOPEDIA
OF JvlYSTICAL A,"-;D PARANORMAL
EXPERIENCE.
Copyright 1991 by Rosemary
Ellen Guiley. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. No part of this book
may be used or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission except in the
case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. For information, address
HarperCollins Publishers, 10 East 53rd Street, New York, NY 10022.
HARPER'S
FIRST DmOl'-:
Library
of Congress
Cataloging-in-Publication
Data
Guiley, Rosemary.
Harper's encyclopedia of mystical and paranormal experience I Rosemary Ellen Guiley :
foreword by Marion Zimmer Bradley. - 1st ed.
p. em.
Includes bibliographical references.
ISBN 0-06-250365-0 (hard: alk. paper)
ISBN 0-06-250365-9 (pbk.)
1. Occultism-Encyclopedias.
2. Parapsychology-Encyclopedias.
3. SupernaturalEncyclopedias.
1. Title.
II. Title: Encyclopedia of mystical and paranormal experience.
BF1407.G85 1991
133'.03 -dc20
90-21718
CIP
93 94 95 RRD(H) 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
This edition is printed on acid-free paper that meets the American National Standards Institute
Z39.48 Standard.
For
James G. Matlock
Contents
Foreword by Marion Zimmer Bradley
IX
Preface
Xl
Acknowledgments
The Encyclopedia
Xlll
Foreword
When I was first asked to write a foreword for this encyclopedia, I wasn't exactly enthusiastic. Reading an unbound
manuscript almost ten inches tall is a bit
of an ordeal. At least it takes a considerable stretch of the imagination to imagine
what the final printed and bound volume
will be like.
However, I remembered Rosemary's
The Encyclopedia of Witches and Witchcraft, which adorns my own coffee table.
I thought it an excellent book and quite
worthy, so I agreed.
Among the virtual flood of books on
the occult with which bookstores have
been cluttered of late, this book stands
out. I find it hard to imagine a better
book for browsing or one that is likely to
give the neophyte more comprehensive
information on the subject. Even the person who is well informed is likely to find
out something he or she didn't already
know. And, after all, for what other purpose is an encyclopedia intended?
The classic book review, "This book
tells me more about penguins than I care
to know," has always been a pitfall of
encyclopedists. This is not the case with
Harper's Encyclopedia of Mystical and
Paranormal Experience. Of course, it
does not cover absolutely everything. No
human work can do that. But, by and
large, it informs readers about anything
they're likely to want to know without
boring them with irrelevant material.
Foreword
I cannot tell you whether you are going to want to put this book on your coffee table, because interior decoration is
not within my field of expertise, no matter how loosely that subject is defined.
What I can say is that it's certainly good
reading. It ought to be fun for the casual
browser as well as the serious seeker of
information, and it's likely to turn the
former into the latter.
One of things I like most to do is
start out in a book like this almost anywhere, find something so fascinating that
one thing simply leads to another, and
before you know it you've read the whole
thing through.
Especially in these troubled times,
we need information, and we need it
badly. In fact, acquiring information can
be the substitute for all those things to
which we're supposed to "just say no." I
sincerely believe that one of the things we
can put in the place of any socially disapproved behavior is the gathering of information, one of the more satisfying
things anyone can do.
And so publishing an encyclopedia
in this day and age can contribute to one
of the major spiritual challenges of our
time. I don't know whether that's what
Rosemary Ellen Guiley or her publishers
first set out to do. But whether they know
it or not, that's what they've done. And
for that, I salute them.
Marion Zimmer Bradley
tX
Preface
This book is a result of my personal odyssey into "alternate realities," which began years ago. As anyone else who has
undertaken such a quest also knows, the
subjects are many and the literature vast.
Reading to find answers raises more
questions in the process.
Early on in this quest, I began to
wish for a handy reference-something
that would provide a quick grasp of subjects and concepts that were new to me. I
envisioned a book that would both satisfy
an immediate need to know and stimulate
deeper inquiries into subjects of particular interest. Looking around, I didn't find
anything quite like what I had in mind.
Years passed and eventually a series of
synchronicities opened up an opportunity
for me to materialize my own wish.
This encyclopedia is intended for the
layperson who is curious about a good
many topics that fall under the "alternate
realities" umbrella. I use the term "alternate realities" for want of a bener one.
"Occult" is too limited and, for many, a
tainted term; "supernatural" has its limitations as well. "New Age" came and,
thankfully, went. Unfortunately, there is
no broad, definitive term to describe the
range of subjects that pique one's curiosity on a spiritual quest. "Alternate realities" suggests the worlds that open up
through many paths of inquiry.
It was not difficult to decide what to
include in the book. Rather, it was difficult to decide what to leave out. The
Preface
book gives preference to subject over person. While it does include a number of
biographies of people of historical note
and popular interest, biographies were
limited in favor of phenomena, disciplines, systems, philosophies, traditions,
and concepts. The emphasis throughout
is on experience. That emphasis, I believe,
will be particularly helpful to those readers who are trying to understand and
come to terms with unusual experiences
they have had themselves. Some of my
own experiences have become part of the
research.
The book is not meant to be definitive, but a reflection of evolving thought.
The reader will find that a good many of
the subjects offer widely disparate theories and points of view. I have attempted
to give objective overviews. Admittedly, I
am not a skeptic, though I seek to be
open-minded and consider all possible
sides and arguments. The sources listed at
the end of every entry will open additional doors for the reader who wishes to
explore a topic further. Due to space
limitations, and because sources are listed
throughout, there is no bibliography at
the end of the book. Sources include approximately 1,100 books and several
hundred periodical articles.
My own interests have always been
eclectic, which I believe is typical of the
interests of many others. Consequently, I
have sought to include a range of subjects
under one cover. One scientist I inter-
Xl
xu
Preface
Acknowledgments
I am deeply grateful to the many people
who provided material, art, or critiques
that helped the realization of this book. I
would like to give special thanks to:
Joanne P. Austin and Margaret Guiley,
Seattle, and Don Wigal, Ph.D., and Bruce
S. Trachtenberg, New York, for their meticulous help in the research and compilation of many entries; James G. Matlock, New York, parapsychologist and
anthropologist, for his review of a substantial portion of this book, and for his
comments and suggestions, which were
of great help to me; Elda Hartley,
founder of Hartley Films, Cos Cob, Connecticut, for providing me numerous photos taken during her many years as film
chronicler of spiritual quests; and photographer Bonnie Sue, Somers, New
York, for providing numerous photos as
well. Special thanks also to Dorothy Kroll
and Patricia Godfrey, New Jersey, for
their help in research.
I also would like to thank the following individuals and organizations for
their assistance: Renee Haynes, past president of the Society for Psychical Research, London; the staff of the American
Society for Psychical Research, New
York; Eileen CoIl', president of the Parapsychology Foundation, New York; author Tom Perrott, president of The Ghost
Club, London; Susan Jion Postal, Zen
priest, Meeting House Zen Group, Rye,
Acknowledgments
xm
Harper's
Encyclopedia
of
Mystical
&
Paranormal
Experience
I
I
II
I
I
!
i
I
I
I
III
A
A Course in Miracles
A self-study spiritual development course
that was channeled through an atheist
over a seven-year period, from 1965 to
1972. A Course in Miracles is a threevolume work comprising
over 1,100
pages: a 622-page Text, which lays the
theoretical foundation; a 478-page Workbook for Students, which includes 365
lessons, one for each day; and an 87-page
which
are inherent
A Course
in Miracles
in human-
Frightened, Schucman wanted nothing to do with the Voice, but felt compelled to continue. She took the dictation
in shorthand from the Voice almost daily,
sometimes several times a day. It always
resumed dictation precisely where it had
left off, no matter how much time elapsed
between sessions. Courteously,
it never
intruded during her work or social activities. The Voice never identified itself. It
was clear but silent. Schucman never entered a trance or wrote automatically.
Schucman shared the material with
Thetford. He encouraged her to continue,
though the experiences greatly upset her.
Some of the material was dictated in
prose, some was dictated in blank verse
or iambic
pentameter.
Occasionally,
Schucman was tempted to change the
words that were dictated, but always restored them to their original dictation.
Until almost the end of the project, she
was fearful of the content of the material,
and repeatedly expressed no interest in
reading \vhat the Voice had given her.
and
Beginning in 1971 Schucman
Thetford arranged the Text into chapters
and subsections. By September 1972 the
Manual was finished, completing the entire work. The Voice predicted that a
woman would come along who would
know what to do with it.
That woman was Judith R. Skutch,
president of the Foundation for ParaSensory Investigation. In 1975 she met Thetford and Schucman, who gave her a copy
of the Course. Skutch and her husband,
Robert, changed the name of their foundation to the Foundation for Inner Peace.
In 1976 they dedicated it to publishing
and distributing the Course. Information
spread solely through
word-of-mouth.
Schucman and Thetford chose to remain
anonymous,
but acted as advisers to the
Foundation.
Study groups, independent
of the foundation,
have been started
around the \vorld.
The Voice continued
to speak to
Schucman, who wrote down a collection
her
her
Acupressure
See Bodywork.
Acupuncture
See Bodywork.
Age of Aquarius
A supposed rwo-thousand-year-Iong
era
of enlightenment,
joy, accomplishment,
intellect, brotherly peace, and closeness
to God, heralded by the entry of the sun
into the zodiac sign of Aquarius.
Astrologers
disagree on the exact
start of the Age of Aquarius. Dates range
from 1904 to 2160; the latter was arrived
at in calculations made by the Hermetic
Order of the Golden Dawn. The disparities in dates are due to the backward
drift of the vernal equinox through the
zodiac. The vernal equinox takes 25,920
years to make a complete cycle through
the zodiac, but a gradual slipping creates
a retrograde of one zodiac sign approxi-
A Course
in Miracles
mately every 2,160 years. Some astrologers take this slippage into account, others do not. American
medium Edgar
Cayce, called by some "the Prophet of the
New Age," said the Age of Aquarius and
its preceding age, the Age of Pisces, overlap and that the transition could not be
fully understood
until the beginning of
the twenty-first century. The Age of Pisces is supposed to be characterized by disillusionment and skepticism. The transition to Aquarius
allegedly will bring
ferment and change in social behavior
and institutions. Aquarius is ruled by t\vo
planets: Saturn, symbol of time, endurance, tests, and tasks; and Uranus, symbol of the new, revolutionary,
strange,
and bizarre. The 2160 starting date for
the Age of Aquarius approximately
coincides with various predictions
of cataclysms, war, and a shift of the North Pole
in the closing years of the t\ventieth century, followed by a t\vo-thousand-year
era of peace, tranquility,
and brotherhood.
See Nostradamus;
Revelation,
Book of. The term "Age of Aquarius"
was popular during the 1960s, which saw
a great deal of societal change and upheaval and interest in spiritual exploration. The Great Conjunction
of the sun,
moon, Venus, lvlars, lvlercury, Jupiter,
and Saturn in Aquarius on February 5,
1962, was said by astrologers to be a significant influence on quickening the transition to the new era. The term "Age of
Aquarius" has been supplanted by "New
Age." See Harmonic Convergence;
New
Age.
Akasha
(akasa)
morrow.
1978.
Aikido
See Martial
arts.
Akasha (akasa)
In Hinduism
and Buddhism,
the allpervasive life principle or all-pervasive
space of the universe. Akasha is the Sanskrit term for "all-pervasive space."
In Hinduism the akasha is seen as
the substance ether, the fifth and subtlest
element. The akasha permeates
everything in the universe and is the vehicle for
all life and sound. In the practice of yoga,
the akasha is one of three universal principles, along with prana ("breath of life")
and "creative mind," which form a trinity
of sources of magical and psychic power,
and are immanent in all things from the
mineral kingdom on up, throughout
the
universe. From the akasha comes will,
\vhich enables all manner of feats to be
accomplished.
In Buddhism
the akasha
is not ether
Akashic Records
In Theosophy the master records of everything that has ever occurred since the
beginning of the universe. The records are
said to exist as impressions in the astral
plane, and provide a dossier of sorts for
souls who wish to examine their spiritual
progress through many lifetimes.
The term "Akashic" comes from the
Sanskrit word akasha, defined as either
the fundamental
etheric substance in the
universe or all-pervasive space. According
to Theosophy
the akasha is an eternal
record of the vibrations of every action,
thought, emotion, light, and sound.
Some psychics say they consult the
Askashic Records either through clairvoyance or our-of-body travel, to receive
information
about past history or lives.
The process is variously described as tuning into an astral television set, or tuning
into a radio broadcast,
or visiting an
enormous library and looking up information in books. Some say they encoun-
Akasha
(akasa)
and intra. The Essential Steiner. San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1984; Joan Windsor. The Inner Eye: Your Dreams Can
Make You Psychic. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall, 1985.
Alchemy
Literally, an ancient art of transmutation
and the precursor of modern chemistry
and metallurgy. Symbolically, a mystical
art for the transformation
of consciousness.
Current Western interest in alchemy
is due largely to psychiatrist Carl G. Jung,
who sa\v it as having a spiritual dimension as well as a physical one: The true
purpose of the art is the psychological
and spiritual transformation
of the alchemist.
Alchemy is called a "spagyric"
from the Greek terms for "to tear"
an,
and
differently.
Western Alchemy
Western alchemy draws on the Hermetic tradition,
Greco-Egyptian
esoteric
teachings.
According
to legend
the
founder is Hermes T rismegistus, a form
of the Egyptian and Greek gods of magic
and wisdom, Thoth and Hermes, respectively. See Hermetica. In the late centuries
B.C. and early centuries .\.D., the Egyptians
combined metallurgy with Hermetic philosophy and ideas drawn from Western
mysteries, Neoplatonism,
gnosticism, and
Christianity.
The Egyptians
developed
one of the basic fundamentals
of alchemy: that the world was created by divine force out of a chaotic mass called
Thus in
alchemy all things can be reduced to first
matter through soh'e et coagula, "dis-
Alchemy
Alchemists at work
solve and combine," and transmuted
to
something
more desirable.
Specifically,
alchemists sought to transmute through
joining opposites.
By the fourth century .\.D., alchemy
had assumed its historical form and essentially replaced the disintegrating mysteries. It spread throughout
Europe beginning in the twelfth century, a product
of the Muslim occupation
of Spain. It
\vas a highly respected science, practiced
by adepts who wrote their treatises and
manuals in deliberately obscure language.
The term "gibberish"
is derived from a
medieval
alchemist
named
Jabir
ibn
Hayyan, generally known as Geber (c.
721-815), whose writings were largely
unintelligible.
Alchemy was at its peak from the
late Middle Ages through the Renaissance. Alchemists sought the elusive "philosopher's stone," or lapis, a mysterious
substance believed to enable the transmutation of base metals into silver or gold.
The philosopher's stone also served as the
"elixir of life," a means to immortality.
While most attempts at metals transmutations were failures, some alchemists
claimed to succeed. Nicholas Flamel, one
of the great alchemists of the fourteenth
century, is said to have achieved the
transmutation of mercury into silver or
gold on three occasions.
The writings and drawings produced
by the alchemists tend to be obscure and
difficult to understand. The alchemists
based their study primarily upon direct,
personal revelation through visions and
dreams. The alchemists did not describe
their work in direct terms, but wrote and
drew in symbols intended only for the
comprehension of other adepts. They varied in their use of terminology.
According to early alchemy, all
things have a hermaphroditic composition of two substances: sulfur, which represents the soul and the fiery male principle; and mercury, which represents
spirit and the watery female principle.
Later European alchemy added a third ingredient, salt, which corresponds to
body. The transmutation process involves
separating these three essentials and recombining them into a different form.
The process must be done according to
astrological auspices.
As a continuation of the mysteries,
alchemy may essentially have been a euphemism for the sacred service of cocreation, made possible by immortalization,
a status that had been achieved through
initiation into the mysteries.
The hermaphroditic nature of alchemy was often expressed in erotic art,
though there is no evidence that actual
sexual rites were practiced.
Medieval and Renaissance alchemists were responsible for many discoveries important in metallurgy, chemistry,
and medicines. See Paracelsus. However,
in the early nineteenth century, alchemy
was discredited by the discoveries of oxygen and the composition of water. Alchemy was reduced to the level of pseudoscience and superstition and was
replaced by physics.
Interest in alchemy remained low
key until about the second half of the
twentieth century, when a revival of interest began taking hold in the West. Alchemy schools were founded to teach the
ancient art, resulting in spagyric products
for cosmetics, herbal medicines, beverages and wines, perfumes, and so on.
Eastern Alchemy
Alchemy was highly developed in ancient China. It was an oral tradition until
c. A.D. 320, when the classic alchemical
text, Nei P'ien, was written by Ko Hung.
The immortality sought by the Chinese
was not an extension of earthly years;
they sought instead to attain a state of
timelessness spent with the Immortals, in
which one had supernormal powers. To
this end ancient Chinese alchemy focused
on various elixirs, which were purified by
combining ingredients and repeatedly
heating them in various vessels.
The alchemical process is analogous
to Taoist meditation, in which ch'i, the
universal life force, is created and purified
in the body. Ch'i is created when the nutritious elements of food are combined
with secretions from glands and organs.
This forms blood and sexual energy
(ching). Heat in the form of breath transforms the sexual energy to ch'i, which circulates up and down psychic channels
along the spine, from the crown to the
abdomen, somewhat akin to the kundalini energy of yoga. The ch'i passes
through twelve psychic centers located
along the channels. After many cycles the
ch'i becomes refined. It reaches the crown
in a highly concentrated state, where it
can be manipulated or else sent back
down to the abdomen. The ch'i can be
stored for future use.
Alchemy
Alchemy
symbolic
death and
conscious;
Gustav.
Gnosticism;
Jung,
Carl
Sources: Richard Cavendish, ed. The Encyclopedia of the Unexplained. New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1974; Martin Ebon, ed. The
Signet Handbook of Parapsychology. New
Jung,
Understanding
Yourself.
Alexander Technique
See Bodywork.
Alpert, Richard
See Ram Dass.
Alchemy
Science
10
religions, Hinduism and Buddhism technically are cults in the West, and Christianity is a cult in the East. Some conservative Christians define cult as any
religious group that is non-Christian.
"Cult" also has become a pejorative
term. Cults usually are identified as
groups having a charismatic leader,
which is characteristic of any emergent
religion, including Christianity.
Alternative
religious movements
have existed throughout history. In the
West they have arisen out of paganism,
Christianity, and Western occultism, and
have also been imported from the East. In
the present day numerous Eastern religious groups have taken root and flourished in the West. Some of these groups
exist primarily to serve the ethnic communities of immigrants, and have attracted the intellectual and religious interest of occidentals. Other groups have
been established primarily to spread their
teachings to Westerners. The common
themes of Eastern religious groups include pantheistic universalism; a sense of
the divine within; the goal of uniting with
the inner divine through meditation or
mystical experience; a cosmos that is
an infinite, nondualistic, conscious, and
transpersonal Reality, which is the divine
that dwells within and is the true nature
of all things; and karma and reincarnation.
The religions and philosophies of
East and West have cross-fertilized each
other since ancient times. Major influences on modern alternative movements
date to the influence of Confucian philosophy on the Enlightenment, as well as
on some of the founding fathers of America, including Benjamin Franklin. In the
nineteenth century the Transcendentalists
were influenced by Hinduism. Transcendentalism and Theosophy brought Eastern concepts to the West. They combined
with other movements such as mental
healing, Spiritualism, and a revival of occultism, and in turn influenced the for-
Altered
states of consciousness
form
of Hinduism
based
on Bhakti
(devotional)
Yoga,
ISKON was founded in America in 1965
by A. C. Bhaktivedanta
Swami Prabhupada (born Abhay Charan De) of Calcutta, India. ISKON is the latest revival
of a movement started in the sixteenth
century by a Bengali saint, Chaitanya
Mahaprabhu
(1486-1534?).
At age
t'Nenty-one,
Chaitanya
began chanting
the name of Krishna, and attracted a following. Swami Prabhupada
(1896-1977)
became a follower of one of the revivalist
movements, the Gaudiya Mission, and in
1933 was charged by its leader, Bhakti
Siddhanta,
with carrying Krishna Consciousness to the West. Prabhupada
did
little until 1965, when the United States
lifted restrictions on Asian immigration.
By that time Prabhupada was seventy. He
came to New York and quickly built up
a following. By 1970 ISKON was spread
throughout
the United States and to Europe, England, Australia,
Canada, and
Japan.
Devotees of ISKON are called the
Hare Krishnas for their incessant chanting of the Hare Krishna mantra
(see
Mantra),
which they believe will raise
their consciousness
to a state of bliss.
Krishna is considered the Personality of
the Godhead. Knowledge of the Vedic literature, especially the Bhagavad-Gita, is
stressed, although all great scriptures are
held to contain the Absolute Truth.
Devotees adopt clothing associated
with the devotional life in India and follow a semimonastic
tarians. They gained
their chanting in the
of funds in airports,
become restricted.
quarters
11
ican headquarters
California.
12
Rajneesh Foundation
International
The Bhagwan ("godman") Shree Rajneesh, born a Jain in India in 1931,
proved to be one of the more controversial gurus to set up shop in the West. He
claimed to have his first experience of samadhi (enlightenment) when he was
seven; in 1953, while a student at the
University of Saugar, he experienced a
spiritual death and rebirth. In 1966 he
became a full-time spiritual leader, espousing nontraditional teachings that became known as Rajneeshism, a synthesis
of major religions and humanistic psychology. He was discovered by Westerners in Bombay in 1970. In 1974 he
founded the Rajneesh Foundation (later
the Rajneesh Foundation International)
and established an ashram at Poona.
In 1981 Rajneesh came to the United
States, where he purchased a 64,000-acre
ranch near Antelope, Oregon; in 1982 it
was incorporated as Rajneeshpuram. His
followers were at constant odds with the
residents of Antelope, especially when
Rajneesh hosted seven thousand followers at a summer festival. In a 1982 election, devotees took control of the Antelope government. Efforts to deport
Rajneesh failed, for he had been adopted
in 1936 by an Indian who became a US
citizen in 1973 -the father of his secretary, Ma Anand Sheela. Despite Rajneesh's blatant materialism, most notably
a fleet of nearly one hundred Rolls Royces (gifts from his followers), his devotees
increased across the country.
In 1985, in a storm of controversy
that involved charges of attempted poisoning of a number of people, Ma Anand
Sheela resigned, and Rajneesh denounced
her and accused her of crimes against him
and the movement. He then denounced
Rajneeshism, which he said she had cre-
Unification Church
The Unification Church, the target
of the most anti cult activity in the United
States, was founded in 1954 in North Korea by the Reverend Sun Myung Moon
(born Young Myung Moon in 1920).
Moon was ten when his parents converted to Presbyterianism, and was sixteen when he had a vision of Jesus, who
anointed him to fulfill Jesus' unfinished
mission. According to Moon, in order to
restore the world from the Fall, a messiah
is required who conquers sin and manifests God's masculine nature, and marries
a woman who manifests God's feminine
nature. By not marrying and having children, Jesus offers only spiritual salvation
but not physical salvation.
In Japan during World War II,
Moon had another spiritual experience in
which he entered the spirit world and engaged in winning combat over satanic
forces. He then changed his name to Sun
Myung Moon, which means "Shining
Sun and Moon."
The Holy Spirit Association for the
Unification of World Christianity, as the
Unification Church officially is known,
grew slowly after its founding in 1954,
and was expanded to Japan in 1958. In
1960 Moon married his second wife, who
bore twelve children by 1981. At that
point Moon called himself "Lord of the
Second Advent" and said he had completed Jesus' mission.
13
14
American
Research
(ASPR)
15
16
American
Society
for Psychical
Research
Amulet
Object, inscription, drawing, or symbol
believed to be imbued with a supernormal or magical power to protect against
disease, evil spirits, the evil eye, bewitchment, infertility, impotence, bad luck,
and a host of misfortunes and calamities.
In their simplest form, amulets are
natural objects that have an eye-catching
color, an unusual shape-such as a holed
stone-or are rare, such as a four-leaf
clover or double walnut. Ancient civilizations, in their efforts to control spirits
and the forces of nature, made amulets
from a variety of materials. The practice
continues universally in modern times.
The term "amulet" is derived either
from the Latin amuletum, or the Old
Latin amoletum, for "means of defense."
Research
(ASPR)
Ancient
astronauts,
theory of
Written amulets also have been common since ancient times. The Romans
had formulae for preventing various diseases. The ancient Hebrews believed in
the protective powers of the names of angels and of God, and in the written word
of scriptures. Written amulets are worn
about the neck, hung over doors and
beds, or carried in cases, boxes, and bags.
The cylindrical mezuzah is one example
of this type of amulet. Originally intended to protect against demons, it was
later given religious significance with biblical inscriptions about monotheism. The
mezuzah continues to be worn as a pendant and hung on the doorjambs of Jewish homes.
Other types of written amulets include spells, words of power, secret symbols and signs, religious phrases and
scripture, and legends. In magic, magic
circles are inscribed with amuletic symbols and words and names of power,
which help protect the magician from
harm by the spirits summoned in ritual.
See Magic; Talisman.
Sources: Francis Barrett. The Magus. 1801.
Row, 1979.
17
since ancient times. The ancient astronauts theory holds that these accounts
may be based on actual events. Erich Von
Daniken, a German author, helped to
popularize the theory in the early 1970s.
In Chariots of the Gods? (1971), Von
Daniken suggested that the mysteries of
various ancient pictographs, sculptures,
sites, myths, and legends could be explained as efforts by ancient peoples to
depict how extraterrestrials and their
spacecrafts appeared and how the aliens
communicated with human beings. The
theory also was offered as explanation
for stupendous physical feats accomplished by ancient peoples, such as the
construction of the pyramids in Egypt
and Stonehenge in England, and the legendary but unproven civilizations of Atlantis and Lemuria.
Scholars dismiss the ancient astronauts theory as fantasy, yet some circumstances raise questions about its plausibility. The Dogon of Africa, for example,
possess unusual knowledge about the star
Sirius and still practice rituals based on a
Sirian cosmology. Ancient drawings and
artworks portraying alien gods who came
down from the sky still exist in various
parts of the world. For example, cave
drawings in France, South America, and
Africa depict men in spacesuit-type attire,
including antennae-like spirals on their
headgear. The figures in the "Spacemen
of Val Camonica" drawings in Italy have
geometrical symbols in their hands and
wear headgear resembling modern space
helmets.
The ancient astronauts theory proposes that the extraterrestrials who visited Earth long ago continue to monitor
the progress of the human race. See Atlantis; Extraterrestrial encounters; Lemuria; Nazca lines.
Sources: Charles Berlitz. Mysteries from
Forgotten Worlds. New York: Dell, 1972;
Peter Kolosimo. Not of This World. Secau-
cus, NJ: University Books, 1971; Eric Norman. Gods and Devils from Outer Space.
18
Andrews, Lynn V.
American author whose popular books
describe her initiatory shamanistic experiences with various tribal medicine
women. Lynn V. Andrews says the purpose of her books is to help restore the
balance between male and female power,
and to heal Mother Earth. Inevitably, she
has been compared to Carlos Castaneda,
author of books describing his personal
experiences as apprentice to Yaqui sorcerers.
Andrews grew up in the Seattle,
Washington, area. At age fifteen she
moved to Los Angeles, California, where
she enrolled in a Catholic girls' school
through college. After graduating from
college, she worked for a brief time as a
stockbroker until she married. She became an accomplished equestrian and an
avid art collector, and lived in Beverly
Hills.
Her shamanistic journeys reportedly
began in 1974, during a traumatic period
following her divorce. According to Andrews she saw, or thought she saw, an
intriguing Native American basket in a
photography exhibit in Los Angeles.
Though no one else recalled seeing the
basket, Andrews tracked it down to
Agnes Whistling Elk, a Cree medicine
woman of Manitoba, Canada. Andrews
traveled to Manitoba, where she met
Agnes Whistling Elk and her colleague,
the blind Ruby Plenty Chiefs. She learned
Ancient
astronauts,
theory of
that she had been brought there by a vision. The basket, a sacred marriage basket, could not be purchased, but had to
be won. It was in the possession of Red
Dog, a white man turned sorcerer, who
had once been an apprentice of Agnes
Whistling Elk. He had sought out Agnes
to restore the female balance in his own
consciousness, but had attempted to steal
all the power for himself and had been
dismissed. He had stolen the female
power in the form of the basket.
Andrews became an apprentice to
the medicine women and was the first
white person to join the Sisterhood of the
Shields, a secret society of forty-four shamanesses from various tribal cultures
who had dedicated themselves to preserving their shamanic traditions. Agnes told
Andrews she was to be a bridge between
the tribal and industrialized cultures, and
was to write about her experiences. Andrews retrieved the sacred basket from
Red Dog, who then became her lifelong
enemy, and went on to other initiations.
She chronicled these adventures in four
bestselling books: Medicine Woman
(1981), Flight of the Seventh Moon: The
Teaching of the Shields (1984), Jaguar
Woman: And the Wisdom of the Butterfly Tree (1985), and Star Woman: We
Are Made from Stars and to the Stars We
Must Return (1986). She explored the
culture of aboriginal shamanesses in
Crystal Woman: The Sisters of the
Dreamtime (1987), Nepalese female adepts in Windhorse Woman (1989), and
medieval wise women in The Women of
Wyrrd (1990).
Andrews's work has drawn criticism
from some Native Americans who feel
she has misrepresented Native American
spirituality, citing factual inaccuracies of
geography, rites, and language. Andrews
has stated she changed certain names and
facts to protect the identity of her teachers, and that she described her experiences as they happened. She is not teaching or practicing Native American
Andrews, Lynn V.
Lynn V. Andrews
tradition, she says, but is providing information to help reinstate "the feminine
consciousness. "
Andrews, like Castaneda, has been
charged by some with fictionalizing her
accounts. She has denied those allegations. In addition to writing, she has
given shamanic initiatory seminars. Andrews lives in Beverly Hills, California,
and writes at her studio in Santa Fe, New
Mexico. See Castaneda, Carlos.
Sources: Jonathan Adolph and Richard
Smoley. "Beverly Hills Shaman." New Age
(March/April 1989): 22-26+; Lynn V. Andrews. Medicine Woman. San Francisco:
Harper & Row, 1981; Lynn V. Andrews.
Flight of the Seventh Moon: The Teaching
of the Shields. San Francisco: Harper &
Row, 1984; Lynn V. Andrews. Jaguar
Woman: And the Wisdom of the Butterfly
Tree. San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1985;
Lynn V. Andrews. Star Woman: We Are
Made from Stars and to the Stars We Must
Return. New York: Warner Books, 1986;
Bob Groves. "Mainstream Mysticism: Author Takes Her New Age Act on the
Road." Los Angeles Herald Examiner (September 1, 1988): B1+; Beth Ann Krier.
"The Medicine Woman of Beverly Hills."
19
Angel
An immortal being who lives in the spirit
world and serves as an intermediary between God and humanity. The word "angel" is derived from the Greek angelos
and the Latin angelus, which mean "messenger." In religion angels belong to the
class of beings known as demons; they
may be either friendly or hostile to humankind. In art angels are depicted with
wings and halos.
Angelology was developed in ancient
Persia, and was absorbed into Judaism
and Christianity. According to the Babylonian Talmud, all beings are led and
protected by angels, who connect the
earth to God.
The ancient Hebrews applied the
term malakh (angel) to anyone who carried God's message in the world, including people. In Genesis 18 three men, or
angels, appear to Abraham to predict the
birth of Isaac. Later angels became spirit
beings, serving God in heaven and coming to earth upon his instructions. Some
angels evolved into guardian angels, such
as Michael, the guardian of Israel.
The legions of angels are ranked in
hierarchies. The highest in Judaism and
Christianity are the seven archangels,
each of whom is assigned to one of the
seven spheres of heaven: Gabriel, Raphael, Michael, Uriel, Jophiel, Zadkiel,
and Samael (Satan). When Lucifer was
cast out of heaven by God, his angels fell
with him. Theodore of Mopsuetia, an
early Christian father, said these angels
were not demons, but men who submitted to Lucifer and became his instruments, spreading vice, heresy, lies, profane learning, and all manner of ills
throughout the world.
20
Andrews, Lynn V.
Angel
21
York: Bantam Books, 1975; Gershom Scholem. Kabbalah. New York: New American Library, 1974; Rudolf Steiner. The Influence
of Spiritual
Beings
Upon
Man.
22
Angel
the Earth, which are too slight to be noticed by humans. That theory, however,
does not satisfactorily explain many incidents.
During the Battle of Britain in World
War II, some people watched cat behavior as a predictor of bombings. If the hair
on a cat's back stood up and the animal
ran for cover into a shelter, people took
shelter as well.
A study at the University of Waterloo in Ontario, Canada, suggested that
rats have a sense of their own impending
doom. Researchers J. G. Craig and W. C.
Treurniet released rats at one corner of a
reference grid and recorded their activity.
Some time later half of the group was
randomly selected to be killed. A subsequent analysis of the slain rats' movements on the grid indicated that they had
been more active than the tats who were
spared.
Many psychics like to have animals
accompany them when they are investigating apparitions and haunted houses,
because animals are assumed to be more
sensitive to ghosts and spirits. Many dogs
and cats have been known to visibly react
in fear when placed in a suspected
haunted house. One of the functions of
the witch's animal "familiar" is to sense
the presence of unwanted or evil energy.
Various laboratory tests have been
done on animals to see if their precognition of impending harm to themselves
causes them to use PK to avert the harm.
Researcher Helmut Schmidt exposed
both brine shrimp and cockroaches to
electric shock determined by a random
number generator. The shrimp received
fewer shocks than would be expected
by chance, but the cockroaches were
shocked more, perhaps indicating psi
missing. See Psi hitting and psi missing.
The tests were inconclusive. Schmidt
could not replicate the results with the
shrimp, and his dislike for cockroaches
may have influenced those tests. See Experimenter effect.
23
Animals in Out-of-Body
Experience Tests
24
1-21;
Sheila Ostrander
and Lynn
Schroeder. Psychic Discoveries Behind the
Iron
Curtain.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall, 1970; Rene Peoch. "Chicken
Imprinting and the Tychoscope, an Anpsi
Experiment." Journal of the Society for
Psychical Research 55, no. 810 (January
1988): 1-9; D. Scott Rogo. Psychic Breakthroughs Today. Wellingborough, Northamptonshire, England: The Aquarian Press,
1987; Bill Schul. The Psychic Power of Animals. New York: Fawcett Gold Medal,
1977; Benjamin B. Wolman, ed. Handbook
Animal
of Parapsychology. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1977; Joseph Edward Wydler. Psychic Pets: The Secret World of Animals. New York: Stonehill Publishing,
1978.
Anthroposophy
See Steiner, Rudolf.
Apocalypse,
Book of the
Apparition
The supernormal manifestation of people, animals, objects, and spirits. Most
apparitions are of living people or animals who are too distant to be perceived
by normal senses. Apparitions of the dead
are also called ghosts. Despite extensive
study since the late nineteenth century,
science still knows little about the nature
of apparitions.
Characteristics
Most apparition experiences feature
noises, unusual smells, extreme cold, and
the displacement of objects. Other phenomena include visual images, tactile sensations, voices, the apparent psychokinetic movement of objects, and so on.
Visual images are seen in only a small
percentage of reported cases.
A srudy of apparitions published in
1956 by American psychical researcher
Hornell Hart and collaborators showed
no significant differences between characteristics of apparitions of the living and of
the dead. Some apparitions seem corporeal, while others are luminous, transparent, or ill-defined. Apparitions move
through solid matter and appear and disappear abruptly. They can cast shadows
and be reflected in mirrors. Some have
Apparition
25
26
Apparition
Apparition
27
28
Society
for Psychical
Research
Applied psi
An offshoot of parapsychology that assumes the existence of psychic abilities
and seeks ways to apply them to mainstream life. The field also is called "applied parapsychology" and "psionics."
The latter term was created in the early
1980s by American parapsychologist Jeffrey Mishlove, who borrowed it from science fiction literature.
Applied psi has existed since ancient
times in so-called "primitive" cultures, in
which shamans, medicine men, and sorcerers for centuries have used psychic
powers to heal, control weather, ensure
successful hunts and fecund marriages,
and cast and lift spells. It continues to be
used in present times, in its broadest
sense, whenever anyone acts on intuition
to make decisions.
Some experimental studies relevant
to applied psi development, such as studies of mesmeric phenomena, date back to
the eighteenth century. But as psychical
research in general advanced, applied psi
languished as a discipline until the twentieth century. In 1962 the Newark College of Engineering in New Jersey became
one of the first engineering centers in the
United States to explore the psi faculty in
people. Researchers studied successful
husiness executives, and found that most
company presidents not only believe in
psi, but use it daily in their jobs in the
form of intuition, hunches, and gut instinct. Test results did not prove that precognition, the ability to see the future,
Apparition
Applied
psi
29
Apport
An object certain mediums and adepts
claim to materialize from thin air or
transport through solid matter. Apports
also are a phenomenon of poltergeist
cases.
Most apports are small objects, such
as candy, coins, feathers, pebbles, rings,
or vials of perfume. Some are large and
quite unusu~l, such as flowers, books,
serving dishes, and live animals, fish, and
birds. During the height of Spiritualism,
apports were commonplace at seances.
The live dove was a favorite. Madame
d'Esperance produced impressive live and
rooted flowers. William Stainton Moses
produced showers of tiny semiprecious
and precious stones. Some mediums were
exposed as frauds in producing their apports, which they hid on their persons or
in the room prior to the seance. Seances
almost always were conducted in the
dark, making trickery easy.
Mediums usually said their apports
were brought to a seance as gifts from
the spirits. Other theories proposed that
the medium pulled objects from other dimensions through sheer willpower and
some sort of psychic magnetism, or that
the medium somehow took existing objects in other locations, disintegrated
them, then transported and reassembled
them.
The Sufis, the mystical adepts of Islam, and Hindu swamis and holy men are
renowned for the apports they produce,
including food, precious jewelry, religious
objects, and vibuti (holy ash). Like mediums, some adepts have been detected using sleight of hand; but others, such as
Sai Baba of India, have never been exposed as frauds. Sai Baba's apports include vibuti, sweets, entire banquets of
hot food, business cards, jewelry, religious statuettes, and many other objects.
Most are produced within his closed fist,
while others are pulled out of sand on the
ground. Food is produced in dishes. See
30
Materialization;
T deportation.
Poltergeist;
Sai Baba;
Sources: Slater Brown. The Heyday of Spiritualism. New York: Hawthorn Books,
1970; Alfred Douglas. Extrasensory Powers: A Century of Psychical Research. Lon-
Archetypes
The contents of the collective unconscious as universal primordial images
passed down from an ancestral past that
includes not only early humankind but
humankind's prehuman and animal ancestors. Archetypes are not part of conscious thought, but are predispositions
toward certain behaviors-patterns
of
psychological performance linked to
instinct-such as fear of the dark or the
maternal instinct, which become filled
out and modified through individual expenence.
Psychiatrist Carl G. Jung developed,
but did not originate, the concept of archetypes; they have existed universally
for thousands of years in mythologies and
in the motifs of fairy tales and folktales.
The Greek philosopher Heraclitus was
the first to view the psyche as the archetypal first principle. The idea of archetypes was articulated by Plato in his Theory of Forms, which holds that the
essence of a thing or concept is its underlying form or idea. See Plato. The term
"archetype" occurs in the writing of Philo
Judaeus, Irenaeus, and Dionysius the Ar-
Apport
Archetypes
31
32
Archetypes
Arigo
Jungian
Artificial elemental
Assagioli, Roberto
See Thought-form.
See Psychology.
Ashram
Association for Research and
Enlightenment (ARE)
Association
(ARE)
for Research
and Enlightenment
33
Sugrue.
Press, 1973.
Astral body
See Aura; Out-of-body experience (OBE).
Astral projection
See Out-of-body experience (OBE).
Astrology
An ancient system of divination using the
positions of the planets, moon, and stars.
According to astrology the celestial bodies exert forces and exhibit personalities
that influence people and events below.
These influences may be determined by
mapping positions in the sky at various
times.
34
Association
for Research
and Enlightenment
(ARE)
U
~0
'-~
".:,,:"\/"\
__
V.L..-.<"-0 \ J1
~.~,\~'.~\.\
['~--;::,
"j"';\' r",1"":i
,P// ..'""-"
"-\.\\. ...
'T\. x,,;//'\V/n
"";.:;
C
2-
The constellations
The ancient Indians, Maya, Egyptians, and Tibetans also used various
forms of astrology.
Typically, early astrology was the
province of royalty. Around 600 B.C. to
500 B.C., the ancient Greeks assimilated
Chaldean astrology and made it available
to the masses. Pythagoras, Plato, and Aristotle were among the many great thinkers who accepted the influence, but not
the rule, of the stars upon life on Earth.
The Greeks believed that astrology could
reveal favorable and unfavorable times
for taking certain actions, but could not
guarantee success.
The Romans learned astrology from
Greek slaves c. 250 B.c.-244 B.C.,contributing the names of the planets still used
today. Astrologer fortune-tellers, many of
them fraudulent, became so popular that
they were driven out by decree in 139 B.C.
by Cornelius Hispallus. They infiltrated
society and reestablished themselves
among all classes of society. Augustus
was the first Roman emperor to become a
believer in astrology.
Circa A.D. 140-200 the most important book in the history of Western astrology was written by Ptolemy, GrecoEgyptian astronomer who devised the
Astrology
35
and the occult, but never fell out of public favor. Today it is followed by celebrities and the rich and powerful as well as
the general public.
Psychiatrist Carl G. Jung sometimes
consulted the horoscopes of his patients
to search for inner potentials and latent
problems. He believed that astrology, like
alchemy, sprang from the collective
unconscious-that
it was a symbolic language of psychological processes, uniting
the inner world with the outer. He also
said that astrology is synchronistic: whatever is born or done has the quality of
that moment in time.
In the East modern astrology is used
chiefly for divination. In the West astrology has been used increasingly in alternative forms of counseling and therapy.
Natal Astrology
The horoscope-a Greek term meaning "I look at the hour" -predicts the
general course of a person's character and
destiny throughout life based on the positions of the planets at the exact time
and place of birth. The oldest surviving
horoscope is Babylonian, c. 410 B.C.; another found in Uruk, Chaldea (now Iraq),
dates to 263 B.C.
The most important factor in a horoscope is the sun sign, the constellation of
the zodiac occupied by the sun at the time
of birth. The sun sign indicates overall
personality traits.
Next in importance is the rising sign,
or ascendant, which reveals character,
abilities, the manner of self-expression,
and one's early environment. The horoscope is divided into twelve houses, each
of which influences a different facet of
one's life. The houses are, in order, personality, finances, communication, early
home, children, health and service, marriage, philosophy, profession, friends,
and karma.
The horoscope ideally is a guide to
opportunities and potential problems, not
36
Astrology
Atlantis
Fabled island-continent of ancient times
that allegedly sank beneath the sea in a
cataclysm. Numerous legends exist about
Atlantis
37
38
Atlantis
1907; Edgar Cayce. Edgar Cayce on Atlantis. New York: Warner Books, 1968; James
Churchward. The Children of Mu. New
York: Ives Washburn, 1931; Ignatius Donnelly. Atlantis: The Antediluvian World.
1882. New York: Gramercy Publishing,
1985; Into the Unknown.
Pleasantville,
NY: The Reader's Digest Association,
1981; Ruth Montgomery with Joanne Garland. Ruth Montgomery: Herald of the
New Age. New York: DoubledaylDolphin,
1987; Lewis Spence. The History of Atlantis. 1926. Reissue. Secaucus, NJ: The Citadel Press, 1968; Rudolf Steiner. Cosmic
Memory. San Francisco: Harper & Row,
1959; Immanuel Velikovsky. Worlds in
Collision. Garden City, NY: Doubleday,
1950; Jennifer Westwood, ed. The Atlas of
Mysterious Places. New York: Weidenfeld
& Nicholson, 1987.
Attitudinal healing
See Behavioral medicine.
Augustine,
St. (354-430)
39
40
Aura
An envelope of vital energy, which apparently radiates from everything in nature: minerals, plants, animals, and humans. The aura is not visible to normal
vision, but may be seen by clairvoyance
as a halo of light. Then it often appears as
a multicolored mist that fades off into
space with no definite boundary, and
having sparks, rays, and streamers.
Much of what is purported to be
known about the aura is based on occultism and clairvoyance; no scientific evidence has been found to prove its existence. The body does have a magnetic
field-a biofield, as it is called-but it is
far too weak to account for a lightemitting aura. Even if the field were many
times stronger, it still would be insufficient to emit light. It has been theorized
that the aura might actually be a form of
light vibrating at frequencies beyond the
normal range of vision, caused by some
yet-to-be-discovered light-emitting diodes
embedded in living organisms. Another
theory suggests that clairvoyants who say
they see the aura may in fact see the magnetic field, which may register as light,
perhaps because of some sort of sensitive
magnetic detector in the brain.
The emanation of vital energy from
life forms has been believed since ancient
times, and appears in the writings and art
of Egypt, India, Greece, and Rome. In the
sixteenth century Paracelsus was one of
the first Western scholars to expound
upon the astral body, which he described
as a "fiery globe." In the eighteenth century the clairvoyant Emanuel Swedenborg said in his Spiritual Diary that
"there is a spiritual sphere surrounding
every one, as well as a natural and corporal one." Scientific study of the aura
Aura
41
42
Behind
Aurobindo,
Sri (1872-1950)
Aura
His original name was Aravinda Ackroyd, but he dropped Ackroyd during his
school years in England.
From his early childhood Aurobindo
had an inkling of the great destiny that
lay before him, and which steadily unfolded: He had been sent to earth by God
with the power to raise the consciousness
of humankind to its next evolutionary
level of Supermind. He was exposed to
both Western and Eastern thought. From
ages five to seven, he was raised and
taught by Irish nuns in Darjeeling, and
then was sent to England for his education. He spent fourteen years in England,
during which time he was schooled in St.
Paul's School in London and at King's
College in Cambridge. At Cambridge he
gave speeches advocating the political
emancipation of India.
Despite his stance on independence,
he received a civil service appointment in
Baroda State, and in 1893 returned to India. Disembarking from his ship at Bombay, he experienced a profound calm that
lasted for months, a harbinger of his own
rising spiritual consciousness. He entered
the employ of the Maharaja of Baroda,
and served first as professor and then as
vice-principal of Baroda College. Between
1898 and 1899 he began work on Savriti:
A Legend and a Symbol, a poem about
the spiritual ascent and transformation of
the physical world. It reached 23,000
lines in length, and he revised it continually until immediately before his death.
While at Baroda he developed an interest in yoga, and began practicing
pranayama, or breath control, which enabled him to write poetry at prodigious
speed. Vishnu Bhaskar Lele, a Maharashtrian yogi, instructed him in communing
with the Divine, which was seated within
the heart.
From 1900 to 1908 Sri Aurobindo
was a leading political activist for the
freedom of India. As early as 1905 he
identified what he called his three madnesses: He was destined to work for God;
43
44
Barrington,
MA:
Inner
Traditions/
Lindisfarne Press, 1987; M. P. Pandit. Sri
Aurobindo and His Yoga. Wilmot, WI: Lotus Light Publications, 1987; John White,
ed. What Is Enlightenment? Exploring the
Goal of the Spiritual Path. Los Angeles:
Automatic writing
The act of writing while in a dissociated
or altered state of consciousness. Automatic writing sometimes produces astounding results that seem to be beyond
the ordinary knowledge or ability of the
writer. Many occultists say automatic
writing is the product of communication
with a discarnate being; psychical researchers generally believe it comes from
the writer's own subconscious mind, or
perhaps from information
obtained
through extrasensory perception (ESP).
Automatic writing is the most common form of automatism, or unconscious
muscular movement often attributed to
supernatural guidance. See Automatism.
Most automatic writers want either to
communicate with the dead or to contact
Automatic
writing
45
46
Vols. 1 and 2. 1903. New York: Longmans, Green & Co., 1954; J. B. Rhine and
Robert Brier, eds. Parapsychology Today.
New York: The Citadel Press, 1968; J. B.
Rhine and J. G. Pratt. Parapsychology:
Frontier Science of the Mind. Springfield,
IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1957; Ian Stevenson. "Some Comments on Automatic Writing." The Journal of the American Society
for Psychical Research 72, no. 4 (October
1978): 315-32.
Automatisms
Automatisms fall into two categories:
motor and sensory. Motor automatisms
are unconscious muscular movements
Automatic
writing
Automatisms
ing theirs. In some cases the style is recognizable as that of a deceased artist.
One of the most famous automatic
painting cases is the Thomas-Gifford oils
of the early twentieth century. Robert
Swain Gifford was an American artist
who died suddenly on January 15, 1905.
Six months later Frederic Thompson, a
New York City engraver, was seized with
the urge to sketch and paint pictures. He
experienced visions of gnarled trees and
misty landscapes, favorite subjects of Gifford.
Thompson had previously met Gifford, but was not well acquainted with
him. When Thompson painted he felt he
was Gifford, though he did not know
Gifford was dead. Thompson would tell
his wife, "Gifford wants to sketch."
Sometimes he heard Gifford's voice telling him to finish the artist's work.
Thompson
produced
numerous
works, which reminded buyers of Gifford's style and sold at good prices. After
about two years, haunted by a recurring
vision of gnarled oak trees, he began to
worry that he was going insane. He met
Dr. James H. Hyslop, philosopher and
psychical researcher, who arranged a series of sittings with different mediums to
identify the personality responsible for
the art. The mediums, in trance, picked
up information about Gifford that was
coming through Thompson. Thompson,
reassured of his sanity, resumed his artistic work, locating the actual scenes he
saw in his visions and executing them on
canvas. Hyslop was convinced the source
of his inspiration was Gifford, and that
he had found a true case of spirit obsesSIon.
47
48
Avatar
In Hinduism a human incarnation of the
Divine who functions as a mediator between people and God. Avatar is a Sanskrit term literally meaning "descent."
The concept is expressed in the sacred
writings of the Ramayana and Mahabharata (the latter of which includes the
Bhagavad-Gita),
but is not present in the
Vedas or the Upanishads.
The avatars who appear in the epics
of the Ramayana and Mahabharata are
Rama and Krishna, incarnations of
Vishnu, the sky god and protector of the
universe. Vishnu is said to have had anywhere from ten to thirty-nine incarnations, all of whom appeared to save the
world in times of crisis. Rama and
Krishna are the most beloved and worshiped; Krishna is considered the most
perfect expression of the Divine. The potential number of avatars is countless.
Vishnu's final avatar will be Kali, who
will appear at the end of Kali Yuga, the
present era, and destroy the wicked and
usher in the new era of Maha Yuga. See
Kali Yuga.
Automatisms
Avebury
The oldest megalithic site in Britain, and
perhaps the largest megalithic site in the
world. Avebury covers 28 1/2 acres six
miles west of Marlborough in Wiltshire,
southern England; its site includes the
modern village of Avebury. Larger and
more extensive than Stonehenge, it is said
Avebury
that more than a quarter of a million people could stand within the boundaries of
its circle. The henge was in active use berween 2600 B.C. and 1600 B.C., thus predating the Druids.
It is believed by some that the Avebury stones are repositories of Earth and
psychic energy, which may be detected by
clairvoyance and dowsing. See Leys. Such
energy may be responsible for paranormal phenomena that has long been reported at the site, including eerie small
figures seen flitting about the stones at
night and strange lights drifting and bobbing over the ground. See Earth lights.
Around World War I, a scene suggesting
retrocognition (seeing into the past) was
reported by a woman who saw the
sounds and lights of a fair in progress
among the stones. It had been at least
fifty years since a fair had taken place
there. See Retrocognition. In the late
1980s, Avebury became a major site of
the mysterious crop circles, geometric indentations made in fields, which defy explanation. See Crop circles.
The henge comprises a large, circular
ditch 1,200 feet wide and surrounded by
a fifteen-foot-high bank. Inside are rwo
or three smaller circles. The henge is intersected by four avenues, possibly causeways to give ancient users access to the
interior. The layout resembles a Celtic
cross.
Ringing the inner edge of the ditch
are the remains of the Great Stone Circle,
which once contained some one hundred
sandstone sarsens. Only rwenty-seven remain, due to destruction in the sixteenth
and seventeenth centuries by Puritans,
who smashed and burned the stones, and
by farmers, who wanted to clear the land.
The largest remaining stone is about
rwenty-five feet tall and weighs about
sixty tons. The stones alternate in shape
from pillars to diamonds.
No records survive attesting to the
original purpose and uses of the henge,
and excavations have yielded little in-
49
50
Ayurveda
See Behavioral medicine.
Avebury
B
Bacon, Francis
See Saint Germain.
Barbanell, Maurice
See Spiritualism.
Barrett, William
See Parapsychology; Society for Psychical
Research (SPR).
Behavioral medicine
Approaches to healing that are holistic in
nature and take into account the interrelations between mind, body, and spirit,
and between the human organism and the
environment. Non-Western healing systems, such as Ayurveda and Chinese medicine, have been based on a holistic foundation since ancient times; but Western
medicine has since the seventeenth cenrury been based on the Cartesian philosophy of dualism, the sepatation of mind
and body. Beginning in the 1960s, however, the broad humanistic movement
and various scientific researches have
provided impetus for the integration of
so-called alternative and conventional
medicines.
The term "behavioral medicine" is
preferred to "holism" and "holistic medicine." The term "holism" was coined
Bacon, Francis
51
52
Program for
Behavioral
medicine
53
54
Bermuda Triangle
A mysterious area in the Atlantic Ocean
where paranormal events are alleged to
occur. The Bermuda Triangle is bounded
by Florida, Bermuda, and Puerto Rico. It
is also called the Devil's Triangle, Limbo
of the Lost, Hoodoo Sea, Twilight Zone,
and Port of Missing Ships. Numerous
planes and ships have vanished there
without a trace. Most incidents reportedly have occurred in good weather or
near a landing site or port. Just before
disappearing crews have made radio contact indicating that nothing was amiss. In
rare instances missing ships have been
found, but without their crew or passengers.
The Bermuda Triangle was named in
1945, after the disappearance of six Navy
planes and their crews on December 5, a
sunny, calm day with ideal flying conditions. Prior to that scores of ships of all
sizes reportedly had vanished in the area.
Strange phenomena have been reported
since Christopher Columbus's voyage to
America. Columbus wrote in his logs that
his compass acted strangely, and that an
unexplained light emanated from the sea.
Other phenomena witnessed in the
area include bright lights or balls of fire;
a calm yet unnatural look to the ocean;
sudden red flares in the sky that appear
to be explosions; the turning of the sky
yellow, hazy, and foggy; and objects that
appear to be UFOs. Airplane crew members report sudden power failures,
compass-spinning, strong magnetic pulls
on planes toward the sea, and their inability to control the plane's altitude.
In the lore of fishermen, the Bermuda Triangle is inhabited by devils, demons, and monsters that kidnap ships.
Some scientists say unusual weather conditions are responsible. Other theories
propose that phenomena are caused by
alignments of the planets, time warps that
trap ships and planes, forces emanating
from the unknown ruins of Atlantis, or
Bernard of Clairvaux
(1090-1153)
Christian saint, mystic, and doctor of the
Western church, known as Doctor Mellifluous, "The Honey-Mouthed Doctor,"
for the spiritual sweetness of his teachings. Bernard was born in Fontaines,
France, near Dijon, to a leading family of
the nobility. He excelled in his early studies, especially in literature, while at the
same time giving evidence of great piety.
At about the age of twenty-three he entered the reformed Benedictine community at Citeaux, to which he ,vas eventually followed by his father and five
brothers. In 1115 the abbot, St. Stephen
Harding, sent Bernard to found a new
daughter house that was to become famous as the Cistercian Abbey of Clairvaux.
Bernard
of Clairvaux
(1090-1153)
55
56
Berry, Thomas
See Planetary
consciousness.
Besant, Annie
See Theosophy.
Betty Books
See White,
Stewart
Edward.
Bhagavad-Gita
See Hinduism;
Bernard
Yoga.
of Clairvaux
(1090-1153)
History
1933): 205-49;
Vivian Worthington. A
&
Bilocation
Bioenergetics
The appearance of an individual in two
distant places at once. It is not known
precisely what occurs in a bilocation, but
prevailing theory suggests that it is the
projection of a double. The double may
be perceived by others as a solid physical
form, or may appear ghostly. Typically,
the double acts strangely or mechanically,
and often does not speak or acknowledge
when others speak to it.
Bilocation is an uncommon but ancient phenomenon. It is said to be experienced, and even practiced by will, by
mystics, ecstatics, saints, monks and holy
persons, and magical adepts. Many
Christian saints and monks were famous
for bilocation, such as St. Anthony of
Padua, St. Ambrose of Milan, St. Severus
of Ravenna, and Padre Pio of Italy. In
1774 St. Alphonsus Maria de'Ligouri was
seen at the bedside of the dying Pope
Clement XIV, when in fact the saint was
confined to his cell in a location four
days' journey away.
Early psychical researchers, such as
Frederic W. H. Myers, one of the
founders of the Society for Psychical Research in England, collected and studied
reports of bilocation, but the phenomenon receives scant scientific attention in
modern times.
Spontaneous and involuntary bilocation sometimes presages or heralds the
death of the individual seen.
See Apparition; Out-of-body experience (OBE).
Sources: John Ferguson. An Illustrated Encyclopedia of Mysticism and the Mystery
Religions. New York: Seabury Press, 1976;
Biofeedback
See Bodywork.
Biofeedback
The electronic measurement and presentation of information concerning physiological processes, such as brain-wave
rhythms, heart rate, blood pressure, skin
temperature, and muscle tension. The information then is used to control those
processes. Since the 1960s biofeedback
has been used in parapsychology in psi
testing, and in health care as an alternative treatment for various physical, behavior, and psychological disorders and
conditions. Biofeedback also helps one
achieve altered and mystical states of consciousness; it is sometimes called "electronic yoga."
Biofeedback is based on the principles that behavior can be changed by
making changes in environment, and that
by mentally recognizing a biological function, control may be gained over it. Initially, biofeedback was applied to brain
waves. Brain waves were discovered and
measured in 1924 by Hans Berger, but it
was not until the 1950s that Western attention was turned to the possibility of
producing certain brain waves at will. In
1958 researcher Joe Kamiya hypothesized
that subjects continuously fed data on
their brain waves might be able to regulate them. In experiments with college
students, Kamiya added a relay circuit to
an EEG machine so that a tone sounded
whenever alpha brain waves (corresponding to a state of relaxation) were generated. Students quickly learned to control
the tone. Kamiya went on to study the
brain waves of Zen meditators. By the
57
Hertz
Alpha
8-13
Theta
Delta
58
13-26
4-8
0.5-4
Characteristics
Active, waking consciousness, eyes open
Eyes closed, body relaxed; also daydreaming
with eyes open. Average
person can maintain
awareness.
Deep relaxation, drowsiness; the hypnagogic
state before sleep. Average person cannot
maintain awareness;
meditators can, and
show smoothest waves
with quiet mind, body,
and emotions.
Sleep or unconsciousness
Biofeedback
and Psi
Biofeedback
can
teach
individuals
Biofeedback
and Mystical
States
Biofeedback
the brain, as well as both parts of the limbic system and brain stem, thus indicating
that mystical states of awareness can be
induced by balancing right and left sides
of the brain. Biofeedback may be promising as a means to achieve that balance.
See Mystical experiences.
Biofeedback
and Health
59
Mystic Experience.
London:
Wildwood
House, 1985; Hoyt L. Edge, Robert L.
Morris, John Palmer, and Joseph H. Rush.
Foundations of Parapsychology.
Bosron:
Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1986; Mark
Golin. "The Biofeedback Way to Starve
Stress." Prevention (June 1987): 30-32;
Elmer and Alice Green. Beyond Biofeedback. New York: Delacourt Press, 1977;
Richard Grossman. The Other Medicines.
Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1985; Frederick J. Heide. "Relaxation:
The Storm
Before the Calm."
Psychology
Today
(April 1985): 18-19; Charles Honorton,
R. Davidson, and P. Bindler. "Feedbackaugmented EEG Alpha, Shifts in Subjective
State, and ESP Card-Guessing
Performance." The Journal of the American Society for Psychical Research 65 (1971):
308-23; William G. Roll, Robert L. Morris, and J. D. Morris. Research in Parapsychology 1972. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow
Press, 1973; Charles T. Tart. States of Consciousness. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1975;
"Warm Hands and Children's Migraines."
Psychology Today (December 1984): 71;
John White and James Fadiman, eds. Relax. New York: The Confucian
Press,
1976; John White, ed. Frontiers of Consciousness. New York: Avon Books, 1975;
Benjamin B. Wolman, ed. Handbook
of
Parapsychology. New York: Van Nostrand
Reinhold, 1977.
Bird
A nearly universal symbol of the soul.
Birds are messengers to the gods and carriers of souls to heaven. The ancient
Egyptians equated birds with the ba, or
soul; a hawk represented the soul of Horus and the pharaoh. The Hindus associate birds with higher states of being. The
Aztecs believed that the dead were reborn
as colibris, the birds of their patron god,
Huitzilopochtli.
In trance shamans assume the shape of birds in order to leave
the body and soar through the universe.
Among some Native Americans,
birds
personify the wind and rain.
In folklore, myth, and fairy tales
around the world, birds possess the abil-
60
ity to talk and offer guidance or collaboration to humans. Birds bring news and
are the omens of death, especially black
birds such as crows and nocturnal birds
such as owls.
Psychiatrist Carl G. Jung said birds
represent spirit, angels, supernatural
aid,
and thoughts and flights of fancy. In alchemy the bird represents forces in the
process of activation. Madame Helena P.
Blavatsky, cofounder of the Theosophical
Society, said birds are on an evolutionary
track to become devas, a type of exalted
beings. See Deva.
See Symbols; Compare to Horse.
Sources: H. P. Blavatsky. The Secret Doctrine. 1888. Pasadena, CA: Theosophical
University Press, 1977; J. E. Cirlot. A Dictionary of Symbols. New York: Philosophical Library, 1971; Mircea Eliade. Shamanism. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University
Press, 1964; Ake Hultkrantz. The Religions
of the American Indians. 1967. Berkeley:
University of California Press, 1979; Carl
G. Jung, ed. Man and His Symbols. 1964.
New
York:
Anchor
PresslDoubleday,
1988; Barbara G. Walker. The Woman's
Encyclopedia of Myths and Secrets. San
Francisco: Harper & Row, 1983.
Biofeedback
61
(1932).
Neihardt was among those who witnessed Black Elk's last trip to Harney
Peak to address the Six Grandfathers and
apologize for his failure to mend the sacred hoop. He said that if he had any of
his power left, the Thunder Beings of the
west would answer him with thunder and
rain. The trip took place during a
drought season under a clear blue sky.
Black Elk painted and dressed himself as
he had been in his great vision. In his address to the Grandfathers and the Great
Spirit, Black Elk expressed hope that
some little root of the central tree still
62
Reinhold, 1977; Paula Gunn Allen. "American Indian Mysticism." Shaman's Drum
no. 14 (Mid-Fall 1988): 39-46; Joseph
Epes Brown. The Sacred Pipe: Black Elk's
Account of the Seven Rites of the Oglala
Sioux. Norman, OK: University of Oklahoma Press, 1953; John G. Neihardt. Black
Elk Speaks: Being the Life Story of a Holy
Man of the Oglala Sioux. 1932. New York:
(1863-1950)
Blake,
William
(1757-1827)
co:
63
Maung Ba Han. William Blake: His Mysticism. 1924. Darby, PA: Folcroft, 1974;
Robert Maynard Hutchins, ed. Great
Books of the Western World. Chicago: Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1952; Louis Kronenberger, ed. Atlantic Brief Lives. Boston:
Little, Brown, 1971.
64
In 1884 HPB toured Europe with Olcott. While they were there the Coulombs
published letters, which they said were
written by HPB, that gave instructions for
the Masters' manifestations and for operation of the shrine through secret back
panels. The panels apparently had been
built by Coulomb in HPB's absence in order to ruin her reputation. In December
1884, Richard Hodgson of the Society of
Psychical Research (SPR) in London arrived at Adyar to investigate the phenomena there; by spring he had released a
scathing report alleging fraud and trickery by HPB and her associates. The report remained controversial for more
than one hundred years. In 1986 the SPR
published an article in its Journal stating that the report was prejudiced, that
Hodgson had ignored all evidence favorable to HPB and had not proved his case,
and that an apology was due.
Because of the controversy, Olcott
sent HPB to Europe in 1885. She eventually settled in Germany and continued
to work despite deteriorating health. By
1885 the French-born Swedish countess
Constance Wachtmeister had moved in
with HPB and remained with her while
she wrote her second book, The Secret
Doctrine (1888), her greatest work. It
outlines a scheme of evolution relating to
the universe (cosmogenesis) and humankind (anthropogenesis), and is based on
three premises: (1) Ultimate Reality as an
omnipresent, transcendent principle beyond the reach of thought; (2) the universality of the law of cycles throughout
nature; and (3) the identity of all souls
with the Universal Oversoul and their
journey through many degrees of intelligence by means of reincarnation, in accordance with "Cyclic and Karmic law."
The Secret Doctrine is said to be
largely based on an archaic manuscript,
The Book of Dyzan, which HPB interpreted. Parts of The Secret Doctrine purportedly were communicated to her by
the Mahatmas, who, she said, impressed
65
66
Blavatsky,
cidents in the Life of Mme. Blavatsky. London: Redway, 1886; Lewis Spence. The Encyclopedia of the Occult. 1920. Reprint.
London: Bracken Books, 1988; H. Blavatsky
and
Her
Writings.
Pamphlet.
Bodhisattva
In Buddhism an enlightened being who
postpones or renounces nirvana in order
to remain in the universe to give spiritual
guidance to all beings still caught in the
wheel of rebirth. Bodhisattvas (a Sanskrit
term for "enlightened being") generally
are less advanced than buddhas, but buddhas are sometimes referred to as bodhisattvas.
Bodhisattvas were an early concept
of the Mahayana school of Buddhism,
which recognizes two types of bodhisattvas: earthly and transcendent. The
other major Buddhist school, Theravada,
teaches self-enlightenment, and maintains
that once nirvana is reached, there remains no ego or karma to warrant rebirth
as a bodhisattva.
The earthly bodhisattva seeks buddhahood through attaining enlightenment
and service to others. Six paramitas
(virtues or perfections) must be acquired
and practiced: (1) generosity, or total
self-surrender; (2) morality; (3) patience;
(4) zeal, effort to overcome obstacles; (5)
meditation, constantly perfected; and (6)
wisdom, which cannot be obtained without first getting rid of attachment and repulsion. Practicing the paramitas helps
one to see the illusory nature of the self.
Many rebirths may be required to accomplish these.
Transcendent bodhisattvas have attained perfect wisdom and are free of rebirth. They manifest to lead others to en-
Madame
Helena Petrovna
(1831-1891)
Bodywork
Health therapies that involve manipulation of the body and its bioelectrical energy field. There are numerous types of
Bodywork
Acupuncture
This ancient Chinese therapy, dating
to c. 3000 B.C., is based on the principle
that there is a nervous connection be-
67
Alexander Technique
A therapy of massage and manipulation combined with verbal instruction,
developed in the late nineteenth century
by F. Mathias Alexander, Australian
Shakespearean actor and monologist.
Massage of the neck enables energy to
flow up the spine to the head, which controls body movement. The "reconditioned" individual moves, thinks, works,
and speaks much better than before.
Bioenergetics
Acupuncture
tween the body's organs and the body's
surface. Needles are inserted under the
skin at various points to treat various
conditions by manipulating ch'i, the universallife force, which flows through the
body along energy pathways called meridians. Acupuncture is good for pain relief, and is also used to treat addictions.
In China it is used as an analgesic for surgery, and to treat conditions that normally require surgery in the West, such as
appendicitis.
Acupressure
Stimulation of the acupuncture
points by finger and hand pressure instead of with needles. Acupressure can be
self-administered and can provide relief
when acupuncture is not immediately
available, or where pain medication is not
desirable.
68
Chiropractic
The manipulation of the spine and
joints by hand to rebalance or repair the
body's neurological functions and restore
the body's energies. Its premise is that
poor posture, stress, accidents, and traumas produce abnormalities in the joints
and muscles, which may be corrected by
realigning the spine. Dr. George J. Goodheart developed chiropractic into applied
kinesiology, "the science of muscle activation," in which hurt muscles are
treated by work on their opposing, weak
muscles.
Feldenkrais Technique
Modern movement and posture therapy developed by the Russian-born Israeli, Moshe Feldenkrais, and based on
the ancient premise that the body is a
mirror of the mind. The Feldenkrais tech-
Bodywork
Bodywork
69
Yoga.
Sources: Sherry Suib Cohen. The Magic of
Touch. New York: Harper & Row, 1987;
i
~
Kathleen Fanslow-Brunjes, R.N., scans
woman's aura to sense areas that need
treatment with Therapeutic Touch.
70
England:
Penguin
Bodywork
Book test
A test for evidence of survival after death
that was originated in the early twentieth
century by English medium Gladys Osborne Leonard, and her spirit control,
Feda. It is possible that the test was suggested by Feda herself as proof of communication from the dead.
In the book test, a communicating
spirit, called a "communicator," delivers
a message to a living person through a
medium, specifying a book in a location
to which the medium has not had access.
The communicator gives the book's exact
location on a shelf, such as third from the
left on the top shelf, and specifies a page
number. The text on that page is to contain the message.
Leonard was very successful with
book tests, sometimes naming books that
were unknown to her sitters, but which
bore out personal messages as the communicating spirits claimed.
Book tests were common immediately before World War I and after, when
interest in communication with the dead
was at a high. The rate of success of the
tests was not high; in one analysis of 532
tests (1921), 17 percent were successful
and 19 percent approximately successful.
Slightly more than 38 percent were total
failures, with the remainder dubious or
nearly total failures. Nevertheless, many
successful book tests could not be explained in terms of telepathy between
medium and sitter, but seemed to be
paranormal. They are not, ho\vever, considered proof of sun'ival after death.
Nina Kulagina, Russian physical medium, demonstrated extraordinary success v.:ith book tests, by naming the first
letters of each paragraph of given pages
in a book chosen by random but not
opened. See Leonard, Gladys Osborne;
Mediumship; Newspaper test.
Sources: Alan Gauld. c\lediumship and Suruiual. London: William Heinemann Ltd.,
1982; Susy Smith. The Alediumship of lvIrs.
Buddhism
Buckland, Raymond
See Witchcraft.
Buddhism
Religion of the "awakened one," based
on the teachings of the historical Buddha,
Shakyamuni ("Sage of the Sakyas"), born
Siddhartha Gautama (c. 566 B.c.-486
B.C.). Buddhism is one of the world's
great religions, although some argue that
it is a philosophy and not a religion. It
originated in India, where it died out after the twelfth and thirteenth centuries,
and spread through Asia and eventually
to the West.
In Asia Buddhism is known as the
Buddha-Dhamma,
or the "eternal truth
of the Awakened One," referring to both
Buddha sculpture
71
72
Buddhism
Buddhism
73
74
Buddhism
Buddhism
75
c
Caddy, Eileen
See Findhorn.
Caddy, Peter
See Findhorn.
Caduceus
An esoteric symbol of spiritual enlightenment and higher wisdom. The caduceus is
a wand entwined by two snakes and
topped by wings or a winged helmet. It
also is associated with healing, and has
been the emblem of physicians for centuries. The T shape of the caduceus is derived from the tau cross, a T-shaped cross
used in the ancient Egyptian and Mithraic
mysteries initiations.
In Greco-Roman mythology, the caduceus belongs to Hermes (Mercury), the
shrewd and swift messenger god who flies
as fleet as thought. Hermes carries his
magical wand when escorting souls to the
underworld. Originally, the wand was a
symbol of reconciliation of arguments.
According to legend, Hermes came upon
two snakes fighting and thrust his wand
between them. The snakes became entwined on the wand and remained attached to it.
The \vand is made of olive wood,
symbolic of peace and the continuity of
76
life. Its shaft represents power; the serpent represents wisdom or prudence; the
wings are diligence; and the helmet symbolizes high thoughts. Overall, the caduceus symbolizes immortality. With a
touch of his caduceus, Hermes could put
mortals to sleep or raise the dead. The
Romans viewed the caduceus as a symbol
of moral conduct and equilibrium.
The caduceus actually predates
Greco-Roman mythology, appearing in
Mesopotamian cultures around 2600 B.C.,
where its serpents signified a god who
cured illness. The association of the caduceus with medicine and health was
passed from the Middle East to the Greek
culture. In ancient India the caduceus appeared in temples as a symbol of the four
elements: the wand (earth), the serpents
(fire and water), and the wings (air).
In Hindu and Buddhist esoteric
teachings, the caduceus represents the
transformation of spiritual consciousness
through the vehicles of the body's pranic
energy system. The wand is the spine, or
Bramadanda ("stick of Brahma"), and
the serpents are the kundalini force, or
serpent-power, which resides in the earth.
The kundalini rises up through the ida
and pingla nervous channels along the
spine, entwines around the six major
chakras of the body, and flowers with
wings at the crown chakra. The wings
signify the rise of the consciousness
through higher planes of awareness, the
result of the flow of kundalini.
Caddy, Eileen
In Freemasonry
the caduceus represents the harmony and balance between
negative and positive forces, the fixed and
the volatile, the continuity of life and the
decay of life. See Chakra; Kundalini.
Sources: ]. E. Cirlot. A Dictionary of Symbols. New York: Philosophical
Library,
1971; Manly P. Hall. The Secret Teachings
of All Ages. 1928. Reprint. Los Angeles:
The Philosophic Research Society, 1977;
Edith Hamilton. kfythology.
New York:
New American Library, 1940; C. W. Leadbeater. The Chakras. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing House, 1927; New Larousse Encyclopedia of Mythology. New
ed. New York: Crescent Books, 1968; Anthony S. Mercatante.
Encyclopedia
of
World lvfythology and Legend. French's
Forest, Australia:
Child & Associates,
1988; Samuel H. Sandweiss. Sai Baba: The
Holy Man and the Psychiatrist. San Diego,
CA: Birth Day Publishing, 1975; Arthur
Edward Waite. A New Encyclopedia of
Freemasonry. Combined ed. New York:
Weathervane Books, 1970.
(1743-1795)
A friend and successor of Comte de Saint
Germain,
Cagliostro
was a glamorous
figure in the royal courts of Europe,
where he reputedly practiced magic, psychic healing, alchemy, scrying, and occult
arts. Some historians label him a fraud
and fake, while others say his psychic and
occult gifts were genuine, and that he was
a generous man who tried to help the
poor.
His real name is often given as Guiseppe Balsamo, born in 1743 in Palermo
to a poor Sicilian family. Balsamo was a
real person, but his identity as Cagliostro
is disputed.
According
to legend the
young
Cagliostro
was a street-smart
child, and learned early how to turn his
natural psychic talent for precognition
imo a lucrative fortune-telling
business.
Cagliostro,
Count Alessandro
(1743-1795)
Cagliostro
At twenty-three he went to Malta, determined to make a name and fortune for
himself, and was initiated into the Order
of the Knights of Malta, where he studied
alchemy, the Kabbalah, and other occult
secrets. He changed his name to Count
Alessandro
Cagliostro,
borrowing
the
surname from his godmother.
Later he
joined the Freemasons in England, which
had a great influence on his beliefs. See
Freemasonry.
Cagliostro
spent most of his adult
life as a nomad among royalty in Europe,
England, and Russia. In Rome he met
and married Lorenza Feliciani, who became his partner in various occult ventures, such as crystal-gazing,
healing by
laying on of hands, conjuring spirits, and
predicting ,vinning lottery numbers. They
also sold magic potions, the elixir of
life, and the philosopher's
stone. They
held seances, transmuted
metals, practiced necromancy,
cast out demons, and
hypnotized people. Cagliostro's
accurate
fortune-telling
gifts led to a new name:
"The Divine Cagliostro."
Spectacular success invariably breeds
resentment, and Cagliostro fell out of favor with the medical community and the
Catholic church. In 1875 he and his wife
were victimized
in an infamous
fraud, the
77
78
Calumet
See Sacred pipe.
Cagliostro,
Count Alessandro
(1743-1795)
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
Joseph Campbell
Woodstock, New York, for $20 a year.
There he spent the next four years reading the classics of many world cultures.
During this time he became convinced of
the universal parallels between myth,
dreams, and art. He thereafter often drew
upon Jung's archetypes of the collective
unconscious, as well as ethnologist Adolf
Bastian's concept of "elementary ideas."
Campbell believed that Bastian was the
first scientist to show that the world's
mythologies, ritual practices, folk traditions, and major religions share certain
symbolic themes, motifs, and patterns of
behavior. Campbell spent much of his life
documenting and explaining these key
notions.
The same year he moved to Woodstock, Campbell began teaching at Sarah
Lawrence College in Bronxville, New
York, where he remained for thirty-eight
years. He was Professor Emeritus until
his death in 1987.
In 1938 Campbell married one of his
former students, Jean Erdman, who graduated from Sarah Lawrence that same
year. Erdman danced with Martha Graham and later became a distinguished
choreographer and artist.
The importance of Joyce in Campbell's early life is illustrated by Jean Erdman's recollection that during the early
years of their marriage she would be on
one of Joseph's arms, and a copy of
Joyce's Finnegans Wake (1939) would be
under his other arm. Campbell's first
book, coauthored with Henry Morton
Robinson, was A Skeleton Key to Finnegans Wake (1944). References to Finnegans Wake appear thereafter throughout
Campbell's work.
In 1942 Campbell signed a contract
with Simon and Schuster for $750 to
write a "self-help book." The publisher
envisioned merely an updated Bullfinch's
Mythology, but Campbell wrote instead
The Hero with a Thousand Faces (1948),
a truly original masterpiece, which broke
new ground for scholars in many disciplines. The book established him as a
world authority in mythology. The work
presents a definitive study of the archetype of all myth: a single hero and a single journey-pattern, which emerges from
behind many different versions. After describing various examples of myth-telling
in this book, Campbell observes, "It will
be always the one, shape-shifting yet marvelously constant story that we find, together with a challengingly persistent
suggestion of more remaining to be experienced than will ever be known or
told." The work quickly won Campbell
exceptional praise and soon became a
classic in the field. His fame and reputation could be justified by this work alone.
In the four-volume series The Masks
of God (1959-1968), Campbell presents
his study of mythologies. He groups them
as either Primitive, Oriental, Occidental,
or Creative.
In 1969 Campbell wrote the script
for a film, Stairways to the Mayan Gods.
In it he anticipates the concepts concerning the ascent and decline of Mayan In-
79
80
considering three terms for the transcendent in Sanskrit: one means "being," a
second means "full consciousness," and
the third means "rapture." He recalled,
"I don't know whether my consciousness
is full consciousness or not, I don't know
whether my being is proper being or not,
but I do know where my rapture is. Let
me hang on to rapture, and that will
bring me both being and full consciousness, and it works."
During the last twelve years of Campbell's life he had several dialogues with
friend and radio talk show host Michael
Toms, which Campbell referred to as
"religious experiences." Nine of them
were published in 1988 as the book An
Open Life: Joseph Campbell in Conversation with Michael Toms, with a fore-
Campbell,
Joseph
(1904-1987)
Atlas
of
World
Mythology.
Garland Publishing, 1987; "Joseph Campbell: Making the Bones of Folklore Sing."
Sarah Lawrence (Spring-Summer 1988):
13-15; "Thus Spake Zoroaster: An Interview with Joseph Campbell." Omni (December 1988): 143-44.
81
82
cybe mexicana mushrooms. His apprenticeship lasted from 1961 to 1965, when
he decided to terminate it.
Castaneda's experiences became the
subject of his first book, The Teachings
of Don Juan: A Yaqui Way of Knowledge
(1968), the forward of which says, "This
book is both ethnography and allegory."
The book was accepted as his master's
thesis, and became an underground bestseller. In 1968 Castaneda returned to
Mexico to show the book to don Juan,
and began a second apprenticeship,
which lasted until 1971. His second
book, A Separate Reality: Further Conversations with Don Juan, appeared in
1971. His third book, Journey to Ixtlan:
The Lessons of Don Juan (1972), in
which Castaneda acquires a coyote sorcerer's companion, was accepted as his
doctoral dissertation. In Tales of Power
(1974), Castaneda parted ways with dons
Juan and Genaro. Together they jump off
a cliff into an abyss, and Castaneda experiences the "two inherent realms of all
creation, the tonal and the nagual."
Forces compel Castaneda to return to
Mexico, however, and in The Second
Ring of Power (1974), he discovers he
has been drawn by nine other apprentices
of don Juan, five women and four men,
who expect him to take don Juan's place
as teacher. One of the women, dofia
Soledad, turns her powers against Castaneda and engages in a fierce battle of
sorcery. Castaneda's adventures continued for at least another four books.
Many reviews of his books have
been favorable, yet there has been much
debate as to whether or not the books are
documented fact, are embellished fact,
or are entirely fiction. Whether or not
don Juan exists is unknown, as there is
no evidence of him outside of Castaneda's writing. The name may be a pseudonym. Critics have pointed to the absence of Yaqui terms and evidence of
culture in don Juan's conversation and
habits. According to Castaneda don Juan
Edgar Cayce
ing to cure people from all over the
world. He never went beyond grammar
school and never studied medicine, but
from an unconscious state he could prescribe drugs and treatments
that were
said to be accurate in more than 90 percent of his cases.
Cayce was born on March 18, 1877,
in Hopkinsville,
Kentucky. He had psychic powers from an early age, including
the ability to see nonphysical beings (who
were his childhood companions) and the
auras of others.
His curative powers came to light in
1898 when he was twenty-one and working as a salesman. He suffered a persistent hoarse throat and intermittent laryngitis, which resisted medical treatment
and forced him to give up his job. As a
last resort, he enlisted the aid of a hypnotist, who provided temporary relief. He
was then hypnotized by Al Layne, who
asked him to describe, while in trance,
the cause of his affliction and a cure.
Cayce did so, and at the end of the ses-
83
84
mind became inactive and his unconscious took over. He believed that each
cell had a consciousness of its own, and
during a reading he was able to see every
gland, organ, blood vessel, nerve, and tissue inside a body. The cells communicated with his unconscious and told him
what was troubling them.
His diagnosis would then be based
upon a variety of causative factors. Glandular conditions could cause many problems; so could childhood bumps and
bruises, which produced lesions that later
caused disturbances. Karmic conditions
(spiritual heredity) also could predispose
a body to certain weaknesses.
Cayce viewed the body as one interconnected network of organs and tissues;
when something was wrong with one
part, the whole network became disturbed. This disturbance was due to the
body not properly assimilating what it
needed to maintain its natural equilibrIum.
Healing could take place only
through natural channels in order to restore the natural equilibrium. Cayce's
prescribed treatments were a unique combination of osteopathy, chiropractic therapy, electrical procedures, vibrations,
massage, therapeutic baths, manipulation, foods and diet, medicinal compounds, drugs, herbs, tonics, exercises,
and rest. Most treatments were intended
to be implemented under the professional
guidance of a medical practitioner.
The chief difference between Cayce's
suggested treatments and those of the
medical community was that Cayce
sought to heal the whole body by treating
the causes rather than the symptoms of a
patient's problem.
The individual patient, hO\vever,
played a key role in healing because it
was first necessary to have faith in a
higher power's ability to heal. Cayce believed that as a Christian, God gave him
the power to cure as a gift to help other
people. But it would not be he, Cayce,
Cayc~
Edgar (1877-1945)
who would affect the change in an individual's condition; the patient would use
his or her own positive attitudes to influence the outcome. The patient had to
view the reading with hope and prayer
rather than perceive it as a freak event or
last resort. The reading had to be a spiritual event, with results that were not
only physical, but mental and spiritual as
well. "Mind is the builder," Cayce was
fond of saying.
The right attitude also was necessary
in order to successfully follow treatment
procedures. The body, with its delicate
chemistry and nervous impulses, responded to commands from the mind,
and what the mind chose and held before
itself either quickened the body or let it
go slack to psychic impulses.
Cayce believed that everyone has a
natural psychic ability, and such phenomena as dreams and premonitions are expressions of that ability. He said that psychic ability is merely an extension of faith
and love, and that psychic perception and
psychokinesis (PK) are higher forms of
creativity. Everything has its fields with
complex patterns of vibration. When
fields of the human psyche are set into
motion within a given field, psychic perception or PK takes place.
Cayce said that if the mind and will
are directed toward shared creativity,
then resources will be drawn from the
soul to yield helpful psychic impulses
needed for those tasks. A person who has
purity of heart and enduring love toward
others will always have a ready supply of
psychic energy available.
Cayce Organizations
In addition to the ARE, three organizations have grown up around Cayce's
work. The oldest, chartered in 1930, is
Atlantic University in Virginia Beach, a
formal educational program offering a
master's degree in transpersonal studies.
The Edgar Cayce Foundation, also at Vir-
85
Chakras
In yoga vortices that penetrate the body
and the body's aura, through which various energies, including the universal life
force, are received, transformed, and distributed. Chakras are believed to play a
vital role in physical, mental, and emotional health and in spiritual development. They are invisible to ordinary sight
but may be perceived clairvoyantly. Some
people say they can activate the chakras
to whirl faster and can direct the flow of
energy through them.
Chakra
is Sanskrit for "wheel."
Chakras are said to be shaped like multicolored lotus petals or spoked wheels
that whirl at various speeds as they process energy. Chakras are described in
Hindu and Buddhist yogic literature.
There are differences between the two
86
ENDOCRINE GLANDS
CHAKRA SYSTEM
Chakras
poor health they become cloudy and irregular or sluggish in rotation. Chakras
that are blocked are believed to adversely
influence the body functions they govern.
In alternative healing there are techniques
for clearing chakra blockages and stimulating rotation.
In Laya Yoga, the yoga of concentration upon the chakras and the nadis,
each chakra has its own dominant and
subdominant mantra sounds and complex symbologies of geometric shapes,
sexual symbols of lingam and yoni, and
letters of the Sanskrit alphabet. Combinations of mantras (chants), pranayama
(breath control), and visualizations are
employed in Laya Yoga to cleanse and
balance the chakras, and to raise the kundalini. See Yoga.
The seven major etheric chakras are
the root, the sacral, the solar plexus, the
heart, the throat, the brow, and the
crown:
1. The root (muladhara) is located at
the base of the spine and is the seat
of kundalini. It is concerned with
self-preservation, one's animal nature, taste, and smell. It is the least
complex of the seven centers, divided
by only four spokes. It is orange-red
in color.
2. The sacral (svadhisthana) lies near
the genitals and governs sexuality
and reproduction. It has six spokes
and is primarily red. In some systems
the root chakra is ascribed reproductive functions, and the sacral chakra
is overlooked in favor of the spleen
chakra, a rosy pink and yellow sun
with six spokes located halfway between the pubis and navel. It influences overall health and in particular
governs digestion and functions of
the liver, pancreas, and spleen. The
spleen chakra is seen as minor in
other systems.
3. The solar plexus (manipurna) rests
just above the navel. It has ten
87
4.
S.
6.
7.
88
Channeling
A form of mediumship in which information is communicated from a source perceived to be different from the conscious
self. Sources are identified variously as
nonphysical beings, angels, nature spirits,
totem or guardian spirits, deities, demons, extraterrestrials, spirits of the
dead, and the Higher Self. Channeling is
done in a dissociated or altered state of
consciousness. As mediums hip it has existed in virtually all cultures throughout
history and has gone through cycles of
acceptance and rejection. As a New Age
phenomenon, channeling has almost exclusively focused on the delivery of religious or spiritual information allegedly
obtained from spiritual sources, such as
highly evolved and nonphysical entities
(who usually have exotic names), angels,
Jesus, God, and the Virgin Mary.
Historical Overview
The desire to communicate with
nonworldly beings is perhaps as old as
Chakras
Channeling
minaries have included Jach Pursel (Lazaris), JZ Knight (Ramtha), Pat Rodegast
(Emmanuel), Elizabeth Clare Prophet
(Saint Germain), and others. Popular interest in channeling was further fueled in
the 1980s by actress Shirley MacLaine,
whose spiritual odyssey was aided by
California channeler Kevin Ryerson. Undoubtedly, many frauds filled the field, as
they had done during the peak of Spiritualism. By the late 1980s, the channeling
explosion was over, though popular interest remained.
89
90
Channeling
cial memories residing deep within all human beings. In keeping with Jung's view,
Ametican psychologist Jean Houston
calls channeled entities "goddings," or
personae of the Self. Some channelers believe they are calling upon their own
Higher Self, a level of wisdom not normally accessed in waking consciousness.
The Higher Self also has been called the
"ovetsoul" and "superconscious."
There is evidence to support the notion that channeled entities are part of the
channeler. Studies of mediums undertaken in the first part of the twentieth
century show that many spirit controls
had characteristics remarkably similar to
the mediums themselves. Eileen J. Garrett
believed her controls were part of her
own self, but most mediums believe controls to be separate, external entities.
They have contended that the process of
channeling forces the entities to filter
through their human hosts in order to
communicate.
Some psychologists believe channeling is pathological in origin, and is symptomatic of multiple personality disorder.
In multiple personality cases, individuals
are host to two or more personalities,
each of which has its own identity, memories, beliefs, and history. However, the
individual usually has little or no control
over the personalities. Mediums and
channels, on the other hand, control the
access of the channeled entities and generally lead otherwise normal lives.
Still other theories related to the
channeled-entity-as-self idea hold that
human consciousness is far more complex than believed. Thus each individual
may actually have multiple consciousnesses of varying levels of sophistication;
only a few individuals, however, become
aware of these and gain access to them.
Or channeling may be but one part of a
universal Mind to which all consciousnesses in creation are connected.
Channeling
91
Chanting
The continuous recitation of a mantra,
sutra, word, or phrase as part of meditation or a religious or magical rite, which
helps one achieve an altered state of consciousness, ecstasy, communion with the
Divine, or summon psychical power for
magical, exorcism, or healing purposes.
Chanting is done in rhythm, sometimes in cantillation (musical modulations), which creates a pattern of energy
and power. Yogis emphasize developing a
beautiful voice and cadence in chanting.
In some schools of Zen Buddhism, sutras
are chanted in a monotone, with the
voice trailing off at the end of the chant.
Chanting is an ancient, universal
practice, and is often done in conjunction
with drumming, hand-clapping, dancing,
or the fingering of beads on a rosary. Rosaries are 'Nidely used in chanting in Buddhism, Islam, Hinduism, and Christianity. Group chanting, accompanied by
dancing, hand-clapping, or drumming,
is considered more effective in raising
consciousness because the energies and
movement of many people are united,
which facilitates achievement of the ob-
92
Channeling
Chanting is part of tribal society rituals to raise psychic power, pay tribute to
deities, appease supernatural powers, exorcise demons, control the weather, ensure success in hunt and war, bring blessings of prosperity and fecundity, and
accompany funeral and initiation rites. In
Vodoun thousands of chants exist to accompany rites, composed in various African dialects and Haitian Creole, a blend
of French, English, and Spanish. Shamans
chant "power songs" as they dance.
Words vary according to individuals, but
melodies and rhythms are handed down
in tribes through generations. The Navajo chant elaborate myths as part of curing rituals, which also include sand painting. The long texts must be chanted
perfectly, or they are rendered invalid or
result in the disease they are intended to
cure.
Witches and Pagans combine chanting and dancing to raise a group psychic
energy field called a "cone of power,"
which is released to effect magic. The
chants may be names of Goddess or the
Horned God, or phrases relative to spells.
See Cone of power.
In magic the success of a conjuration
or spell depends heavily upon the sound
vibrations created by chanting, a belief
that dates back thousands of years. The
ancient Egyptians were aware of the
power of sound upon people, and reasoned that the same power could be applied to tap into the occult forces of the
universe. The magician believes that the
rhythmic chanting of magic words and
names of God sends out waves of energy,
which helps the magician reach a state of
frenzy and summon his or her inner
power. See Mantra.
Sources: Margot Adler. Drawing Down the
Moon. Rev. ed. Boston: Beacon Press,
1986; Richard Cavendish. The Black Arts.
New York: Perigee Books, 1967; Chant
and Be Happy: The Power of Mantra Meditation. Based on the teachings of A. C.
Chantways
Francisco: Harper
Chantways
Curing ceremonies of Native Americans
of the Southwest, especially the Navajo,
who practice the art in its highest form.
Chantways last from one to nine days
and invoke supernatural powers to cure
physical and psychical ailments. They involve lengthy and precise chants or songs,
prayers, dancing, purifications, rattling,
medicinal herbs, and sand paintings,
which are colored paintings on dry
ground of religious and mythical symbols
pertaining to the cure. Chantways have
largely retained their importance. Some
Navajo will not accept conventional medical treatment without an accompanying
chantway.
The principle behind chantways is
the belief that disease or bad luck result
from an imbalance in the delicate harmony of the cosmos. Imbalances can be
caused only by human beings. The chantway restores the harmony. According to
Navajo mythology, the ceremonial instructions for chantways were given to
the Dinneh ("the People," as the Navajo
call themselves) by the Holy Ones, who
were never seen by human eyes, through
intermediary spirits such as the Wind
People. The very first apprentices spent
93
seven days and seven nights in purification and instruction. They were told that
the sand paintings had to be done on
Mother Earth, so that the sacred knowledge could be had by all who needed it.
The first chantway to be witnessed by a
Caucasian was reported in 1891.
In a nine-day chantway, the first four
days involve cleansing and invitations to
the Supernaturals to appear, followed by
four days during which they arrive, and a
final day of curing. The chant is a lengthy
reenactment from mythology concerning
the mortal hero or god who first received
the ceremony. The text must be chanted
precisely and without error, otherwise it
is invalidated. Serious errors in the chant
may cause the hatathli, or chanter, to fall
ill with the same affliction he is trying to
cure. The chanter usually is a man who
volunteers for the job, and spends years
learning chants before he is allowed to
practice. Typically, he learns one great
rite and a few lesser ones, plus the Blessing Way, which concludes every ceremony.
The arrival of the Supernaturals is
marked by the sand painting, which also
must be done with great precision within
a single day's time. Each chantway has
perhaps a hundred or more illustrations,
of which the chanter or patient chooses
four. They are drawn in the five sacred
colors of white, red, black, yellow, and
blue. The Supernaturals are depicted by
figures that are elongated, perhaps to indicate their power and nonworldly origin. The figures may be arranged at the
cardinal points of the painting, and may
be accompanied by sacred animals or
plants. Some paintings include the sun or
moon, or Father Sky and Mother Earth
representations.
The sand painting is empowered
with a sprinkling of pollen and the placement of sacred feathers and items from a
medicine bundle. The patient then sits on
the painting and the painted earth is
pressed against his or her body, especially
94
of the Navajo
Shooting
Chant.
Charismatic renewal
Charismatic renewal, also called "neoPentecostalism," refers to the movement
in the 1960s and 1970s to reestablish a
personal, more joyously expressive communion with God and emphasize the gifts
of the Holy Spirit.
Chantways
Charismatic renewal
were put forth by the Full Gospel Business Men's Fellowship International (FGBMFI), a Pentecostal worship group
founded by Armenian-American Demos
Shakarian, a California dairyman and
millionaire.
Since speaking in tongues and healing gifts were looked upon by many people as sideshow events, not Christian
worship, those in the mainline churches
who had received the Holy Spirit kept it
to themselves. The first traditional minister to declare his experience was Dennis
Bennett, a successful pastor of St. Marks
Episcopal church in Van Nuys, California. His quiet revolution in 1960 split the
congregation, and Bennett was removed
to an inner-city parish in Seattle, Washington, where he continued to preach
charismatic renewal.
In 1963 divinity students and faculty
at Yale University began speaking in
tongues, and the first Catholic Pentecostal prayer meeting was held in Pittsburgh,
Pennsylvania, at Duquesne University in
1966. Many Catholics embraced charismatic renewal as a breath of fresh air in
what some viewed as out-of-date orthodoxy, as the movement spread to the University of Michigan and the University of
Notre Dame. The Michigan group at Ann
Arbor founded an ecumenical group
called the "Word of God" and published
a periodical entitled New Covenant,
which served as a clearinghouse for renewal information. Little by little the
movement grew into a cause: a revolt
against entrenched theology.
In his book The New Charismatics
II, Richard Quebedeaux attributes the
success of the movement with Western
society's rediscovery of the supernatural
and the occult. He notes that in an age
fascinated by psychics, astrology, neardeath experiences, and prophecy, Pentecostal phenomena such as healing,
tongues, and exorcism would have great
appeal. To psychical researcher James H.
Hyslop, such Christian events were oc-
95
Ch'i
See Universal life force.
Ch'i Kung
See Qi Gong.
Chiropractic
See Bodywork.
96
Christianity
See Christology; Jesus of Nazareth; Mysticism, Christian.
Charismatic
renewal
Christian Science
See Church of Christ, Scientist.
Christology
Doctrines and theories of the meaning of
the belief in Christ (Jesus of Nazareth).
The various Christological debates are often about subtle theological distinctions
of academic interest, but sometimes also
address issues with significant consequences. Typically, how a religious group
thinks of Christ will greatly influence its
psychology, anthropology, mythology,
liturgy, and philosophy.
Most Christologies are based on the
New Testament, and in particular the
Gospel books of Matthew, Mark, and
Luke, though some look to the Old Testament in the promises and prophecies
that anticipated the coming of the Messiah. A number of Christologies also call
upon extra-theological
and secular
sources.
The first Christo logy was developed
by Paul, one of Jesus' twelve apostles.
Paul conceived of Jesus as the Christ, a
preexistent divine being who had descended into man to save humankind
from the powers of law, sin, and death.
The resurrected Christ was raised up to
sit at the right hand of God, and would
return at some point in the future to
judge humankind.
Since the time of Paul, innumerable
Christologies have been conceived. They
are complex and their history has been
fraught with controversy. Early Christologies focused on Jesus as the incarnation
of Logos (God or the Ultimate Reality)
and not as the historical man. Christological controversies of the Patristic Age
(which concerns the lives, writings, and
doctrines of the Fathers of Christianity)
usually focus on the questioning of the
(full) humanity and/or (full) divinity of
Jesus. These included Gnosticism as the
Christolog)'
97
98
menism is that in The Coming of the Cosmic Christ (1988) by the prolific Dominican priest, Matthew Fox. The author
argues for focus on the "Cosmic Christ,"
a living Christ who can bring about a living cosmology. See Creation spirituality.
Sources: Glenn F. Chestnut. Images of
Christ: An Introduction
to Christology.
Christo logy
99
100
101
102
Church
of Christ, Scientist
(Christian
Science)
103
104
Smith would read the translation to Cowdery, who wrote it down, then another
character would appear in the hat. The
Book of Mormon was published in
March 1830. Moroni supposedly reclaimed the plates and stones, with many
of the plates still sealed.
By December 1830 Smith had translated the Book of Moses from divine revelation and he later added the Book of
Abraham, reportedly from an ancient papyrus Smith found with a mummy in
1835. These two books, along with
Smith's recollections of his revelations
and the Saints' Articles of Faith, appeared
in The Pearl of Great Price around 1842.
On May 15, 1829, Smith and Cowdery prayed in the woods for guidance
about the sacrament of baptism. Suddenly, a holy messenger, whom they later
determined was John the Baptist, appeared and conferred upon them the
Priesthood of Aaron: an ordination, lost
for centuries, which gave the men authority to preach the gospel of repentance and
baptize by immersion. Smith would be
First Elder and Cowdery Second Elder,
and each was commanded to baptize and
ordain the other. Not long after the apostles Peter, James, and John appeared,
conferring the higher Melchizedek Priesthood, allowing them to lay on hands and
perform healing miracles. These revelations established a well-defined apostolic
priesthood similar to that of the Catholic
church.
Smith organized the Church of Christ
on April 6, 1830. The name changed to
Church of the Latter-day Saints in 1834,
finally becoming the Church of Jesus
Christ of Latter-day Saints in 1838. In
October 1830 Mormon missionaries
went to Kirtland, Ohio, to establish the
first Zion and site of the first temple.
One of the Saints' earliest thorny
theological problems was the salvation of
those already dead. If the true power to
ordain and perform sacraments had been
lost since the days of the apostles until
conferred upon Smith and Cowdery, earlier generations were damned through no
fault of their own. To guarantee the
dead's salvation, the Saints baptized them
in secret temple ceremonies, leaving the
dead free to choose salvation for themselves. Mormons keep extensive genealogical records to document the existence
of past relatives so that they may be baptized.
Opposition from Kirtland residents
forced the Mormons to move on in 1837
and 1838 to Independence, Missourithe "true Zion," according to Smith. A
temple was begun there also, but the Missouri group suffered terrible persecution.
During the winter of 1839 to 1840, the
Mormons moved again, this time to
Commerce, Illinois.
Within a very short time, Commerce,
renamed Nauvoo by Smith, was the biggest city in Illinois. (Although Smith alleged that nauvoo means "beautiful plantation" in Hebrew, no such word exists
in that language.) Smith had the support
and backing of the state's biggest financiers and politicians, and the Mormons
began their third temple. Smith solidified
his power as the Saints' prophet and
leader, receiving revelations that he gathered in the Doctrines and Covenants.
One of these was the Order of Enoch,
which called for all Saints to consecrate
their wealth for the common good and
redistribution. But the most important
doctrine was the Order of Abraham, revealed by Smith on July 12, 1843.
This new order would establish marriage as a "new and everlasting covenant." Smith conceived of heaven as three
states of glory: the celestial, for those
who kept Gospel laws and ordinances,
eventually returning to God the Father;
the terrestrial, for those who did not
accept Christ but were nonetheless good
and honorable; and the telestial, for the
rest of the sinners who still would be received by the Holy Ghost. Within these
states of glory were an infinite number of
105
106
Four Winds Press, 1975; Keith Crim, genetal ed. Abingdon Dictionary of Living Religions. Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1981;
John Godwin, ed. The Occult in America.
New York: Doubleday, 1982; Klaus J.
Hansen. Mormonism and the American
Experience. Chicago: The University of
Chicago Press, 1981; J. Gordon Melton.
Encyclopedic Handbook of Cults in America. New York: Garland Publishing, 1986;
Jan Shipps. Mormonism: The Story of a
New Religious Tradition. Urbana, IL: Uni-
Church of Scientology
Religious organization founded by L.
(Lafayette) Ron Hubbard in 1953, an expansion of his earlier concept of Dianetics. Scientology offers a number of
techniques and disciplines to help the individual overcome negative effects of the
present and previous lives, a process
called "auditing" in order to become
"clear." According to Scientology if all
people were "clear," the world would be
free from drugs, war, pollution, crime,
mental illness, and other ills. Scientology
has been the focus of numerous controversies and disputes with various governments, and vigorously defends itself
against critics.
Hubbard (1911-1986) was born in
Tilden, Nebraska. He studied civil engineering at George Washington University
in 1931 and 1932, and shortly thereafter
began a successful career as a writer. He
received the most notice for his works of
science fiction.
Church of Scientology
and extraterrestrial life, seeks to raise humankind to a higher level of consciousness. Engrams from past lives must
also be erased in order to achieve an
even higher level of clear, "Operating
Thetan." Thetans are the eternal essences
of immortal celestial beings who existed
long ago, who through the course of experimenting with life in the flesh became
trapped as human beings. To become an
Operating Thetan, one must clear the engrams of the present life and the past lives
of the Thetan, and recover awareness of
the celestial origin. Hubbard augmented
the auditing process with a device called
the "electropsychometer," or "E-meter,"
a kind of polygraph that would tell an
auditor when an individual might not be
honest.
In 1952 Hubbard founded the Hubbard Association of Scientologists, which
was renamed the Hubbard Association of
Scientologists International. In 1953 he
incorporated the Church of Scientology;
and in 1955 he established the Founding
Church of Scientology as an unincorporated, independent church. Scientology
has since spread throughout the world.
In 1958 the Internal Revenue Service
revoked the church's tax-exempt status.
Over thirty years later, the church remains in litigation to reinstate it. In 1963
the Food and Drug Administration seized
some E-meters, claiming they had been
used in the diagnosis of disease. In 1969
Hubbard won a victory from the US
Court of Appeals that auditing was a central practice to the church, akin to confession in the Catholic church. The
E-meters were returned.
During the 1960s and 1970s, Scientology faced more criticisms and government problems in the United States, Great
Britain, and Australia. It was denounced
by some as a cult, and began to undertake vigorous legal defenses. In the late
1970s, the FBI began an investigation
concerning allegations that Scientologists
were stealing government documents that
107
108
York: Garland Publishing Inc., 1986; Russell Miller. Bare-Faced Messiah: The True
Story of L. Ron Hubbard. New York:
Henry Holt, and Co., 1987.
Circle
Symbol of oneness, completion, perfection, the cosmos, eternity, and the sun. In
psychology the circle symbolizes the Self,
the totality of the psyche. A feminine
symbol, the circle appears in sacred art
and architecture and plays an important
role in various religious and magical rites.
Many sacred dances are performed in circles. In Islam listeners gather in mosques
around teachers in circles called halqahs.
In ritual a circle demarcates a holy
space that protects one from negative
forces on the outside and facilitates communion with spirits and deities. Within
the circle one may ritually achieve transcendent levels of consciousness. Among
Native North Americans, circles are
known to have great medicine power. See
Medicine wheels.
In folk medicine lore, circles drawn
around the beds of the sick and of new
mothers protect them against demons.
Seances customarily are conducted
around a circular table; participants often
hold hands. See Seance.
In ceremonial magic magicians draw
a magic circle around themselves to protect them from the demons and spirits
they conjure. See Magic. To step outside
Church of Scientology
Clairaudience
The hearing of sounds, music, and voices
not audible to normal hearing. The term
comes from French for "clear hearing."
Clairaudience often is intermingled with
other basic psychic perceptions of clairvoyance, "clear seeing," and clairsentience, or "clear sensing." In yoga it is a
siddhi, and is experienced when the fifth
chakra, located at the throat, is activated.
See Siddhis.
Clair audience often is experienced in
the dream state and related stages of con-
Clairaudience
109
clairau-
dient experiences
in which God sends
messages to prophets and kings. For example, King Solomon is described hearing the voice of the Lord telling him he
has been given a wise and discerning
mind, and none like him shall ever come
after him. The boy Samuel hears his name
called and thinks it is the priest Eli; later
he realizes it is the Lord.
Clairaudience has occurred regularly
to great men and women in history, and
to highly creative individuals. See Inspiration. At age thirteen Joan of Arc began
to see visions and hear the voices of the
angels Michael, Margaret, and Catherine,
her spirit guides. In the eighteenth century, English poet William Cowper heard
voices giving him advance notice of all
important
events in his life. In the late
seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries, the mesmerists observed that magnetized subjects experienced
clairaudience, particularly the voices of the dead,
along with other psychic phenomena.
Messages from the dead, received by a
medium clairaudiently,
became an integral part of many Spiritualist seances.
Clairaudience
frequently
occurs in
psychic readings. A psychic may hear
voices, music, or sounds relating to a person's past or present. It manifests in times
of crisis, as when one sees and hears a
loved one in trouble. Shamans use clairaudience in a trance state to communicate
with spirit helpers and guardian spirits.
Not all clairaudient experiences are
meaningful and to be taken seriously. The
inner voice may be cultivated through diligent
meditation
and
awareness
of
dreams.
Clairaudient
voices differ from the
disembodied
voices sometimes heard at
seances and in poltergeist cases, which
are considered
collective
apparitional
phenomena.
See
Hypnagogic/hypnapompic states; Possession.
SOl/rces: Slater Brown. The Heyday of Spiritualism. New York: Hawthorn
Books,
110
1970; W. E. Butler. How to Develop Clairvoyance. 2d ed. New York: Samuel Weiser,
1979; Arthur Ford in collaboration with
Marguerite
Harmon
Bro. Nothing
So
Strange: The Autobiography
of Arthur
Ford, New York: Harper & Brothers,
1958; Michael Harner. The Way of the
Shaman. New York: Bantam, 1986; Craig
Junjulas. Psychic Tarot. Dobbs Ferry, NY:
Morgan & Morgan, 1985; C. W. Leadbeater. The Chakras. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing House, 1927; Ormond
McGill. The Mysticism and Magic of India.
Cranbury, NJ: A. S. Barnes & Co., 1977;
Ian Stevenson. "Are Poltergeists Living or
Are They Dead?" The Journal of the American Society for Psychical Research 66, no.
3 (July 1972): 233-52; Joan Windsor. The
Inner Eye: Your Dreams Can Make You
Psychic. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall, 1985.
Clairsentience
A superphysical
sense perception that is
one of the primary tools of a psychic.
"Clairsentience"
is derived from French
for "clear sensing," and was brought into
popular usage during the late eighteenth
century by the followers of Franz Anton
Mesmer, who developed the practice of
animal magnetism.
See Mesmer, Franz
Anton.
Clairsentience
involves the psychic
perception
of smell, taste, touch, emotions, and physical sensations that contribute to an overall psychic and intuitive
impression. Depending on the psychic's
individual
techniques,
the perceptions
may register internally or externally.
Clairsentience is used in conjunction
with clairvoyance, or "clear vision," and
clairaudience,
or "clear hearing." Many
people experience clair sentience without
being aware of it. They may discuss the
fleeting impressions and flashes as imagination. Like other psychic perceptions,
clairsentience is tied closely to the intuition and gut feelings.
One of the earliest and most important laboratory
experiments
involving
Clairaudience
Clairvoyance
The perception of current objects, events,
or people that may not be discerned
through the normal senses. Clairvoyance,
from the French for "clear seeing," is a
common psychic experience. The seeing
may manifest in internal or external visions, or a sensing of images. Clairvoyance overlaps with other psychic faculties
and phenomena, such as clairaudience,
clairsentience, telepathy, precognition,
retrocognition, psychometry, and remote
vIewmg.
Clairvoyance appears to be a general
ability among humans, and it also appears to exist in animals. Research in this
area, which is largely limited to anecdotal
case studies, has been highly controversial. See Animal psi.
Clairvoyance has been acknowledged, used, and cultivated since ancient
Clairvoyance
111
112
Clairvoyance
Cloud dissolving
Mystic, and the Physicist: Toward a General Theory of the Paranormal. New York:
Viking Press, 1974; Ormond McGill. The
Mysticism and Magic of India. Cranbury,
113
The Journal of the Society for Psychical Research 38, no. 690 (December 1956): 35264; Ruth Montgomery. Strangers Among
Us. New York: Fawcett Crest, 1979; Susy
Smith. Today's Witches. Englewood Cliffs,
Collective unconscIOUS
Concept of psychiatrist Carl G. Jung that
refers to the memories of mental patterns
that are experienced and shared by a
large number, if not all, humans. Likewise, most members of a single culture
may have a more specific collective unconscious, while sharing also in the more
universal patterns. "Collective unconscious" is synonymous with "universal
consciousness. "
In developing the concept of the collective unconscious, Jung broke away
from psychiatrist Sigmund Freud's view
that the unconscious was exclusively personal and formed of repressed childhood
traumas. Jung affirmed a personal unconscious, and said that underneath it lies a
much deeper layer, the collective unconscious, which is separate. The collective
unconscious does not derive from per-
114
ton: Princeton University Press, 1968; Andrew Samuels, and Bani Shorter and Fred
Plaut. A Critical Dictionary of Jungian
Analysis. London: Routledge & Kegan
Paul, 1986.
Cloud dissolving
Colors
Seven primary wavelengths, or vibrations, of light visible to the human eyered, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo,
and violet-which have had occult, religious, philosophical, and healing significance since ancient times. Colors are believed to have specific effects upon body,
mind, and spirit.
Color lore is ancient and is part of
the mystical, magical, and healing systems developed by the ancient Indians,
Chinese, Tibetans, Egyptians, Greeks,
Persians, Babylonians, and others. Modern scientific evidence supports some of
the ancient claims made about colors.
Red, the longest wavelength of visible colors, is associated with physical and
material forces, while violet, the shortest
wavelength, is associated with spirituality
and enlightenment. Black, the absence of
color, is virtually universally associated
with evil; while white, the combination of
all colors, is associated with the Godhead
and purity. In terms of the three aspects
of hUI11anbeings, the body is associated
with red, the mind with yellow, and the
spirit with blue. Some Hindu gods, usually attributes of Vishnu, are portrayed
with blue skin to denote their divine nature.
The Pythagoreans said that white
light-the Godhead-contains
all sound
and color, and that the seven colors of
the spectrum correspond to the seven
known planets and the eight notes of the
scale. Both the first and eighth notes of
the scale correspond to red, the eighth
note having a higher vibration of red.
The Old Testament tells that the
seven colors of the spectrum were given
by God as a rainbow, a token of a covenant between God and humankind. The
Colors
The Effects
of Color
115
116
Colors
117
Cone of power
In modern Witchcraft a force field of psychic energy raised by a coven of Witches
for magic purposes. The Witches join
hands and begin dancing in a ring and
chanting to raise the power, which is visualized as a cone, the base of which
comprises the circle, and the apex of
which either extends into infinity or is
pictured as a person or symbolic image.
When the energy peaks in intensity, the
group releases it toward accomplishment
of a goal, such as a spell or healing.
Cones of power also are raised
through cord magic. The Witches sit inside a magic circle and hold ends of overlapping or interwoven cords. As the
Witches chant, either aloud or silently,
knots are tied in the cords. Power is released when the knots are untied.
The energy projected by the cone of
power is similar to that raised in a group
prayer meeting. Witches who have developed their psychic abilities can sometimes
see the cone of power as a luminous, pulsating cloud flooded with changing colors, or as a silvery-blue light.
In 1940 many covens of Witches
gathered in the New Forest in England to
raise a cone of power to prevent Hitler
from invading the country. The energy
was directed against the men in the German High Command, either to convince
them the invasion would not be successful, or to confuse their minds so that the
118
Committee
Consciousness
See Altered states of consciousness; Kundalini; Meditation; Mystical experiences;
Mysticism; Psi.
Contemplation
See Prayer; Mystical experiences.
Control
In mediumship a spirit or entity that acts
as the primary intermediary between the
medium and other discarnates who wish
to communicate to the living through the
medium. The control literally controls
which entities will communicate, and
when, how, and in what order. A control
usually stays with a medium permanently.
Investigation
Cook, Florence
(1856-1904)
119
of which were sealed with wax. The sitters prepared themselves by singing Spiritualism songs. After a few minutes, King,
pale and white with fixed eyes, emerged
from behind the curtain or the back of
the cabinet. Meanwhile, Cook moaned
and sobbed out of sight. Katie would not
speak, but only smiled and nodded. After
the sitters had been awed and entertained, the spirit disappeared behind the
curtain or back of the cabinet. The sitters,
following Cook's instructions, waited
and then looked for Cook, whom they
always found still clothed and tied, and
profoundly exhausted from the experience.
Cook attracted the attention of Spiritualist investigators, including the eminent British scientist William Crookes.
Investigators were amazed at King's
flesh-like appearance; more than one
concluded the "spirit" was Cook herself.
She was caught at least twice in fraud.
Once, a sitter grabbed a "spirit hand"
that was sprinkling him with water, and
found he had grabbed Cook, who was
seated at the seance table. The medium
protested that she was only reaching to
retrieve a flower the spirits had taken
from her dress. In 1873 a sitter grabbed
King first by the hand and then the waist.
The spirit struggled and was pulled away
by two of Cook's friends. The lights went
out. The sitters waited five minutes, then
opened the cabinet and found Cook
dressed and tied. Nevertheless, the sitter
was convinced he had touched a living
person, probably Cook.
On another occasion, in 1880, Sir
George Sitwell noticed that King's spirit
robes covered corset stays, an unusual requirement for a spirit. He seized her. The
curtain was pulled aside to reveal Cook's
chair empty and the ropes slipped.
Crookes subjected Cook to numerous tests. He photographed King and
walked arm in arm with the spirit, convinced of her validity. For the photographs, taken in 1874, Cook lay down on
120
chic vision of White Eagle and other Native American spirits one night as they
appeared in a circle around her bed. The
visions came just before she fell asleep,
probably as she drifted into the hypnagogic state. Most of the natives wore
bright colors, but the tallest, a stately,
elder chief, was dressed in white. In the
dream state, the chief took her to the astral plane to a place of great beauty,
where she saw elemental spirits. He revealed himself as White Eagle, one of the
Great White Brotherhood, the Brotherhood of the Cross of Light within the Circle of Light. He explained the spiritual
work he and Cooke were to accomplish
together during Cooke's life.
Cooke became a Spiritualist medium
in 1913. While popular attention was focused on communicating with the dead,
Cooke preferred to emphasize spiritual
development and esoteric teachings,
which she felt were desperately needed in
the world.
Her first church was a small one in
Middlesex, but she eventually left it because of the congregation's preoccupation with proof of survival.
In 1936 White Eagle and other spirits in the Great White Brotherhood instructed Cooke to form an organization
for those people ready to practice brotherhood among men and be channels of
light, or light-bearers. Cooke established
the White Eagle Brotherhood at Burstow
Manor in Surrey, later moving headquarters to Pembroke Hall in Kensington,
London. The hall was destroyed by
bombs in World War II, and the Brotherhood moved to new premises in Kensington, and to Edinburgh, Scotland. In
1945 the White Eagle Lodge was further
established at the present headquarters at
New Lands in Liss, Hampshire. The organization has been administered by a
trust since 1953. Throughout her ministry Cooke was aided by her husband,
Ivan, and their two daughters. The White
Eagle Lodge grew to an international or-
Grace Cooke
ganization, including a publishing trust of
spiritual books and tapes.
Cooke was a teacher of meditation,
and published two books on the subject,
Meditation (1955) and The Jewel in the
Lotus (1973). In her later years, she experienced vivid rein carnation aI memories
of previous lives as a Mayan and Egyptian priestess, both under the tutelage of
White Eagle. Using a meditational technique learned from an Ea~tern adept,
Cooke would rise through her crown
chakra and read the Akashic Records.
The stories of these two past lives are recorded in Cooke's book The Illumined
Ones.
Cooke said the Mayan civilization in
which she lived as Minesta flourished at
least ten thousand years ago in the foothills of the Andes, an advanced culture
established by an extraterrestrial race by
way of Atlantis. Though archaeologists
date the earliest Mayans to about A.D.
350 in Central America, Cooke was confident that archaeological remains would
be found in South America to confirm her
visions. In 1965 some remains were
found in Peru that indicated a Mesoamerican influence, or vice versa.
As a Mayan Cooke was guided in
her spiritual development by Hah-Wah-
121
Crandon, Mina
See American Society for Psychical Research (ASPR).
Creation spirituality
A movement to redefine and revitalize
Christianity by restoring an element of
sensual, playful, and creative mysticism
122
I
I
I
I
I
and with the Liberation spirituality developing in Latin America. Upon his return
to the United States, Fox taught at Aquinas Institute and Barat College. At the
latter, a women's college, his own feminism was born. In 1977 he founded the
ICCS at Mundelein College in Chicago,
and in 1983 moved the program to Oakland. Fox's numerous papers, articles,
and books have addressed creation spirituality and the question of the relationship between mysticism and social justice.
His 1983 book, Original Blessing: A
Primer in Creation Spirituality, brought
him to public attention.
Creation spirituality advocates the
rebirth of an earthy, ecstatic mysticism
that reveres the feminine principle, sexuality, passion, play, prophecy, creativity,
and the divine child within, all of which
is diametric to the orthodox Christian
mystical tradition of mortification of the
senses. Creation spirituality embraces panentheism, which holds that God is in
everything and everything is in God.
(Panentheism is often confused 'with pantheism, deemed a heresy by the church,
which holds that God is everything and
everything is God.) It advocates a return
of body consciousness in worship, that
is, movement and dance; if worship is
not playful, it loses its transformative
power.
In The Coming of the Cosmic Christ
(1988), Fox articulates his concept of a
Cosmic Christ, as opposed to a historical
Jesus, who embodies the aforementioned
qualities. The appropriate symbol of the
Cosmic Christ is Jesus as Mother Earth,
who is crucified yet risen daily. Fox says
that in order for Christianity to survive,
the church must turn from its preoccupation with the historical Jesus and begin a
quest for the Cosmic Christ. However, it
cannot be undertaken without a living
cosmology that embraces a "holy trinity
of science (knowledge of creation), mysticism (experiential union with creation
and its unnameable mysteries), and art
I
I
Creation spirituality
123
124
Creative visualization
The use of positive, affirming mental pictures to obtain goals. A vivid mental picture of a desired goal is held in the mind
as though it already were accomplished.
Creative visualization is widely employed
in the creative arts, sports, business, alternative medicine, religious practices,
psychotherapy, the mystical and occult
arts, psychical research, and in personal
self-improvement. Other terms for it are
"positive thinking," "positive imaging,"
"dynamic imaging," "creative imaging,"
"imaging," and so on.
The power of thought, imagination,
and will to effect changes in circumstance
is ancient knowledge. See Imagery. Creative visualization is an aid in helping the
individual marshal the resources necessary to accomplish what is desired. It also
is believed to help establish a harmony
that facilitates fortuitous synchronicities,
that is, opportunities and "lucky breaks."
See Synchronicity.
Creative visualization seems to be
most effective when practiced in a relaxed
or altered state of consciousness, such as
in a daily prayer or meditation session.
Some individuals call on a higher power,
Creation
spirituality
Croiset,
Gerard (1909-80)
Creativity
See Inspiration.
125
126
Crookes, William
See Cook, Florence; Parapsychology; Sociery for Psychical Research (SPR).
Crop circles
Large circles and other patterns that appear inexplicably in the middle of grain
fields when the crop is several feet high.
Most crop circles have been found in
Southeast England since the early 1980s.
But other countries-including the United
States-have reported them as well. Some
have been exposed as hoaxes but others
remain unexplained.
Crop circles measure from as small
as ten feet in diameter to as large as three
hundred feet. They appear overnight,
Croiset,
Gerard (1909-80)
sometimes preceded by amber lights reportedly hovering above the Earth. The
grain inside the circles usually has been
found lying horizontally,
seemingly
knocked down or crushed by some tremendous force, yet unbroken and still
growing. No tracks leading up to them
have been found, giving additional credence to theories suggesting some external force from above was responsible.
In the years between 1980 and 1987,
between 100 and 120 crop circles were
found in England. Over the following
years the numbers increased dramatically: 112 in 1988; 305 in 1989; and 400
in 1990.
With the increase in numbers of circles also came significant changes in their
appearances. Where the phenomenon
once was limited to circles of varying
sizes, new formations began taking shape
that ranged from large circles surrounded
by smaller ones to elaborate patterns that
resembled some form of ancient hieroglyphs, featuring rectangles, rings, spurs,
and pathways linking circles to one another.
Theories as to the origins and causes
of these crop circles are as multiple as the
shapes themselves. Some theories blame
natural forces, such as violent weather
patterns or the effects of irrigation. Others claim the shapes were left by UFOs,
because of the appearances of anomalous
lights prior to some circle formations.
Still other theories suggest the circles are
communications from other intelligent
life forces, perhaps a planetary intelligence of Earth itself.
In 1988, before the sudden proliferation and variation of crop circles, Terrence Meaden (a British physicist with the
Tornado Storm Research Organization,
who had studied some fifty crop circles)
dismissed them as the result of rare meteorological events, which he called stationary whirlwinds, or sudden vortices of
wind. Meaden said these bursts of air
sink to the ground and flatten crops in a
Crop circles
127
128
Cross correspondence
A cross correspondence occurs when the
information communicated through one
medium corresponds with information
communicated through another, independent medium. There is no normal
explanation for the occurrence. Some
psychical researchers believe cross correspondences provide strong evidence in
support of life after death. Others say
they are produced by the mediums in an
unconscious telepathic network.
Psychical researchers have defined
three types of cross correspondences:
simple, complex, and ideal. In simple
cross correspondences, two or more mediums produce the same word, words, or
phrases, or similar phrases that are
clearly interconnected. In complex cross
correspondences, topics are mentioned
only indirectly. Ideal cross correspondences involve messages that are incomplete until put together.
The Society for Psychical Research
(SPR) in England studied cross correspondences intently between 1901 and
1932. The principal communicators appeared to be three of the founders of the
SPR, all of whom had been interested in
the question of survival after death:
Edmund Gurney, who died in 1888,
Henry Sidgwick, who died in 1900, and
Frederic W. H. Myers, who died in 1901.
Of the three men, Myers was most interested in proving survival after death, and
had stated while living that he would attempt to communicate posthumously.
Sidgwick had been open to the possibility
of survival, while Gurney had been skeptical. These three were joined by other deceased communicators.
Leonora Piper, a prominent American medium, claimed to establish contact
with the spirits of the three men through
automatic writing. Her impressive results
generated much publicity, and inspired
about twelve other women to try the
same thing, all independently. One of the
Crop circles
principals was Margaret Verrall of Cambridge, England, who shared Myers's interest in classicism. After some time of
automatic writing, the scripts of which
were collated and examined by members
of the SPR, the cross correspondences
were noticed. For example, "Myers"
would give Verrall one part of a message,
and the rest to another automatist in India (Alice Fleming, the sister of Rudyard
Kipling). Over a period of years, other
mediums had similar results. Most of the
communications of "Myers" contained
references to classical literature.
SPR member Frank Podmore believed that cross correspondences were
the result of telepathic communication
among the living. He suggested that one
automatist telepathically broadcast material, which was picked up by other automatists. Psychical researchers have not
found any clear evidence for that sort of
phenomena, however. Also, the idea for
cross correspondences did not originate
with anyone living. The plan seems to
have been devised on the "other side" by
"Myers." Myers, when living, knew full
well that researchers would attempt to
explain communications of entire messages through one medium in terms of telepathy and clairvoyance on the part of
the medium. But if pieces of messages
were disseminated with apparent deliberation, it \vould strengthen the case for
survival.
Some of "Myers's" communications
support that notion. In automatic writing
through Piper, he purportedly stated, "I
am trying with all forces ... together to
prove that I am Myers." And in automatic writing through Fleming: "Oh, I
am feeble with eagerness-how can I best
be identified?"
The principal investigators of the
SPR concluded that the cross correspondences \vere the products of the deceased
SPR leaders and others. Though the style
and content of their messages conformed
with their living personalities, they were
Crowley,
Aleister
(1875-1947)
Ex-
Ltd., 1938.
129
130
Cryptomnesia
Sources: Richard Cavendish, ed. The Encyclopedia of the Unexplained. New York:
Cryptomnesia
The unconscious memory of information
learned through normal channels. Cryptomnesia is one possible explanation for
memories of past lives and communications with the dead. Information that is
consciously "forgotten" may be stored
deep within the unconscious indefinitely.
According to psychiatrist Carl G. Jung,
this forgetting is not only normal but necessary. Otherwise, the mind would become unbearably cluttered. Hypnosis, an
altered state of consciousness, automatic
writing, or inspiration can stimulate recall of the buried information, which
seems "new."
Psychical researchers consider the
possibility of cryptomnesia when investigating cases of reincarnation, or a medium's communication with the dead. The
possibility of cryptomnesia is strong if research shows that the information apparently obtained paranormally can be
found in existing sources, and that the
person may have had access to those
sources; and that the information does
not go beyond those sources.
The earliest case of cryptomnesia recorded in psychical research occurred in
1874, when the English medium William
Stainton Moses purported to contact the
spirits of two young brothers who had
died in India. The deaths were verified by
a check of records. Further research disclosed that six days prior to the seance,
131
132
Re-
Cryptomnesia
Crystals
Clear and colored quartz, as well as semiprecious and precious stones-all generally referred to in modern usage as
"crystals" -have, more than any concept
or object, become synonymous with the
New Age. From the 1980s crystals were
widely used as amulets and talismans
with reputed healing, psychic, or magical
properties. There is no scientific evidence
that crystals have paranormal properties,
but adherents believe that the stones emit
vibrations undetectable
by ordinary
means.
The modern popularity of crystals is
a new twist on ancient and universal lore.
Early civilizations valued crystals for
their alleged protective properties against
disease, bad luck, evil, and sorcery, and
for their physical and mental healing
properties. Ancient peoples most commonly wore crystals as amulets in jewelry
and breastplates. This practice continued
throughout the Middle Ages, when European nobility wore them to ward off the
plague. Crystals also were ground into a
powdered form and administered as medicines for a variety of disorders.
As in ancient times, crystals are worn
in pendants, rings, and other jewelry, carried in small pouches, placed about
Crystal wands
Crystals
133
134
Sources: Randall N. Baer and Vicki Vittitow Baer. The Crystal Connection: A
Guidebook for Personal and Planetary Ascension. San Francisco: Harper & Row,
1987; E. A. Wallis Budge. Amulets and Superstitions. 1930. New York: Dover Publications, 1978; Edmund Harold. Focus on
Crystals. New York: Ballantine Books,
1986; Ursula Markham. Fortune-Telling by
Crystals and Semiprecious Stones. Welling-
Cults
See Alternative religious movements.
Culture hero
See Mythology.
Curse
See Psychic attack.
Crystals
D
Dalai Lama
The religious and temporal leader of
Tibet. Dalai Lama means "ocean of
wisdom." Tibetans usually refer to His
Holiness as Yeshe Norbu, "the Wishfulfilling Gem," or Kundun, "the Presence." According to Tibetan belief, the
Dalai Lama is an emanation of Chenresi,
the Buddha of Compassion, the national
deity of Tibet who vows to help and protect all living things. Chenresi is often depicted as a herdsman with four arms, or
as a being with eleven heads, one thousand arms, and an eye in the palm of his
hand.
The Dalai Lamaship is not a hereditary succession, but a succession of reincarnations. Prior to his death, the Dalai
Lama selects the circumstances of his
next incarnation. He may give clues as to
where he may be found, or the clues may
manifest after his death. Oracles, high lamas, and astrologers are consulted, and
the search goes out for an infant born
near the time of the Dalai Lama's death
who is his reincarnation. Candidates,
who include peasant children, are tested
for past-life recall by lamas and must
identify personal objects owned by the
Dalai Lama. The child also may recognize
high lamas, or recite scriptures he has not
been taught. Once certified the new Dalai
Lama is taken to the Potala Palace in
Llasa to be enthroned and schooled. A
Dalai Lama
135
136
Dalai Lama
may end
Sources: Barbara and Michael Foster. Forbidden Journey: The Life of Alexandra
David-Nee!.
San Francisco:
Harper
&
Row, 1987; His Holiness the Dalai Lama
of Tibet. My Land and My People: Memoirs of the Dalai Lama of Tibet. 1962. New
York: Potala Corp., 1983; The Office of
Tibet, New York City.
Da Love-Ananda (formerly
Da Free John) (b. 1939)
American mystic and founder of the Free
Daist Communion,
a body of five institutes that disseminate Da Love-Ananda's
teachings.
Da Love-Ananda
Da Love-Ananda
(formerly
Da Free John)
(b. 1939)
137
claimed that he actually died and resurrected himself and did not merely have a
near-death experience.
His alleged physical death freed him
from his teaching and his need to interact
with ordinary people. He resides at the
Hermitage,
\vhere he merely "Stands
Free" and is "Boundlessly Radiant" in all
directions, ready to "Offer the direct Realization of Truth" to all who \vill receive
"His Gift." He lives almost as a recluse,
cared for by a small number of attendants
and granting audiences to a few practitioners. He adopted new titles, and is
known informally as "Da Love-Ananda"
or "Heart-Master
Da Love-Ananda,"
and
formally
as "Avadhoota
Da
LoveAnanda Hridayam."
"Avadhoota"
refers
to one who has passed beyond worldly
attachments
and desires; "Hridayam"
is
Sanskrit for "heart."
The Free Daist Communion,
the
present name of Da Love-Ananda's
religious organization,
dedicates
itself to
spreading his teachings. It includes five
fellowships for different levels of practice: the Laughing Man Institute, based in
San Rafael, California; the Dawn Horse
Fellowship; the Ajna Dharma Fellowship;
the Advaitayana
Buddhist
Fellowship;
and the Crazy Wisdom Fellowship.
Sources: Heart
Nlaster Da Love-Ananda.
138
David-Ned, Alexandra
(1868-1969)
French explorer, author, and scholar of
Tibet, the first Western woman to enter
Llasa, the forbidden capital of Tibet. Alexandra David-Neel spent fourteen years
in Tibet as one of the first Westerners to
probe that nation's mysticism
She claimed to be descended
and magic.
from Gen-
Da Love-Ananda
(formerly
Da Free John)
(b. 1939)
regarded
goddess
as
of
Dauid-Neel,
Alexandra
(1868-1969)
139
In 1916 David-~eel
at the im'itation
illegally entered
of the Panchen
140
beset by bandits
but was
never harmed, and frequently took hospitality from them. Yongden passed her
off as a sorceress and as the wife of a
deceased sorcerer to cajole offerings of
food from peasants. She also masqueraded as a kamdora, a female spirit or
fairy whose blessings are sought.
The journey to Lhasa took three
years due to detours caused by local
fighting,
bandits,
wild animals,
and
avoidance of government
officials. The
last stage of the journey was made across
the uncharted and treacherous Po country, whose
mored
to
wild inhabitants
were rube cannibals.
David-Neel
tachments.
In the chad the participant
sacrifices himself or herself to dismemberment
and devouring
by a hungry
horde of ghouls, then renounces the sacrifice as illusion because he or she is nothing, and therefore has nothing to give.
Da,"id-Neel may have continued to practice the chad during her later years in
France.
Yongden was expected to manage
David-NeeFs estate, but the lama, an alcoholic, died of uremic poisoning
in
1955.
David-Nee!
hired
a secretary,
Jeanne Denys, in 1958. Denys came to
despise the ill-tempered David-Neel, and
devoted ten :"ears to an unsuccessful attempt to prove her works as fiction.
In 1959 David-Neel
hired Marie:Yladeleine Peyronnet, who looked after
her until she died just short of age 101 on
September 6, 1969. Twentv years later
Pevronnet was still working at Samten
Dzong, ,vhich is now a conference center
and museum . .:vIost of David-Nee!'s
books and artifacts ,vent to various other
museums.
David-NeeFs
,yorks include more
than thirty titles, and contain descriptions
of Tibetan practices, rituals, and ceremonies that \X'esterners are unlikely ever to
see performed
again" Her best-known
books are My Journey to Lhasa (1927',
an account of her penetration to the capital; Magic and Mystery in Tibet (1929"
anecdotal accounts of magical and mvstical practices; Initiations and Initiates of
Tibet (1930, a more serious discussion of
T antric lore and mystical rites; and Buddhism: Its Doctrines and Its Alethods
:1936"
a recapitulation
of an earlier
work on Buddhist doctrines. During her
life she recei,"ed many honors, including
the French Legion of Honor, the gold
medal of the Geographical
Society of
Paris, the sih"er medal of the Royal Be!gian Geographical
Society, and the Insigne of the Chinese Order of the Brilliant
Star.
Deathbed
visions
Shambhala;
Thought-form.
Sources: Alexandra
David-Nee!.
1929.
lviagic and Mystery in Tibet. New York:
Dover
Publications,
1971;
Alexandra
David-Nee!. .lvIy Journey to Lhasa. 1927.
Boston: Beacon Press, 1986; Barbara and
Michael Foster. Forbidden Journey: The
Life of Alexandra David-Neel. San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1987; Leslie A.
Shepard, ed. Encyclopedia of Occultism
and Parapsychology. 2d ed. Detroit: Gale
Research Co., 1984.
Deathbed VISiOns
Paranormal
experiences
of the dying.
:Ylost deathbed visions are apparitions of
the dead or mythical or religious figures,
and visions of an aftenvorld.
Deathbed
visions are significant because they provide evidence, albeit not scientific, in support of sun'ival of consciousness
after
death. The visions share certain traits
with mystical experiences,
such as a
marked sense of the sacred, profound
peace, and elation.
Deathbed visions have been recorded
since ancient times. Early psychical researchers, among them James H. Hyslop
and E. Bazzano, collected and studied
cases around the turn of the twentieth
century. The first systematic study was
done by William Barrett, English professor of physics and psychical researcher.
Barrett became interested in 1924 when
his wife, a physician specializing in obstetrical surgery, told him about a woman
141
142
Deathbed visions
Encounter
phenom-
Sources: William Barrett. Death-Bed Visions: The Psychical Experiences of the Dying. 1926. Wellingborough, Northamptonshire, England: The Aquarian Press, 1986;
W. Y. Evans-Wentz, compo and ed. The Tibetan Book of the Dead. 3d ed. London:
Oxford University Press, 1960; Michael
Grosso. The Final Choice: Playing the Survival Game. Walpole, NH: Stillpoint Publishing, 1985; Edmund Gurney, Frederic
W. H. Myers, and Frank Podmore. Phantasms of the Living. London: Kegan Paul,
Trench, Trubner & Co. Ltd., 1918; Karlis
Osis. Deathbed Observations by Physicians
and Nurses. Monograph no. 3. New York:
Parapsychology Foundation,
1961; Karlis
Osis and Erlendur Haraldsson, At the Hour
of Death. Rev. ed. New York: Hastings
House, 1986.
Decline/incline
effects
Declinelincline
effects
143
A disorientation
of time in which one
feels that one has been to an unknown
place before, or has experienced a situation before. Deja vu is an impression of
familiarity that is unexpected, and applies
to events, experiences,
sensory impressions, dreams, thoughts, statements, desires, emotions, meetings, visits, the act of
reading, the state of knowing, and, in
general, living. The term, French for "already seen," was first used to describe
such experiences in 1876 by E. Letter
Boirac, who called it "la sensation du
deja vu." It was introduced to science in
1896 by F. L Arnaud. There is no adequate English equivalent for the term
"deja vu."
Deja vu is a common psychological
experience. In a 1986 poll conducted by
the University
of Chicago's
National
Opinion Research Council, 67 percent of
adult Americans
reported
instances of
deja vu, up from 58 percent in 1973. In
other studies deja vu is experienced more
frequentlv among women than men, and
among younger people than older.
Theories eXplaining deja vu differ
\videly. Some psychologists call it "double cerebration."
As early as 1884, theories \vere ad\'anced suggesting that one
hemisphere of the brain receives information a split second earlier than the other
half. In 1895 English psychical researcher
Frederic W. H. :vlyers theorized that the
subconscious mind registered information
sooner than the conscious mind. The biological process of deja m, if there is one,
has not been proved.
Reincarnationists
say deja vu is
caused by fragments of past-life memories jarred to the surface of the mind by
familiar surroundings
or people. Others
say it may be the product of out-of-body
travel during sleep, or other extrasensory
phenomena such as clailToyance or telepathy. Still others, using psychiatrist Carl
G. Jung's theory of the collective uncon-
144
1977.
Demon
A low-level spirit that interacts in the affairs of the physical world. Demons are
universally believed to exist in numerous
varieties, and may be either entirely good,
entirely evil, or capable of both. They
may offer advice and assistance or be responsible for bad luck, disease, illness,
and death. Demons may be summoned,
controlled, or expelled by qualified adepts, such as a priest, magician, sorcerer,
or shaman.
"Demon" means "replete with wisdom," and is derived from the Greek daimon, "divine power," "fate," or "god."
To the Greeks daimons were intermediary spirits - including
those
heroes-between
humankind
gods. A daimon acted
spirit. See Inspiration.
of deified
and the
as an advisory
Deja vu
ment of Solomon, which dates to this period, describes Solomon's magic ring for
commanding
demons called the djinn,
and gives the names and functions of various Hebre\v,
Greek, Assyrian,
Babylonian, Egyptian,
and perhaps Persian
demons. During the sixteenth and seventeenth
centuries,
Christian
demonologists catalogued
demons into various
hierarchies of hell and ascribed to them
attributes and duties, including ambassadorships to earthly nations. The most
complex hierarchy was devised by Johann \lVeyer, who estimated that there
were 7,405,926
demons serving under
seventy-two princes.
Much demon lore concerns sexual
intercourse between demons and humans.
Demons with such sexual appetites are in
the demonologies
of the ancient Hebrews, Egyptians, Greeks, Romans, Assyrians, Persians, and other cultures.
Demon
145
146
Depossession
The exorcism
(also releasement)
of attached
discarnate
hu-
Demon
r
Some therapists say that past-life recalls
may concern not the patients, but their
attached
spirits. See Past-life therapy
(PLT).
Depossession has precedence in the
West. During the height of Spiritualism,
people suffering from unusual mental
symptoms
often attended
seances
in
hopes of having "low" spirits exorcised.
The first medically trained person to approach mental illness as due to spirit possession \vas Carl Wickland, an American
physician and psychologist who had attended
numerous
Spiritualist
seances.
Wickland and his wife, Anna, attributed
all manner of mental conditions and illnesses to confused, benign spirits who
were trapped in the auras of living people. The Wicklands depossessed patients
in the late nineteenth and early twentieth
centuries. \Vickland invented a static electricity machine
that transmitted
lowvoltage electric shock to the patient, causing the possessing spirit great discomfort.
The device was a forerunner
of lowvoltage electric shock treatment used in
psychotherapy.
Wickland then forced the spirit to
leave its victim, enter Anna's body, and
then finally depart forever. If the spirit
resisted, Wickland called on "helper spirits" to keep the possessing spirit in a socalled "dungeon,"
out of the aura of the
victim or Anna, until the spirit gave up its
selfish attitude and departed.
Titus Bull, a New York physician
and neurologist,
used a medium in the
early twentieth century to persuade obsessing entities to depart. See Exorcism;
Possession; Thought-form.
Sources: Dr. Edith Fiore. The Unquiet
Dead: A Psychologist Treats Spirit Possession. Garden City, NY: DolphinIDoubleday & Co., 1987; Edith Fiore, Ph.D. "Freeing Stalemates in Relationships
by the
Resolution of Entity Attachments."
The
journal of Regression Therapy 3, no. 1
(Spring 1988): 22-25; Louise Ireland-Frey.
"Clinical Depossession: Releasement of At-
Deva
1974.
Depth psychology
See Psychology.
Dervish
See Sufism.
Deva
In Hinduism and Buddhism, an exalted
being of various kinds. The term deva is
Sanskrit for "shining one."
Hinduism distinguishes
three kinds
of devas: mortals who live in a higher
realm than other mortals,
enlightened
people who have realized God, and Brahman in the form of a personal God.
In Buddhism devas are gods who live
in various realms of heaven as a reward
for their previous good deeds; however,
they are still subject to rebirth.
Madame
Helena P. Blavatsky, cofounder of the Theosophical
Society, introduced
the concept of devas to the
West, defining them as types of angels or
gods who were progressed entities from a
previous planetary period. They arrived
on earth before elementals or human beings, and would remain dormant until a
certain stage of human evolution was
reached. At that time the devas would integrate with elementals and help further
the spiritual development of humankind,
Blavatsky said.
147
See Nature
spirits; Findhorn.
Dharma
In Hinduism and Buddhism, law, truth,
or doctrine that defines the cosmos; also,
duty, truth, righteousness,
virtue, ideal,
phenomena,
and so on. Dharma
has
many-shaded
meanings,
depending
on
context. "Dharma"
is Sanskrit from the
Aryan root dhar, to uphold, sustain, or
support. Its Pali form is dhamma, \vhich
is generally used in The1;avada Buddhism.
In Hinduism dharma is the supreme
operating law of the universe, governing
148
provide educational
to their members.
are
overcome
through
the
Deva
is the second
of the Three
tributes or phenomena
called "elements
of being," which are minute impulses of
energy. Dharmas comprise the skandas,
the karmic aggregates of form, feelings,
perceptions, impulses, and consciousness,
which in turn comprise the illusory nature of all sentient beings. See Karma.
Sources: Robert Aitken. Taking the Path of
Zen. San Francisco: North Point Press,
1982; John Blofeld. The Tantric Mysticism
of Tibet. Boston: Shambhala Publications,
1987; Tenzin Gyatso, His Holiness the
Fourteenth Dalai Lama. Kindness, Clarity,
Direct-voice
mediumship
and Insight. Ithaca, NY: Snow Lion Publications, 1984; Virginia Hanson and Rosemarie Stewart, eds. Karma: The Universal
Law of Harmony. 2d ed. Wheaton, IL:
Theosophical
Publishing
House,
1981;
Yong Choon Kim. Oriental Thought. Totowa, NJ: Rowman and Littlefield, 1973;
Solange Lemaitre. Ramakrishna and the Vitality of Hinduism. 1959. Woodstock, NY:
The Overlook Press, 1984; Maurice Percheron. Buddha and Buddhism.
1956.
Woodstock,
NY: The Overlook
Press,
1982; K. M. Sen. Hinduism. Harmondsworth,
Middlesex,
England:
Penguin
Books, 1961.
Dianetics
See Church of Scientology.
Direct-voice mediumship
A method of spirit communication,
in
which a spirit speaks directly to an audience without using a medium's vocal apparatus. In early Spiritualism direct-voice
mediumship
took the form of the dead
communicating
to the living by speaking through trumpets and megaphones,
which amplified their voices. Sometimes a
spirit voice seemed to emanate from a
point in space near the medium. According to some Spiritualists, the vocalization
was made possible by an artificial larynx
constructed
by the spirits and activated
by ectoplasm. The spirits were said to use
ectoplasmic rods to manipulate the trumpets and megaphones,
which floated
around the rooms.
Most early Spiritualist mediums employed direct-voice
communication
at
one time or another, though some specialized in it more than others. In the
1850s the Spirit Room of Jonathan
Koons, an Ohio farmer, was famous for
spirits that talked and played musical instruments.
After attending
several seances, Koons claimed he was directed by
a band of spirits to build the room and
149
Direct-voice mediumship
was often
suspected of ventriloquist
fraud. However, records of some seances conducted
in the nineteenth century attest to the authenticity
of the spirit voices, which
talked at the same time as the medium, or
several of which talked at once from different locations. As of the late twentieth
century, direct-voice mediumship
was a
rarity.
One of the best-known
modern
direct-voice mediums is Leslie Flint of
England. Flint, a Spiritualist, retired from
giving public seances in 1976, after more
than thirty-five years of direct-voice mediumship. The spirits seemed to speak
from a point above and slightly to the left
of Flint's head. Psychical
researchers
thought Flint might actually receive messages clain'oyantly
and then surreptitiously substitute his own voice. Flint was
extensively tested - he called himself "the
most tested medium in England" - but no
evidence of fraud was ever found. The
most dramatic test was done in London
and New York in 1970. Flint's lips were
sealed with plaster, and a throat microphone showed no evidence of use of his
vocal chords, despite the manifestation of
ghostly voices. See Ectoplasm; Spiritualism. Contrast \vith Channeling.
150
Displacement
In psi testing, perception of information
other than the "target," either in time or
context. In laboratory
tests for psi, displacement was first documented in 1939
by Whately Carrington,
a psychical researcher at Cambridge University in England. Since then it has been observed as
a common occurrence in psi testing, usually affecting time and sequences. For example, a person being tested to give the
order of face-down ESP cards may experience a displacement of one or two cards
either forward or backward.
Similarly,
the receiver in a telepathy or clairvoyance
test of a series of photographs
or images
may see them correctly, but one or more
images forward or behind the target.
In the ganzfeld stimulation
test, in
which a receiver attempts to identify one
of several images transmitted
telepathically, more than one image may be received, sometimes so vividly that a decoy
is chosen over the target image.
Parapsychologists
call displacement
a type of "psychic noise." It is caused by
two main factors: the absence of linear
time in the higher planes, where psychic
awareness functions; and the psychic association of a group of potential targets,
when they become difficult to tell apart.
Displacement
also occurs in psychic
readings and precognitive dreams, when
unpleasant
news or conditions are suppressed or buried in nonthreatening
information or symbols. See Psi hitting and
psi missing; Stained-glass window effect.
Sources: June G. Bletzer. The Donning International Encyclopedic
Psychic Dictionary. Norfolk, VA: The Donning Co.,
1986; Mary Ellen Carter. Edgar Cayce on
Prophecy.
New York: Warner,
1968;
Edgar D. Mitchell. Psychic Exploration: A
Challenge for Science. Edited by John
Direct-voice
mediumship
Divination
The
the
host
and
ilizations throughout
history, by providing a means for solving problems and resolving disputes. The responsibility
for
divination customarily
falls to a priest,
prophet,
oracle, witch, shaman, witch
doctor, medicine man, psychic, or other
person
reputed
to have supernatural
powers.
Innumerable
divinatory,
or mantic,
methods exist, and diviners use the ones
sanctioned by their cultures. Techniques
fall into two broad categories: the interpretation
of natural or artificial signs,
omens, portents, and lots; and the direct
communication
with gods and spirits
through visions, trance, dreams, and possession. All divination is an attempt to
communicate with the divine or supernatural in order to learn the will of the gods;
and even in the interpretation
of signs
and lots it is assumed that the gods interfere to provide answers to questions. A
skilled diviner also employs a keen sense
of intuition and an innate understanding
of human psychology. A typical divination consists of advice as well as prediction-sometimes
more of the former than
the latter.
In early civilizations divination was
primarily a royal or holy function, used
for guidance in matters of state and war,
and to forecast-and
therefore avoid or
Divination
Diviner
mitigate-natural
disasters. Most courts
employed royal diviners, whose very lives
often depended
upon the accuracy of
their forecasts. The Chaldeans and Babylonians had elaborate divinatory systems
under the auspices of priests, who saw
portents in virtually everything in nature
around them. The ancient Chinese had
court astrologers and other diviners who
interpreted cast lots of yarrow sticks (the
I Ching), bones, and other objects. Early
Egyptian priests slept in temples in hopes
of receiving divinatory information from
the gods in a dream. In ancient Rome a
special caste of priests called augurs interpreted signs in nature, believed to be
messages sent by the gods. Augurs interpreted such natural phenomena
as the
flights of birds, the patterns of clouds and
smoke, and the markings on the livers of
sacrificed
animals
(livers, rather than
hearts, were believed the central organ of
the body). The Greeks divined dreams
and consulted special oracles, who went
into trance to allow the gods to speak
through them. The most famous oracle
resided at Delphi, near the base of Mount
Parnassus. The Greeks helped spread divination among the masses by popularizing astrological
horoscopes.
See Astrology.
In tribal cultures divination remains
151
152
marriageable
young
religious
movements.
Divination
Donne,
John (1572-1631)
They may be
Dolmen
See Megaliths.
153
Thomas Aquinas,
and other Christian
church fathers in his brilliant and inspired
"metaphysical"
poetry,
very little of
which was published during his life.
Donne was born in London to a Roman Catholic family. He studied law and
theology at Oxford, and perhaps Cambridge, but he took no degree because his
Catholicism prevented him from swearing allegiance to a Protestant
queen.
Gradually, he leaned more and more toward Protestantism.
In 1598 he was made secretary to Sir
Thomas Edgerton. He fell in love with
Ann More, the daughter of Sir George
More, and married her secretly. In anger
Sir George had Donne fired from his
post, which ruined any future in public
service.
After ten years of extreme poverty,
Donne was ordained a minister of the
Church of England in 1615. He was
enormously successful, and in 1621 was
named Dean of St. Paul's Cathedral,
a
position he held until his death ten years
later. During this last phase of his life,
Donne wrote more than 160 sermons and
much religious poetry containing erotic
Imagery.
In 1623 Donne nearly died from
illness. ~'hen his health was restored,
he wrote Devotions, an account of his illness and recovery. Devotions
is comprised of t\venty-three
units, each of
which offers a Meditation,
Expostulation, and Prayer.
Shortly before his death,
Donne
preached his own funeral sermon and
went to bed. He ordered his portrait to be
painted on his shroud; he contemplated it
for se\'eral days before passing away on
March 31, 1631.
Donne's language and imagery concerning the ecstatic state are remarkably
similar to the writings of the great Spanish mystics, St. John of the Cross and St.
Teresa of Avila. Like them, Donne expresses the ecstatic union of the human
soul with God, often comparing it to love
154
between humans.
is The Extasie.
His best-known
work
Double
An apparition of a living person. Doubles
are exact replicas of persons, including
clothing, and often deceive witnesses with
their solid appearance. They usually are
seen in a location distant from the real
person. Some doubles act strangely or
mechanically.
The true nature and cause of the
double are not known. Popular occult
theory holds that doubles are projections
of an astral body. The projections may
happen involuntarily
or, in the case of
certain adepts, be accomplished
at will.
See Bilocation. The appearance
of doubles often is associated with the imminent
death of the person.
The double is known by various
names, including "Beta body," "subtle
body," "fluidic body," and "pre-physical
body." It is called a "fetch" in Irish and
English folklore. In Irish lore a fetch seen
in the morning is a portent of long life for
the individual, while a fetch seen in the
evening is an omen of impending death.
A German term for the double is doppleganger, which comes from an expression
meaning "double walker." In Sweden it is
called the vardager.
Beliefs about doubles exist in tribal
cultures. One widespread
Donne,
John (1572-1631)
Dowsing
Divination by using a forked rod, bent
wire, or pendulum to locate people, animals,
objects,
and
substances.
The
Dowsing
155
of the past
Dowsing Tools
Forked dowsing sticks usually are
made of hazel, ash, rowan, or willO\v,
and occasionally metal, whalebone,
and
plastic. Wands or bobbers are stripped
tree branches, stiff wires, or the ends of
fishing rods, which have been weighted
on one end. Angle rods are made of
metal.
Ordinary
coathangers
suffice,
though copper and aluminum ,vires are
said to be more responsive. In Europe the
rod has given way to the pendulum,
which is suspended on a string and rotates in response to questions or as a
dowser scans a map. The dowser usually
"tunes" the instrument by concentration
and visual images. Dowsers who locate
missing persons may first hold their instrument over a personal item belonging
to the person.
Some exceptionally
skilled dowsers
have learned how to dowse without a
tool. Uri Geller, the Israeli renowned for
his psychokinetic mental bending, learned
156
Dowsing as a Science
Dowsing was widely used until the
nineteenth
century, when scientists rejected it as superstition.
In the twentieth
century, dowsing made a comeback, especially in Europe and Great Britain,
where it has been used successfully in archaeological digs, the search for minerals,
and in medicine. During World War I,
dowsers helped locate mines, unexploded
shells, and buried mortars for the military.
The Abbe Alexis Mermet of France
believed in dowsing as a science as early
as 1906, an activity he documented in his
classic book, How I Proceed in the Dis-
Bouly
the British
Society
formed. International
of Dowsers
radiesthesia
was
con-
Dowsing
Dowsing
in Medicine
Dreams
1986): 7-11.
Power point.
Dreams
The meaning
of dreams has puzzled
humankind
since antiquity.
Everyone
dreams, regardless
of whether
or not
dreams are recalled upon awakening. The
overwhelming
majority of dreams deal
157
metaphorically
with issues, events, and
people in the life of the dreamer, and every element in a dream has significance to
the dreamer.
Some dreams are paranormal,
involving clairvoyance,
precognition,
and
telepathy (shared dreams) between two
or more people. Others are interpreted as
having past-life content. A still different
type is the lucid dream, in which the
dreamer is aware of the dream and in
some cases can direct its outcome.
158
references
to the
interpreta-
Dreams
Dreams
inner
terms
what
For
lives,
of inneeds
exam-
The Nature
of Dreams
159
Dreams
time
have provided
inspiration
immemorial.
Solutions
to
problems, ideas for inventions, and artistic expressions have found their way to
the conscious mind through dreams. For
example, artist and poet William Blake
found dreams to be a continuing source
of inspiration and artistic subjects, as did
Salvador Dali and other artists of the sur-
160
realistic
schools.
are harbingers
or barometers
of health
problems. Jung noted that when some patients dreamed of destruction of or injury
to horses- an archetypal symbol of the
animal life within the human body-they
subsequently
were shown to be in the
early stages of serious illness, such as cancer. A 1987 study by Dr. Robert Smith of
Michigan State University showed that
cardiac patients who dreamed of destruction, mutilation,
and death had worse
heart disease than those who did not. The
dreams worsened as did the conditions,
despite the fact that the patients did not
know the severity of their disease.
Dreams also sometimes serve as a
way to prepare an individual for death.
Terminally
ill patients sometimes have
transitional
dreams,
such as entering
beautiful gardens, crossing bridges, or
walking through doorways, which occur
shortly before death and which often
bring peace of mind.
Paranormal Dreams
Dreams universally have been seen
as sometimes having prophetic content.
Seeing into the future through dreams
customarily has been the province of the
priest, shaman, or diviner. Various folklore techniques
also exist for inducing
precognitive dreams, though most are of
dubious value. Precognitive dreams may
occur once or twice during an individual's life, or not at all; some people, especially those who exhibit other psychic talents, seem to have frequent precognitive
dreams. See Precognition.
Precognitive
dreams, which the dreamer eventually
learns to discern from ordinary dreams,
may be accompanied
by certain symbols
or emotions.
Dreams
ill
tific demonstrations
of telepathy
dreams, the most famous of which was
research conducted
from 1962-74 by
Montague Ullman, Stanley Krippner, and
others at the Dream Laboratory
of the
Maimonides Medical Center in Brooklyn,
New York. When subjects were in REM
stages, a person in another room attempted to telepathically
transmit a target art image, usually depicting people
and archetypal in character. The subjects
\vere then a\vakened and asked to describe their dreams. The next day they
were sho\vn several possible targets and
asked to rank them in terms of matching
the content and emotions of their dreams.
In some cases the dream correspondences
would occur one to two days after the
target had been transmitted.
Overall, the
correlation of dream images to target im-
Dreams
Lucid Dreams
In a lucid dream, the dreamer is
aware of the fact that he or she is dreaming. Lucid dreams occur during REM
stages. Nearly everyone has at least one
lucid dream, and a very few people dream
161
lucidly often. Aristotle, in the fourth century B.C., mentioned the existence of lucid
dreaming. The earliest extant written account of a lucid dream (in Western history) is contained in a letter written in
415 by St. Augustine, who described the
lucid dream of a Carthaginian
physician,
Gennadius. Lucid dreams have been ignored by many dream researchers, or dismissed as impossible. Some researchers,
hmvever, feel lucid dreams hold great potential as creativity and healing tools.
There are varying degrees of lucidity
in dreams.
At the lowest level, one
awakes from a realistic dream and realizes it \vas a dream, not reality. At the
highest level, one is aware of the dream
as it takes place, and can influence its
course and outcome. The form taken by a
lucid dream seems to mirror the dreamer's mental state. The initiation of awareness of dreaming can be triggered by various factors, such as the stress of a
nightmare,
incongruous
elements, or a
spontaneous
recognition that the reality
is different from waking reality. Generally, lucid dreams are characterized
by
light (sometimes
very bright), intense
emotions, heightened colors and images,
flying or levitation, and a sense of liberation or exhilaration.
Some are almost
mystical in nature. Sex plays a prominent
role in lucid dreams,
especially
for
women.
Interest in lucid dream research was
piqued in the late 1960s by the now classic study by British researcher Celia E.
Green. Subsequent work in the 1970s and
1980s by British parapsychologist
Keith
Hearne, and by the American researchers
Ann Faraday, Patricia Garfield, and Stephen LaBerge, among others, sustained
this interest.
been
162
control
over their
Dreams
Drop-in communicator
A strange entity, unknown to both medium and sitters, who manifests unexpectedly at a seance. Drop-in communicators
have
been studied
by some
psychical researchers since the late nineteenth century as possible evidence that
seance spirits are real and not constructs
from the medium's
subconscious,
and
that the information
they provide does
not come from telepathy or super-ESP on
the part of the medium. The ideal drop-in
provides information that has never been
in print in a public source, and which is
known to (and can be verified by) only a
small number of people.
Most drop-in cases, hoviever, are inconclusive,
with drop-ins
manifesting
only once or twice and giving insufficient
information
to verify their identities.
Nonetheless,
the majority
of drop-ins
seem to have motives for manifestingsometimes
nothing more than to talk
about themselves, as though they were
lonely.
One famous drop-in with a mission
was the case of Runolfur
Runolfsson,
who dropped
in on medium Hafstein
Bjornsson in 1937 and identified himself
as a rough, hard-drinking
Icelander who
had died in 1879 at age fifty-tvvo. Over
the course of several sittings, Runolfsson
said he wanted to find his missing leg
bone. He said he had gotten drunk,
Drop-in
communicator
Worth,
Patience;
Xeno-
163
164
Drop-in
communicator
Drugs in mystical
and psychic
experiences
Mescaline takers feel they can remember and "think straight," but visual
images are intensified, particularly colors,
which appear to be supernaturally
brilliant. Interest in space and time drop dramatically, and the taker loses interest in
doing much of anything save drinking in
the Being and "is-ness" of everything.
The high lasts eight to ten hours. Mescaline apparently creates no physical dependency. "Bad trips," or negative experiences, are most likely to happen
to
individuals who are prone to depression
or anxiety, or who suffer from jaundice.
Huxley, who later took LSD, became
an advocate of drugs as a doorway to visionary or perhaps even mystical experiences. He said hallucinogenic
drugs
served to enlarge the "reducing valve" in
the brain and nervous system, which prevents the mind from being overloaded by
constant cosmic awareness, the Mind at
Large. See Huxley, Aldous.
LSD was discovered in 1943. Albert
Hoffman, a Swiss chemist, was working
with a derivative of lysergic acid, an active ingredient in the ergot fungus of rye,
and began to hallucinate after absorbing
it through his skin. By 1947 LSD was receiving worldwide publicity. In the late
1950s, it came to the attention of Timothy Leary, a psychologist on the faculty
of Harvard University who was experimenting with psilocybin. Working with
Richard Alpert (later Ram Dass) and others, Leary became one of the foremost advocates of LSD, viewing it as a cure for
society's ills. See Leary, Timothy; Ram
Dass.
Publicity about bad trips and uncontrollable flashbacks
led the Food and
Drug Administration
to severely restrict
access to LSD to only selected researchers
in 1963.
In the 1960s Robert Masters and
Jean Houston
conducted
LSD experiments. In Varieties of Psychedelic Experiences (1966), they identified four levels
in the unconscious
reached during LSD
165
166
birth (and
is closely
in which
time and
Peak experiTobacco.
Drugs in mystical
and psychic
experiences
Druids
The priestly caste of the Celts, a Germanic tribe that spread out over much of
Europe, the British Isles, and parts of
Asia Minor in the sixth and fifth centuries B.C. Not much is known about the
Druids,
modern
century B.C. to the fourth century A.D.the Romans, including Julius Caesar, perhaps from a biased point of view. Other
knowledge has come from archaeological
digs.
Druid means
"knowing
the oak
tree" in Gaelic; the robur oak was sacred
to the Celts. The exact role and purpose
of the Druids in Celtic society is uncertain, and many theories have been advanced over the centuries.
They have
been equated with the Persian Magi and
the Hindu Brahmins. Some controversial
modern
Druids
theories
hold
that
they were a
167
168
Druids
Druids
169
E
Earth lights (also ghost lights,
spook lights)
Mysterious
luminous
phenomena
seen
around the world, including more than
one hundred sites throughout
the United
States and others in Britain, Japan, and
else\vhere. Earth lights are inexplicable
balls or patches of light reported to have
been seen in remote areas, often near
power lines, transmitter
towers, mountain peaks, isolated buildings, roads, and
railway lines. Neither marsh gas nor artificiallights,
most earth lights are yellow
or white, while others are red, orange, or
blue. The lights may change color as they
are observed. They appear randomly or
regularly at particular
sites, \'arying in
size and configuration,
and may be "active" for years. Some appear and become
"inactive" after short periods of time.
Researchers
have identified several
common characteristics
of earth lights:
The lights appear only in remote areas; (2) the lights are elusi\'e, and the
viewer must be at the proper distance and
angle to see them; (3) the lights react to
noise and light, such as from flashlights
or car headlights,
by receding into the
distance or disappearing
altogether;
(4)
the lights are often accompanied by outbreaks of gaseous materials;
observers
frequently report a buzzing or humming
sound in the vicinity of the sightings.
Perhaps the most famous earth lights
are the .;vlarfa lights, named after .;vlarfa,
170
intense,
multicolored
been reported
in the
of North Carolina. In
from the United States
Geological Survey dismissed the phenomenon as nothing more than train lights.
Yet the lights continued to appear even
after a flood later that year disrupted
train service to that region for several
weeks.
Not all reported
earth
anomalies.
Some have been
lights are
shown to
have natural
explanations,
most commonly car headlights.
The anomalies
lights)
ECKANKAR
prominent role in at least one controversial study that suggests energy given off
by the lights could spark changes in the
brain that might lead some individuals to
imagine they've had an encounter with a
UFO. In laboratory experiments electromagnetism has been shown to affect the
brain's hippocampus region, causing a
subject to undergo an altered state of
consciousness. Researchers have been
able to duplicate the same kinds of visions and bodily sensations experienced
by people who claim to have come in
contact with extraterrestrials.
Sources: Paul Devereux. Earth Lights Revelation. London: Blandford Press, 1990;
Paul Devereux. Earthmind. New York:
Harper
New York:
Bantam Doubleday Dell, 1989.
True Tales of the Uninvited.
Earth mysteries
See Dowsing; Earth lights; Leys; Megaliths; Planetary consciousness; Power
point.
ECKANKAR~'
Religious movement founded in 1965 by
the late Paul Twitchell, dedicated to presenting the teachings of ECK. ECK is the
Holy Spirit, the life force, the "Audible
Life Current" that sustains all life, and
which manifests in light and sound. ECKANKAR headquarters are in Minneapolis, Minnesota, with followers in approximately one hundred countries.
ECKANKAR involves the study of
Spirit in the lower worlds of marrer, energy, space, and time. According to
Twitchell, the 971st Living ECK Master,
it is older than all religions on Earth, and
traces of it can be found in most spiritual
teachings. It was formerly a secret path to
'The terms ECKANKAR, ECK, Mahanta, and Soul Travel are trademarks of
ECKANKAR.
171
172
ECKANKAR
ECKANKAR
Soul Travel
Soul Travel, according to ECKANKAR, is the soul's journey home to God,
an upliftment into ecstatic states of consciousness. The ability to leave the physical body at will and travel into the spiritual realms is taught to all ECKists.
Twitchell preferred the term "Soul
Travel" over "bilocation," which he felt
sounded too much like astral projection
(deemed harmful) and did not express the
breadth and depth of ECKANKAR.
According to ECKANKAR the soul
is sheathed in protective bodies. The
ECKist travels in the Atma Sarup, the
soul body. The travel is done in the four
spirito-materialistic planes below the soul
plane: physical, astral, causal, and mental. Soul Travel may be done alone, but it
is preferable to be accompanied by a spiritual master who has attained the soul
plane and is living-that is, the Living
ECK Master.
173
ECKANKAR:
An Introduction.
Eckhart, Johannes
(c. 1260-1327)
Dominican
theologian
and mystic,
founder of "German mysticism." Johannes Eckhart is known generally as
"Meister Eckhart" or simply "Meister"
(Master). He is considered the most important medieval German mystic, and
one of the most important figures in
Christian mysticism.
Eckhart is said to have been born in
Hockheim in Thuringia; no exact records
of his date and place of birth exist. At
about age fifteen, he joined the Dominican Order at Erfurt, where his exceptional abilities were recognized, and he
was eventually sent to the Dominican
Higher School in Cologne to study theology. There it is likely that he heard
Thomas Aquinas and Alberrns Magnus,
who had a profound influence on the development of his mystical philosophy.
Eckhart also was greatly influenced by
Plotinus, Dionysius the Areopagite, Au-
174
gustine, and Erigena. He returned to Erfurt, and sometime between 1290 and
1298 was named prior.
He attended the University of Paris
in 1300, and in 1302 received the title of
Meister of Theology. The following year
he was elected the first Provincial-Prior of
the Dominican Order for Saxony (most
of northern Germany and Holland). In
1307 he also became Vicar-General of
Bohemia and was given the task of ridding the area of its notoriously lax ways
and heretical views. The problems were
compounded by the animosity between
the Dominican and Franciscan orders.
In 1311 Eckhart returned to Paris,
and in 1314 went to Strasbourg, where
he launched his brilliant career as a
preacher and teacher. He was enormously popular and drew large audiences, to whom he preached in their own
language, not in Latin. He coined many
philosophical and theological words. He
was a prolific writer, composing in Latin.
At around 1322 he went to Cologne.
On September 26, 1326, Eckhart
was formally accused of heresy, in part
because he was one of many victims of
the political turmoil between Louis IV of
Bavaria and Pope John XXII, and the difficulties between the Dominicans and
Franciscans. The king disputed the election of the pope, who in turn excommunicated him. The dispute provided on opportunity for the Archbishop of Cologne,
a Franciscan, to drive out Dominicans
and bring them up before the Inquisition.
Eckhart was found guilty of nearly
one hundred counts of heresy; his teachings were said to be dangerous to the
common people in their own tongue.
Though technically not answerable to the
Archbishop of Cologne, Eckhart felt
obliged to defend himself and his order
and submitted to a trial. The ill-informed
judges were no match for him, but the
trial dragged on for nearly a year. Eckhart appealed to Pope John XXII, who
ordered the documents in question to be
ECKANKAR
Eckhart's Theology
Eckhart's theology is complex. The
type of mysticism Eckhart taught is called
"speculative" or "essential." He affirmed
God as the "I am that I am" of the Old
Testament, and distinguished between the
Godhead and God. Godhead is "beingness," and God is creation, the "becoming" of all things. God can be born in and
fill the soul, which in turn reflects the divine back to God while retaining its own
identity. Mystical union between the God
and the soul is achieved in the soul's
depths, from where emanates a spark that
unites the t\VOwhile leaving them separate. The spark, said Eckhart, is indestructible, transcends time and space, and
is the seat of conscience.
Eckhart saw the underlying, unbroken unity of all things existing in an everpresent Now, concepts found in Eastern
mysticism and more recently in quantum
physics. He said the soul is troubled by
perceiving created things as separate. Instead, one must awaken to "Absolute
Seeing," in which all things are appreciated simply for their "beingness" and not
projected upon with our own thoughts.
He emphasized the need to become one
with whatever occurs at the moment.
Eckhart was not impressed with
good works. What matters, he said, is the
inner attitude. Detachment was a fundamental theme of Eckhart's preaching, appearing everywhere in his works. "You
must know that to be empty of all created
things is to be full of God, and to be full
of created things is to be empty of God,"
he wrote in a short treatise, On Detachment. Thus the soul can only receive God
when it is emptied. Eckhart emphasized
an inner detachment, even from external
religious exercises. Those who are "attached to their penances and external exercises" cannot understand Divine truth,
he said in Sermon 52.
Another of his fundamental concepts, and among the most controversial,
175
176
Ecstasy
The psycho-physical
condition that accompanies the apprehension
of what one
experiences as the ultimate reality. The
ultimate reality may differ, as for Indian
mystics and Christian saints, for example.
Yet, as psychical researcher Frederic W.
H. Myers observed, "the evidence for ecstasy is stronger than the evidence for any
other religious belief" (Human Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death,
1903).
Religious ecstasy, such as discussed
by the mystic-theologians,
including Augustine, Thomas Aquinas, and Meister
Eckhart, may be the experience of that
which is presumed by faith to be an anticipating of the beatific vision-the
ultimate and everlasting experience of being
in the presence of God. Typically, there is
a sudden, heightened inner consciousness
of stillness and peace, a loss of sense of
self, and an identification
with God and
all things. Such ultimate religious experience may be best described by the mystic
poets, exemplified by William Blake. See
Blake, William. Related also is the "quietness of the soul" described by the great
Spanish mystics John of the Cross and
Teresa de Avila, and Italian mystic Catherine of Siena, although they often experienced also the "dark night of the soul."
See John of the Cross, St.
The state of ecstasy feels timeless.
One may believe the state endures a long
time, though usually it lasts less than half
an hour; some recorded ecstasies allegedly have lasted several days. The longest
on record is an astonishing
thirty-five
years, claimed by a Tyrolean woman,
Maria von Moerl (1812-1868).
In her book Mysticism (1955), Evelyn Underhill describes three distinct aspects under which the ecstatic state may
be studied: the physical, the psychological, and the mystical. She comments that
many of the misunderstandings
that surround the topic come from the refusal of
Eckhart,
Johannes
(c. 1260-1327)
the
Psychology
of Joy
Ecstasy
177
Ectoplasm
A white, fluidic substance said to emanate from the bodily orifices of a medium
that is molded by spirits to assume phantom physical shapes. Substances purported to be ectoplasm have been photographed, but the existence of the
substance has never been proven. It once
was a frequent characteristic of Spiritualist seances.
According to some mediums, ectoplasm is exuded only under certain conditions, such as in trance states during a
seance. It is damaged by exposure to
light, a reason given why seances are held
in dark or dimly lit rooms.
Ectoplasm supposedly manifests as a
solidified white mist and has a peculiar
smell. In some cases the smell may be due
to chemical trickery. "Ectoplasm" can be
created from a mixture of soap, gelatin,
and egg white, which, when blown into
the air, shimmers and glows in bubble-
178
Ecstasy
like forms. Another recipe calls for toothpaste and peroxide. A common trick
among fraudulent mediums in the late
nineteenth century was to use muslin.
Nevertheless, many witnesses have
testified to the actuality of ectoplasm.
The most common manifestation of ectoplasm at early Spiritualist seances was
phantom hands, called pseudopods,
which shook the hands of sitters and felt
icy to the touch. Ectoplasm was the subject of extensive studies by psychical researchers well into the twentieth century.
It is not a phenomenon of channeling. See
Home, Daniel Dunglas; Materialization.
Sources: Richard Cavendish, ed. The Encyclopedia of the Unexplained. New York:
bridge, England:
Press, 1985.
Cambridge University
Electronic
voice phenomenon
179
phenomenon.
Ellis concluded
that the
voices most likely were a natural phenomenon. He said the interpretation
of
the sounds was highly subjective and was
susceptible to imagination.
Raudive, who died on September 2,
1974, expressed no particular theory. At
the time of his death, he was studying a
parakeet that apparently had begun uttering meaningful sentences in German,
in a manner characteristic of the Raudive
voices.
Research into the electronic voice
phenomenon
continues by various individuals
and
groups.
The
American
Association-Electronic
Voice Phenomena,
founded in 1982 by Sarah Estep, has
more than two hundred
members
in
thirty-four states in the United States and
eleven foreign countries. The association
calls itself "a metaphysical
organization
interested in spiritual evolvement as well
as all genuine evidence for postmortem
survival," and focuses on "objective contact with those in other dimensions
through tape recorders, televisions, and
computers." See also Phone calls from the
dead.
Sources: Peter Bander. Carry On Talking:
How Dead Are the Voices? Gerrards Cross,
England: Colin Smythe Ltd., 1972; Peter
Bander. Voices from the Tapes: Recording
from the Other World. New York: Drake
Publishers, 1973; Raymond Bayless. "Correspondence." The Journal of the American
Society for Psychical Research 53, no. 1
(January 1959): 35-38; D. J. Ellis. The Mediumship of the Tape Recorder. Pulborough, England: Self-published, 1978; Alan
Gauld. Mediumship and Survival. London:
William Heinemann Ltd., 1982; Edgar D.
Mitchell. Psychic Exploration: A Challenge
for Science. Edited by John White. New
York: Paragon Books, 1974; Sheila Ostrander and Lynn Schroeder. Handbook of
Psi Discoveries. New York: Berkley, 1974;
Konstantin
Raudive. Breakthrough:
An
Amazing Experiment in Electronic Communication with the Dead. New York:
Taplinger, 1971.
180
Elementals
See Nature
spirits.
Emmanuel
See Channeling.
Empathy
Tuning in on an intuitive or psychic level
to the emotions, moods, and attitudes of
a person, group of people, or animals.
Empathy is neither entirely conscious nor
entirely unconscious, but falls in between.
It apparently
involves psi phenomena
such as the telepathic
transmission
of
feelings and thoughts,
sometimes
over
long distances. Empathy in face-to-face
situations may be derived in part from an
unconscious
reading of muscular movements and tension.
Empaths are particularly susceptible
to feelings of suffering and distress. The
physical ills of another may manifest in
the empath's own body in the same place,
while emotional disturbances may manifest as depression. These conditions are
picked up from places as well as people.
For example, an empath may walk into a
church and sense the suffering of all the
people who have corne to the church for
solace: the church itself may seem to cry.
Some empaths can sense illness and disease in another before the other person is
aware of the problem, as in cases of cancer. These empathetic experiences are not
the same as psychometry, which requires
touching objects to gain impressions, or
with Therapeutic Touch, a type of medical diagnosis done by scanning one's
aura with the hands.
Empaths may sense death at a distance, sometimes before it occurs. The
sensations may involve the afflicted part
of the body; an empath may feel chest
pain concerning a person who is about to
die of a heart attack. Empathy at a dis-
Electronic
voice phenomenon
tance is most likely to occur between people who have close emotional ties. Twins
are particularly noted for empathetic or
sympathetic links, and mothers often are
empathetic with their children.
Some empaths find that in addition
to sensing emotions, they absorb them
like sponges. The impact can be devastating in the encounter of distress and depression, sometimes leaving an empath
drained of energy.
Cases have been documented of animals exhibiting empathy at a distance.
Pets sense when their owners are in trouble or have been injured or killed, and
become agitated or depressed. Pets also
sense when something happens at a distance to another animal in the household.
Research indicates that animals retain an
empathetic link to their offspring, parents, and litter mates. See Animal psi;
Clairsentience; Psychic attack.
Sources: Isaac Bonewits. Real Magic. Rev.
ed. York Beach, ME: Samuel Weiser, 1989;
Craig Junjulas. Psychic Tarot. Dobbs Ferry,
NY: Morgan & Morgan, 1985; Sheila Ostrander and Lynn Schroeder. The ESP Papers: Scientists Speak Out from Behind the
Iron Curtain. New York: Bantam Books,
1976; D. Scott Rogo. Psychic Breakthroughs Today. Wellingborough, Nonh-
Encounter phenomenon
Anyone of a wide range of experiences
involving alternate realities and nonphysical beings, as found in folklore, mythology, mysticism, shamanism, parapsychology, and psychology. Seemingly disparate
encounters-such
as visions of angels,
possession, channeling of entities, religious conversions, shamanic journeys,
near-death experiences (l\<1)Es),and UFO
abductions-share some common characteristics. Various theories have been put
Encounter
phenomenon
181
182
Encounter phenomenon
The matter
of survival
after
death
The "Encounter-Prone
Personality"
Research
Enlightenment
See Mystical
experiences;
Mysticism.
ESP (extrasensory
perception)
Enneagram
See Gurdjieff,
Georgei Ivanovitch.
Erhard, Werner
See est.
Erlendur, Haraldsson
See Deathbed
visions;
Sai Baba.
183
New
Frontiers
of
the
Mind
184
of ESP
ESP (extrasensory
perception)
Forms of ESP
How information from the second
reality reaches the conscious mind depends upon the following: the conditions
that exist at the moment the information
becomes available; the natural ~oclivities for ESP in the individual; and the colorations and distortions created by prejudices, thoughts, and conditionings. In a
study of 10,000 cases involving ESP, the
findings of which were published in
1963, Louisa E. Rhine divided ESP into
four basic forms: realistic dreams (39 percent); intuition (30 percent); unrealistic
dreams (18 percent); and hallucinations
(13 percent). Realistic dreams contain
vivid, detailed imagery of the information
conveyed. Intuition includes "gut feelings," forebodings, and premonitions.
Unrealistic dreams contain fantastical imagery and symbols. Hallucinations include visual and auditory sensations that
relay information. Rhine suggested that
dreams may be the most efficient carriers
of ESP messages, because in sleep the barriers to the conscious mind appear to be
thinnest.
185
+\ ~ ~~
..\~, '0\'\:_\-\\ -
0...
-\U\. ~~~
<Vr 'VIII
0..-'1A..~0\\ .
ESP
cards
186
ESP cards
and precognition. The cards are occasionally used in the lab, but they have virtually been replaced by the computer.
Before an experiment the cards are
thoroughly shuffled. In a telepathy test, a
tester goes through the deck, concentrating on each symbol one at a time; the
subject, or percipient, writes down the
symbols as they are perceived. In clairvoyance a tester picks cards out of the
pack face down and places them down;
the percipient records the hidden symbols
as they are perceived. In precognition the
percipient attempts to name the cards in
order before they are shuffled by the
sender.
Going through the entire deck constitutes a "run." The score is measured
against mean chance expectation (MCE);
a percipient may be expected to hit one
out of five correctly.
Precautions
are
taken to guard against fraud and accidental invalidation
by sealing the cards in
opaque containers or envelopes and placing the tester and percipient in separate
rooms, sometimes separate buildings.
ESP cards were first used in 1930 at
Duke University in North Carolina. They
were created by two Duke faculty members, ]. B. Rhine and Karl Zener, as a
simplification
of psi tests using regular
playing cards. As early as 1884, such tests
had been conducted
by Dr. Charles
Richet of France, and others.
By 1932, after exhaustive
testing,
Rhine found eight subjects who consis-
ESP (extrasensory
perception)
Essenes
Essenes
Members of an ascetic sect, Jewish in heritage, most of whom lived in the Qumran
settlement on the western shore of the
Dead Sea during the century before and
the century after the birth of Jesus. Modern interest in them is due mainly to the
discovery in the Qumran caves in the
1940s of the documents popularly called
the Dead Sea Scrolls.
Modern research on the Essenes in
general and the Qumran community in
particular is based not only on the Dead
Sea Scrolls, but also on the writings of
first-century historians, including Philo
of Alexandria. According to these descriptions, the Essenes were a peaceful,
primarily religious community of about
four thousand members who shared their
possessions. Their livelihood centered on
agriculture and handicrafts. They rejected
slavery and believed in the immortality of
the soul. After two to three years of preparation, each person took an oath of piety, justice, and truthfulness.
The community had a regular schedule of solemn meals, prayer, and study,
especially on the Sabbath. There was a
central teacher and titles for various officeholders. The central group opposed
marriage. Transgressors were excluded.
Because of the similarity of these
practices and those of the early Christian
communities, the assumption often is
made that there was some relationship
between the two. It has even been proposed that some members followed John
the Baptist or even became, or were also,
187
St.;
188
Essenes
Evil eye
of est, by
1984.
Etheric body
See Aura; Healing, faith and psychic.
Evil eye
An ancient and nearly universal belief
that certain individuals possess the supernatural power to wreak disaster, calamity, illness, and even death with a glance
or lingering look. The evil eye, also called
"fascination," "overlooking," mal occhio, and jettatura, is greatly feared in
many parts of the world.
189
190
The death-dealing
evil eye is possessed by various tribal shamans
and
witch doctors, and appears frequently in
Native American folklore. The fatal look
may be used in conjunction
with the
pointing of the shaman's finger, stick, or
wand,
which
sends negative
energy
streaming toward the victim. See Eye of
Horus; Psychic attack.
Sources: James Bonwick. Irish Druids and
Old Irish Religions. 1894. Reprint. Dorset
Press, 1986. E. A. Wallis Budge. Amulets
and Superstitions. 1930. New York: Dover
Publications,
1978; Lawrence Di Stasti.
Mal Occhio/The Underside of Vision. San
Francisco: North Point Press, 1981; Martin
Ebon. Psychic Warfare: Threat or Illusion?
New York: McGraw-Hill, 1983; Frederick
Thomas Elworthy. The Evil Eye. 1895. Secaucus, NJ: University Books/Citadel Press,
1987; Douglas Hill and Pat Williams. The
Supernatural. London: Aldus Books, 1965;
Maria Leach, ed., and Jerome Fried, assoc.
ed. Funk & Wagnalls Standard Dictionary
of Folklore, Mythology, and Legend. San
Francisco: Harper & Row, 1979.
Exorcism
The expulsion of troublesome or evil spirits, ghosts, demons, or other nonphysical
entities. Exorcism rites exist universally,
and their use is common in many societies where spirits are believed to interfere
frequently in earthly affairs, causing illness, bad luck, and disasters. Exorcisms
are performed by the appropriate, trained
individual, usually a religious official or
magical or occult adept. Western psychologists and psychiatrists also perform
a sort of exorcism in the treatment of patients who feel taken over by alien and
external personalities.
"Exorcism"
derives from the Greek
exousia, "oath," and refers to "putting
the spirit or demon on oath," or invoking
a higher authority to bind the entity and
compel it to act in a way contrary to its
wishes.
Evil eye
Exorcism
191
smoke, pressing rock salt between the fingers, burning pig excreta, beating the victim or pulling the victim's hair, using
copper coins as an offering, reciting
prayers or mantras, and offering gifts of
candy or other presents.
In some shamanic traditions, it is believed that demons or spirits cause maladies and misfortune by stealing souls. The
shaman enters an ecstatic trance to search
for and recover the soul and drive the demon out.
See Depossession; Feng shui; Possession; Shamanism; Watseka possession.
Sources: Julio Caro Baroja. The World of
the Witches. Chicago: The University of
of the Unexplained.
Experimenter effect
In laboratory tests for psi, the unwitting
psychic influence of the experimenter
upon the subject, thereby influencing the
results to fit the expectations of the ex-
192
Exorcism
Extraterrestrial
encounters
Extraterrestrial encounters
Various psychic, paranormal, and mysterious phenomena are reported in conjunction with alleged sightings of, or encounters with, extraterrestrial spacecraft
and beings. Extraterrestrial (ET) encounters are a global phenomenon and may
have been taking place over millennia.
See Ancient astronauts, theory of. As a
social phenomenon ET encounters are as
significant as encounters with the Devil
during the witchcraft hysteria of the Middle Ages and Renaissance, and reported
sightings of the Virgin Mary. There has
been virtually no scientific investigation
of ETs, however; most scientists take a
highly skeptical stance on the subject, as
do government agencies.
The age of modern interest in ETs
began in 1947. On June 26 a Boise,
Idaho, businessman and pilot, Kenneth
Arnold, sighted a chain of nine bright objects while flying over the Cascade Mountains in Washington. He estimated their
speed to be at 1,600 miles per hour. Arnold said the objects' motion resembled
saucers that had been skipped over water,
which gave rise to the popular term "flying saucer" to describe unidentified flying
objects (UFOs). The famous "Roswell incident" also occurred in 1947. Three
UFOs reportedly crashed near Roswell,
New Mexico. The United States government claimed the crash was a weather
balloon. Although witnesses years later
claimed to have seen the bodies of alien
beings, the incident remains inconclusive.
Since these incidents an estimated
70,000 sightings and encounters have
been reported-probably
but a small
fraction of the actual number. Approximately 95 percent of the cases have been
explained by natural phenomena, aircraft, weather balloons, or hoaxes. The
193
194
Extraterrestrial encounters
Paranormal Phenomena
Some eyewitnesses assert that prior
to their encounter they acquired or enhanced existing psychic abilities that
helped to bring about their encounter, or
to perceive certain of its aspects, or to
communicate telepathically with the ETs.
Other eyewitnesses claim that psychic or
healing abilities manifested after the encounter. The rays of light that emanate
from the spacecraft sometimes have been
said to be the source of healing powers.
Witnesses have claimed that old or recent
wounds healed shortly after an encounter. Many encounters are characterized
by a hypnotic-like trance before, during,
and after the episode. Some witnesses feel
compelled to make the contact by going
to a certain location or looking out their
window. The compulsion may be a physical sensation, like a tingling or a vibrating, or clairaudient voices, or some sort
of telepathic command. There may be accompanying strange noises or poltergeist
effects, or unusual behavior among animals.
At contact the witness is often
bathed in light from the spacecraft. If the
witness sees alien beings, there may be
communication, either in the witness's
own language or by telepathy.
Witnesses who are abducted typically have no recollection of the details,
only missing time. Details are recovered
under hypnosis. Witnesses then recall being levitated, some in their cars, aboard
spacecraft, or floating or flying into the
ship. Some are transported to remote locations in wooded areas. After abduction
they are subjected to pulsating lights and
a physical examination; some report sexual intercourse with the aliens or surgery
for the implantation of devices. The ETs
try to soothe the witnesses, who feel uncomfortable but not terrified. Witnesses
may be given a weighty message to impart to other human beings, or warned
not to remember or speak of their experience. Some witnesses claim to have been
Extraterrestrial encounters
Aftermath
An encounter or abduction generates
real emotional stress that continues to act
on the person long after the event. Repercussions may include nightmares, anxieties, or depressions, as well as physiological changes. Many witnesses feel
transformed and effect major changes in
their life-styles, such as adopting a vegetarian diet or becoming active in environmental concerns. Some begin preaching
new versions of the age-old messages of
impending doom unless greedy humans
change their ways.
The "encounter theories" view of ET
encounters as a psychological projection,
perhaps in response to a mass yearning to
raise the consciousness of humankind,
has credence. Many ET encounters fit a
pattern of encounters with supernatural
and divine beings throughout history.
Furthermore, modern research shows
that ET encounters tend to fit a psychological profile called the "encounterprone personality." See Encounter phenomenon.
Many descriptions of ETs resemble
those of sick and starving children-small
beings with enlarged heads, big eyes, and
spindly limbs, as portrayed in Steven
Spielberg's film, Close Encounters of the
Third Kind. Philosopher Michael Grosso
suggests that ETs are mythical projections of the Child archetype, who in myth
is the bearer of extraordinary powers, the
harbinger of the future, and always under
threat. ETs, then, may be symptoms of a
195
Eyeless vision
The perception of images and colors
through the skin, especially in touching
with the fingers. Other terms for eyeless
vision are "skin reading," "skin vision,"
and "derma-optics"; the French call it
"para-optic ability" and the Soviets call it
"bio-introscopy." Eyeless vision mayor
196
Extraterrestrial
encounters
Eye of Horus
One of the most common amulets of ancient Egypt. The highly stylized eye of the
falcon-headed solar and sky god Horus
(the Latin version of Hor) is associated
with regeneration, health, and prosperity.
It has become commonly associated with
esoteric a and the occult. It is also called
the udjat eye or utchat eye, which means
"sound eye."
Horus, the son of Osiris and Isis,
was called "Horus who rules with two
eyes." His right eye was white and represented the sun; his left eye was black
and represented the moon. According to
myth Horus lost his left eye to his evil
brother, Seth, whom he fought to avenge
Seth's murder of Osiris. Seth tore out the
eye but lost the fight. The eye was reassembled by magic by Thoth, the god of
writing, the moon, and magic. Horus presented his eye to Osiris, who experienced
rebirth in the underworld.
As an amulet the Eye of Horus has
three versions: a left eye, a right eye, and
two eyes. The eye is constructed in fractional parts, with 1/64 missing, a piece
Thoth added by magic. The symbol of
modern pharmacies and prescriptions, :ijc,
is derived from three pieces of the Eye of
Horus.
The Egyptians used the eye as a funerary amulet for protection against evil
and rebirth in the underworld, and decorated mummies, coffins, and tombs with
it. The Book of the Dead instructs that
funerary eye amulets be made out of lapis
lazuli or a stone called mak. Some were
gold-plated.
Worn as jewelry fashioned of gold,
silver, lapis, wood, porcelain, or carnelian, the eye served to ensure safety, pro-
Eye of Horus
Eye of Horus
of Mythology.
197
F
Fairies
A wide variety of supernatural beings
that help or harm humankind. Fairy beliefs are widespread and similar, and are
strongest in the Celtic lore of Britain, Ireland, and Europe. Fairy lore may have
originated to explain bad luck, natural disasters, epidemics, birth defects, and child
illnesses and death.
The word "fairy" derives from the
Latin fata, or fate, which refers to the
mythical Fates, three women who spin
and control the threads of life. An archaic
English term for fairies is fays, which
means "enchanted" or "bewitched."
The main theories about the origins
of fairies propose that they are: (1) unbaptized, earthbound souls; (2) guardians
of the souls of the dead; (3) ghosts of venerated ancestors; (4) Lucifer's fallen angels, condemned to remain on earth; (5)
nature spirits; or (6) small human beings.
Medieval romances portrayed fairies
as little humans who intermarried with
nonfairy people. These stories may refer
to diminutive races such as the Lapps or
Picts, who were pushed into isolation in
woodlands or were pressed into servitude
by the Celts and other larger races.
Fairies are said to possess magical
powers and consort with witches and
other magically empowered humans.
They have many names and come in all
manner of sizes, descriptions of beauty or
198
Fairies
Norton & Co., Inc., 1976; Geoffrey Hodson. Fairies at Work and Play. 1925. London: Theosophical Publishing House,
1982; Maria Leach, ed., and Jerome Fried,
assoc. ed. Funk & Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of Folklore, Mythology, and Legend. San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1979;
Dora Van Gelder. The Real World of Fairies. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing
House, 1977.
Fairy tales
Park, NY: University Books, 1971; Ormond McGill. The Mysticism and Magic of
India. Cranbury, NJ: A. S. Barnes & Co.,
1977.
See Mythology.
Fakir
In India a type of holy man who allegedly
performs magical, miraculous, or paranormal feats. Many fakir tricks are conjurations done with cleverly disguised
props and quick sleight of hand. Such
tricks include conjuring scalding water
into a seemingly empty brass bowl (the
199
200
Fatima
See Marian apparitions.
Feldenkrais Technique
See Bodywork.
Feng shui
An ancient and complex Chinese art that
combines mysticism, science, and superstition to determine health, luck, and
prosperity according to natural landscapes and the placement of dwellings,
buildings, and graves. In the West feng
shui is sometimes alternately called "geomaney," which is divination by the earth
and is not precisely the equivalent of feng
shui.
Feng shui translates as "wind" and
"water." Its fundamental concept is that
in order to be healthy and prosper, one
must be in harmony with the earth and
receive the benefit of ch'i, the universal
life principle, which exists in all things
and flows through the earth and nature.
The yin (female) and yang (male) components of ch'i must be in balance. The flow
of ch'i and the yin-yang balance are affected by contours of the landscape, the
presence or absence of water and vegetation, the weather conditions, and the sitings and shapes of buildings and the
Feng shui
201
202
Fetish
An object representing spirits that is used
to create a bond between humans and the
supernatural. Fetishes are common in animistic societies, and were prevalent in
predynastic Egypt. They are often worn
on the body to impart their magical powers, such as for protection, luck, love,
curing, warding off evil, money, good
hunting, gambling, or curses on enemies.
Typical fetishes are dolls, carved images,
stones, or animal teeth, claws, or bones.
They embody specific spirits or are inhabited by them.
The term "fetish" may derive from
the Latin factitius, made by art, or the
Portuguese feitico, charm or sorcery.
Other terms associated with fetishes are
"juju" and "gris-gris," both of which
may have derived from a West African
term, grou-grou, for sacred objects. Early
European traders commonly called the
grou-grou they encountered juju, meaning dolls or playthings. The gris-gris
evolved out of the African American slave
culture in the American South, and refers
to charm bags filled with magical powders, herbs, spices, roots, bones, stones,
feathers, and so on. Gris-gris are used in
Vodoun magic. In Santeria such charm
bags are called resguardos, or "protectors." See Santeria; Vodoun.
Various North American tribes have
fetish traditions. Some fetishes are personal, while others are collective, serving
a clan, secret society, village, or tribe. See
Medicine societies. The most elaborate
traditions exist among the Zuni and other
Pueblo tribes. Zuni fetishes are considered to be petrified supernatural beings
from the creation myth. According to the
story, the first humans came out of four
caves in the underworld, called the Lower
Regions. The Earth's surface was a frightening place, covered with water, shaken
by earthquakes, and filled with beasts of
prey. Out of pity for the humans, the
Children of the Sun dried and hardened
Feng shui
Reality
of Mystical
Religion.
St.
Findhorn
of the American
Indians.
Findhorn
Experimental spiritual community located in northern Scotland near the Arctic
Circle, and the site of a garden seemingly
endowed with special powers. At its peak
in the late 1960s and early 1970s, Findhorn yielded forty-pound cabbages and
other plants and flowers that sometimes
grew twice their normal size, despite the
fact that the soil was nothing more than
sand and gravel and the cold climate of
the North Sea made for poor growing
conditions. Findhorn residents claimed
that they received the directions for planting, cultivating, and managing their gardens from spirits that inhabit the natural
world. The Findhorn experiment has
come to be viewed as a demonstration of
the power and potential of human beings
and the natural world living and working
together in harmony.
The Findhorn phenomenon began in
1962 when Peter Caddy, an out-of-work
hotel manager without prospects for employment, his wife, Eileen, and friend and
coworker Dorothy Maclean, moved to
the Findhorn Bay Caravan Travel Park.
Although the trailer park was a desolate
place to live-situated next to a rubbish
dump and a rundown building-Caddy
felt he had been directed there for a purpose through spiritual guidance his wife
had received in meditation. According to
Caddy this same voice had been directing
every action of their lives up to that
point.
Thwarted in all attempts to find
work, Caddy started the garden in 1963
to pass the time, even though Findhorn
seemed the worst place imaginable to
grow anything. Located on a narrow,
203
204
Pindhorn
Firewalking
Firewalking
A centuries-old rite practiced around the
world, consisting of walking barefoot
across thirty- to sixty-foot-Iong beds of
glowing coals, white-hot stones, or pits of
fire. Despite temperatures of 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit to 1,400 degrees Fahrenheit or more, firewalkers are able to
traverse this distance without suffering
any pain or showing any signs of burns
or other bodily damage. Firewalkers prepare for their feat by chanting, praying,
or meditating, which brings either a
trance-like state or intense beliefs that
they will not be burned. In the United
States, where it has grown in popularity
since the early 1980s, firewalking is promoted as a means for overcoming fear
and developing personal power.
205
206
fear and free themselves from its restraints on personal growth, as well as
to demonstrate the mind's power over
matter.
Firewalking Theories
Firewalkers, as well as scientists,
have been unable to explain how people
can walk on hot coals or white-hot stones
without damage. Doctors say human
flesh exposed to 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit
should suffer devastating third-degree
burns.
Dr. Myrne Reid Coe, Jr., an American scholar, who once walked thirty feet
through a fire pit and on another occasion licked red-hot iron bars, has theorized that vaporized moisture from saliva
or perspiration forms a protective air
cushion that prevents flesh from burning
when exposed to extreme temperatures
for brief periods. This is called the "Ledenfrost effect," and may be demonstrated by sprinkling water on a hot grill:
the droplets dance on the surface.
Dr. Bernard Leikind, an American
plasma physicist, has contended that firewalking is not a paranormal experience.
The difference between the temperature
of the coals and the lesser amounts of actual heat they contain explains why people have not been burned. He compared
firewalking to sticking a hand into a hot
oven-the air doesn't give off enough energy to cause burns. Touching a cake pan
baking in the same oven, however, brings
immediate pain and bodily damage. Leikind noted that while both are hot, each
contains different heat or thermal energy.
He said that coals are like the air in an
oven-they do not contain enough heat
to burn the soles of a walker's foot.
Both these theories seem to be disproved by the fact that many people have
been burned the instant they've set foot
onto the hot coals-some so badly that
they required skin grafts. Also, some re-
Firewalking
Firewalking
207
Research
inating Mind: Reflections on Human Possibilities. San Francisco: Harper & Row,
Flint, Leslie
See Direct-voice mediumship.
Flotation
A means of sensory deprivation by floating in a dark, enclosed bathtub-like tank
containing heavily salted water. Flotation
induces altered and mystical states of
consciousness, and causes profound mental and physical transformations. As a
therapy it is used in relaxation and stress
reduction, and in the treatment of various
behavior disorders and physical ailments.
Flotation tanks contain about ten
inches of water in which eight hundred to
one thousand pounds of Epsom salts have
been dissolved; the entire tank weighs
about two thousand pounds. The water is
heated to between 93 degrees Fahrenheit
and 95 degrees Fahrenheit, slightly less
than body temperature. The effect of lying in such water in the dark is one of
weightlessness; the boundaries of the
physical body dissolve. Flotation apparently depresses left-brain activity (logic,
language, and analytic thought), while
liberating right-brain activity (intuition,
creativity, and holistic thought). It also
208
Firewalking
Flotation
Therapeutic Uses
Flotation has been shown to achieve
dramatic results in stress reduction. Studies using an electromyograph (EMG),
which measures muscular tension, show
that floaters become more quickly and
deeply relaxed than those who use other
techniques such as meditation, biofeedback, and progressive relaxation. Flotation also has been shown to increase tolerance for stress by altering the level at
which the body releases fight-or-flight
biochemicals such as adrenaline, cortisol,
and ACTH.
Flotation produces results in creative
visualization. Studies show that images
209
210
(1897-1971)
American medium famous for his splnt
communications and his advancement of
Spiritualism. Ford was engaging and sociable, but his private life was tormented
by a battle with alcoholism. His mediumistic talent appeared to be formidable,
but posthumous evidence indicates he
may have cheated at some seances in his
later career.
Ford was born to a Southern Baptist
family on January 8, 1897, in Titusville,
Florida. He was the second oldest of four
children. He had no unusual psychic experiences during childhood. He was excommunicated at age sixteen because of
his outspoken skepticism of orthodox
church doctrine concerning the nature of
heaven and hell.
Ford intended to become a minister,
but interrupted studies at Transylvania
College in Lexington, Kentucky, to join
the Army in 1918 during World War I.
He never went overseas. Stationed at
Camp Grant in Sheridan, Illinois, he inexplicably began having precognitive
dreams of the next day's death list during
a severe flu epidemic. Shortly thereafter
he began to hear voices whispering the
names of soldiers who were about to be
killed in action overseas.
After the war Ford returned to Transylvania College, questioning his sanity. A psychology professor, Dr. Elmer
Snoddy, convinced him he was merely
psychic.
Following graduation Ford was ordained a minister of the Disciples of
Christ Church in Barbourville, Kentucky,
in 1922. He married Sallie Stewart; the
marriage lasted five years.
Ford proved to be an eloquent and
popular preacher. His psychic experiences, however, led him to leave mainstream Christianity and join Spiritualism.
He moved to New York, where he lec-
Flotation
211
Sources: Arthur Ford, as told to Jerome Ellison. The Life Beyond Death. New York:
G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1971; Arthur Ford, in
collaboration with Marguerite Harmon
Bro. Nothing So Strange: The Autobiography of Arthur Ford. New York: Harper &
Brothers, 1958; Ruth Montgomery. A
World Beyond. New York: Fawcett Crest,
1971; Allen Spraggett. Arthur Ford: The
Man Who Talked with the Dead. New
York: New American Library, 1973.
Fortean phenomena
(also Forteana)
Any paranormal or anomalous phenomena that defy natural explanation, such as
rains of frogs, fish, stones, dead birds,
flesh, and snakes; mystifying religious experiences, such as stigmata, the sudden
flowing of blood from a person's palms
or legs in the same places where Christ
bled from being nailed to the cross; weeping statues; floating balls of light in the
night sky; spontaneous human combustion; UFOs; ghosts and poltergeists; and
monstrous creatures.
Fortean phenomena are named after
Charles Fort (1874-1932), an American
journalist who is called "the father of
modern phenomenalism." After an inheritance enabled him to quit work as a
journalist at age forty-two, Fort began
collecting and cataloguing thousands of
odd phenomena that had no explanation,
which he found by poring through scientific and popular journals in the British
Museum and New York Public Library.
The collecting proved to be so absorbing
that he dedicated the remaining twentyseven years of his life to it. He never attempted to explain these phenomena, but
used these examples to point out the limitations of scientific knowledge and the
danger of dogmatic acceptance of "natural" laws, which the phenomena seemed
to contravene. Fort compiled his research
into four books: The Book of the
212
Fortune,
Dion
(1890-1946)
213
214
founders of the Golden Dawn, and believed Moina sent psychic attacks upon
her. Fortune established her own order,
the Fraternity of the Inner Light, devoted
to esoteric Christianity. Initially, the order was part of the Golden Dawn, but
Moina Mathers expelled Fortune and the
order became independent.
In the winter of 1923 to 1924, Fortune went to Glastonbury, where she contacted three more Masters on the inner
planes: the Greek philosopher Socrates;
Lord Erskine, chancellor of England in
the early nineteenth century, whom she
believed was the reincarnation of Thomas
More; and David Carstairs, who claimed
to be a young British officer killed at
Ypres in World War I. These Masters directed her magical work during her most
productive years. Fortune said Socrates
dictated to her The Cosmic Doctrine, her
essential occult philosophical work. During her life Fortune periodically retreated
to Glastonbury, where she immersed herself in the Celtic Otherworld, which she
believed lay beneath the Tor, and in
Arthurian lore. She also said she came in
contact with another inner Master, Merlin, the great magus of British myth and
legend. Her experiences are recorded in
her book Glastonbury: Avalon of the
Heart. The house she once lived in is reputedly haunted.
In 1927 Fortune married Thomas
Penry Evans, a Welsh physician and occultist. Evans, known as Merlin or
"Merl" to Fortune's followers, became
her priest in her magical work, injecting a
strong pagan element into it. The marriage was stormy and was strained by
Fortune's apparent lack of interest in sex.
They had no children. In 1939 Evans divorced her and married another woman.
Fortune's years with Evans marked
her most fruitful as a magician and
writer, however. In addition to the Fraternity of the Inner Light, she ran the Chalice Orchard Club, a pilgrim's center she
established at Glastonbury, and founded
Freemasonry
Sources:
Defence.
Fox, George
See Society of Friends (Quakers).
Fox, Matthew
See Creation spiriruality.
Fox sisters
See Mediumship; Spiritualism.
Freemasonry
The secret and fraternal organizations believed descended from the craft guilds of
the stonemasons. These groups, open to
membership by men only, represent no
single religion or ideology but instead try
to foster spirirual development and fraternal charity among all classes and
creeds. Also called the Brotherhood or
the Craft, the orders provide a network
for business, professional, and social suc-
215
216
it-seems
symbolically similar to the
quest for the Lost Word of God. Followers of the Isis cult were known as "widow's sons," after the murder of her
husband/brother Osiris, and Masons also
are called "sons of the widow."
Followers of Sufic mysticism believe
that the builders of King Solomon's temple were really Sufi architects incorporating the holy words of God in numerical
equivalents expressed in temple measurements, making Freemasonry Arabic in origin. According to this view', the Saxon
King Aethelstan (A.D. 894-939) introduced Masonry to England after learning
of it from the Spanish Moors.
None of these theories or legends can
be proven. Most Masonic scholars trace
the Craft's history to the development of
medieval stonemason craft guilds. The
skilled stonemasons, few in number, traveled from town to town and were commissioned by local ,clergy to build
churches and cathedrals. In order to
guard their knowledge, the masons organized into guilds, complete with passwords, rules of procedure, payment and
advancement, and religious devotion.
How or why the stonemasons' craft
guilds attracted unskilled, or speculative
members remains a mystery. Speculative
members were those men, usually of a
higher class than the craftsmen, who were
interested in the pursuits of spiritual wisdom, philosophy, and often the occult,
with no knowledge of stonemasonry. Perhaps the lodge provided cover for more
esoteric activities, but most likely hid the
members' radical penchant for political
and religious reform.
Most Masonic historians consider
Elias Ashmole (1617-1692), astrologer,
solicitor, officer of the court of Charles II,
and antiquarian, to be the first important
nonoperative Freemason in England. For
years Ashmole had dabbled in alchemy,
Rosicrucian philosophy, and the Kabbalah, and counted as friends Francis Bacon and other founders of what became
Freemasonry
the Royal Society. Ashmole's diary records his initiation into Masonry in October 1646, by which time the English
lodges were so crowded with honorary,
or Accepted Masons that few claimed
even one skilled craftsman as a member.
By the eighteenth century, nearly every pub in England and Scotland hosted a
Masonic lodge. To establish preeminence
for the English lodges and standardize ritual, four London lodges merged in 1717
into the Grand Lodge of England, with
Anthony Sayer as the first Grand Master.
George Payne replaced Sayer the next
year, followed by the Rev. John Theophilus Desaguliers as Grand Master in
1719. Desaguliers, a lawyer, Fellow of
the Royal Society, and chaplain to Frederick, Prince of Wales, helped not only
organize the Grand Lodge but used his
considerable influence to spread the Craft
worldwide, especially to his French
homeland.
Berween 1751 and 1753, Scots and
Irish Freemasons unaffiliated with the
Grand Lodge formed the Antient Grand
Lodge, competing directly with the
Grand Lodge "Moderns" for participating lodges. Both groups became the
United Grand Lodge of England in 1813,
which exists today.
Freemasonry
217
218
Freemasonry
the beginning. Many church officials continue to look the other way, especially in
England, home of most European Masons. The Greek Orthodox church officially condemned Freemasonry in 1933,
calling it a system reminiscent of heathen
mystery religions.
S. R. Parchment, author of Operative Masonry and founder of the Rosicrucian Anthroposophic League, stated in no
uncertain terms that Masons believe in
the potential of Christ in each man, but
not in Jesus as the Son of God. Even the
Anglican vicar and Masonic apologist
Vindex called Freemasonry the embodiment of all religious systems and ancient
mysteries, not the Christian organization
inherited from the guilds. Of course,
many Masons are not Christians.
Stephen Knight, author of The
Brotherhood, claims that during ritual
ceremonies for the Holy Royal Arch exaltation, candidates learn the Lost Name
or Word of God, said to be "Jahbulon."
Knight maintains that most Masons do
not realize the significance of the name,
which he defines as a combination of
three names: Jah, for the Hebrew god
Yahweh; Bul, the ancient Canaanite fertility god Baal and devil; and On, for Osiris, the Egyptian god of the underworld.
It is impossible, however, to besmirch the characters of so many illustrious Freemasons with devil worship.
Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart was a Mason, and probably Christopher Wren, architect of St. Paul's Cathedral in London.
Italian nationalist Giuseppe Garibaldi
also professed Freemasonry.
Those ,\Tho believe the United States
is a nation destined to rise and prosper
ascribe the country's founding as proof of
spiritual intervention via the Craft, noting that eight signatories of the Declaration of Independence, including Benjamin
Franklin and John Hancock, were Masons. George Washington became a Freemason in 1752, but declined to assume
control of all Masonry in the United
Freemasonry
219
Sources: Foster Bailey. The Spirit of Masonry. London: Lucis Press Ltd., 1957;
Keith Crim, general ed. Abingdon Dictionary of Living Religions. Nashville: Abing-
don Press, 1981; R. A. Gilbert. "Freemasonry & The Hermetic Tradition." Gnosis
no. 6 (Winter 1988): 24-27; Manly P.
Hall. Freemasonry of the Ancient Egyptians. 1937. Los Angeles: Philosophical Research Society, 1973; Manly P. Hall. The
Lost Keys of Freemasonry. 1923. Richmond, VA: MaCoy Publishing and Masonic Supply Company, 1976; Manly P.
Hall. Masonic Orders of Fraternity. Los
Angeles: Philosophical Research Society,
1950; Manly P. Hall. The Secret Destiny of
America. Los Angeles: Philosophical Research Society, 1944; Stephen Knight. The
Brotherhood: The Secret World of the Freemasons. New York: Stein & Day, 1984;
S. R. Parchment. Operative Masonry. San
220
Freemasonry
Freud, Sigmund
(1856-1939)
221
222
Freud, Sigmund
(1856-1939)
Carrington not to use his name in connection with the venture. He said he did
not dismiss a priori the study of "socalled occult phenomena as unscientific,
discreditable, or even as dangerous," and
if he were at the beginning of his career
rather than at the end of it, he "might
possibly choose just this field of research,
in spite of all the difficulties." He went
on to say that psychoanalysis had nothing
to do with the occult and he wanted to
keep it separate from "this as yet unexplored sphere of knowledge"; and that he
had certain skeptical, materialistic prejudices about the occult, and rejected completely the notion of survival of the personality after death.
Freud told his inner circle of associates that they must prepare for an attack
on psychoanalysis by those who believed
psychic forces to be real. These "true believers" would be likely to misuse the results of psychoanalysis and thus make the
movement look ridiculous to the scientific establishment. See Dreams; Jung,
Carl Gustav; Psychology.
Sources: George Devereux, ed. Psychoanalysis and the Occult. New York: Interna-
223
224
ings: The Relevance of Religion and Psychical Research to Planetary Concerns: 5265; Ernest S. Wolf. "Sigmund Freud." The
American Academic Encyclopedia. Princeton: Arete, 1980.
Freud, Sigmund
(1856-1939)
G
Gaia hypothesis
See Planetary consciousness.
Ganzfeld stimulation
In parapsychology an environment of
mild sensory deprivation intended to
stimulate the receptivity of extrasensory
perception. Ganzfeld is German for "homogeneous field" or "entire field," and
refers to the blank field of vision stared at
by a test subject. The ganzfeld originally
was used beginning in the 1930s as a test
of visual processes; it was first applied to
psi testing in 1973.
In a psi ganzfeld test, a receiver attempts to perceive impressions and sensations transmitted by a sender. The perceptions may come through telepathy,
clairvoyance, clairaudience, precognition,
or combinations of those phenomena. Because it is difficult, if not impossible, to
know which form of ESP is involved,
ganzfeld experiments usually test for
"general extrasensory perception," or
GESP.
Gaia hypothesis
225
226
Gardner, Gerald B.
See Witchcraft.
Ganzfeld
stimulation
1918, she married another wounded soldier, J. W. Garrett. That marriage also
ended in divorce, and Garrett never remarried.
Garrett's trance mediumship began
during the rise of interest in Spiritualism
following the war. One day she joined a
group of women who wanted to contact
the dead through table tapping. Unexpectedly, she went into a trance and began speaking of seeing the dead gathered
around the table.
The experience was unsettling, and
Garrett was referred to a person who
hypnotized her and communicated with a
so-called control personality, Uvani, who
said Garrett would now be a vehicle for
communication with spirits. This Garrett
resisted, but the door to the other side
remained permanently open. She sought
help at the British College of Psychic Science in London, where she met James
Hewat McKenzie. From 1924 to 1929,
McKenzie worked with her to develop
her mediumistic talents and trained her to
remain aloof from and impartial to the
process. She rapidly developed telepathy,
clairvoyance, and clairaudience skills,
and communicated with poltergeist entities. She worked with leading psychical
researchers, including Sir Oliver Lodge
and Hereward Carrington and Nandor
Fodor. McKenzie died in 1929.
In 1930 the British dirigible R-l0l
crashed in France on its maiden voyage to
India, killing everyone aboard. The incident was among the most famous involving Garrett, for she had experienced premonitions of a disaster involving a
dirigible for several years beforehand. In
1926 she had a vision of a phantom dirigible in the sky over London; it appeared
normal. In 1928 she saw the airship
again, only this time it gave off smoke,
was buffeted about, and disappeared. In
1929 she saw a vision of a dirigible in the
sky in flames. Also in 1928, during a mediumistic sitting, Garrett gave a message
from a deceased Captain Raymond
Eileen]. Garrett
227
228
Views
After World War I, Garrett met Edward Carpenter, whose social and political writings interested her. Carpenter
told her she had been born to a state of
cosmic consciousness others spent their
entire lives searching for in vain. She began to see her perceptions not as hallucinations, but as capacities for inner comprehension, or what Carpenter called
cosmic consciousness. She had a profound spiritual experience in which she
saw that her need to live in two selves
was the result of "positive powers beyond
the range of contemporary understanding." Garrett said that the experiences of
telepathy, clairvoyance, and trance depended upon a fundamental shift of
awareness into a different reality, which
she could do by choice by changing her
breathing. She learned to control her
powers so as not to be exhausted by what
she called the "climax of clairvoyance," a
state of inspiration in which past, present,
and future are perceived simultaneously
and one is identified with the unity of the
VISIOn.
Garrett remained uncertain of the reality of her controls. Uvani was the dominant one, joined by Abdul Latif, who
claimed to be a seventeenth-century Persian physician. Garrett stayed detached
from them, viewing them with respect but
not being able to explain. Her mediumship encouraged her to study her own
deep unconscious. By 1938 she felt her
powers were not supernormal in origin,
Gautama, Siddhartha
See Buddhism.
229
230
Gematria
One of three Kabbalistic systems for discovering the true and hidden meanings of
words, using numbers and letters of the
alphabet. The numerical values of the letters of words are added together, and
then interpreted according to other words
with the same numerical values.
Although gematria was developed
into a sophisticated system by Kabbalists-predominantly
German Kabbalists of the thirteenth century-it
was
known and used much earlier by other
cultures. King Sargon II, who ruled Babylonia in the eighth century B.C., used the
numerical value of his name to determine
that the wall of Khorsabad should be
built to the same equivalent, or 16,283
cubits. The ancient Greeks, Persians,
Gnostics, and early Christians used gematria for a variety of purposes. The Greeks
applied it to dream interpretation, and
the Gnostics to the names of deities. Early
Christians arrived at the dove for the
symbol of Christ, because the Greek letters of alpha and omega (the Beginning
and the End) and the Greek term for
dove, peristera, add up to the same number, 80l.
The Kabbalistic system of gematria
is far more complex than merely tallying
up numerical values of letters; it involves
various methods of analysis by which the
mystical purposes of the Scriptures,
buildings, and objects may be determined. Not only are the numerical values
considered, but also the size and strokes
of the letters. The early Kabbalists of the
thirteenth century, most notably Eleazar
of Worms, applied gematria to the Scriptures, which were believed to have been
inspired by God and written in code.
Thus, "And 10, three men" from Genesis
Gem elixirs
See Crystals.
General extrasensory
perception (GESP)
See ESP (extrasensory perception).
Genius
See Inspiration.
Geobiology
See Feng shui.
Geomancy
See Feng shui.
Ghost
See Apparition; Haunting.
231
232
Glastonbury
crossfire. The next day, after more fighting between other Sioux and whites, the
Sioux surrendered to Miles.
The massacre ended the Ghost
Dance religion and brought to an end the
Native American wars of the Western
frontier.
Sources: Ake Hultkrantz. Native Religions
of North America. San Francisco: Harper
& Row, 1987; Ruth M. Underhill. Red
Man's Religion. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1965; Carl Waldman. Atlas
of the North American Indian. New York:
Facts On File, 1985.
Glastonbury
One of the oldest sacred sites in England,
whose history is intertwined with the
Holy Grail and Arthurian legends. Glastonbury is believed to rest at the intersection of powerful leys, lines of earth energy. Its mystical lore draws numerous
pilgrims and visitors from around the
world.
Glastonbury is located in the West
Country, on the plains of Somerset Levels, not far from the Bristol Channel. The
site includes an abbey, town, and Glastonbury Tor, a terraced volcanic rock
522 feet high and topped with the remains of an old church tower.
Archaeological evidence indicates the
area was inhabited from the third or
fourth century B.C.; the site may have
been sacred to the Druids. The town was
nearly on an island, surrounded by
marshlands, until the sixteenth century,
suggesting it may have been associated
with the mysterious island of Avalon in
Arthurian lore.
Various legends are associated with
the Tor. One holds that King Arthur once
had a stronghold atop the Tor, which
provided entrance to Annwn, the underworld. Monks built a church there during
the Middle Ages; it was destroyed in an
earthquake. The present remains are of a
later church. Another legend says that the
233
234
Glastonbury
Glossolalia
geist!: A Study
in Destructive
Haunting.
Glossolalia
The act of speaking or writing in another,
unknown tongue. Although the practice
of ecstatic speech has been part of religion for centuries, glossolalia usually denotes the baptism of the Holy Spirit in
Pentecostal or charismatic Christian worship.
Originating from the Greek glossa,
"tongue," and lalia, "a talk," glossolalia
signifies a recurring phenomenon and not
just one outburst. The ability to speak in
unknown tongues first came to the apostles at Pentecost, or the celebration seven
weeks after Passover. Acts 2:4 in the New
Testament tells that "they were all filled
with the Holy Spirit and began to speak
in other tongues, as the Spirit gave them
utterance. "
Perhaps as remarkable as the speech
itself was that the apostles' listeners recognized their own languages and realized
that the apostles should not have been
able to speak them. Whatever the apostles said was heard in each one's native
tongue.
Not every tongue is intelligible, however; some sound more like gibberish.
The early Christians at Corinth used
tongues extensively in their worship services, although few could tell what they
were saying or what the tongues meant.
St. Paul cautioned the Corinthians about
tongues, saying that unless they could be
interpreted, they were useless. Paul outlined the uses of tongues thus: as an aid
235
236
Abingdon Press, 1981; Felicitas D. Goodman. Speaking in Tongues: A CrossCultural Study of Glossolalia. Chicago:
University of Chicago Press, 1972; James
H. Hyslop. "Psychic Phenomena and Christianity." The Journal of the American Society for Psychical Research 16, no. 1 (January 1922): 59-71; Richard Quebedeaux.
The New Charismatics II. San Francisco:
Harper & Row, 1983; John Sherrill. They
Speak with Other Tongues. New York:
McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1964; Lewis
Spence. The Encyclopedia of the Occult.
Reprint. London: Bracken Books, 1988.
Gnosticism
Dualistic, mystical Christian religion,
which flourished in the Mediterranean region during the second century A.D.
"Gnostic" comes from the Greek gnosis,
meaning "knowledge." Gnostics believed
that redemption, or liberation of the soul,
was possible only through knowledge,
gnosis, not faith, pistis.
At its origin Gnosticism-the
"religion of knowledge" or "the religion of
insight" -was a philosophically dualistic
religion consisting of at least sixty sects.
In orthodox Christian circles, Gnosticism has been dismissed as heretical
and pseudo-religious. However, modern
scholarship has questioned this view and
has considered that the Gnostics may
Glossolalia
Gnosticism
Gnostic talisman
237
238
Another major factor in the reexamination of Gnosticism is the work of psychiatrist Carl G. Jung, who may be described as a "neo-Gnostic." Between
1912 and 1926, Jung delved into a study
of Gnosticism and early Christianity. He
found in Gnosticism an early, prototypical depth psychology. He believed that
Christianity, and as a result Western culture, had suffered because of the repression of Gnostic concepts. In looking for
ways to reintroduce Gnostic ideas to
modern culture, Jung found them in alchemy. See Alchemy.
The first codex of the Nag Hammadi
library found in 1945 was purchased and
given to Jung on his eightieth birthday. It
is called the Codex Jung.
Others influential in the Gnostic revival are Hans Jonas, a student of the existentialist Martin Heidegger, and religion historian Kurt Rudolph. Jonas, who
was influenced greatly by the New Testament scholar Rudolph Bultmann, published his pioneering work, Gnostic Religion, in 1934. It introduced many readers
to a historical perspective that leads to a
better understanding of the early church
in general, and the Dead Sea Scrolls in
particular.
In 1977 Kurt Rudolph published
Gnosis: The Nature and History of
Gnosticism, a chronological history of
many elements leading to ancient Gnosticism, from the beginning of Alexander
the Great's campaigns in Asia (334 B.C.)
to the most significant elements that led
to the Catholicizing of the last Paulicians
in Bulgaria in the seventh century. The
Paulicians, founded c. 657, followed the
teachings of the apostle Paul as interpreted by Marcion, and represented
Gnosticism in the extreme, in that they
believed in two supreme gods, one of
good and one of evil. Rudolph's historical
survey of the consequences of Gnosticism, while expertly documented, considers only the European Christian side. He
observes that a similar investigation de-
Gnosticism
Goddess
The feminine
Force. Widely
Goddess is no
the mainstream
three millennia
principle
of the Divine
venerated in earlier times,
longer a primary power in
religions: For the past
she has been subordinated
Goddess
in West-
Age sculptures of
with exaggerated
believed to repreMother. The so-
239
ings and good will none may prosper either in heaven or on earth. In various cosmologies she is most often represented as
Goddess of the Earth, whose masculine
divine counterpart is God of the Sky. In
her celestial aspects, she is often Goddess
of the Moon, whose rays have been associated with fertilizing power since ancient times. In ancient Chinese myth,
there was once a time when Goddess
reigned supreme: the Tao Teh Ching tells
of a time when yin, the female principle,
was not ruled by yang, the male principle.
The wisdom of Taoism is based on traits
that are labeled feminine: intuition, the
flow of the forces of nature and harmony
with nature. See Taoism.
The facets of Goddess are represented by her many aspects, goddesses of
various names and attributes; Goddess is
said to be She of a Thousand Names. Her
multiplicity indicates that multiplicity is
natural to woman in her many roles in
life.
The beginning of the end of the
Golden Age of Goddess commenced circa
1800 B.C. to 1500 B.C., during the time of
Abraham, the first prophet of the Hebrew
God, Yahweh, who proclaimed that humankind would have no other gods before Yahweh. During the spread of Christianity, worship of Goddess, along with
all pagan deities, was routed or suppressed, and the deities were demonized.
But the need for veneration of a female
figure persisted, and in Christianity that
need was transferred to the muchdisputed adoration of the Blessed Virgin
Mary. At times the cult of Mary has approached that of Goddess worship, but
any similarities drawn between Mary and
Goddess are discouraged by the Catholic
church. The proper place of Mary in
Christianity was one of the major disputes in the Protestant Reformation-the
Protestants felt she had been given too
much emphasis. Mary, as Queen of
Heaven, officially occupies a status below
that of deity yet more exalted than the
240
Goddess
Goddess
fered of Jung's concepts of anima and animus. Jung ascribed feminine characteristics to the anima and male characteristics
to the animus; men and women have
both within them. The animus plays a
central role in Jung's writings on the psychology of women. Some feminists deplore the anima/animus concept because
it pigeonholes characteristics according to
sex. Jung's views, of course, reflect the
different attitudes toward women of his
time. Alternatives have been proposed,
such as the psychology of Jean Shinoda
Bolen, which is based on female Goddess
representations of archetypes: "masculine" traits are associated with the goddesses who evince them, such as Artemis
and Atalanta.
Perhaps one of the most visible arenas for the revival of Goddess is in the
neo-Paganism and neo-Pagan Witchcraft
nature religions. These are largely reconstructions of earlier pagan religions. Most
sects recognize both female and male aspects of the Divine Force-Goddess and
Horned God respectively-but
Goddess
is given primacy (some feminist covens
worship Goddess exclusively). Goddess
embodies the very essence of modern
Witchcraft: she is the Great Mother,
Mother Nature, Creator, Destroyer, the
Queen of Heaven, the Moon (the source
of magical power), and the innermost
self. Goddess frequently is recognized in a
trinity, the Triple Goddess, a personification of her three faces as Virgin, Mother,
and Crone, respectively called Diana, Selene, and Hecate. See Archetypes; Creation spirituality; Moon; Neo-Paganism;
Psychology; Witchcraft.
Sources: Mary Daly. Beyond God the Father: Toward a Philosophy of Women's
Liberation. Rev. ed. Boston: Beacon Press,
1985; Elizabeth Gould Davis. The First
Sex. New York: G. P. Putnam's Sons,
1971; Riane Eisler. The Chalice and the
Blade: Our History, Our Future. San Fran-
241
of the Goddess
Grail, the
Spiritual mystery in the Western, and especially British, esoteric tradition. It is a
pagan story that became Christianized
and merged with Arthurian legend, but
retained much of its pagan imagery and
symbolism. The Grail is a gateway to Paradise, a point of contact with a supernatural and spiritual realm. It possesses unlimited healing power and makes possible
a direct apprehension of the Divine.
As a pagan image, the Grail is the
Graal, a cup of plenty and regeneration,
the vessel in which the life of the world is
preserved, and which symbolizes the
body of Goddess or the Great Mother. In
its Christianized form, the Grail is the
chalice used by Christ at the Last Supper,
and which held his blood following the
crucifixion. It is not known whether such
an object truly existed or exists, and there
is no definitive image of it. As a spiritual
mystery, the Grail represents regeneration
through Christ's teachings; in medieval
belief blood embodied the soul, and in
Christ's case even his divinity.
Various versions of the Grail legend
exist. The first written texts appeared toward the end of the twelfth century and
flowered through the fourteenth century,
though it is likely that the story existed
earlier in oral tradition. Originally, the
242
Goddess
243
244
Guardian
spirit
large for a single personality. An incarnation includes both a soul, or personality, and a component of his total self. The
sum total of all the souls is the spirit. After death the soul joins the spirit. In far
memory Grant said she was accessing a
particular component of her spirit.
According to the Kelsey-Grant practice, if a soul fails to integrate itself into
the spirit, fragments split off and form a
"ghost," which traps energy. The ghost
lingers through subsequent incarnations,
until its energy is released, such as in psychotherapy. See Past-life recall; Past-life
therapy (PLT); Reincarnation.
Sources: Joan Grant. Far Memory. New
York: Harper & Row, 1956; Denys Kelsey,
MB, MRCP and Joan Grant. Many Lifetimes. Garden City, NY: Doubleday & Co.,
1967.
Guadelupe
See Marian apparitions.
Guardian spirit
In tribal cultures a spirit, usually in animal form, that protects individuals,
tribes, and clans, or provides magical shamanic power. The animal represents the
collective power of an entire species or
genus, and customarily has magical powers that enable it to perform extraordinary feats, such as a wolf with the power
of flight. Guardian spirits almost always
appear in animal form, but may in some
cases take on human shape on various occasions. In animal form they can converse
with humans. The animal form is rooted
in the deep belief that humans and animals are related to one another.
Beliefs about guardian spirits vary.
In many tribes it is assumed that males
have guardian spirits from birth, otherwise they would not live to adulthood.
Some tribes believe that not all males suc-
245
246
Guided imagery
See Creative visualization.
Guardian spirit
(1866?-1949)
As much an enigma as his homeland of
Russia, G. 1. Gurdjieff was considered by
some to be the greatest mystical teacher
of all time, and by others to be a fraud.
His liberation philosophy, commonly
called "the Work," set occultism on its
ear in the 1920s and paved the way for
now-conventional techniques of group
and encounter therapy.
His birth date is unknown. Gurdjieff
gave it as 1866, but it has been variously
given as 1877 by his sister and 1872 by
his biographer, J. G. Bennett. All agree,
however, that Gurdjieff was born in Alexandropol, in the Russo-Turkish frontier, to Greek and Armenian parents. He
spent his early years in the village of
Kars. Gurdjieff absorbed the varied cultural influences of the area, which later
surfaced in his teachings.
After several, mostly undocumented,
years of travel, some of which may have
been devoted to spying against England
on behalf of Russia, Gurdjieff turned his
attention to finding out the "whys" of
life. He was familiar with Madame H. P.
Blavatsky's Theosophical Society and the
occult-Orthodox philosophies of priest
Pavel Alexandrovitch Florensky. But instead of embracing any organized occult
teaching, Gurdjieff devised his own. He
postulated that people are no more than
machines run by forces outside their control. Human beings in such a state are
essentially asleep. In order to wake up,
they must work hard to penetrate their
normal state of unconsciousness to reach
the true consciousness inside.
Gurdjieff turned increasingly to hypnotism to accomplish this goal. He
had acquired extensive, albeit unorthodox medical knowledge on his travels,
and believed that the tempo of the blood
altered at adolescence to accommodate
humankind's normal "asleep" state. He
claimed that he possessed new hyp-
247
248
jeered his theories outright in 1931. Another famous student, A. R. Orage, editor
of the British journal The New Age, took
Gurdjieff's ideas to New York and developed what was called "the Oragean version." He also formally rejected Gurdjieff
in 1931.
After 1924 Gurdjieff no longer
taught but began writing down his theo"
ries and worldview; his style was strange
language and tiresome anecdotal detail.
He practiced some hypnotic healing, relied on the largesse of rich widows, and
otherwise lived on the fringes through
World War II until his death in October
1949.
His students then broke silence and
began publishing his life and works. The
first was Ouspensky's In Search of the
the best explanation of
Miraculous,
Gurdjieff's theories. This was followed
by Gurdjieff's masterwork, All and Everything: First Series, better known as
Beelzebub's
Tales
to
His
Grandson
1973; O. M. Burke. "Notes on the Dervishes." Critique: A J oumal of Conspiracies & Metaphysics no. 25: 37-42; P. D.
Ouspensky. In Search of the Miraculous.
New York: Harcourt, Brace and Co., 1949;
James Webb. The Harmonious Circle: The
Lives and Work of G. 1. Gurdjieff, P. D.
Ouspensky,
and Their Followers. New
Guru
Wilson, ed. Dark Dimensions: A Celebration of the Occult. New York: Everest
House, 1977.
Gurney, Edmund
See Society for Psychical Research (SPR).
Guru
A spiritual master, religious teacher, divine preceptor, or learned Brahmin. Guru
is a Sanskrit term meaning "teacher." In
ancient India the Vedas, Vedanta, and
other sacred lore were handed down
orally through generations from gurus to
disciples.
Traditionally, a Hindu male is initiated into the religion at age twelve, at
which time he becomes a student, or
chela, of a guru to learn the Vedas and
other teachings. The student must show
great deference to his guru, who confers
immortality through his wisdom. The
guru holds a more exalted status than the
student's family, including his parents. In
some Hindu sects, the guru instructs the
initiate in a secret mantra, prayers, rituals, and meditations, a practice also followed in Transcendental Meditation.
In some sects of Sikhism, the guru is
not a person, but the Word of God, obtained directly from scripture. In other
Sikh sects, the human guru is responsible
for helping people recognize the way to
divine salvation. The Bauls of Bengal
sometimes use the term "guru" as a metaphor for whatever makes them understand or think of God.
Yoga systems have been handed
down and taught through the ages by gurus. Finding a guru is of paramount importance to yoga disciples.
In Tibetan Buddhism Padma Sambhava, "The Lotus Born" (755-97), was
the Great Human Guru of the Bardo
Thodal, the Book of the Dead. He was an
incarnation of the essence of the Buddha
249
250
Guru
H
Hag syndrome
See Psychic attack.
Hallucinogens
See Drugs in mystical
nences.
Halo
A circle of radiant light, which in art
crowns the head of deities, holy beings,
and saints. It represents the aura or a
crown chakra, which is prominent in a
person of high spiritual development. Ancient Egyptians, Greeks, Indians, and Romans used the halo in art to depict supernatural
force, mystical
states, and
superior intellect. In ancient Egypt and
Greece, the halo was associated with the
sun and resurrection.
In the Eleusinian
Mysteries, it was bestowed upon the sacrificed and reborn god, usually Dionysus.
In Christian art the halo graces saints, angels, Christ, Mary, and other holy persons. Eastern deities usually are depicted
with crowns or headdresses rather than
Hare Krishnas
See Alternative
religious
movements.
Harmonic Convergence
The supposed end of the materialistic
world, which occurred on August 16 and
17, 1987, according to interpretations
9f
astrological configurations,
Native American myth, and Mesoamerican
calendars
and prophecies.
The event, called the
Harmonic
Convergence,
was observed
around the world in celebrations of dancing, chanting, meditation,
and yoga intended to foster peace and help usher in
the next phase in humankind's
spiritual
evolution.
The Harmonic
Convergence
was
largely the idea of Jose Arguelles, an
American art historian who in 1983 con-
nected
astrological
configurations
to
chronological
forecasts and to his research of Mayan cosmology and calen-
Hag syndrome
251
252
Harmonic Convergence
Arguelles recommended that people continue to raise collective energy by gathering in groups of thirteen at the solstices
and equinoxes and conducting rituals to
tune into the Earth. Thirteen is a significant number in Maya cosmology; Arguelles states that the entire Mayan story
of science, myth, galactic measure, and
divine strategy can be told in a matrix of
thirteen numbers and twenty symbols.
The solstices and equinoxes are ancient
pagan holidays tied to agrarian cycles.
See New Age; Planetary consciousness.
Sources: Jose Arguelles. The Mayan Factor.
Haunting
The manifestation of inexplicable phenomena attributed to the presence of
ghosts or spirits. Phenomena include apparitions, noises, smells, tactile sensations, extremes in temperature, movement of objects, and the like. Despite
much scientific inquiry over the last one
hundred years or so, very little is known
about the nature of hauntings and why
they happen.
The term "haunt" comes from the
same root as "home," and refers to the
occupation of homes by the spirits of deceased people and animals who lived
there. Other haunted sites seem to be
places merely frequented or liked by the
deceased, or places where violent death
has occurred. Most hauntings have no
apparent reason or purpose. Some are
continual and others are active only on
certain dates that correspond to the
Haunting
Theories
Thousands of hauntings have been
investigated by psychical researchers and
parapsychologists since the late nineteenth century. Numerous theories have
been advanced, all inconclusive.
Frederic W. H. Myers, one of the
founders of the Society for Psychical Research (SPR), defined a ghost as "a manifestation
of persistent
personal
energy,
253
previously known
on earth" (Human
Personality
and Its Survival of Bodily
Death, 1903). Myers believed that ghosts
have no intrinsic intelligence or consciousness, and are meaningless fragments of energy left behind in death.
Eleanor Sidgwick, former secretary
of the SPR, theorized that hauntings are a
form of psychometry, vibrations of events
and emotions imbued into a house, site,
or object. Variations of Sidgwick's theory
propose that hauntings are impressed
upon a "psychic ether" or upon a psi
force field, which certain people access
under the right conditions. See Psychometry.
One popular Spiritualist theory
holds that hauntings occur when the
spirit of the dead person or animal is
trapped on the earth plane for various
reasons, doesn't know it is dead, or is reluctant to leave. Gentle exorcisms will
send the spirit on to the afterworld.
Ghost Investigations
Researchers employ three basic techniques to investigate a haunting: description, experimentation,
and detection.
Description involves taking eyewitness
accounts.
Experimentation
involves
bringing a psychic to the site to corroborate the eyewitness accounts or provide
new information. Psychic readings are
unreliable, as telepathy and ESP cannot
be ruled out, and often information is
given which cannot be historically verified. Detection involves the observation
or recording of phenomena. English psychical researcher Harry Price was among
the first to use modern technology in his
ghost investigations. His most celebrated
case was Borley Rectory, which he investigated between 1929 and 1938. Price put
together a ghost-hunter's kit that included felt overshoes, steel tape measures,
a thermometer, a still camera, a remotecontrol movie camera, fingerprinting
equipment, a telescope, and a portable
254
Haunting
Healing,
255
256
a key role, which means that theories explaining psychic healing must be multidimensional, and not limited to the causeand-effect theory of Newtonian science.
Quantum physics has demonstrated that
matter is energy and is not static but exists in a dynamic field; it cannot be separated from its activity. The indivisibility
of matter and energy forms the basis of
the ancient healing practices based on
Taoist, Buddhist, and Hindu philosophies.
The will also is a likely factor, as evidenced by laboratory experiments in
psychokinesis (PK), in which healers,
through prayer or mental projection,
have altered the properties of water,
caused seeds to germinate and plants to
grow more quickly than control groups,
and have slowed cancerous tumor growth
or speeded wound healing in mice. See
Prayer; Psychokinesis (PK); Worrall,
Olga. It has been suggested that the process of healing may not be a matter of
"how" but of "why": the need for a healing exists, and the consciousness selects a
path to effect it.
The traditional Western scientific
view holds that the universe is dead, and
that life is but an infinitesimal and insignificant part of it. Healers reflect the nonWestern philosophic view that the universe is a living entity created by a higher
consciousness or deity, and that all things
within the universe are interconnected.
Dora van Gelder Kunz, one of the creators of Therapeutic Touch, a modern
version of laying on of hands, states that
both healer and healee are "expressions
of a unified therapeutic interaction" in
which both are healed and made whole.
At least five factors are said to influence the effectiveness of a healing. Their
presence, however, does not guarantee
that a healing will take place. The factors
are:
1. The presence of high levels of the
universal life force: Geographic locations, such as certain mountains, sea
257
along with fifteen other associations, affiliated with the Confederation of Healing Organisations.
Faith Healing
Belief in faith healing has existed in
all types of societies throughout history.
It is fundamental to Christianity, although it is not universally emphasized in
all denominations. Healing was central to
the ministry of Jesus, and the New Testament stresses that healing is natural and
is the work of God's grace, not human
skill. Early Christians considered sickness
as caused by Satan; and, like sin, it would
yield to prayers of faith. By the end of the
fourth century, St. Augustine rejected the
validity of the healing gift, but by 424 he
had changed his mind. As Christianity developed healing increasingly became a
specialized function of the priesthood,
and was associated with sacraments, holy
shrines, and the relics of saints. The scientific revolution of the seventeenth century negated miraculous healings, and the
cures of Jesus came to be regarded as a
phenomenon that could no longer happen.
Interest in faith healing began to revive in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries with such movements as
Christian Science and Pentecostalism.
The greatest boost in interest came following World War II, with the rise of
evangelistic healers such as Oral Roberts,
Jack Coe, and Kathryn Kuhlman.
Faith healings typically take place in
a revivalist atmosphere and involve fervent prayer and a laying on of hands.
Some recipients say they can feel a transfer of energy. There are numerous cases
of cures that cannot be explained medically, but the high degree of expectation
and the desperation of many of the sick
have been known to effect false and temporary cures, with devastating emotional
and physical aftereffects. Some evangelists say they do not know how or why
258
Healing,
standing
Medicine.
Conventional
and
Alternative
Row, 1965.
Hermetica
Mystical wisdom that, along with the
Kabbalah, formed the foundation of the
Western occult tradition. According to
legend, the wisdom is contained in fortytwo books allegedly written by Hermes
Trismegistus, or "thrice-greatest Hermes," a mythical composite of the Egyptian and Greek gods Thoth and Hermes,
respectively. The alleged surviving fragments of these books are known collectively as the Hermetica. The writings
probably are of anonymous Christian authorship, a synthesis of Neo-Platonic,
Kabbalistic, and Christian elements
passed off as ancient Egyptian wisdom.
The composite of Hermes Trismegistus was created by the Greeks who settled in Egypt, and who identified Thoth
and Hermes with one another. Thoth
ruled mystical wisdom, magic, writing,
and other disciplines, and was associated
with healing. Hermes was the personification of universal wisdom and patron of
magic; a swift, wing-footed messenger, he
carried a magic wand, the caduceus. See
Caduceus. Both were associated with the
spirits of the dead: Thoth weighed their
souls in the Judgment Hall of Osiris; Hermes escorted shades to Hades. Both were
credited with writing the sacred books of
science, healing, philosophy, magic, and
law, and revealing the wisdom to humankind.
"Thrice-greatest" refers to Hermes
Trismegistus as the greatest of all philosophers, the greatest of all kings, and the
Hermetica
greatest of all priests. The story that developed around him held him to be a
mythical king who reigned for 3,226
years. He carried an emerald, upon which
was recorded all of philosophy, and the
caduceus, the symbol of mystical illumination. He vanquished Typhon, the
dragon of ignorance and mental, moral,
and physical perversion. He is credited
with writing 36,525 books on the Principles of Nature. lamblichus reported the
number at 20,000, and Clement of Alexandria at forty-two books.
According to legend, the Hermetic
books were written on papyrus and
stored in one of the great libraries in Alexandria. Most were lost when the library burned. Surviving fragments supposedly were buried in a secret desert
location known only to select initiates.
Extant works, which have been
translated into many languages, include
The Divine Pymander and The Vision.
The Divine Pymander sets forth how divine wisdom was revealed to Hermes,
and how he established his ministry to
spread the wisdom throughout the world.
The Vision tells of Hermes' mystical vision and cosmogony, the Egyptians' esoteric wisdom, and the spiritual development of the soul. Passages bear
resemblance to the writings of Plato and
Philo and to the Gospel of St. John.
The legendary Emerald Tablet (or
Emerald Table), which Hermes Trismegistus holds in art, is said to be inscribed
with the whole of the Egyptians' philosophy, including the magical secrets of the
universe. According to legend it was
found clutched in the hand of the body of
Hermes Trismegistus in his cave tomb
(another version has it that Hermes Trismegistus's mummy was interred in the
Great Pyramid of Gizeh). No two translations of the Tablet are the same (a Latin
translation dates to c. 1200).
The Emerald Tablet is cited as the
credo of adepts, particularly the alchemists, who believed that mystical secrets
259
Sources: Rosemary Ellen Guiley. The Encyclopedia of Witches and Witchcraft. New
York: Facts On File, 1989; Manly P. Hall.
The Secret Teachings of All Ages. 1928.
Los Angeles: The Philosophic Research Society, 1977; Kurt Seligmann. The Mirror of
Magic. New York: Pantheon Books, 1948.
260
Hermetica
261
262
Hermetic
Dawn
Hinduism
Hildegard
of Bingen's
Scivias.
Hinduism
Religion indigenous to India, practiced by
those who are not Muslim, Buddhist,
Jain, or Sikh. Hinduism has no founder,
no defining creed, and no centralized hierarchy. It is vast, complex, and subtle,
and is both world-affirming and worlddenying. The major concepts of the mys-
263
264
The Upanishads put forth the concept of the One, Brahman, successor to
the thousands of Vedic gods, the ineffable
cosmic All that holds all things together
and unifies all life. Brahman is the one
reality and the eternal absolute. Brahman
brings all things into existence, supports
them, and reabsorbs them in the endless
cycle of birth, death, and rebirth, called
samsara. Brahman also is identified with
the Atman, the immortal part of the self
that is the soul in Western thought, and
which is eternal, absolute being, absolute
bliss, and absolute consciousness. This
absolute is within all things, not as an
emanation, but as a whole principle. The
mystical unity of Brahman with Atman is
expressed in the "great word," tat tvam
asi, or "that thou art" or in "I am Brahman."
The Upanishads also explain the unifying principles in the universe in elemental terms, such as power, breath, and
food, thus uniting matter and spirit.
The concept of maya ("deception"
or "illusion") forms the foundation of
mind and matter and is inseparable from
Brahman. Maya has two aspects, one of
which is ignorance that prevents one
from realizing Brahman, and one of
which is knowledge that leads one to
Brahman.
Because Brahman is beyond comprehension, in worship the transcendent divine principle is manifest as Ishvara
("lord of the universe"). Ishvara has three
aspects: Brahma (not to be confused with
Brahman), creator of the universe and belonging to the realm of maya; Shiva, the
sustainer and guardian of dharma (the
lawful order of the universe, especially
pertaining to morality and ethics); and
Vishnu, destroyer. Originally, all three
were equal in stature, but Brahmanism
has declined in favor of the Shaivism and
Vaishnavism, as well as the Shaktism of
Tantra.
The Hindu mystic strives to escape
from selfhood. All individuals are bound
Hinduism
Hinduism
265
Holistic healing
See Behavioral medicine.
Holy Grail
See Grail, the.
266
He eventually learned to control his levitation, and witnesses said that on occasion he seemed to fly. In 1853, after entering the Theological Institute in Newburgh, New York, to study religion, he
experienced an eleven-hour out-of-body
trip during which a spirit guide showed
him the afterworld.
For most of his life, Home lived as a
guest in various households. He attended
seances, but felt most mediums were
frauds and avoided contact with them.
When he began to conduct his own seances, he did so with the lights on, producing spectral lights, rappings, ghostly
hands that shook hands with the sitters,
and ghostly guitars that played music. He
moved tables, chairs, and objects and
tipped tables. He spelled out messages
from the dead by pointing at letters of the
alphabet written on cards. On occasion
he acted possessed, playing the piano or
accordion in great frenzy. He also was
seen to stretch or shrink his body, once
increasing his height by eleven inches to
six feet, six inches, and once shrinking to
five feet. To prove that he was not secretly manipulating hidden devices, he often asked his guests to hold his hands and
feet.
Home credited the phenomena to
spirits over whom he had no control. The
most reliable was named "Bryan." When
in trance Home referred to himself in the
third person as "Dan."
In 1855 he traveled to England and
Europe, where he was controversial but
welcomed in elite circles. His supporters
included author Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
and poet Elizabeth Barrett Browning.
Foes included David Brewster, a noted
scientist, and poet Robert Browning, who
so disliked Home that he wrote a twothousand-line poem called Mr. Sludge the
Medium.
In February 1856 Home announced
his spirits required him to withdraw from
public life for a year. After giving an audience to Pope Pius IX, he converted to
Hinduism
Horse
Homeopathy
See Behavioral medicine.
Honorton,
Charles
Horse
The horse has had mystical, spiritual, and
paranormal associations throught history. The horse, said psychiatrist Carl G.
Jung, represents "the mother within us,"
the intuitive understanding and magic
side of humankind. Sacred and revered
around the world since ancient times, the
horse has been associated with fertility,
the forces of nature, and clairvoyance. In
India the royal Vedic "Horse Sacrifice" of
a consecrated stallion ensured fecundity
to the queen and health and prosperity of
the kingdom and royal family. The Greek
fertility goddess, Demeter, was associated
267
with the horse, as were Aphrodite, goddess of love, and Artemis, goddess of the
hunt. In the Hindu Brihadaranyaka Upanishad, the horse is a symbol of the cosmos. The ancient Greeks and Romans related the hotse to thunder, water, wind,
and war. The Celts believed horses carried souls to the land of the dead. Epona,
a Celtic mother goddess, was patroness of
horses, and also was associated with
death and graves, healing spirits, the dog,
and birds.
In dreams the hotse is often an archetypal symbol of the human body in
terms of its animal instincts and drives.
In various shamanic cultures, the
horse is an important mystical symbol. It
is both a funerary animal, the mythical
image of death and the carrier of the
souls of the dead, and the means by
which the shaman takes magical flights of
ecstasy to fotbidden realms. In some ecstatic dances, the shaman mounts Ot carries on his shoulders a symbolic horse
made of sticks, leaves, or bamboo. The
funerary and ecstatic horse may be eightlegged, headless, or phantom. Among the
Yakut and Buryat of Siberia, the drum is
called the "shaman's horse." Some shamanic rituals involve horse sacrifice,
which enables the shaman to make a
mystical ascent to the sky. See Shamarnsm.
In witchcraft lore horses are said to
be vulnerable to bewitchment and the evil
eye. Witches supposedly borrowed horses
at night to ride to sabbats, returning them
exhausted in the morning. Brass bells on
harnesses and iron horseshoes hung in
stables are amulets against witches and
the evil eye.
Of all animals the horse is believed
to be one of the most psychic. Stories of
horses precognitive of unseen danger and
thus saving their riders from disaster are
legion throughout history.
In the 1920s an American filly
named Lady typed out precognitive messages by tapping typewriter keys with her
268
muzzle. Parapsychologists]. B. and Louisa Rhine investigated Lady in 1927, suspecting that she was not clairvoyant, but
was picking up telepathic instructions
from her owner. The Rhines could not
prove their theory. Lady was again investigated in 1946 by Dr. Thomas Garrett, a
skeptical N ew York psychologist, who
became convinced of the veracity of her
skill. Lady predicted the outcome of
horse races, the entry of the Unites States
and the Soviet Union into World War II,
and the victory of Harry Truman. In
1951 she directed police to the location
of a missing boy in Quincy, Massachusetts.
Clever Hans was a Russian stallion
who achieved fame in Berlin around 1904
for similar feats. He spelled out answers
to questions by shaking his head and nuzzling alphabet blocks, and stomped answers to mathematical questions. An investigator was able to demonstrate that
Hans was reading the body language of
his owners, which cued him in his responses. In Elberfeld, Germany, a stable
of "wizard horses" performed mathematical feats such as extracting cube roots by
tapping out answers with right and left
front hooves. To demonstrate that no
physical signals were given to the horses,
Karl Krall, the trainer, had them perform
with sacks tied over their heads. See Animal psi.
Sources: J. E. Cirlot. A Dictionary of Symbols. New York: Philosophical Library,
1971; Mircea Eliade. Shamanism. 1951.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press,
1964; Miranda Green. The Gods of the
Celts. Totowa, NJ: Barnes and Noble
Books, 1986; Into the Unknown. Pleasantville, NY: Reader's Digest, 1981; Geoffrey Parrinder, ed. World Religions from
Ancient History to the Present. New York:
Facts On File, 1971; Doreen Valiente. An
ABC
of
Witchcraft
Past
and
Present.
Amended ed. Custer, WA: Phoenix Publishing, 1986; Joseph Wydler. Psychic Pets:
The Secret World of Animals. New York:
Stonehill Publishing, 1978.
Horse
Hubbard, L. Ron
See Church of Scientology.
Humanistic psychology
See Psychology.
Huna
Ancient esoteric tradition of the Hawaiian Islands. Huna nearly died out as a
result of Christianization following the
arrival of Westerners in the eighteenth
century, but has been revived in the twentieth century, especially following the
modification of laws that outlawed its
practice.
Huna is not a religion but rather a
philosophy. Its present-day emphasis is
on healing and psychic arts; traditionally,
it also addressed science, the arts, professions, and magic. Huna means "that
which is hidden, or not obvious." It is
sometimes called Hidden Knowledge.
Huna has no hierarchy, but is comparable to a guild. Its initiated practitioners,
kahunas, meaning "priests, ministers,
sorcerers, experts in a profession," function in various specializations.
The origins of Huna are found in
mythology and concern the mythical civilizations of Mu (Lemuria) and Atlantis.
Long before those places existed, a race
of small-statured star people from the
Pleiades came to Earth and a sister planet
that no longer exists. The Earth visitors
settled on the continent of Mu, and became known as the People of Mu, or the
Manahuna or Menehune, "the people of
the secret power." Their philosophy was
Huna, which became divided into three
orders: the Intuitionists, who included
mystics, philosophers, psychologists, and
so on; the Intellectuals, the scientists and
engineers; and the Emotionals, the politicians, economists, and athletes. All had
psychic powers and practiced forms of
Huna
psychic healing. The sister planet selfdestructed in much the same fashion as
Atlantis did later, which caused cataclysms on Earth, and Mu sank. The
Menehune dispersed throughout the Pacific Ocean. In the Hawaiian Islands they
intermarried with the natives, and then
decided to leave so as not to lose their
racial identity. Their legacy was Huna,
which was passed on through families,
who initiated and trained the kahunas.
At some point the three orders became associated with Hawaiian deities.
The Intuitionists became the Order of
Kane, the highest and most spiritual god;
the Intellectuals became the Order of
Lono, god of medicine, meteorology, and
agriculture; and the Emotionals became
the Order of Ku, the god of the unconscious, sorcery, war, fertility, and rain.
By the time Captain Cook arrived in
1779, Huna had degenerated into little
more than a ceremonial priesthood. With
the arrival of Europeans in the eighteenth
century, conversion to Christianity was
rapid. Huna was outlawed by the misSlOnanes.
In the early twentieth century, Max
Freedom Long, a schoolteacher and businessman, spent fourteen years in the Hawaiian Islands, during which he recovered much Huna knowledge. He devoted
about thirty-six years to decoding the language and further research, and published six books on Huna, which continue to be the major sources. By the
latter twentieth century, it was estimated
that true kahunas numbered only about
2,500. The Order of Huna International
was formed in 1973 by Serge King, a
non-Polynesian kahuna.
A true kahuna is one who has been
initiated into the tradition by a natural or
adoptive parent and trained from childhood. The term is often misused by others who have kahuna abilities but technically are not one, such as psychics,
psychic healers, magicians, and so on.
Kahunas have counterparts elsewhere in
269
Healing
Huna takes a holistic approach to
healing that takes into consideration attitudes, thoughts, and emotions as well as
physical causative factors. The body is
held to be an energized thought-form and
has an aka, an etheric body, which is the
pattern on which the physical body is organized. Illness results when the conscious mind conflicts with the patterns of
the aka. Healing involves working with
the ku, the subconscious, or "bodymind."
Like other psychic and spiritual healers, kahuna healers are conduits for the
healing properties of mana, the effective
energy or power that is the Huna concept
of the Universal Life Force. See Universal
life force. Healing comes from the Godhead, Kumulipo. A healing always begins
with prayer and attunement of mind,
body, and spirit to the All, followed by
spiritual
counseling,
Ho'oponopono,
which means "to make right." Traditional treatments include massage and energy field manipulation (see Bodywork),
blood cleansing, colon cleansing, herbal
remedies, special diets, rituals, and amulets, such as charged natural objects
(stones, for example) which are determined to be good sources of mana-or
which the kahuna charges himself or herself. See Healing, faith and psychic; Shamanism.
Psychic Powers
Kahunas consider psychic abilities
natural to all people. They cultivate all
psi abilities, including telepathy, clairvoyance, precognition, and psychokinesis,
the latter of which includes such feats as
weather control and firewalking. See
270
Magic
Magical skills are gained from mental disciplines and use of mana. Evil sorcery is not part of the Huna tradition,
though kahunas are sometimes confused
with ano-anos, evil sorcerers. Traditionally, the sorcerer is feared for his ability
to cast a "death prayer" spell in which he
kills at a distance. Kahunas possess
counter-sorcery magical skills of protection, sending-back, and a sort of exorcism that is not expulsion of an entity,
but a ridding of negative influences. See
Magic.
Sources: Steve Bogardus. "Kahuna: Ancient
Hawaiian Healers." Venture Inward 4, no.
2 (March/April 1988): 16-19; Enid Hoffman. Huna: A Beginner's Guide. Gloucester, MA: Para Research, 1976; Serge King.
Kahuna Healing. Wheaton, IL: The Theosophical Publishing House, 1983; Max
Freedom Long. The Secret Science Behind
Miracles. Los Angeles: Kosman Press,
1948; Shirley Nicholson, compo Shamanism. Wheaton, IL: The Theosophical Publishing Co., 1987.
Huna
271
272
magnifying glass. He graduated from Balliol College in 1915. His first book was a
volume of poetry, The Burning Wheel,
published in 1916. He rose to literary
prominence during the 1920s and 1930s
with novels satirizing the European intellectual "lost generation."
He married Maria Nys in 1919, with
whom he had one child, Matthew. They
emigrated to the United States in 1937,
and settled in California in 1940. There
Huxley received treatments that improved his vision.
In the 1940s he became increasingly
interested in mysticism, and in the use of
drugs to experience non ordinary reality.
His views on mysticism, especially Eastern mysticism, as a route to personal psychological freedom are expressed in The
Perennial
Philosophy
(1945).
Hurkos,
Peter (1911-1988)
273
274
Hypnagogic/hypnapompic states
(also hypnogogic/hypnopompic
states)
Intermediate stages between waking and
sleep, during which the mind is receptive
to sounds, images, ideas, feelings, and intuitions. Most likely the material rises up
from the unconscious, but some of it may
be psychic in nature. If dreams provide,
as Edgar Cayce said, contact with spiritual and psychic forces, then the hypnagogic and hypnapompic states are the
gateways to those forces.
As one descends into the first stage
of sleep, one enters the hypnagogic state,
a semiconscious twilight during which
the conscious mind quiets and transfers
dominance to the subconscious mind.
During this state one experiences a spontaneously generated reverie of sketchy
and fleeting images, impressions, and,
quite often, clairaudient voices. The reverie ends as one enters sleep.
The hypnapompic state is similar to
the hypnagogic state, occurring at the end
of the sleep cycle as one emerges from
sleep into wakefulness.
The imagery that occurs in the hypnagogic and hypnapompic states is not
the same as dream imagery, but can be
equally instructive to the individual in
terms of self-understanding. The hypnagogic/hypnapompic
reveries are the
equivalent of visual thinking, often expressed in the individual's own system of
symbols. Interpreted, these symbols can
provide answers to questions and problems, and even alert one to future circumstances and events. Rousing oneself
from a hypnagogic reverie to record the
images, feelings, and sounds is as benefi-
Huxley,
Aldous
(Leonard)
(1894-1963)
Hypnosis
An induced altered state of consciousness
in which the subject becomes passive and
is responsive to suggestion, and may also
exhibit heightened psychic awareness. The
term "hypnosis" comes from Hypnos, the
Greek god of sleep, and was coined in
1842 by James Braid, a celebrated English surgeon.
The altered state is induced through
a variety of methods, such as a fixed
gaze; monotonous rhythm of color, movement, or sound; and suggestion. States of
hypnosis are (1) light, in which the subject is lethargic and is aware of what is
taking place around him or her; (2) cataleptic, in which the muscles become rigid;
and (3) somnambulistic, a deep trance in
which the subject can be manipulated by
the hypnotist's suggestions and experiences hallucinations, anesthesia, and psi
phenomena. Contrary to popular belief,
hypnosis cannot be used to force a person
to act against his or her will.
It is estimated that 90 percent of the
population can be hypnotized, although
only a small percentage can attain a deep
trance. Left-brain dominant people are
more susceptible to hypnosis than rightbrain people.
The precursor of hypnosis was ani-
Hypnosis
275
276
mal magnetism the most important physical discovery in several centuries. The
first public demonstration of hypnotism
in the Soviet Union took place in 1924,
conducted by Dr. L. L. Vasiliev in a demonstration of telepathic hypnosis. During
Stalin's oppressive regime, hypnotism fell
into disrepute along with all psychic phenomena. Research resumed after Stalin's
death in 1953. See Gurdjieff, Georgei
Ivanovitch; Past-life recall; Telepathic
hypnosis.
Sources: Slater Brown. The Heyday of Spiritualism. New Yark: Hawthorn Books,
1970; Eric Cuddon. The Meaning and
Practice of Hypnosis. New York: Citadel
Press, 1965; Alfred Douglas. Extrasensory
Powers: A Century of Psychical Research.
London: Victor Gollancz Ltd., 1976; Martin Ebon. Psychic Warfare: Threat or Illusion? New York: McGraw-Hill, 1983;
Henry Gris and William Dick. The New
Soviet Psychic Discoveries.
Englewood
Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1978; Thomas
Jay Hudson. The Evolution of the Soul.
Chicago: A. C. McClurg & Co., 1904; Ron
McRae. Mind Wars. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1984; Janet Oppenheim. The
Other World: Spiritualism and Psychical
Research in England, 1850-1914. Cam-
Hypnosis
I
"I AM" Religious Activity, the
Religious movement founded in 1931 by
Americans Guy W. and Edna Ballard.
The "I A.\1" Religious Activity offers believers the opportunity to communicate
with the Ascended Masters, particularly
Jesus and Saint Germain, and through
them to realize the divinity of the Mighty
"I A1\1" Presence in all people.
The group takes its name from Exodus 3: 14-15, in which God tells Moses
from the burning bush, "I AM who I
A.\1." The Mighty "I A1\1" Presence represents the individualized existence of
God in all people: the light, love, and
power of God; God in Action. "I AM"
itself comes from YHVH, the Israelite
name for God, usually pronounced "Yahweh." The letters are a third-person verb
form possibly meaning "He causes to
be."
Founder Guy W. Ballard (18781939), a Spiritualist and occultist, had
been seeking proof of the Ascended Masters for years when he allegedly encountered Saint Germain in 1930 on a trip to
Mt. Shasta in California. Ballard was investigating reports that a group of "Divine Men" called "the Brotherhood of
Mt. Shasta" had been sighted walking in
the mountains. While hiking he met a
stranger who looked like another young
walker but instead revealed himself as the
Ascended Master Saint Germain. He offered Ballard a creamy liquid to slake his
thirst, claiming it came from the "Universal Supply." Ballard wrote that the
draught had a vivifying effect on him.
Saint Germain explained that he had been
seeking a person in Europe and America
worthy to receive the instructions of the
"Great Laws of Life," and had decided
that Guy, his wife, Edna, and their son,
Donald, should be his "Accredited Messengers." Through a series of meetings,
Ballard received Saint Germain's wisdom
and plans for implementing the Seventh
Golden Age: the "I AM" age of earthly
perfection. Ballard also witnessed his
own past lives, learning that he had been
George Washington.
As a result of the experiences, the
Ballards founded the "I AM" Religious
Activity, the Saint Germain Press, and the
Saint Germain Foundation in Chicago in
1932. Ballard wrote of his enlightenment
under the pseudonym "Godfre Ray
King" in Unveiled Mysteries (1934) and
The Magic Presence (1935). The Ballards
began holding classes and seminars
around the country, selecting devoted
students, or chelas, as "appointed messengers" to carry on the work.
By 1936 the Ballards had published
the "[ AM" Adorations and Affirmations
(1935), outlining the decrees, affirmations, and invocations used by students of
the "I AM"; "[ AM" Discourses, a series
of lectures by Saint Germain; the "I AM"
Songs, a hymnal; and the Foundation's
magazine, The Voice of the "[ AM."
277
278
I Ching
An ancient system of Chinese wisdom, often consulted in oracular divination. The
I Ching, or Book of Changes, consists of
sixty-four hexagrams of solid and broken
lines. A hexagram is determined by the
results of tossing three coins three times,
or tossing fifty yarrow sticks. Each hexagram has a meaning, which must be interpreted by the inquirer.
The I Ching represents an entire philosophy based on the concept of a unified
and cyclical universe, in which the future
develops according to fixed laws and
numbers. There is no "coincidence" or
"chance," but causality. The I Ching
shows what is possible when the mature
"superior man" is in harmony with the
flow of yin and yang energy. Its symbols
reveal a high moral, social, and political
code.
The I Ching does not give definitive
answers, but forces the inquirer to look
within for answers. It reflects a moment
in time, and shows probable outcomes if
various alternatives are undertaken. As a
teacher it instructs the pupil in how the
superior man would respond to situations. Like the Tarot the I Ching requires
intuitive thought, and an awareness of
the flow and flux of energy throughout
the universe.
Psychiatrist Carl G. Jung appreciated
the I Ching for its demonstration of the
principle of synchronicity, or "meaningful coincidences": the random tossing of
I Ching
279
Iddhis.
See Siddhis.
280
TIluminati
Term first used in fifteenth-c~ntury Europe to signify adepts, specifically those
who were quite learned or who possessed
"light" from direct communication with a
higher source. It was associated with various occult sects and secret orders, including the Rosicrucians and the Freemasons.
The most highly organized sect, the
Order of Illuminati, was founded in Bavaria on May 1, 1776, by Adam Weishaupt, a twenty-eight-year-old professor
of law. There were five initial members.
Weishaupt may have created the order
because he aspired to join the Masons,
which he did in 1777. In 1780 he was
joined by Baron von Knigge, arespected
and high-level Mason, which enabled him
to incorporate Masonic elements into his
organizational structure and rites. The
Order failed to obtain official Masonic
recognition, however, at a Masonic conference in 1782.
Illuminism was antimonarchial, and
its identification with republicanism
gained it many members throughout Germany. In 1784 Masonry was denounced
to the Bavarian government as politically
dangerous, which led to the suppression
of all secret orders, including the Masons
and Illuminati. Later the name "Illuminati" was given to followers of Louis
Claude de St. Martin (1743-1803),
French mystic, author, and founder of the
Martinist sect in 1754. See Cagliostro,
Count Alessandro.
The Order of Illuminati included
such distinguished figures as Goethe, Cagliostro, and Franz Anton Mesmer. Cagliostro was initiated in 1781 at Frankfurt to the Grand Masters of the
Templars, the name used by the order
there. Cagliostro supposedly received
money from Weishaupt to be used on behalf of Masonry in France. Cagliostro
later connected with the Martinists.
Following its suppression in Bavaria,
the Order was revived in 1880 in Dresden
I Ching
Imagery
Imagery
Mental phenomena that play significant
roles in psi activity, creative and physical
performance, behavioral medicine and
healing, meditation, mystical experiences,
and magic. Imagery includes visual pictures of colors, shapes, patterns, inanimate and animate objects; auditory sensations of words, music, and sound; and
thoughts and feelings associated with various stimuli. Imagery is a way to contact
the unconscious mind and harness its
powers. As such it has been employed
since ancient times in the East and among
preindustrial societies.
Imagery occurs spontaneously during waking fantasies, dreams, and in hallucinations (apparitions). With training it
can be employed deliberately in goaloriented tasks. Studies have shown imagery to be enhanced in the hypnotic
state.
Imagery is subjective. Studies have
shown that some people naturally are
"high-imagers," while others are "low-
281
282
the target image is reorganized in a recognizable pattern, but different from the
original; (3) part of the target image is
embedded in additional and new material, and missing elements are filled in by
imagination, memory, and so on (this is
often a "near-hit" or "near-miss" in
tests); (4) the target image is transformed
into a different but similar image; and (5)
the target image is not perceived, but
does simulate associations on the part of
the percipient.
Gifted psychics may receive their psi
information in one or two dominant
ways, or may experience all five. Gerard
Croiset, for example, received both unchanged images and associations. In some
cases, a vibration would begin and make
him feel filled inside. A serious problem
caused him to see many colors, which
would begin to spin around him until
they formed three-dimensional pictures.
In diagnosing illness, for example, an image of peaches meant cancer to him. The
association was formed because the night
his mother had died of cancer, she had
left half-eaten peaches by her bedside. See
Croiset, Gerard.
Russian psychic Wolf Messing said
the thoughts of others became colorful
images in his mind; he saw pictures
rather than heard words. The thoughts of
the deaf and dumb were clearer than
those of others. See Messing, Wolf Grigorievich.
Some of the most promising research
in the manifestation and processing of psi
imagery has been done in the Ganzfeld
stimulation test. See Ganzfeld stimulation.
Both the process-oriented and goaloriented imagery are used in various techniques for creative visualization, which
are intended to yield a host of benefits,
including improved health, relationships,
career and financial success, spiritual
growth and happiness. See Creative visualization. Imagery is integral to the martial arts disciplines of the East, and to the
Imagery
Imagery
itation techniques as a means to transcend thought and reach a unitive consciousness. Images are either geometric
shapes, such as a lotus or yantra, or divinities. Tantric Buddhism in particular
makes extensive use of vivid and complex
imagery. Through yoga concentration exercises, the adept trains himself or herself
to visualize shapes and colors, then
progresses to more complex imagery of
Tibetan letters, deities, and mandalas.
Ritual dramas are projected through imagery that attains a dream-like state,
which the adept controls at will. The visualization demonstrates the illusory nature of the material plane, and that the
physical body is created by the mind. See
Lotus; Mandala; Meditation; Yoga.
While imagery is employed to reach
supreme illumination, the state itself is
characterized by an absence of all
thought, and thus no imagery-one of the
reasons why mystics have such a difficult
time describing their experiences. See
Mystical experiences; Peak experiences.
Meditating upon geometric shapes
has been shown to enhance intuitive faculties. See Intuition.
In magic imagery is used to effect
spells and transcend ordinary consciousness. It is both process- and goaloriented, and employs various symbols
and sigils, which are ritually imbued with
power. By visualizing the symbol or sigil,
the magician accesses the power, spirit, or
deity represented by it. Poet William Butler Yeats, a member of the Hermetic Order of the Golden Dawn, recognized the
great power of symbols, not only in
magic but in art as well. The artist, he
believed, could access metaphysical truths
through magic (the use of imagery) and
translate the truths into the concrete imagery and symbolism of art. See Magic.
See also Altered states of consciousness;
Drugs in mystical and psychic experiences; ESP (extrasensory perception) ;
Hypnagogic/hypnapompic
states; Psychic; Shamanism; Symbol.
283
Incline effect
See Decline/incline effects.
Inspiration
A right-brain phenomenon in which profound insights, information, intuitions,
and creativity burst through to the waking consciousness in startling clarity. In-
284
Imagery
alone and in "good cheer," such as walking after a good meal, or traveling in a
carriage, or during sleepless nights. At
those times the ideas flowed best and
most abundantly, he said, and he heard
his compositions all at once and not as
successive parts. The music poured into
his thoughts in finished form, needing
only to be committed to paper. Albert
Einstein's breakthrough to the theory of
relativity came with what he called "the
happiest thought of my life," when he
was inspired by the vision of a person
falling off a roof, and the realization that
the person was both at rest and in motion
simultaneously.
The onset of inspiration sometimes is
accompanied by physical sensations, such
as chills, burning, tingling, "electric
glows," and "fuzzy" feelings that something profound is about to happen. Beethoven said his whole body shivered and
his hair stood on end when inspiration
struck. He felt plunged into a mysterious
state of oneness with the world, in which
all the forces of nature were his instruments.
Inspiration can be triggered by meditation, deep prayer, fasting, psychedelic
drugs, and even the onset of acute psychosis. Individuals who are skilled in
meditation, and thus spend more time in
an alpha state, are likely to experience a
higher frequency of inspiration. See Altered states of consciousness; Intuition;
Mystical experiences.
Sources: Nandor Fodor. An Encyclopedia
of Psychic Science. 1933. Secaucus, NJ:
Citadel Press, 1966; Philip Goldberg. The
Intuitive Edge. Wellingborough, Nonh-
14; Gardner Murphy. "Research in Creativeness: What Can It Tell Us about Extrasensory Perception?" The Journal of the
American
Intuition
Society
for Psychical
Research
Institut Metaphysique
International
See Parapsychology.
Intuition
A clear and direct knowing from within,
also referred to as a hunch, a gut feeling,
a gut response, and even luck. Intuition is
a knowingness that comes without explanation as to how or why. It is a rightbrain function involving extrasensory
perception (ESP), but much broader; it
functions on physical, emotional, mental,
and spiritual levels. Each individual experiences intuition differently. There may
be physical sensations, such as tingling of
the skin or a feeling of leaden weights in
the stomach; clairaudient or inner voices;
seemingly inexplicable attractions or
aversions to newly met people; inspirational solutions to problems; feelings of
closeness to God or the Divine Force;
mental imagery; or cues from the environment, such as circumstances that alter
plans.
Some definitions of intuition include
visions, as well as the transmission of information from spirit guides or entities,
though these broad definitions may be
disputed by some.
285
286
comes from within. Cayce said that impressions obtained from the physicaV
mental self, rather than the spiritual self,
were not intuition.
According
to
William
Kautz,
founder (1979) and director of the Center
for Applied Intuition in San Francisco, intuitive information comes from the superconscious mind. To reach the conscious
mind, it must travel through the subconscious, where it may be distorted by fears,
memories, and impressions stored there.
By cultivating intuitive growth through
processes previously mentioned, the subconscious obstacles can be reduced or
eliminated.
Environmental factors can enhance
or inhibit intuition. An ideal intuitionstimulating room is painted light green,
aqua, or chartreuse, lit with natural sunlight, and warmed to between 70 degrees
or 73 degrees Fahrenheit with a humidity
between 60 percent and 70 percent. See
Colors. Music aids receptivity to intuition
by stimulating a relaxed state, triggering
memories, and causing right- and leftbrain hemispheres to work in greater
unity. See Music. The presence of plants
helps to keep air clean of irritating pollutants.
Intuition, along with other psychic
skills, has been applied on an increasing
basis since the early 1970s to a wide
range of scientific and business endeavors. Kautz developed a technique called
"intuitive consensus," in which highly
skilled channelers and psychics are given
questions related to problems or situations; the information is validated as
much as possible by empirical methods.
The process has been shown to be effective and save time and money over traditional methods of validating hypotheses.
Similar programs have been employed in
California by the Stanford Research Institute of San Francisco (SRI) and the
Mobius Group of Los Angeles. The importance of intuition in the business
world also has received greater recogni-
Intuition
Intuition
most intimate secrets of life. In deep meditation or contemplation, mystics experience intuitive flashes in which they perceive the ineffable nature of the cosmos,
the Divine Force, the soul, and the unity
of all things. P. D. Ouspensky, who popularized the Gurdjieff Work, gave the
name "Tertium Organum" to what he
called "intuitive logic" or "higher logic,"
defined as the "logic of infinity, the logic
of ecstasy," which he said has existed
since time immemorial in great philosophical systems and holds the key to the
mysteries. The formula of this intuitive
logic may be expressed as "A is both A
and not A," or "A is All." Ouspensky
said Plotinus's treatise, On Intelligible
Beauty, embodies the fullest expression
of this logic. Plotinus said that "every
thing contains all things in itself ... so
that all things are everywhere, and all is
all. ... And the splendour there is infinite." See Imagery; Mystical experiences.
Sources: Roberto Assagioli. Psychosynthesis: A Manual of Principles and Techniques. 1965. New York: Penguin Books,
1976; Harmon Bro. Edgar Cayce on Religion and Psychic Experience. 1970. New
The Academy of Religion and Psychical Research (1988): 73-89; Frieda Fordham. An
Introduction
to Jung's Psychology.
1953.
287
neling: The Intuitive Connection. San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1987; William H.
Kautz, Sc.D., and Melanie Branon. "The
Intuitive Connection." New Realities 8, no.
4 (March/April 1988): 28-39; Jacques de
Marquette.
Introduction to Comparative
Mysticism. New York: Philosophical Library, 1949; P. D. Ouspensky. Tertium Organum. 1916. Rev. ed. New York: Alfred
A. Knopf, 1981; Louisa Rhine. ESP in Life
and Lab. New York: Collier Books, 1967;
Louisa Rhine. Hidden Channels of the
288
Intuition
Jainism
See Mysticism.
Jainism
289
290
ficient to produce one white crow; a single one is sufficient." Piper possessed
"supernormal knowledge," he said, and
thus was a white crow. While James remained committed to empiricism, as he
stated in a lecture in 1896, he also was
concerned with enlarging the scope of science to include phenomena that cannot be replicated and occur according to
no known physical laws. See Piper, Leonora E.
James served as vice president of the
SPR from 1890 to 1910, and from 1894
to 1895 served as president of the society
as well. Around 1898 to 1899, an incident of clairvoyance piqued his curiosity,
and he investigated it. The case concerned
a Mrs. Titus of Lebanon, New Hampshire, who dreamed where the missing
body of a drowned girl could be found.
James approached it with skepticism, but
concluded in a 1907 article in the ASPR's
Proceedings, that the case "is a decidedly
solid document in favor of the admission
of a supernormal
faculty of seership"
I
I
James, William
(1842-1910)
mans, Green
Reinhold, 1977.
291
..,--""m~~ll
'...
Jesus
In Christianity the son of God, son of
man, Messiah, and redeemer of humankind. Mainstream Christianity believes
the crucifixion and death of Jesus, c. A.D.
33, to be the central reality of humankind's spiritual salvation. By his death
and resurrection from the dead, Jesus restored the relationship between God and
humankind, which had been broken by
original sin: the fall of Adam and Eve as
described in Genesis, the first book of the
Bible. Various modern theories dispute
the divinity and even the sex of Jesus.
292
Jesus
Non-Christian Historical
Sources
Historians contemporary with Jesus
who wrote about him include Flavius Josephus, a first-century Jewish historian
Jesus
Modern Theories
Various recent studies of Jesus throw
new light on previously unconsidered
possibilities. These are often not developed Christologies, but single-concept
theories presented somewhat out of any
theological context. Most theories that
depart from orthodox Christianity are
routinely rejected by the ecclesiastical
community, sometimes with a great deal
of hostility.
Many academic discussions concerning Jesus are comparatively harmless, and
even uncontroversial, such as Richard A.
Batey's hypothesis that Jesus was an actor, or at least was familiar with contemporary theater. More radical theories include the opinion that Jesus never existed,
or that he did not die on the cross, or
even the extreme notion that he was an
Anti-Christ.
The idea that Jesus was one of the
many Levantine magicians is presented
by renowned Columbia University scholar Morton Smith in his Jesus the Magi
293
294
Jesus
Divinity of Jesus
Various theories question whether
Jesus was truly divine or was merely a
great ~~l'.t,_.The Gospels do not refer to
Jesus as God, but present him as the Messiah, the anointed of the Lord. The divinity of Jesus was confirmed at the Council
of Nicaea in 325, although the affirmation perhaps was influenced more by politics than theology. The Alexandrians at
the council stressed the divinity of Jesus,
and Emperor Constantine, perhaps not
wanting to alienate Alexandria because
of its strategic and commercial values,
agreed. The deification of mortals was
not an extraordinary matter in those
times. Emperors routinely were made
gods following their deaths, and Constantine anticipated this for himself.
Fundamental to nearly every Christian tradition that has evolved since Constantine is the tenet that Jesus is God incarnate who r~om
the dead; to m~st
Chrlsuans he is the one and only GodMan. Traditional Christians believe they
share in this union of God and Man
"through, with, and in" Christ. To most
of those who believe in the Trinity (God
the Father, God the Son, and God the
Holy Spirit), Christ is the incarnated second person of the Trinity (God the Son).
The Trinity is rejected as a doctrine by,
for example, the Unitarian Church, a
Christian denomination that stresses tolerance of difference in religious opinions.
Sex of Jesus
I
I
I
I
Theories demonstrating the possibility that Jesus was female ("Christa") have
been made by various serious scholars
since the Inquisition. The Sacred Virgin
and the Holy Whore (1988), by Anthony
Harris, calls upon both traditional and
original sources. The former include new
interpretations of the reference by Josephus to Jesus being only five feet tall, and
the reference in the Gospel of physician-
Jesus
295
augurated through the death and resurrection of Christ. In this sense an emphasis is given to the theological virtue of
hope-the stress on the teaching of Jesus
that the future realm of Jewish hope was
now becoming a reality and would (soon)
be consummated. However, the term in
ecumenical theology more recently has
been used to refer to a new understanding
of the church's conciliation (representative government) and catholicity (universality). See Christology.
Sources: Michael Baigent, Richard Leigh,
and Henry Lincoln. Holy Blood, Holy
Grail. New York: Delacourte, 1982; John
Dart. The Jesus of Heresy and History: The
Discovery and Meaning of the Nag Hammadi Gnostic Library. Rev. and expanded
edition of The Laughing Savior: The Discovery and Significance of the Nag Hammadi Library. San Francisco: Harper &
Row, 1988; Vergilius Ferm, ed. The Encyclopedia of Religion. Secaucus, NJ: Poplar Books, 1955; Jeffrey Furst, ed. Edgar
Cayce's Story of Jesus. 1968. New York:
Berkley Books, 1976; Flavius Josephus. Antiquities of the Jews. Grand Rapids, MI:
Kregel, 1960; Kersten Holger. Jesus Lived
in India. Longmead, Dorset, England: Ele-
:.::.>
Jin Shin Do
See Bodywork.
296
Jesus
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Joan of Arc
own clothing and left her nothing but
men's clothing to wear. She was condemned as a relapsed heretic on May 28,
1431. On May 30 Joan recanted her confession and was excommunicated. She
was burned at the stake the same day in
Rouen. Charles VII never once attempted
to help her.
According to legend Joan's heart refused to burn, and the executioner discovered it whole in the ashes.
Pope Calixtus III annulled her sentence in 1450. She was canonized in 1920
by Pope Benedict XV. A national festival
in her honor is held in France on the
second Sunday in May. Her feast day is
May 30.
English psychical researcher Frederic
W. H. Myers hypothesized that Joan's visions and voices were externalizations of
her own inner voice coming from her
subconscious, which Myers called "the
subliminal self." He compared her saint
guides to the daimon of Socrates, an inner voice Socrates credited to a guiding
spirit from childhood. Joan's case, Myers
said, exhibited characteristics of motor
I
I
i
297
Witch-cult
in Western
Europe
(1921), were severely criticized by scholars and subsequently discredited. See Apparition; Witchcraft.
Sources: Rosemary Ellen Guiley. The Encyclopedia of Witches and Witchcraft. New
298
Carmel.
These works describe the soul's mystical journey toward God, a.nd detail
three stages of mystical union: purgation,
illumination, and union. Detachment and
suffering are presented as requirements
for the purification and illumination of
the soul. St. John of the Cross describes
the "dark night of the soul" as "an inflowing of God into the soul, which
purges it from its ignorances and imperfections, habitual, natural, and spiritual,
and which is called by contemplatives infused contemplation, or mystical theology." The phrase "dark night of the soul"
has since become a reference to the state
of intense personal spiritual struggle, in-
Julian of Norwich
Judge, William
See Theosophy.
Judo
See Martial arts.
(1342-after
1416)
299
300
gravely ill, received the last rites, and believed herself to be dying. At that point
she began to see visions of the suffering
of Christ, of the role of the Blessed Virgin, and of the whole plan of salvation,
accompanied by spiritual understanding
of these matters. The entire experience
happened quickly; Julian writes that she
saw God "in the twinkling of an eye." It
was accompanied by such extreme pain
that she later said that had she known it
would be so bad, she never would have
asked for it, nor would counsel anyone
else to ask for the same.
Julian reportedly felt the lower part
of her body die away (she may have suffered a heart attack or experienced a kundalini awakening). She asked to be
propped up so that she could fix her gaze
on a crucifix. She felt death take over as
her chamber constricted to a dark and
narrow space around her bed. Then the
visions began: She saw the crown of
thorns upon the head of the crucified Jesus, and a shower of dark red pellets of
blood running down from it like a summer rain, until the entire chamber was
filled with blood. The sixteen visions and
their teachings sprang from Jesus
crowned by thorns, his skin ripped by
flagellation. They occurred as she followed the blood, which first rushed to
hell, where she felt the Devil clutching her
throat, smelled his breath, and saw his
face and claws. The realm of the damned
was dark with devils all around. Then the
blood rushed upward to a high mountain
cathedral (the heart), where Christ sat on
a throne (coming to live in the heart).
This cosmos was filled with light.
Julian spent the next twenty years
contemplating these visions. In her writings she does not present her revelations
systematically; images and ideas recur
and lead to one another in a way that has
its own inner order. She interprets all her
images in terms of the scriptures and
Christian theology. Certain themes are
typically hers: Though she acknowledges
(1875-1961)
301
302
In May 1910 the Society for Psychical Research in London published Jung's
paper "The Psychological Foundations of
Belief in Spirits." In it he identified three
main sources for the belief in spirits: the
seeing of apparitions, mental disease, and
dreams, the most common of the three.
He said spirits of the dead are created
psychologically upon death: Images and
ideas remain attached to relatives and are
activated to form spirits by intensity of
emotion.
From 1907 to 1913, Jung was
greatly influenced by Sigmund Freud.
Jung once appeared to demonstrate psychokinetic powers in the presence of
Freud during a heated discussion. See
Freud, Sigmund. After several years of
close contact, Jung parted company with
Freud. A breaking point came when
Freud asked Jung to interpret a dream he
had, but refused to divulge a key association because it would damage Freud's
authority. Jung had significant disagreements with Freud, chiefly over Freud's
emphasis on sexuality as the basic, driving urge for people; his dismissal of spiritual aspects of the psyche and of the
paranormal; and concerning the meaning
of "symbol."
The break with Freud had a profoundly disturbing effect on Jung, and he
suffered a six-year-Iong breakdown during which he had psychotic fantasies. He
was called a "mystic" -a pejorative label
at the time-and
was shunned by his
peers. Freud had accused Jung of death
wishes against him, after he had
"fainted" twice in Jung's presence; Jung
denied the charge, but after his break
with Freud he developed a "Judas complex" about their relationship. He had
highly symbolic and Wagnerian-like
dreams in which he killed Freud.
During this psychotic phase of Jung's
life, he experienced numerous paranormal phenomena. He became immersed in
the world of the dead, which led to his
Seven Sermons to the Dead, written un-
der the name of the second-century Gnostic writer, Basilides, and published in
1916. He described the spirits of the dead
as "the voices of the Unanswered, Unresolved and Unredeemed." Also during
this phase, the distinction between his
dreams and visions eventually faded out
for Jung, and he later recorded them in
detail, especially in his autobiographical
account, Memories, Dreams, Reflections
(published posthumously in 1963).
Following his emergence from this
period, Jung pursued work on his own
theories. One of the most important was
his general theory of psychological types,
first published in 1921. He distinguished
two basic psychological types, extroverts
and introverts, who could be grouped according to four basic functions: thinking,
feeling, sensation, and intuition. Other
significant theories include the anima
(feminine principle) and animus (masculine principle), psychic images that exist
in everyone as feminine and masculine aspects; the collective unconscious; and archetypes. See Collective unconscious.
Jung took issue with Freud's definition of symbols as conscious contents
that provide clues to the unconscious
background. Such are signs or symptoms,
Jung said, while symbols are much different and should be understood as an intuitive idea. See Symbol.
He also took issue with Freud on the
topic of dreams. Freud saw dream symbolism as universal and said therapists
could interpret them. Jung maintained
that dreams are the private property of
the dreamer and speak a private language
that only the dreamer can interpret; some
dreams, however, come from the collective unconscious and belong to all humankind. See Dreams.
Mythology became especially important to Jung around the time of his writing one of his major works, Symbols
of Transformation (1911-12). See Mythology.
Jung was intensely interested in
303
304
phenomenology of the self, the latter culminating in the major work Aion in
1951. See Alchemy; I Ching; Synchronicity.
In Aion Jung summarized the roles
of the "archetypes of the unconscious"
and commented especially on the Christ
image as symbolized in the fish. While
there may not be a Jungian Christology
per se, Jung's work had a major influence
on Christian scholarship. See Christology. Religious themes are developed by
Jung in another major work of the period, "Answer to Job" (1952) as well as
in Mysterium
Coniunctionis
(19551956), which concerns alchemy. In the
latter, his last masterpiece, he states that
he was satisfied that his psychology was
at last "given its place in reality and established upon its historical foundations."
Jung believed in reincarnation; he
drew many of his beliefs from the Tibetan
Book of the Dead. He believed his own
incarnation was not due to karma, however, but "a passionate drive for understanding in order to piece together mythic
conceptions from the slender hints of the
unknowable"
(Nandor Fodor, Freud,
fung and the Occult, 1971). He feared
greatly for the future of humankind, and
said the only salvation lay in becoming
more conscious. He said he believed his
work proved that the pattern of God exists in every person.
Three days before he died, Jung had
the last of his visionary dreams, and a
portent of his own impending death. In
the dream he had become whole. A significant symbol was tree roots interlaced
with gold, the alchemical symbol of completion. When he died in his room in Zurich on June 6, 1961, a great storm arose
on Lake Geneva and lightning struck his
favorite tree.
Jungian principles have been found
to be applicable to nearly all academic
disciplines from mythology to religion to
quantum physics, and to nearly all as-
(1875-1961)
Dictionary
of Jungian
Analysis.
305
K
Kabbalah (also Cabala,
Kabala, Qabalah)
The mysticism of classical Judaism. Kabbalah is Hebrew for "that which is received," and refers to a secret oral tradition handed down from teacher to pupil.
The term "Kabbalah" was first applied to
secret, mystical teachings in the eleventh
century by Ibn Gabirol, a Spanish philosopher, and has since become applied to
all Jewish mystical practice. Though the
Kabbalah is founded on the Torah (the
Jewish scriptures and other sacred literature), it is not an intellectual discipline,
nor does it instruct the mystic to withdraw from humanity to pursue enlightenment. The Kabbalist seeks union with
God while maintaining a full social, family, and community life within the framework of traditional Judaism.
According to legend God taught
Kabbalah to angels. After the Fall they
taught it to Adam in order to provide humankind with a way back to God. It was
passed to Noah, then to Abraham and
Moses, who in turn initiated seventy Elders.
The theosophical and mystical lore
that grew into the Kabbalah appears to
have been influenced by Gnosticism and
Neoplatonism.
The earliest form of mystical literature is found in the tradition of the Merkabah mystics (c. 100 B.C.-A.D. 1000).
Merkabah
means
"God's
Throne-
306
I
I
i
Ii
ing three from each other. The rest represent dimensions of space. Together they
constitute a unity. The twenty-two letters
of the alphabet and their sounds comprise
the foundation of all things.
In 917 a form of practical Kabbalism was introduced by Aaron ben Samuel in Italy; it later spread through Germany and became known as German
Kabbalism or Early Hasidism. It drew
upon the Merkabah practices in that it
was ecstatic, had magic rituals, and had
as primary techniques prayer, contemplation, and meditation. The magical power
of words assumed great importance, and
gave rise to the techniques of gematria,
notarikon, and temura. See Gematria.
The German Kabbalists held that
God was too exalted for people to comprehend. However, mystics could perceive God's presence in the form of a divine fire or light, which is the first
creation, Shekinah, the Mother, God's female aspect. The mystic sought to unite
with this glory. The German Kabbalists
also conceived of four worlds: God's
glory, angels, the animal soul, and the intellectual soul.
Classical Kabbalah was born in the
thirteenth century in Provence, France,
and moved into Spain, where it was developed most extensively by medieval
Spanish Jews. The primary work from
which classical Kabbalah developed is
Sefer ha-Zohar (Book of Splendor), attributed to a second-century sage, Rabbi
Simeon bar Yohai, but actually written
between 1280 and 1286 by the Spanish
Kabbalist, Moses de Leon. According to
the story, Rabbi Simeon and his son,
Eleazar, persecuted by the Roman emperor Trajan, hid in a cave for thirteen
years where the Ben-Gurion Airport now
stands in Lod, Israel. After Trajan's death
the two emerged, but Rabbi Simeon was
so distraught at the lack of spirituality
among Jews that he returned to the cave
to meditate. After a year a voice told him
to let the ordinary people go their own
307
stituted in its place in scripture. The letters YHVH correspond to the Four
Worlds.
Through contemplation and meditation, the Kabbalist ascends the Tree of
Life. Only the most stable and ethical,
who have first purified their bodies,
minds, and spirits, are permitted to approach. The sephirot are contemplated by
visualizing them vibrating with color
(which represents various qualities), together with images of their corresponding
Hebrew letters of the divine names of
God, and the planets, angels, metals,
parts of the body, and energy centers.
Breath and sound also are utilized to raise
consciousness. The techniques are similar
to those of Eastern yoga disciplines. Like
yogis, the early Kabbalists experienced illuminations of light and heat that resemble descriptions of kundalini awakenings.
See Kundalini; Spiritual emergence;
Yoga.
The "short path" to enlightenment
was developed by another thirteenthcentury Spanish Kabbalist, Abraham ben
Samuel Abulafia (b. 1240). At age thirtyone Abulafia received a prophetic call,
and became a pupil of the mystic Baruch
Togarmi. Thus educated, Abulafia set
down his own form of tzeruf, or letter
permutation.
Hebrew letters have corresponding
attributes and numerical values which,
when meditated upon, unify the mind
and body and bring the mystic into contact with higher planes. To meditate on
letters is to meditate on all of Creation,
and to achieve one with the whole. Abulafia's tzeruf enabled mystics to attain
meaning beyond meaning.
The ideal time to begin tzeruf was
midnight. The mystic would begin writing sacred letters, combined with visualizations of the Tree and breathing techniques. A kundalini-type of ecstasy
reportedly would occur quickly. The ecstasy, called shefa ("divine influx"), descended into the mystic (as opposed to
308
Kachinas
Kachinas
Among the Pueblo supernatural beings or
the spirits of the ancestral dead, who
bring rain and perform other mostly ben-
309
310
fer prayers to the koko and throw offerings of food into the river, to be carried
to the Lake of the Dead.
The Zufii distinguish three categories
of koko: (1) people who have recently
died, and who mayor may not make
rain; (2) ancestors who have been dead
for quite a while, and who are petitioned
for health, rain, and good corn crops;
and (3) the original koko, who comprise
children who died by drowning after the
Emergence of people from the Underworld (the Zufii Creation myth) and
those who died and returned to the Underworld.
Not all spirits of the Zufii dead become koko. Those who do were initiated
during life into the koko society; initiates
include most men. Some spirits of the
dead become uwanammi, or water monsters, which also have the power to cause
rain. It is believed that in the koko village
at the lake bottom, the koko live happily
and dress in beautiful garments. They
visit the living by assuming the form of
clouds. It is not clear what happens to the
spirits of women and children. Wives apparently may join their husbands in the
village, but some say the spirits of children are turned into water monsters.
The Hopi dead do not go to a lake,
but to the sacred mountains. The Hopi
have numerous and clearly defined kachinas. Upon burial the Hopi address a
body, saying it is no longer Hopi but
changed into a kachina and has become
"cloud." The body is given a food offering and instructed to eat, and told,
"When you get yonder, you will tell the
chiefs to hasten the rain clouds here."
Kachinas also are represented by
dolls, which are made for educational
purposes for children; among the
Powamu the dolls are given to women
who want children. Kachina dolls are not
idols and are never worshiped. Production of kachina dolls for sale to the public
is an important modern craft among the
Hopi, who have kept alive much of their
Kachinas
of Oklahoma Press, 1964; Ruth M. Underhill. Red Man's Religion. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1965.
Kahuna
See Huna.
Kali Yuga
In Hinduism the present age, lasting
432,000 years and characterized by degeneration, violence, ignorance, sorrow,
materialism, waning religion, chaos, and
evil. A Hindu verse states that the age of
Kali Yuga is so abominable that if a person tells the truth, he will be beaten, but
if he lies, cheats, and bluffs, he will be
liked and accepted. Kali Yuga also is
called the "Dark Age" and "Age of
Iron."
According to the Mahabharata and
other texts of the Puranic period (c. A.D.
400 and later), the material universe has
a finite life. Time is measured by the
kalpa, a day in the life of Brahma, the
creator. One kalpa equals 4,320,000,000
earth years. The day is divided into a
thousand cycles of four ages, or yugas. In
the morning of a kalpa, Brahma creates
the three worlds of Earth, Heaven, and
Hell, which then begin to deteriorate
through the next three yugas. The last is
Kali Yuga, which began about five thousand years ago. By the end of Kali Yuga,
the degeneration is so great that Brahma
destroys the world, appearing as Kalki,
an armed warrior mounted on a white
horse, wielding a sword of destruction. In
some accounts the destruction is wreaked
by Vishnu, the protector of the universe,
who appears as Kalki. The wicked die,
Kali Yuga
the good are saved, and the world is created over again. In still other accounts,
Vishnu must incarnate as an avatar of
Krishna and save the world from Kali,
consort of Shiva and goddess of annihilation and destruction.
This process is repeated until
Brahma lives one hundred years (the
equivalent of 311 trillion, 40 million
earth years) and then dies. His death
marks the end of the material universe in
a giant cataclysm.
In the age of Kali Yuga, people forget their spiritual aim in life and become
captivated by the glitter of material
things. Lifespans shorten. In Satya Yuga,
the golden age, the average lifespan is
100,000 years. In Treta Yuga, the silver
age, it drops to 10,000 years, then to one
thousand years in Dvapara Yuga, the
bronze age. At the beginning of Kali
Yuga, it is one hundred years.
The evil effects of Kali Yuga may be
counteracted with yoga, chanting, and
spiritual devotion. Madame Helena P.
Blavatsky, the cofounder of Theosophy,
said Kali represents the fall of humankind, and must be overcome before nirvana can be attained. She said the symbol
of Kali Yuga is the reversed pentacle, the
sign of human sorcery.
Some Hindus and Buddhists believe
that the seven rishis, mythical guardians
of the human race and keepers of the sacred knowledge, are watching over the
earth through the Dark Age from their
places high in the Himalayas. See Yoga.
Sources: H. P. Blavatsky. Isis Unveiled: A
Master Key to the Mysteries of Ancient and
Modern Science and Theology. London &
311
Karate
See Martial arts.
Karma
In Hinduism and Buddhism, mental and
physical deeds that determine the consequences of one's life and rebirth.
Karma is Sanskrit for "deed." In
Hinduism karma includes deeds, the consequences of one's life or one's previous
life or lives, and the entire chain of cause
and effect. There are three types of
karma: agami-karma, which concerns
present causes and effects and which provides influence over the future through
the present; prarabdha-karma, which is
already caused and is in the process of
being effected; and sanchita-karma,
which is accumulated but yet to be effected. The playing out of karma can take
place over many lifetimes.
The individual is solely responsible
for his or her karma, reaping joy or sorrow as a result of thoughts and deeds.
The karma arises from one's samskaras,
the thoughts, impressions, and attributes
accumulated over lifetimes that make up
one's character. Karma can be either
good or bad with relative consequences.
All karma, good or bad, creates more
karma. Only the attainment of enlightenment eliminates new karma and the need
to reincarnate.
In Buddhism and Zen Buddhism,
karma (or kamma, as it is called in Pali)
is the universal law of cause and effect
that may be played out over a cycle
of rebirths. Karma is created by the
312
Kali Yuga
Ki
See Universal life force.
Kilner, Walter
See Aura.
Kirlian photography
even though he knew nothing about astrology. At the same time, he became a
partner in a venture to install horoscopedispensing machines in movie theaters.
The machines were so successful that
King left the radio business. He expanded
by distributing
horoscopes
through
stores, using the pseudonym Zolar, based
on the word zodiac and probably influenced by Kobar.
As Zolar King sold hundreds of millions of horoscopes around the world. He
also cast personal astrological charts, and
marketed astrological records and dream
interpretations.
He distributed Tarot
cards, talismans, incense, stones, scarabs,
and other occult merchandise. He wrote
books, such as Zolar's Horoscope &
Lucky Number Dream Book and Zolar's
Encyclopedia of Ancient and Forbidden
Knowledge.
King acknowledged that he did not
have the astrological aspects for becoming an astrologer. He liked to point out,
however, that he was born on the cusp of
Leo and Cancer, an auspicious sign for
business management. King died on January 16, 1976. See Astrology.
Sources: John Godwin. Occult America.
New York: Doubleday, 1972; Leslie A.
Shepard, ed. Encyclopedia of Occultism
and Parapsychology. 2d ed. Detroit: Gale
Research Co., 1984.
Kirlian photography
A technique for photographing objects in
the presence of a high-frequency, highvoltage, low-amperage electrical field, the
photographs of which show glowing,
multicolored emanations said to be auras
or biofields. Kirlian photography is
named after Semyon Kirlian, part-time
inventor and electrician from Krasnodar,
Russia, who pioneered work with the
procedure in the early 1940s. The process
remains highly controversial.
There is no evidence that Kirlian
photography is a paranormal phenome-
313
314
Kirlian photography
~-_jmji'Hm
__
.._.
Kirlian photography
315
316
--1~:
--_.---
--
--
--
Knights Templar
See Order of the Knights Templar.
Krippner, Stanley
See Dreams; Healing, faith and psychic.
Krishnamurti (1895-1986)
Although he was perhaps one of the most
influential spiritual teachers of the twentieth century, Jiddu Krishnamurti (Jiddu
is the surname) led no school, nor did he
believe in anyone path to truth. Instead
he denounced all occult theories, organizations, and structured methods as impediments to the search for true reality.
Krishnamurti was born on May 12,
1895, in India, the eighth child of nine in
a Brahmin family. His mother sensed his
destiny was one of sacred greatness, and
gave birth in the home's holy puja room,
dedicated to the devotion of household
gods.
Despite expectations Krishnamurti
performed poorly in school, causing
teachers and other adults to label him
mentally retarded. Nonetheless, at age
fourteen he caught the attention of C. W.
Leadbeater, who shared with Annie Bes-
Krishnamurti
(1895-1986)
Jiddu Krishnamurti
ant the leadership of the Theosophical
Society. Besant, and Madame Helena P.
Blavatsky before her, predicted the coming of a bodhisattva, or World Teacher
and Lord, Maitreya (the fifth and final
Buddha). Leadbeater believed that in
Krishnamurti he had found the vehicle.
By early 1909 Krishnamurti and his
younger brother, Nityananda, had become wards of the society and were sent
to England to enroll at Oxford. Leadbeater and Besant called Krishnamurti
"Alcyone" from "Halcyon," the brightest
star in the constellation Pleiades. Leadbeater used his clairvoyance to investigate
Krishnamurti's past lives and determined
that he had been a teacher and healer for
generations, and had served as a disciple
of Buddha. Krishnamurti joined the society's Esoteric Section, its inner group, in
late 1909. In January 1910 he was formally accepted by the Mahatma Master
Koot Hoomi (K.H.) and was initiated
into the Great White Brotherhood. He
was supposedly greeted by the Masters
Jesus, Comte de St. Germain, Serapis, Hi-
317
318
Krishnamurti (1895-1986)
Kundalini
of Transpersonal
Psychology
18,
Kulagina, Nina
See Parapsychology; Psychokinesis (PK).
Kundalini
A psycho-spiritual energy, the very energy of consciousness, said to reside
sleeping within the body, and which is
aroused either through spiritual discipline
or spontaneously to bring new states of
consciousness, including mystical illumination. Kundalini is Sanskrit for "snake"
or "serpent power," so-named because it
is said to lie coiled like a serpent in the
root chakra at the base of the spine. In
Tantra Yoga kundalini is an aspect of
Shakti, divine female energy and consort
of Shiva.
The power of kundalini is enormous,
and individuals who have experienced it
say it is beyond description. The phenomena associated with it vary, and include
bizarre physical sensations and movements, pain, clairaudience, visions, brilliant lights, superlucidity, psychical powers, ecstasy, bliss, and transcendence of
self. Kundalini has been described as liquid fire and liquid light.
Knowledge and cultivation of kundalini has been most developed in Indian
yoga, which seeks to transmute the en-
319
320
Kundalini
_.ii!J:,
Kundalini
Writings
of Gopi Krishna.
321
L
Lama
In Tibetan Buddhism a senior member of
the Tibetan Order, a holy person of advanced rank and great spiritual achievement. Literally, lama means "superior"
or "none above." Until Communist
China invaded Tibet in 1959, lamas
served as abbots of the monasteries, and
thus had enormous influence over the secular and religious lives of the populace.
322
Lama
Co., 1984.
I
I
I
I
I
I
Leary, Timothy
(b. 1920)
323
.....-==
at Millbrook Leary met and married his
third wife, Rosemary Woodruff, in 1965.
The Millbrook house was closed down
and Leary and Alpert parted ways. Alpert
pursued spiritual studies in India, and
eventually changed his name to Ram
Dass. See Ram Dass.
In 1965 Leary's troubles with the
law began. In 1970 he was sentenced to a
total of twenty years in prison by judges
in Houston, Texas, and Santa Ana, California, on separate charges of possession
of marijuana. He was incarcerated in the
California Men's Colony west in San Luis
Obispo, California, but after several
months managed to escape with the help
of friends in the Weathermen and Black
Panthers.
Leary fled to Europe, where he hid in
Switzerland and experimented with heroin. He was captured in 1973 and extradited to the United States, where he was
incarcerated for thirty-two months on
drug and escape charges. During his jail
time, he was aided by a friend, Joanna
Harcourt-Smith, who legally changed her
last name to Leary to help his publicity
cause. They parted ways when Leary was
released.
In 1978 he married his fourth wife,
Barbara. He has lectured widely on the
college and New Age conference circuits.
He is the author or coauthor of numerous
books and monographs on the psychedelic experience. See Drugs in mystical
and psychic experiences.
Sources: Timothy Leary. Flashbacks: An
Autobiography.
Los Angeles: Jeremy P.
Tarcher, 1983; Timothy Leary. Changing
My Mind, Among
Others. Englewood
Lemniscate
A powerful occult symbol that looks like
a figure eight lying on its side. The lem-
324
niscate signifies eternity, infinity, regeneration, the Holy Spirit, infinite wisdom,
and higher consciousness. Its serpentine
shape has no beginning and no end, and
represents the endless spiraling and balancing of opposing forces in the universe.
The lemniscate appears in various interpretations of the Tarot, and is used in
meditation as a symbol for focusing concentration. In mathematics it represents
infinity. See Symbol.
Sources: Francis Barrett. The Magus.
Lemuria
Legendary lost continent of the Indian
Ocean said to be the original Garden
of Eden and the cradle of the human
race.
The theory of the existence of Lemuria arose in the nineteenth century,
when scientists sought to explain Darwin's theory of evolution of similar species from a common ancestor. Philip
Sclater, an English zoologist, suggested
that a land bridge once existed during the
Eocene Age from the Malay Archipelago
to the south coast of Asia and Madagascar, thus connecting India to southern Africa. The theory explained why such animals as the lemur are found primarily on
Madagascar and in parts of Africa, but
also in India and the Malay Archipelago.
Sclater coined the name "Lemuria" after
the lemur.
Sclater's hypothesis was supported
by other scientists, including Ernst
Haeckel, T. H. Huxley, and Alfred Rus-
Leary, Timothy
(b. 1920)
sell Wallace. Haeckel, a German biologist, proposed that the lost continent also
had been "the probable cradle of the human race."
Madame Helena P. Blavatsky, cofounder of Theosophy, believed that Lemuria had been inhabited by the Third
Root Race of humankind, whom she described as fifteen-feet-tall, brown-skinned
hermaphrodites with four arms; some
had a third eye in the back of the skull.
Their bizarre feet, with protruding heels,
enabled them to walk either forward or
backward. Their eyes were set far apart
in their flat faces so that they could see
sideways. They had highly developed psychic powers and communicated by telepathy. Their continent, which covered
most of the southern hemisphere, broke
up and was destroyed. The Lemurians
migrated to Atlantis, where they evolved
into the Fourth Root Race. Like the Lemurians, the Atlanteans fled the destruction of their own continent, spreading to
other lands and starting the present Fifth
Root Race.
W. Scott-Elliott, a Theosophist,
claimed to investigate Lemuria with the
help of "astral clairvoyance." He said
that Lemurians originally laid eggs but
evolved to reproduce as do humans. They
intermingled with animals to produce
apes. Beings from Venus, the "Lords of
Flame," came to Lemuria and helped the
race achieve reincarnation. At the height
of their civilization, the Lemurian continent sank into the ocean.
Philosopher Rudolf Steiner, using information he said came from the Akashic
Chronicle (Records), said Lemuria extended from Ceylon to Madagascar, and
had included parts of southern Asia and
Africa. He also described the Lemurians
as the telepathic Third Root Race, who
initially had no memory. The goal of Lemurians was to develop will and clairvoyant power of imagination in order to control the forces of nature. Lemuria was
destroyed by volcanic activity.
Lemuria
Mu
In 1870 Colonel James Churchward,
a former Bengal Lancer and a big game
hunter, announced he had learned of a
lost continent named Mu, once located in
the Pacific Ocean with its center just
south of the equator. The continent was
six thousand miles long from east to west
and three thousand miles wide from
north to south. Churchward said he
learned this from secret, ancient clay and
stone tablets hidden in India, which had
been revealed to him by a Hindu priest.
He said human beings first appeared
on Mu some 200,000 years ago, evolving
into an advanced race of about 60 million
people in ten tribes. About 12,000 years
ago, a massive volcanic eruption, earthquakes, and tidal waves destroyed the entire continent. Survivors escaped to other
lands. Churchward claimed evidence of
the existence of Mu may be found in the
legends and artifacts of the ancient
Greeks, Egyptians, Maya, Cliff Dwellers
of North America, Chinese, Burmese, Tibetans, Cambodians, and Pacific Islanders. All the rocky islands now in the Pacific Ocean are remnants of Mu, he said.
Churchward never produced the tablets
to prove his "discovery." He said his research also included trance visits to previous lives. His four books on Mu generally are regarded as romantic science
fiction.
Churchward was supported by Augustus Le Plongeon, a nineteenth-century
French physician who was the first to excavate Mayan ruins in the Yucatan. Le
Plongeon claimed the Maya and the ancient Egyptians were descendants of the
"Muvians." See Atlantis.
Sources: H. P. Blavatsky. The Secret Doctrine. Abridged ed. by Katherine Hillard.
325
(1882-1968)
Called by some "the greatest of all psychics," Gladys Osborne Leonard worked
professionally as a mental medium, passing many tests of leading psychic investigators from Britain and America. Born on
May 28, 1882, in Lytham, Lancashire,
England, Leonard began to exhibit psychic gifts at an early age, following
trauma caused by the unexpected death
of a friend of the family. She began to
have frequent visions of "Happy Valleys," beautiful places populated by radiantly happy people dressed in flowing,
draped clothing. Her family attempted to
discourage her and succeeded superficially; Leonard learned to quit talking
about them, but her interest in the world
of spirit continued.
Although her childhood visions disappeared, in her twenties she became interested in Spiritualism. At the age of
twenty-four, when her mother was extremely ill, Leonard awoke to see a shining vision of her in good health, at the
apparent moment the woman died.
Leonard pursued her psychic ability,
experimenting with table-tipping at seances. At one seance she went into a
trance and a spirit control named Feda
emerged. Feda claimed to be her greatgreat-grandmother, a Hindu girl raised
by a Scottish family. At age thirteen,
around 1800, Feda married Leonard's
great-great-grandfather, William Hamilton, and died a year later in childbirth.
There was no proof of Feda's existence,
though stories of such a girl had been
passed down through the generations.
Feda remained Leonard's control for
more-than forty years.
326
Lemuria
Levitation
A phenomenon of psychokinesis (PK) in
which objects, people, animals, and so on
lift up into the air without known physical means and float or fly about. Levitations are said to occur in mediumship,
shamanistic trance, mystical rapture and
trance, magic, bewitchment, hauntings,
and possession. Many cases of levitation
appear to be spontaneous; some spiritual
or magical adepts are said to be able to
levitate consciously.
Christianity and Islam record numerous cases of levitation. In the first century, Simon Magus is said to have levitated himself from the top of the Roman
Forum in a challenge to St. Peter, as
proof of his magical powers. According
to legend Peter prayed to God that Simon's deception be stopped, and Simon
fell to earth and was killed. Roman Catholic hagiography includes many cases of
levitations among saints, the most famous of which is Joseph of Cupertino
(1603-1663), who reportedly levitated
often and flew through the air, according
to eyewitness accounts. He had the peculiar habit of giving a little shriek just before levitating.
St. Teresa of Avila said she levitated
spontaneously during states of rapture.
According to one eyewitness account by
sister Anne of the Incarnation, Teresa levitated a foot and a half off the ground for
about half an hour. Teresa wrote of one
expenence:
"It seemed to me, when I tried to
make some resistance, as if a great force
beneath my feet lifted me up. I know of
Levitation
327
and his body, except through his right
hand.
Jacolliot was told by Brahmins that
the "supreme cause" of all phenomena
was the agasa (akasha), the vital fluid,
"the moving thought of the universal
soul, directing all souls," the force of
which the adepts had learned to control.
See Universal life force.
Levitation also is said to occur in rituals and ceremonies in shamanism and
other tribal or non-Western traditions.
African witch doctors have been filmed
apparently levitating off the ground.
In the Western secular world, levitation sometimes has been viewed as a
manifestation of evil. During the Middle
Ages and Renaissance, it was common to
blame any unusual phenomena upon
witchcraft, fairies, ghosts, or demons.
Levitation was, and still is, commonly reported in demonic possession cases. Beds,
objects, and the possessed are witnessed
floating up into the air. In 1906 Clara
Germana Cele, a sixteen-year-old schoolgirl from South Africa, suffered demonic
possession and was said to rise up to five
feet into the air, sometimes vertically and
sometimes horizontally. She fell if sprinkled with holy water, which witnesses
took as proof of demonic possession.
Similarly, poltergeist cases and hauntings
are sometimes characterized by levitating
objects.
Some physical mediums have been
known for their alleged levitations. The
most famous was Daniel Dunglas Home,
who reportedly did so many times over
forty years. In 1868 he was seen levitating out of a third-story window; he
floated back indoors through another
window. Home was not always in trance
during levitations and was aware of what
was happening and how he felt. He once
described "an electrical fulness (sic)" sensation in his feet. His arms became rigid
and were drawn over his head, as though
he were grasping the unseen power which
328
Levitation
Citadel Press, 1966; Rosemary Ellen Guiley. The Encyclopedia of Witches and
Witchcraft. New York: Facts On File,
1989; Louis Jacolliot. 1884. Occult Science
in India and Among the Ancients. New
Hyde Park, NY: University Books, 1971;
Maharishi's Programme to Create World
Peace: Global Inauguration. Vlodrop, Hol-
Leys
Alignments and patterns of powerful, invisible earth energy said to connect various sacred sites, such as churches, temples, stone circles, megaliths, holy wells,
burial sites, and other locations of spiritual or magical importance. The existence
of leys is controversial. Their study is part
of the so-called "earth mysteries, " an
area of holistic research into ancient sites
and their landscapes.
If leys do exist, their true age and
purpose remain a mystery. Controversy
over them has existed since 1925, when
Alfred Watkins, an English beer salesman
and amateur antiquarian, published his
research and theory in his book, The Old
Straight Track. Watkins suggested that
all holy sites and places of antiquity were
Leys
329
l!!!ffi;H~i
Megaliths,
330
A Modern Adventure
in Ancient
Wisdom.
New York: Harper & Row, 1989; Havelock Fidler. Earth Energy: A Dowser's Investigation of Ley Lines. 2d ed. Wellingborough, Northamptonshire, England: The
Aquarian Press, 1988; Francis Hitching.
Earth Magic. New York: William Morrow, 1977; Patrick F. Sheeran. "Place and
Power." ReVision 13, no. 1 (Summer
1990): 28-32.
Lilly, John
See Drugs in mystical and psychic experiences; Flotation.
Leys
Lotus
Lindbergh did not mention his experience in his book about the flight, We,
Pilot and Plane, published later in 1927.
It was not until he wrote The Spirit of St.
Louis, published twenty-six years later in
1953, that he could bring himself to reveal the experiences. He discussed it more
in Autobiography of Values, published
posthumously in 1977. The reluctance to
acknowledge mystical experiences is common; some people spend years coming to
terms with them, convincing themselves
the experiences were not just dreams or
hallucinations. See Altered states of consciousness; Mystical experiences.
Sources: Charles Lindbergh. The Spirit of
St. Louis. New York: Charles Scribner's
Sons, 1953; Michael Murphy and Rhea A.
White. The Psychic Side of Sports. Reading,
MA: Addison-Wesley, 1978.
Lotus
Member of the water lily family, and a
sacred symbol in Hinduism, Buddhism,
and to ancient Egyptians.
In Hinduism the lotus is a symbol of
non attachment. Just as the lotus floats on
water but remains dry, the spiritual
seeker should live in the world but not be
affected by it. The pink lotus represents
yoni, the female reproductive organs. The
lingam, or sacred phallus, usually is depicted with the lotus. The fertility goddesses Padma (Lotus), Lakshmi, and Kali
are portrayed with lotuses; one myth
about Padma holds that she is born from
a lotus that springs from the forehead of
Vishnu, god of the phallus. The lotus also
serves as an important symbol in the
Hindu view of creation. The "lotusnaveled" Vishnu puts forth a giant,
331
--
Elf
332
1983.
Lotus seat
The most common sitting posture used in
yoga and other forms of meditation.
Called padmasana in Sanskrit ("perfect
posture"), the position requires sitting on
the floor or a cushion with legs crossed so
that each foot is pressed back into the
stomach or is placed on top of the opposite thigh. The hands rest on the knees
with palms up, thumbs and forefingers
touching. The tongue is placed against
the roof of the mouth. The spine and
neck are kept straight. In this position the
body is in repose, balance, and symmetry,
like the lotus blossom. The position facilitates the flow of the universal life force
through the top of the head and into the
chakras. The organs are unobstructed,
and breathing may be controlled easily.
In a half lotus posture, one foot rests
against the opposite calf rather on top of
the thigh or pressed into the stomach.
Both full and half lotus seats are
among postures used in zazen, the sitting
meditation of Zen. The hands, however,
shape the "cosmic mudra," an oval
formed with left hand overlapping right
and thumbs lightly touching, held against
the navel.
References to the lotus seat and
other asanas (postures and exercises) appear in yoga literature dating back to the
Upanishads, c. 900 B.C. The yogic lotus
seat probably evolved from the most
common, comfortable sitting posture of
the day. Like other sitting, squatting, and
kneeling positions used in prayer, it is
considered ideal for relaxation and meditation without the hazard of falling
asleep. The full lotus position is natural
to Easterners, who practice it from early
childhood; but most Westerners, used to
sitting in chairs, find it difficult and pain-
Lotus
Relax-
LSD
York: Pyramid Books, 1957; Herbert Benson, M.D. The Relaxation Response. New
York: Avon Books, 1976; Bernard
Gunther. Energy Ecstasy and Your Seven
Vital Chakras. North Hollywood, CA:
Newcastle Publishing Co., 1983; Willard
Johnson. Riding the Ox Home: A History
of Meditation
Lucid dreaming
from Shamanism
to Science.
1982. Boston: Beacon Press, 1986; Shunryu Suzuki. Zen Mind, Beginner's Mind.
Lucid dreaming
See Dreams.
333
M
MacLaine, Shirley
See New Age.
Maclean, Dorothy
cession had snared a lover, saved a marriage, healed a sick baby, or eliminated a
wicked enemy. Today members of all
classes and races of Brazilians privately
believe in some sort of ancient spiritual
communion with the gods, while publicly
professing Catholicism.
See Findhorn.
Candomble
Macumba
Common term for the Brazilian form of
Vodoun and SanterIa, or the worship of
African deities through magic and possession of the spirit. Strictly speaking, there
is no "Macumba" religion; the word refers to the two principal forms of African
spiritual worship in Brazil: Candomble
and Umbanda. Macumba sometimes refers to black magic, but that cult is actually called Quimbanda.
African slaves brought to Brazil by
the Portuguese in the 1550s never relinquished their religion, but syncretized it
with Catholicism, keeping its gods and
rituals alive in stories and secret ceremonies. The Africans also found much in
common with the religious practices of
the native Brazilian Indians. By the time
the slaves won their independence in
1888, over fifteen generations
of
Brazilians - black, white, and Indianhad heard the legends of the orishas
(gods) and how the gods' magical inter-
334
MacLaine, Shirley
'I
Macumba
Umbanda
Umbanda was not founded until
1904 and has its origins in Hinduism and
Buddhism in addition to African faiths.
The teachings of Allan Kardec's Spiritism-that
communication with discarnate spirits is not only possible but necessary for spiritual healing and acceptance of one's earlier incarnations-play
a large part in the practices of Umbanda.
Umbanda probably derives from the
Sanskrit term aum-gandha, meaning "divine principle." Umbandistas fear direct
contact with the orishas, believing that
such interaction is too intense for mortals. Instead spirits of divine ancestors act
as mediums for communications with the
gods, much like the services of a trance
channeler or a Native American shaman.
The gods go by their Catholic saint
names in Umbanda and incorporate
many features of their Indian brethren.
Ceremonies start by calling on the
Exus for protection against evil. Then the
Mothers or Fathers of the Saints become
possessed, inviting all who are there to let
themselves receive the spirits. The guide
mediums are usually Native American or
African ancestors, or perhaps a child who
died quite young. The most popular Brazilian guides are the Old Black Man
(Preto Velho) and Old Black Woman
(Preta Velha), who represent the wise old
slaves full of wisdom and healing. As
with possession in Vodoun and Santeria,
those receiving the spirits assume the
characteristics of their possessors, performing medicine dances, whirling to
drumbeats and chants, smoking cigars
and pipes (tobacco is sacred to the Indians), or bending over from advanced age
and labor.
Umbandistas believe that healing of
the physical body cannot be achieved
without healing the spirit; opening the
mind to the entrance of a spirit guide via
ecstatic trance is key to spiritual growth.
Spirits enter the body through the head-
335
Quimbanda
Umbandistas
generally refer to
"lower" or "mischievous" spirits rather
than evil ones in the faith that, with education, all spirits eventually evolve to
higher consciousness. But for the practitioners of Quimbanda or Cuimbanda, the
spirits' evil natures are necessary for their
black magic.
Like the followers of Candomble
and Umbanda, Quimbandistas call upon
the Exus, but appeal to their identities as
tricksters and specialists in witchcraft and
sorcery. "King Exu," often identified
with Lucifer, works with Beelzebub and
Ashtaroth, called Exu Mor and Exu of
the Crossroads. Exu of the Closed Paths
inspires the most dread in Brazilians, for
if prayers to this dark lord succeed, victims could lose job, lover, and family, become ill and eventually die, finding "all
paths closed" unless treated by the white
magic of the orishas. See Santeria; Spiritism; Vodoun.
Sources: Peter Haining. The Anatomy of
Witchcraft. New York: Taplinger, 1972;
Francis X. King. Witchcraft and Demonology. New York: Exeter Books, 1987; A. J.
Laugguth. Macumba: White and Black
Magic in Brazil. New York: Harper &
336
Magic
The ability to effect change in accordance
with one's will and by invoking the supernatural. The change is accomplished
through ritual, in which cosmic powers,
supernatural forces, deities or other nonphysical beings, or the forces of nature
are invoked and made subservient to the
will of the magician. Magic has existed
universally since ancient times. The forms
of magic range from low sorcery, or spell
casting, to high or ceremonial magic,
which is a Western mystical path to God.
All forms of magic traditionally are secret
arts taught only to initiates.
The term "magic" derives from the
Greek megus, meaning "great." Magic is
often called "white," "black," or "gray,"
for good, evil, or neutral; yet magic itself
is amoral-it is the magician's intent that
is good or evil. Some Western practitioners of magic debate the morality of good
versus evil magic; but most cultures regard magic that destroys as an acceptable
means of self-defense or revenge. See Psychic attack.
According to anthropologist Bronislaw Malinowski (1884-1942), magic has
three functions and three elements. The
functions are to produce, protect, and destroy. The elements are spells or incantations; rites or procedures; and the
consciousness of the practitioner, who
undergoes a purification process that alters his or her state of consciousness. This
is accomplished through various means,
such as fasting, meditating, chanting, visualizing symbols, sleep deprivation,
dancing, staring into flames, inhaling
fumes, and taking drugs.
The simplest (and earliest) form of
magic is mechanical sorcery, in which an
Macumba
t.
Sorcery consultation in the New World
Magic
337
lIIiIIII~n.~~.~
I"\:'~cc.'~
._
h-ecv,,-4."''--'V.v.-d
\v.A,..e.R...O~D~'\ rcl1a\oLrc<1})l',\yz.(<l)rYi~ -
Self.
The initiate first learns to achieve saW"'i'* N'" madhi, a state of one-pointed concentra'Ow.rJtlCJl,oJ.
tion, with lower forces personified as el~~S~ti.),,~
ementals and astral beings. These are
lJ .-:'~ts}~) akin to the primal archetypal forces repo-.-\Yc~,"
siding within the magician's own collective unconscious; and through these the
magician begins to understand his or her
own nature. Gods and goddesses are then
invoked as the magician refines the consciousness and comes to terms with the
aspects of the Self that are the weakest. In
fb:\'L.,"l
(1.
'?'<"~~
338
v\e<-'Jed
O<-?~
e\,\~
Q(
tkz
t,t~iI
"..t",,;\V~
Magic
of Witches
and Witchcraft.
New York: Facts On File, 1989; Israel Regardie. Ceremonial Magic: A Guide to the
Mechanisms
of Ritual. Wellingborough,
England: The Aquarian Press, 1980; Jeffrey
B. Russell. A History of Witchcraft. London: Thames and Hudson, 1980; Charles
T. Tart, ed. Transpersonal Psychologies.
San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1975; Robert Wang. The Qabalistic Tarot: A Textbook of Mystical Philosophy. York Beach,
ME: Samuel Weiser, 1983.
Maharaj Ji
See Alternative religious movements.
Mahatmas
See Theosophy.
Maimonides
Dream Laboratory
See Dreams.
Mana
See Universal life force.
Mandala
A design, usually circular, which appears
in religion and art. The term mandala is
Sanskrit for "circle." In Hinduism and
Mandala
Buddhism, the mandala has religious ritual purposes and serves as a yantra, a
geometric-design emblem or instrument
of contemplation. The mandala form also
appears in Christianity, Gnosticism, and
other religions, as well as in mythology,
alchemy, healing practices, art, and architecture. It is used in modem psychotherapies as a therapeutic tool. In essence the
mandala represents the point at which
macrocosm and microcosm meet; it symbolizes the mystic's journey through various layers of consciousness to the center,
which is the ultimate, supreme union
with the Divine.
Mandalas may be drawn, painted,
constructed in three-dimensional figures,
and danced. They may also be images
constructed in the mind, especially
among the lamas of Tibet.
The circular shape of a mandala represents a natural and ultimate wholeness,
and appears in symbols dating back to
the Paleolithic Age, notably as spirals and
sun wheels. Plato described the psyche in
terms of a sphere. In Zen the circle signifies enlightenment.
Mandalas have three basic properties
of construction: (1) a center, which signifies the Godhead, the Beginning, and
the Eternal Now, or, in psychotherapy,
the Self, which is the total psyche; (2)
symmetry; and (3) cardinal points. The
center is universal to all mandalas, while
symmetry and cardinal points vary according to purposes and designs. Symmetry is comprised of concentric and
counterbalanced geometric figures. The
polarities often are expressed in terms of
sexual tension. It is the mandala's purpose to harmonize polarities, to make order out of chaos.
Typically, the circle is oriented to
four points. Sometimes this is done by
squaring, in which a square is drawn
around the outside of the circle; other
times it is done by geometric designs,
such as interpenetrating triangles, or
other designs drawn within the circle.
339
__
II-.::~~:::_,,-:_'
:_,_,
340
1959. Princeton: BollingenlPrinceton University Press, 1972; Carl G. Jung, ed. Man
and His Symbols. 1964. New York: Anchor PresslDoubleday, 1988; C. G. Jung.
"Commentary." The Secret of the Golden
Flower. Translated and explained by Richard Wilhelm. Rev. ed. San Diego: Harcourt
Mandala
341
!IIIIIIlIIII!!fIII!IIlllllilllilii[~ij:i"':'~i
-'--"~~~~~~~_~
~~,~.
Magical
Uses of Mantras
Since the time of the ancient Egyptians and Assyrians, magicians have used
mantras for conjuring and casting spells.
The mantras are "names of power,"
which have been passed down from the
Egyptians, Gnostics, and Hebrews. Many
342
=~=====~~_====
names of power are the true and secret
names of God, such as Yahweh or
Adonai, or nonsensical syllables drawn
from the first letters of various biblical
passages. These are used to summon spirits and to serve as amulets against misfortune.
The general Hindu and Buddhist
populations use mantras as amulets for
protection against illness, evil, and bad
luck. In Sri Lanka exorcists use secret
mantras, along with songs, drumming,
dance, and curative oils, to expel demons
and ghosts responsible for possession,
sickness, and misfortune.
The twentieth-century English magician Aleister Crowley created the mantra
AUMGN, an expansion of am which he
said was the magical formula of the universe. Crowley believed the sound vibrations of AUMGN were so powerful that
a magician using them would be able to
control the forces of the universe.
See Meditation;
Transcendental
Meditation (TM).
Sources: John Blofeld. Mantras: Sacred
Words of Power. New York: E. P. Dutton,
1977; Richard Cavendish. The Black Arts.
New York: Perigee Books, 1967. Chant
and Be Happy: The Power of Mantra Meditation. Based on the teachings of A. C.
University Press, 1960; W. Y. EvansWentz, ed. The Tibetan Book of the Great
Liberation.
London: Oxford University
Press, 1954; W. Y. Evans-Wentz. Tibet's
Great Yogi Milarepa: A Biography from
the Tibetan. 2d ed. London: Oxford University Press, 1951; Jack Forem. Transcendental Meditation. New York: E. P. Dut-
ton,
Govinda.
First
American ed. York Beach, ME: Samuel
Weiser, 1969; Tenzin Gyatso, His Holiness
the Fourteenth Dalai Lama. Kindness, Clar-
Foundations
of Tibetan
Mantra
Mysticism.
(also Mantram)
~_
Margery
See American Society for Psychical Research (ASPR).
Marian apparitions
The appearance or manifestation of the
Blessed Virgin Mary. Countless Marian
apparitions have been reported over the
centuries, but the Catholic church, which
investigates the most promising in
lengthy procedures that can take years to
complete, has decreed only a few of them
to be genuine.
Most Marian apparitions consist of
the appearance of a luminous woman
who is identified as Mary. She mayor
may not speak. If she does she identifies
herself and delivers a message urging people to pray more and lead a more devout
life. She also asks for churches and
shrines to be built to her. Miraculous
healings often are reported in the wake of
sightings. Other paranormal phenomena
associated with the apparitions are brilliant lights, spinning and unusual lights,
burning bushes, spinning crosses, celestial
music, sweet, incense-like smells, apports,
and so on. Some witnesses experience ecstatic trances.
Catholic dogma states that religious
apparitions are not ghosts, but are mys-
Marian apparitions
343
Martial arts
Various styles of Oriental combat, either
empty hand or with weapons. Thousands
of styles of martial arts exist.
Martial arts originally were developed to achieve victory in battle. Over
the centuries, however, they became philosophical and spiritual disciplines for cul-
344
Marian apparitions
Martial arts
Aikido
fication of mind, body, and ki-selfrealization through discipline - and the
manifestation of love and harmony in all
actions. Techniques stress harmonization
with the moves of one's opponent.
Ueshiba early in his life embarked on
a spiritual quest for budo, the inner essence of martial arts. He had a mystical
experience in mid-life one day while sitting under a persimmon tree. The universe quaked and a golden spirit sprang
up from the ground and veiled his body
and changed it into one of gold. His mind
and body became light. He understood
the birds and became aware of "the mind
of God." At that moment he understood
that the source of budo is God's love for
all beings, and the training of budo is to
assimilate and utilize that love in the
mind and body.
Ninjitsu is a stealth art, and was
originated in the fourth century by the
Chinese General Sun Tsu. The ninja are
skilled at silent killing. They learn how to
dislocate their own joints, and how to use
breathing and meditation to stay underwater for prolonged periods and control
their heartbeats to avoid detection.
Most martial arts have feats of incredible power, such as powerbreaking,
which is the breaking of thick pieces of
wood, layers of tile or bricks, and so on
with the hand, foot, elbow, head, or even
fingertips. In Kung Fu the "iron palm" is
a single blow with the hand that kills.
345
346
Martial arts
II
'1;.
d~l'I"'Ji"";i
,"
Mary
The mother of Jesus referred to in the
Christian Gospels, also called "Blessed
Virgin," "Virgin Mary," or in some contexts by Christians simply "Our Lady."
Early church councils, including those at
Ephesus in 431 and at Chalcedon in 451,
gave her the title Theotokos
("Godbearer"); thus the title "Mother of God"
is widely used, especially among Catholics.
According to Catholic doctrine,
Mary is the single exception to the state
of Original Sin due to her Immaculate
Conception. Original Sin, a teaching of
most Christian theologians, holds that
the condition of Adam and Eve after their
fall from grace is the spiritual state in
which all humankind is conceived. Mary,
however, was destined to be the mother
of Christ; thus God infused her soul with
grace at the moment of her conception in
the womb of her mother, St. Anne, which
freed her from lust, slavery to the Devil,
depraved nature, darkness of intellect,
and other consequences of Original Sin.
The idea of the Immaculate Conception
was rejected by Thomas Aquinas in the
thirteenth century.
Mary and her proper place in Chris-
Mary
__
n_'
347
348
Masks
Coverings for the face that are used in
ritual, liturgies, theater, and folk art, the
purpose of which is to transform the
wearer-and
possibly the viewer by
association-into
something other than
what he or she is, such as an animal, an
ancestor, or a presumed image of a supernatura.l-being.
The mask is a sacred object of
power. It does not conceal, but liberates.
By donning it wearers allow themselves
to become possessed by the spirit in the
mask or represented by the mask, which
enables them to invoke the powers of that
spirit. It is a lightning rod of spiritual and
psychic energy. In Jungian terms a mask
connects its wearer to archetypal powers
residing within the collective unconscious. The mask is a mediator between
the ego and archetype, the mundane and
the supernatural, the comic and the sacred. It connects the present to the past.
In prehistoric societies masks succeeded disguises that covered all or part
of the body and magically transformed
the wearer. Perhaps the first prehistoric
masked dancer is the "Sorcerer," a
Neolithic-Age cave painting at Trois
Freres in France. The masked figure is
half human and half animal, wearing stag
antlers, and poised in dance-step.
Although the symbolisms of masks
vary from culture to culture, commonal-
Mary
Masks
349
Masonry
See Freemasonry.
Materialization
The appearance of seemingly solid objects and spirit forms out of thin air. Eastern adepts who have mastered the siddhis
350
Masks
Medicine
bundle
Medicine bundle
A bag made of leather or an animal pelt
in which Native Americans keep an assortment of objects with healing, magical,
and supernatural powers. Medicine bundles are known to almost all tribes. They
are the equivalent of a church reliquary
and held with the same reverence. Some
are small and simple, while others contain more than one hundred items. Such
objects include fetishes and charms, ritual
items, herbs and healing paraphernalia,
magical objects, scalps, hooves, feathers,
claws, stones, arrow points, remains of
ancestors, symbolic miniatures, and the
like. The importance of medicine bundles
in the religions of Native North Americans varies considerably.
The instructions for composing medicine bundles are given to clans, societies,
and individuals by the Supernaturals, or
guardian spirits, in dreams or visions.
The bundles are concrete tokens of medicine power that the spirits have bestowed
351
upon the recipients, such as for healingwhich may be general or limited to one
illness-or hunting. Entire medicine societies have sprung up around bundles,
such as the Midewiwin of the Ojibwa.
The Buffalo Medicine Society had a medicine bundle containing deer hooves,
feathers, bells (for keeping time to chants
and songs), wands of buff tails, sweet
grass incense, and medicinal herbs and
roots. It was carried into battle, where its
contents were used to treat the injured.
On special occasions, such as prior
to war, communal hunts, long trips, and
the moving of village sites, the bundles
are opened according to rituals of song,
dance, and recitation. Thus the bundle's
supernatural power is invoked to ensure
success of the venture. Not all items are
necessarily removed for a specific purpose. To dream of a medicine bundlesuch as before a hunt-is considered propitious.
Individual medicine bundles are either buried \vith their owners or passed
to relatives. Collective bundles are kept
and passed down by medicine men, designated custodians, or descendants of the
original visionary. Some collective bundles of earlier days reputedly had great
power, which was rimally renewed as required.
352
Medicine societies
In the traditions of Native North Americans, closed cults of people who have
been endowed with supernatural powers,
especially curative. Medicine societies
predominate among hunter-gatherers, especially around the Great Lakes region,
and among some planters, such as the
Pueblo of the Southwest. They are shamanic in structure.
The name "medicine society" was
given to these groups by the French; the
French term medecin means "doctor,"
and also is the basis of the Western terms
"medicine man" and "medicine woman"
for individual practitioners. (It is argued
that such terms as "medicine man" are
obsolete, yet they continue to be used by
many Native Americans. "Shaman" is often substituted.)
Perhaps the greatest and most organized medicine society is the Midewiwin,
also called the Grand Medicine Society,
of the Ojibwa, Menomini, and Winnebago. More recently, it has been called
Medicine
bundle
Medicine societies
353
Religions
of North
America.
San
Medicine wheels
Large circles of stone laid out in the
North American Plains by historic Native
North American tribes. The appellation
of "medicine wheel" is modern, due to
the association of the circles with supernarural forces. Little archaeological or
culrurallore exists to shed light on medicine wheels' uses, although recent evidence suggests they were astronomical
and calendrical.
Little is known about the early Plains
tribes, who led a nomadic life and built
no lasting habitats or structures. They
lived only a few seasons in anyone spot.
When they moved to new locations, they
left behind small stone circles, which apparently were used for anchoring tipis,
and mysterious large circles now called
medicine wheels. The remains of approximately fifty known medicine wheels are
scattered across the Plains, mostly in
Canada and some in the United States.
Sizes and patterns of medicine
wheels vary, ranging from a few feet to
354
sixty yards in diameter. They are comprised of loaf-sized stones laid out in circles, with a central cairn of rocks. Some
cairns measure three to four yards high
by ten yards wide, requiring tons of
rocks. Some medicine wheels have additional cairns built along the perimeter, or
smaller rock circles built outside the main
circle. Some wheels have spokes connecting the rim to the central cairn.
The most spectacular is the Bighorn
Medicine Wheel, located at the 10,000foot summit of Medicine Mountain in the
Bighorn Mountains of Wyoming. The
central cairn itself is ten feet wide and is
attached to the perimeter by twenty-eight
spokes of stones. The wheel has six peripheral cairns, five outside the perimeter
and one inside. The estimated age of the
wheel is between one hundred and two
hundred years old, based on an analysis
of a tree limb found placed in one of the
cairns. At the turn of the twentieth century, local Native Americans interviewed
professed to know nothing of the wheel's
builders, except that it was "made by
people who had no iron," meaning that it
was very old. The wheel was recognized
as a holy site, however, and it is possible
that Native Americans did not want to
reveal information related to sacred activities. The circle is a shape considered to
have great power. In the 1920s anthropologist George Grinnell was told by
Cheyenne that the wheel was the ground
plan of a medicine lodge. See Sun Dance.
In 1972 astronomer John Eddy began an investigation of medicine wheels,
beginning with Bighorn. He determined
that the wheel had been laid out on lines
related to the summer solstice (at winter
solstice, the wheel is buried under snow
and is useless). It may have been used to
sight the rise of stars such as Sirius, Aldebaran, and Rigel. It had no apparent
uses for lunar or planetary alignments.
The twenty-eight spokes, however, may
have served as day counters in a lunar
cycle.
Medicine
societies
Meditation
Any of various disciplines of mind and
body that enable one to achieve high~r
states of consciousness. Meditation has
no intrinsic goal, but the goal toward
which it is applied is the transformation
of consciousness; it is a tool for selfimprovement or spiritual growth.
Meditation
in Zen garden
New York,
The ultimate goal of mystical meditation is union with the Absolute. Mystical meditation is practiced usually by the
nonsecular world in concert with withdrawal, asceticism, strict diet, and other
regimens. Secular meditators use meditation as part of daily life in order to improve health, creativity, self-esteem, success, and relationships; cultivate psychic
powers; and gain self-knowledge. Meditation in itself will not accomplish these
goals, but may help people develop their
own powers and abilities to do so. Scientific research of meditation has shown
that regular practice has health benefits.
Meditation is practiced universally,
but has become more formalized as a
spiritual discipline in the East. There are
numerous techniques of meditation,
which may be grouped under general
types. Contemplation, found more in the
Western tradition, includes all practices
of thinking about meaning, such as
prayer, concepts, and questions. Contemplation does not quiet the mind or effect
bodily rest. Concentration is found more
in the Eastern tradition, especially in
yoga, and involves attempts to transform
consciousness by mental control, to go
beyond thought to absence of thought.
355
356
Meditation
Meditation
357
I
tion and the elimination of all thoughts
and sensory phenomena; and introversion, which is concentrating the mind on
its deepest part, the prelude to union with
God. See Ecstasy; Prayer.
Meditation also is part of the mystical practices of Judaism and Islam, the
Kabbalah and Sufism, respectively. See
Kabbalah; Sufism.
In the 1950s scientists in India and
Japan began studying yogis and Zen
monks in meditation. In the 1960s Western scientists began to study Transcendental Meditation (TM) practitioners, at
the invitation of TM founder Maharishi
Mahesh Yogi. Studies have been uneven,
but generally show that meditation lowers the body's metabolism, slows brain
waves, and induces relaxation. Individuals who meditate regularly show greater
resistance to stress and illness, and say
they feel better psychologically. Meditation has been shown to be effective in
treating addiction. See Altered states of
consciousness; Biofeedback; Drugs in
mystical and psychic experiences; Mystical experiences; Mysticism; Relaxation;
Transcendental Meditation (TM).
Sources: Daniel Goleman. The Meditative
Mind: The Varieties of Meditative Experience. Los Angeles: Jeremy P. Tarcher,
1988; Willard Johnson. Riding the Ox
Home: A History of Meditation from Shamanism to Science. 1982. Boston: Beacon
Press, 1986; Da Liu. T'ai Chi Ch'uan and
Meditation. New York: Schocken Books,
1986; Charles T. Tart, ed. Transpersonal
Psychologies. San Francisco: Harper &
Row, 1975; John White, ed. Frontiers of
1974. New York: Avon,
Consciousness.
1975.
Mediumship
Entranced communication with alleged
nonphysical entities, sometimes accompanied by paranormal physical phenomena.
Mediumship is an ancient and universal
practice, undertaken to commune with
358
Meditation
Mediumship
359
Medjugorje
See Marian apparitions.
360
Megaliths
Groups of standing stones or large stone
structures dating to the Neolithic or
Bronze Age. Megalith ruins exist around
the world. They are believed to have had
sacred, astronomical, or burial purposes.
Many are said to possess healing and
magical powers, or to be repositories of
great electromagnetic energy that causes
or contributes to paranormal phenomena
in proximity to the stones.
"Megalith," meaning "great stones,"
comes from the Greek megas, "great,"
and lithos, "stone." Generally, any large
structure of stone may be termed a
"megalith," but the term usually is applied to ancient stone circles and tombs.
Megaliths are divided into two classifications: dolmens and menhirs. Dolmens are tombs of one or more chambers. Some are long in shape, while others
are round with passages connecting the
chambers. Long tombs are common in
parts of Wales, Scotland, and England,
while round dolmens with passages are
most common to Ireland and western
parts of Britain. Some dolmens are covered with earth, forming mounds or tumuli.
Human remains have not been found
in all dolmens, indicating that some may
have served simply as temples for rites of
the dead. Bone shards found at some sites
suggest that sacrificial rites, perhaps even
cannibalism, may have occurred.
Menhirs are single standing stones or
groups of standing stones that are arranged in circles, also called either cromlechs or henges. Of the two, henges are
more complex, containing one or more
entrances and being surrounded by a
ditch or earthwork bank; England's
Stonehenge is perhaps the best known of
these. Thousands of stone circles exist
around the world; there are some three
thousand of them throughout the British
Isles alone.
Many menhirs, especially holed
Mediumship
ones, are <.ttributed with healing and fertility powers. A holed stone is a female
symbol, associated with the Great Goddess, bringer of fertility, healer and protector. See Goddess. Typically, rites involved hugging the stone or passing
through the hole in order to benefit from
its magical powers.
Menhirs usually are associated with
local supernatural lore. They are the
gathering places of fairies and other spirits, and witches and those who practice
the occult arts. Some are said to move
and dance at night, or on certain holy
nights. Others are reputed to be the petrified remains of people who were punished. The Rollright Stones in the
Cotswolds of England, for example, are
said to be an invading king and his
knights, petrified by a witch to prevent
their invasion of England.
Photographs of some menhirs show
radiations of light emanating from them,
leading some researchers to theorize that
the creators of the stones imbued them
with "earth energy" for sacred or psychic
purposes. Individuals have reported discomfort near some menhirs at night, saying the stones radiate disturbing energy
forces, which produce electric shock sensations when touched. See Dowsing;
Leys.
Carnac, in Brittany, is the site of the
greatest and oldest of all megalithic remains, comprising approximately three
thousand standing stones arranged into
avenues, dolmens, mounds, and cromlechs. The original number of stones is
estimated at 11,000 or more. One
mound-covered dolmen dates to c. 4700
B.C., older than Stonehenge or the Pyramids of Egypt.
The Dragon Project Trust (DPT), established in Britain in 1977, has conducted research of the energies and paranormal phenomena
associated with
megalithic sites throughout Britain. As of
1990 no site had been fully checked,
though many had been dowsed and mea-
Men in Black
William Morrow, 1977; Jennifer Westwood, ed. The Atlas of Mysterious Places.
New York: Weidenfeld & Nicholson,
1987.
Meister Eckhart
See Eckhart, Johannes.
Men in Black
Mysterious phenomenon associated with
unidentified flying object (UFO) sightings
and encounters. Various individuals who
claim to have sighted UFOs, been abducted by extraterrestrials, or experienced unaccounted-for "missing time"
are sometimes later visited by Men in
Black (MIB)-men literally dressed all in
black-who
discourage the individuals
from persisting in their claims. MIB also
allegedly have threatened and harassed
individuals and their families; one person's death has been attributed to MIB.
MIB apparently have been active in
America since 1947, when the first "flying saucer" reports were made. They
have been especially active during periods
361
of great UFO activity. MIB seem predominaIlt in America, but have been reported
elsewhere, including Europe, Scandinavia, Australia, New Zealand, and South
Africa.
One of the earliest reports of an MIB
visit, a classic case, occurred in 1953 to
Albert K. Bender, a Bridgeport, Connecticut, factory clerk and enthusiast of
UFOs, the occult, black magic, monsters,
and science fiction and horror films.
Bender organized an international flying
saucer bureau, and through his research
believed he discovered where extraterrestrials come from and why they visit
Earth. He wrote a letter about this to a
friend. After he mailed the letter, three
men dressed in black suits visited him;
one had his letter. After the visit Bender
became ill. He acted "lobotomized," in
the words of one friend, and suffered severe headaches, which he said were controlled by "them." If he thought about
revealing his information, he was hit with
a debilitating headache. He dropped all
of his UFO-related pursuits.
Reports of MIB show some common
characteristics. The facial features and
complexions of MIB lead others to think
they are of Oriental or Italian extraction.
They have a penchant for dressing in
dark or black clothing, which is either
amazingly wrinkle-free or very wrinkled.
They drive about in large, dark or black
cars. Some have unusual hair growth, as
though their head has been shaved and
the hair has grown back unevenly. MIB
sometimes have odd ways of walking, either as though intoxicated, or with a gliding or rocking motion as though their
hips were on swivel joints. Some have
been seen wearing the Great Seal of the
United States in their lapels. The voices of
MIB also are unusual in extremes: monotones, singsongs, and whines, and sometimes eloquent in timbre.
MIB visit UFO witnesses unannounced at home or work, usually coming in threes. Sometimes they appear after
362
Men in Black
Menhir
See Megaliths.
Merlin
Legendary Arthurian wizard who has
been interpreted in modern times as a
Celtic mystic and shaman, and as an archetype of the Trickster and the Magician. In the Western mystery tradition, he
and his consort, Viviane, the Lady of the
Lake, represent Jachin and Boaz, the male
and female principles of the cosmos, force
and form.
Merlin, whose name is a Latinized
version of the Welsh "Myrddin," may be
a composite of real and mythical characters. He may be in part a deity, perhaps
derived from Mabon, or Maponos, the
British Apollo who served as the divine
ruler of Britain. He may have been a real
prophet or bard, or several bards.
The first written references to Merlin
are in the Latin works of Geoffrey of
Monmouth,
a twelfth-century Welsh
cleric. In the early 1130s, Monmouth
wrote The Prophecies of Merlin, verses of
prophecies going beyond the twelfth century, attributed to a Merlin who lived in
the fifth century. It is likely that Monmouth made up much of the book himself. Monmouth mentioned Merlin again
in the History of the Kings of Britain,
completed around 1135 to 1136, which
provided the basis for the Arthurian legends. Monmouth described Merlin as a
magical boy whose parents were a mortal
woman and a daimon, a Greek-derivative
term that means "spirit," but which later
Christians interpreted as a Devil's demon.
According to Christianized legend, Merlin's father was the Devil himself, sent to
earth to obstruct the works of Jesus. The
Devil assumed the shape of a dragon or
Merlin
363
w- ~~
TI1'~;;";..'
Sources:
364
Los Angeles: The Philosophic Research Society, 1977; Rosemary Ellen Guiley. The
Encyclopedia
of Witches
and Witchcraft.
New York: Facts On File, 1989; John Matthews, ed. At the Table of the Grail: Magic
and the Uses of Imagination. 1984. London: Arkana, 1987; R. J. Stewart, ed. The
Book of Merlin. Poole, Dorset, England:
Blanford Press, 1987; R. J. Stewart. The
Mystic Life of Merlin. London: Arkana,
1986; R. J. Stewart. Living Magical Arts.
Poole, Dorset, England: Blanford Press,
1987.
Merlin
ter of novices. (Gethsemani has since become one of the country's acclaimed personal renewal centers.)
Merton wrote several novels during
his youth, one of which, My Agreement
with the Gestapo, was published posthumously in 1969. Three books of poetry
were published between 1941 and 1947
with little notice. Then his autobiography, The Seven Story Mountain (1948),
became a best-seller and catapulted him
to fame. In the book Merton tells of his
gradual conversion from agnosticism to
Catholicism in 1938, and his reasons for
becoming a Trappist.
The autobiography
and subsequent
works of spiritual meditations and reflections, which contain much autobiographical material, have been compared to the
spiritual journals of St. Augustine and
John Bunyan, and in terms of social reflection have been compared
to other
modern
religious
journals,
including
those by Black Elk, Richard Rubenstein,
Albert Schweitzer, and Harvey Cox.
Merton's books can be grouped by
subject matter into three stages. Those
published between 1948 and 1960 deal
mainly with ascetic practices for relating
to the materialist world. Those between
1960 and 1965 are mainly concerned
with social issues and social criticism,
while those from 1965 to 1968 show his
interest in Eastern mysticism.
Merton
scandalized
many Catholics
with his
study of the parallels between Eastern (especially Zen Buddhism) and Western religious traditions.
With exceptional
insights comparable
to his contemporary,
Alan Watts, Merton produced The Way
of Chuang Tzu (1965), Zen and the Birds
of Appetite (1968), and Mystics and Zen
ing with humankind. He believed that being a mystic was to some extent necessary
for a poet.
In his later years, he became an outspoken opponent of the Vietnam War.
He wrote the words for several freedom
songs for the Civil Rights movement, and
edited Gandhi on Non-Violence (1965).
Merton and his writings have influenced
peace activists of many faiths. He and
Dorothy Day were among the writers for
The Catholic Worker who greatly influenced the brothers Daniel and Philip
Berrigan and other charismatic
leaders
of the antiwar
resistance
in the late
1960s and early 1970s, and later such notable social reform activists as actor Martin Sheen.
In 1965 he was allowed to live as a
hermit at Gethsemani, and spent most of
the last three years of his life in solitude.
On December
10, 1968, Merton
died while attending an ecumenical conference of monks in Bangkok. The cause
of death was electrocution
from contact
with an electrical fan that had faulty wiring. His body was returned to the United
States in an airplane that, ironically, also
brought back bodies of American soldiers
who fought in the Vietnam War.
Sources: Monica Furlong. Merton: A Biography. San Francisco: Harper & Row,
1980; Michael Matt. The Seven Mountains
of Thomas Merton. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin,
1984;
M.
Basil
Pennington.
Thomas Merton, Brother Monk. San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1987; Paul Wilkes,
ed. Merton by Those Who Knew Him Best.
San Francisco: Harper & Row, '1984;
George Woodcock.
Thomas MertonMonk and Poet: A Critical Study. New
York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1978.
Masters (1967).
Merton
viewed conversion
as a con-
Mescaline
Mescaline
See Drugs in mystical and psychic experiences; Huxley, Aldous.
365
366
Messing,
Wolf Grigorievich
(1899-1972)
(1899-1972)
One of Russia's most famous psychics.
Wolf Messing dazzled Josef Stalin, accurately predicted the end of World War II,
and impressed audiences all over the Soviet Union with his clairvoyant powers.
He was a small, trim man with piercing
eyes and a mane of wiry hair, which he
combed straight back. He never married,
and spent much of his life in isolation and
loneliness.
Messing was born on September 10,
1899, in Gora Kalwaria, near Warsaw,
Poland. His psychic abilities manifested
early, and he was performing for the public by his teens. In Vienna in 1915, Albert
Einstein invited him to his apartment,
where Messing met Sigmund Freud.
Freud tested his psychic ability, with impressive results. Messing toured the
world as a celebrity.
In 1937 he incurred Adolph Hitler's
wrath by publicly predicting that Hitler
would die if he "turned toward the East,"
to Russia. Hitler put a 200,000-mark
price on his head. In 1939 Messing fled
to Russia, only to land under the terrifying repression of Josef Stalin. Russian
psychics were forced to go underground
or risk being shot, but Messing managed
to impress Stalin.
Stalin assigned Messing to psychically rob a bank. Messing took an empty
attache into a Moscow bank, handed the
clerk a blank piece of paper, and mentally
ordered him to fill it with 100,000 rubles.
The clerk did so. When the test was concluded, Messing handed back the money;
the clerk suffered a heart attack when he
realized what he'd done. Messing said he
used telepathic hypnosis to influence others in this fashion. He claimed to have
eluded the Gestapo and Stalin's police.
367
I
Sources: Henry Gris and William Dick. The
New Soviet Psychic Discoveries. Engle-
368
Messing,
wood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1978; Tatiana Lungin. Wolf Messing: The True Story
of Russia's Greatest Psychic. New York:
Paragon House, 1989; Sheila Ostrander
and Lynn Schroeder. The ESP Papers: Scientists Speak Out from Behind the Iron
Curtain. New York: Bantam Books, 1976;
Sheila Ostrander and Lynn Schroeder. Psychic Discoveries Behind the Iron Curtain.
Milarepa
(C.
1052-1135)
Wolf Grigorievich
(1899-1972)
369
.1111!!!
"i~:-lli.t'
l...-
370
Yoga.
&
Miracle
An occurrence that is perceptible to the
senses, transcends the natural course of
events, and takes place within a religious
context. More precise definitions, and
criteria for distinguishing miracles from
other paranormal events, depend on the
various definitions of "nature" and "religious." Nineteenth-century cultural anthropologists tended to classify all claims
of miraculous events under the heading of
magic; more modern schools tend to classify any extraordinary way of interacting
with the cosmos as a religious occurrence
and rherefore as a "miracle," regardless
of whether or not it is considered valid by
religious authorities.
One's concept of nature affects
whether or not one considers miracles
possible, and what one considers to be
miracles. Modern scientific views of nature, and therefore of the definition and
possibility of miracles, fall roughly into
Milarepa
(c. 1052-1135)
Miracle
371
..-~!_
""!i:~:!"'~' ~
Mirror
A gateway to magic, the supernatural, the
soul, and the mysteries of the universe.
Since ancient times, mirrors-as well as
all smooth, reflective surfaces - have been
used for divination, magic, and repelling
evil; they also have been greatly feared
for their power to steal the soul. In recent
times mirrors have been used as tools in
psychic development to increase clairvoyance and gain knowledge of so-called
past lives.
The precursor to the mirror is the
body of still water in a lake, pond, pool,
or bowl. The ancient Romans believed
mirrors originated in Persia, where they
were used by the magi for divination. The
372
Miracle
Mirror
threshold. A witch would see her reflection, or soul, pierced by the knife and
would flee.
Numerous superstItIons surround
mirrors. Breaking one means bad luck for
seven years, or disaster or death; a mirror
that falls and breaks of its own accord is
an omen of impending death in the
house. A girl who gazes at the moon's
reflection in a mirror will learn her wedding day; if performed on Halloween, the
ritual will reveal a vision of her future
husband. In Ozark lore to see an absent
friend appear in a mirror means he will
soon die; babies under a year in age
should not see their reflections, or they
will be cross-eyed or die before their second birthday.
Students of the occult use mirrors to
look into the world of spirit. Gazing into
one supposedly reveals visions of spirit
guides and helps one gain auric sight, the
ability to see the aura. Some believe that
the face changes seen by staring into a
mirror are images of past lives. Mirrors
painted black on the convex side are considered an excellent tool for developing
clairvoyance. See Scrying.
Sources: W. E. Butler. How to Develop
Clairvoyance. 2d ed. New York: Samuel
373
Montgomery,
Ruth
(b. 1912)
Author who says she communicates with
spirit guides via automatic writing.
Montgomery's subjects have included reincarnation, magnetic healing, Atlantis,
Lemuria, Earth changes, and visits from
aliens and advanced spiritual beings.
She was born Ruth Schick in Princeton, Indiana, on June 11, 1912. Her early
ambition was to be a missionary, but she
pursued journalism instead. Montgomery
attended both Baylor and Purdue universities, but never graduated with a degree.
She had several reporting jobs, culminating in her most important post with the
International News Service (INS) in
Washington, DC, which later merged
with United Press International. She met
her husband, Robert H. Montgomery, a
management consultant, in Detroit.
Montgomery was introduced to the
occult in 1956 in St. Petersburg, Florida,
when she attended seances given by Sr.
Malcolm Pantin, whose mediumship included spirit communications through
floating trumpets. In Washington Montgomery attended seances given by the
Reverend Hugh Gordon Burroughs of the
Spiritualist Church of Two Worlds. She
began to use a Ouija board, which enabled her to make contact, she believed,
with Burroughs's control, Father Murphy, and her dead father. She also attended Burroughs's controversial Spiritualist camp in Ephrata, Pennsylvania,
Camp Silver Belle. She wrote articles
about her experiences for INS.
In 1958 Montgomery met trance medium Arthur Ford and formed an enduring friendship. Through Ford and her deceased father, she received messages that
she should write about life after death.
Ford also told her she had the ability for
automatic writing. It manifested in 1960,
374
Mirror
Moon
Moon
Symbol of the feminine principle, the occult side of nature, the psychic, emotion,
intuition, inspiration, imagination, and
the deep layers of the subconscious. Its
phases correspond to the menstrual cycles
of women and the seasons of nature; it is
linked to fecundity, moisture, wetness,
and the tides. It is a symbol of life, death,
and rebirth: it waxes, wanes, vanishes
from the heavens for three days, and then
reappears to grow again to fullness.
Early humankind noticed that the
moon regulated the tides, and came to believe that it regulated all moistures as
well, including blood and the moistures
within the human body. The moon appeared to regulate all growth and life cycles. It was believed to be responsible for
fertilization, and women who desired to
become pregnant thus slept under the
rays of the moon. In the first century A.D.
the Roman naturalist Pliny the Elder catalogued the moon's apparent influence
over life in his thirty-seven-volume work,
Natural History. Pliny put forth many
prescriptions for regulating all activities
of daily life according to the moon's
phases.
Because the moon appeared to die
and be reborn each month, it became associated with immortality, rebirth, and
the Land of the Dead. Plutarch, the firstcentury Greek essayist and biographer,
conceived of the moon as a way-station
for souls following death and prior to rebirth. According to the Upanishads, the
moon is where unenlightened souls go to
rest and await reincarnation (enlightened
souls go to the sun).
The moon was considered a force of
nature until about 2600 B.C., when it became personified, first as the Man in the
Moon, and then as gods and goddesses of
the moon. Lunar goddesses predominate
over gods, because of the moon's reflective (passive) nature and because of its
associations with the regulation of life.
375
.1I1!!!!
lnllllll~;ti~1P=c:..'
The moon is associated with witchcraft, magic, and sorcery, and is considered to be the source of witches' power. It
is personified by the Triple Goddess-the
virgin, mother, and crone-usually represented by the classical deities Diana (Artemis), Selene, and Hecate. The ancient
witches of Thessaly were said to have the
power to draw the moon down from the
sky at their command; a symbolic ritual
of drawing down the moon is still performed in modern Witchcraft. Witches
hold their meetings, called "circles" or
"esbats," and work their magic spells in
accordance with lunar phases. The waxing moon is propitious for growth,
achievement, good fortune, and healing
spells; the waning moon is propitious for
banishing spells and the undoing of harm
and negative influences.
The moon itself is believed to cast a
spell; one may become moonstruck beneath its silvery rays. The term "mania,"
derived from "moon," means ecstatic
revelation; "lunacy" means possessed by
the spirit of Luna. Nights of the full
moon provide the greatest power for
magic and the world of spirit. In folklore
those cursed by lycanthropy are said to
turn into werewolves under the spell of
the full moon.
Moon power is mind power. The
moon is Goddess's "wise blood" in
women. In ancient times women withdrew to moon huts during menstruation
to contemplate and absorb the power of
the dark moon.
In astrology the moon exerts a powerful force in horoscopes and in daily affairs. As the moon moves through the zodiac, different creative forces are brought
into play. When the moon is between
signs, it is "void of course," a time of
uncertainty and instability.
Sources: Joseph Campbell. The Masks of
God. Vol. 4, Oriental Mythology.
New
York: Viking Penguin, 1962; J. E. Cirlot. A
Dictionary of Symbols. New York: Philo-
376
Prentice-Hall, 1991; Monica Sjoo and Barbara Mor. The Great Cosmic Earth
Mother: Rediscovering the Religion of the
Earth. San Francisco: Harper & Row,
1987; Starhawk. The Spiral Dance. San
Mu
See Lemuria.
Muhammad
(c. 570 or
571-632)
The Messenger of God and the Prophet
of Islam, believed by followers to be the
bearer of the last of all Divine revelations
before the end of the world. Muhammad
means "the Praised one" or "he who is
glorified"; it was either given at birth or
was a nickname. According to tradition
there are two hundred names for Muhammad, such as "Joy of Creation," "Beloved of God," and so on. Mention of his
name is customarily followed by one of
several invocations, such as "God bless
him and give him peace."
Muhammad was an inspired prophet
and religious reformer in the Semitic and
biblical tradition, preaching holy war and
Moon
377
rounded by idols, and it drew great numbers of pilgrims, who were one of Mecca's key sources of income.
Muhammad would have no compromise with the Quryash, which then
banned commerce with his clan, the
Hashimites. Persecutions of the Muslims
began, driving some of them to Abyssinia. Muhammad benefited from protection accorded by his uncle, but when Abu
Talib died, animosity toward the Muslims escalated.
Khadijah died in 619 at the age of
sixty-five. Muhammad married another
widow, Sawdah, thirty-five.
The first pledge of fealty to Islam by
pilgrims to Mecca took place in 620. Persecutions continued, and Muslims fled to
Yathrib. Muhammad himself emigrated
to Yathrib in 622, now observed as the
year in which the Islamic era began.
Yathrib became the first Islamic state,
and became known as Medina, "the city
of the Prophet."
In Medina Muhammad was joined
by his second wife, Sawdah, and a band
of seventy followers. He soon married a
six-year-old girl, A'ishah, who became
his favorite wife; she had an innate ability
to stimulate his intuition and sense of
spiritual immanence. The marriage was
consummated when she came of age.
Throughout the course of his life, Muhammad had ten wives and at least two
concubines. (Islamic law limits the number of wives to four per man, but a revelation of the Koran allowed the Prophet
to have more.)
The growing opposition to Islam
eventually led to a Holy War. In the view
of the Muslims, all unbelievers and idolaters had no "right" to peace. The Koran
exempted from the ranks of unbelievers
the followers of divinely revealed religions, including Jews, Christians, Zoroastrians, and Sabians, the latter of whom
included a number of smaller religions,
and later the Hindus.
Fighting broke out in 624; Muham-
378
mad's forces numbered only three hundred. In 630 Muhammad led an army of
10,000 into Mecca, which offered but token resistance. He destroyed the idols at
the Ka'bah. Within weeks, the city officially converted to Islam. There followed
conversions all over Arabia.
In March 632 Muhammad led
30,000 people (by some accounts,
90,000) in a farewell pilgrimage, during
which he delivered the last revelation of
the Koran in his sermon on Mount Arafat. The new religion was named Islam
("surrender" or "reconciliation") and the
law of Islam was established. Muhammad died on June 8, 632, and was buried
in his house. His death was followed by a
period of confusion and civil wars.
Islam now has an estimated 800 million to 900 million followers in various
sects around the world. It accepts Jesus
and the prophets of Judaism as prophets
of Islam. It seeks to restore the pre-Fall
state of the Garden of Eden, in which humanity in its essence was perfect and capable of perceiving God in the Unseen.
Its fundamentals are the Five Pillars:
the profession of faith; the canonical
prayer or worship; the fast; the legal
tithe; and the pilgrimage. The canonical
prayer rituals are elaborate, done five
times a day at certain times, with certain
attitudes and prostrations, preceded by
ablutions. The worshiper must face toward Mecca. In addition there are other
types of prayer, done at night or upon
certain occasions. The mystical path is
practiced by Sufis. See Sufism.
Sources: Emile Dermenghem. Muhammad
and the Islamic Tradition. 1955. Wood-
An
Introduction
Muhammad
to
the
Moslem
Murphy, Bridey
See Reincarnation.
Murphy, Gardner
See American Society for Psychical Research (ASPR).
Music
Arrangements of sound, which, aside
from creating entertainment, are believed
to affect physical, mental, emotional, and
spiritual states. The ability of music to
positively or negatively influence health,
character, morality, and consciousness
has been known since ancient times. It is
one of the oldest therapies, and in nearly
all cultures has been believed to facilitate
healing, meditation, and religious experience.
According to Eastern traditions
thousands of years old, vibration emanating from a spiritual source creates the
physical
universe.
Sacred
soundshabda-has long been applied to healing
and spiritual unfoldment, combined with
chants, musical instruments, postures,
and rhythmic movements. See Chanting;
Mantra; Om. The ancient Chinese believed music to be the basis of everything:
all things, including human beings, were
molded according to the music that was
performed within them. Confucius stated
that if the music of a kingdom changed,
then its society would alter itself accordingly. Plato, too, believed that music had
the power to bring about the downfall of
the state, and said it was the duty of the
legislature to suppress "effeminate" and
"lascivious" music and promote dignified
and pure music. In the sixth century,
Boethius associated music with morality.
Music
379
380
Music
Myers, Frederic W. H.
Brain
Dominance
Review
1-8.
Myers, Frederic W. H.
See Apparition; Society for Psychical Research (SPR).
381
Mysteries
In the strictest sense, secret religious cults
that flourished during the Hellenistic period, involving adoration of various deities and rites of spiritual transformation
and rebirth. "Mystery" derives from the
Greek myein, "to close," and refers to the
closing of the lips or the eyes. The mystes,
or initiate, was required to keep the secrets of the cult. In a broader sense, the
term "mysteries" also is applied to esoteric teachings and the rites of secret societies outside of the classical world.
The Hellenistic mystery cults were
pre-In do-European and pre-Semitic in origin, although their advanced elements
probably came from the Indo-Europeans.
The mysteries involved the worship of deities from Greece, Syria, Anatolia, Egypt,
and Persia. Some were limited to either
men or women; the Eleusinian mysteries
of Greece are probably the best-known of
those which admitted both sexes.
Regardless of orientation the mysteries shared some common characteristics:
They were centered on a divine female as
the vessel of transformation, even if they
were cloaked in patriarchal form; their
purpose was to secure eternal life in the
afterworld, through rebirth or redemption; they contained an erotic-sexual element of union with the primal mother;
there was preparation and consumption
of special food and drink as part of the
transformative process or as reenactment
of a holy meal of the gods and goddesses;
there were blood sacrifices; there were elements of magic and ecstasy in the rites;
the initiate was revealed the secrets and
the instructions of the cult.
The rites of the mysteries consisted
of religious dramas of the deities, reenactments of the hieros gamos (sacred
marriage), and/or the death and rebirth of
a deity. Psychiatrist Carl G. Jung observed that the ancients learned how to
escape spiritual death by submitting
themselves to the dramas of the myster-
382
Mystery
Cults
Mysteries
Mysteries
383
Mystical experiences
A wide range of experiences in which one
suddenly transcends the bounds of ordinary consciousness to an ineffable awareness beyond time, space, and the physical.
Mystical experiences intrinsically defy description, so the effort here will at best
hint at their nature.
Mystical experiences are universal,
and share some common traits, despite
differences in culture and religion. They
are invariably spiritual, yet not necessarily religious; one need not be a monk or
priest in order to have one. However, all
personal religious experiences are rooted
in mystical states of consciousness, and
mystical experiences are part of all religIOns.
Though mystical experiences are
common as a whole, they occur unbidden
to an individual perhaps once or twice in
a lifetime, if at all. According to a survey
(1987) by the National Opinion Research
Center in Chicago, 43 percent of adult
Americans say they have had some type
of mystical experience. In British polls
published in 1978 and 1979 in the Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion, 56
percent of churchgoers said they had had
such an experience. According to the British polls, mystical experiences were more
likely to occur to those who were older,
better educated, and regularly attended
church.
Psychologist and philosopher William James identified four general characteristics of mystical experiences:
1. Ineffability. Mystical states are more
like states of feeling than intellect,
subtly shaded and with fine nuances
that are difficult to convey in their
import and grandeur to another.
Consequently, much mystical literature is filled with paradoxes and
symbolism.
2. Noetic quality. Mystical experiences
are states of knowledge, insight,
awareness, revelation, and illumina-
384
Mystical experiences
Mystical experiences
Physical Phenomena
Mystical experiences flood an individual with a sense of well-being, joy, and
optimism. The ecstasy can reach such
heights as to become almost unbearable
torment and pain, as seen in the writings
of the great Christian mystics. See Ecstasy. A number of physical phenomena
are characteristic of various mystical expenences.
Decrease in bodily functions is common especially in sustained mystical
states; breathing, pulse, circulation, and
brain waves slow, and one loses awareness of the body. In the state of rapture
described by Christian mystics, the body
seems to be on the verge of extinguishing.
St. Teresa of Avila wrote in The Interior
Castle that in the orison of union, the
soul "is utterly dead to the things of the
world and lives solely in God .... I do
not even know whether in this state she
has enough life left to breathe. It seems to
me she has not; or at least that if she does
breathe, she is unaware of it."
The rise of the powerful kundalini
energy, which in yogic literature resides
at the base of the spine and under certain
conditions of spiritual discipline rises to
the crown chakra, is reported crossculturally. Christian mystics, such as St.
Therese (1873-1897, not to be confused
with St. Teresa of Avila), sometimes experienced the heat, energy, spontaneous
body movements and pain characteristic
of a yogic kundalini awakening. The
same phenomenon is reported among the
!Kung bushmen of Africa, and in Sufism,
Taoism, Buddhism, and shamanism. In a
nonreligious context, kundalini awakening is called a "spiritual emergence" or
385
II~:'.
386
Mystical experiences
and
In Freudian psychology mystical experiences generally are dismissed as illusion. Psychiatrist Carl G. Jung saw them
as a liberation of the unconscious. Humanistic psychologist
Abraham
H.
Maslow called certain mystical experiences "peak experiences" and believed
they are essential to health and to selfactualization, the realization of one's fullest human potential. See Peak experiences. Transpersonal psychology explores
the mystical experience for its therapeutic
potential. See Psychology.
Sources: Richard Maurice Bucke. Cosmic
Consciousness.
1901. New York: E. P.
Dutton, 1969; Nona Coxhead. The Relevance of Bliss: A Contemporary Exploration of Mystic Experience. London: Wildwood House, 1985; William James. The
Varieties of Religious Experience: A Study
in Human Nature. 1902. London: Long-
mans, Green
Mysticism
Mysticism
The belief in or pursuit of unification
with the One or some other principle; the
immediate consciousness of God; or the
direct experience of religious truth. Mysticism is nearly universal and unites most
religions in the quest for the One. There
are different types of mysticism, and different understandings of what constitutes
mystical union. Mysticism is not confined
to monks and ascetics, but touches most
people at least once in life.
The term "mysticism" is derived
from the classical Greco-Roman mystery
cults. It may have come from myein,
which means to close the lips and eyes,
and refers to the sacred oath of the initiate, the mystes, to keep secret about the
inner workings of the religion. In Neoplatonism "mysticism" came to be associated with secrecy of any kind. The term
mystica appeared in the Christian treatise, Mystica Theologia, of an anonymous
Syrian Neoplatonist monk of the late fifth
or early sixth century, known pseudonymously as Dionysius the Areopagite. In
this treatise mysticism is seen as a secrecy
of the mind.
Despite the various approaches to
mysticism, there are some characteristics
common to mysticism in general. Philosopher W. T. Stace studied Roman Catholic, Protestant, ancient classical, Hindu,
and American agnostic mystical experiences and found seven common themes:
(1) a unifying vision and perception of
the One by the senses in and through
many objects; (2) the apprehension of the
One as an inner life; (3) an objective and
true sense of reality; (4) feelings of satisfaction, joy, and bliss; (5) a religious element that is a feeling of the holy and
sacred; (6) a paradoxical feeling; and (7)
inexpressible feelings.
Types of Mysticism
Mystics subscribe to one of two theories of Divine Reality: emanation and
387
388
Mysticism
Mysticism
389
Phenomena of Mysticism
Mysticism invariably is accompanied
by phenomena such as visions, voices,
oracular dreams, paranormal powers
(clairvoyance, telepathy, psychokinesis,
bilocation, levitation, and so on), raptures, trances, and hyper-emotionalism.
Some argue that such phenomena must
be excluded from the mystical experience,
while others contend they are preliminary
and important to the mystical goal. In
the Eastern meditation and yoga disciplines such phenomena, called siddhis,
are distractions, obstacles, and pseudoenlightenment, which must be overcome
in order to achieve the true objective. See
Siddhis.
Sources: Paula Gunn Allen. "American Indian Mysticism." Shaman's Drum no. 14
(Mid-Fall 1988): 39-46; Joseph Epes
Brown. The Spiritual Legacy of the American Indian. New York: Crossroad, 1987;
Fritjof Capra. The Tao of Physics. 2d ed.
New York: Bantam Books, 1984; Nona
Coxhead. The Relevance of Bliss: A Contemporary Exploration of Mystic Experience. London: Wildwood House, 1985; F.
C. Happold. Mysticism: A Study and an
Anthology. Rev. ed. Harmondsworth, Mid-
Mysticism,
Mysticism and Science
A great deal has been written, especially from a "New Age" perspective,
about the apparent parallels and common
worldview between modern physicsquantum and relativity-and the Eastern
mysticism of Buddhism, Taoism, Hinduism, and Zen. It is argued that physics
and mysticism are complementary approaches to the same reality. Much controversy surrounds
these assertions
within the scientific community. The
founders and great theorists of modern
physics-who were mystical in their own
outlook, were acquainted with Eastern
philosophy, and advocated interdisciplinary communication-nonetheless
have
said modern physics neither support nor
refutes mysticism. The debate will continue as new theories are put forward.
390
Great Physicists.
Christian
Mysticism
Mysticism, Christian
Foundation
391
392
Mysticism, Christian
Experience
(1902).
Recent Trends
The popularity within Protestant
groups of proclaiming one's born-again
Christianity has spread within Catholicism. It is often accompanied by dramatic
public witnessing or personal Epiphany
("a showing forth" of Jesus to the Gentiles).
Since the Ecumenical Council Vatican II in the 1960s, ecumenism among
Christians and with other faiths has revived interest in all aspects of spirituality,
especially the mysticism leading to and
flowing from the Cosmic Christ about
which Teilhard de Chardin, Matthew
Fox, and others write.
Women theologians, philosophers,
and writers are also redefining the role of
women in Christian spirituality and mysticism from perspectives such as women's mysteries (birth-death-rebirth) and
the Great Mother/Mary archetype. See
Mythology
A Study
and an Anthology.
in Human
Nature.
1902.
Mythology
Stories that explain the creation of the
cosmos; the reasons for the characteristics of the features of the Earth, the animals, plants, and human beings; supernatural traditions; and gods and culture
heroes. Myths (and fairy tales, which are
degenerated myths) hold the wisdom of a
culture. They reflect how the individual
relates to his or her culture and to the
universe; they are archetypal encounters
and comprise a language of the psyche.
Without myths, a society decays.
Myths come into consciousness as
revelations. The stories are reenacted
through ritual, which is a means of accessing the spiritual power of a myth.
An important figure in mythologies
is the culture hero, a human, animal, or
393
394
Mythology
of Your
Evolving
Self (1988),
they define five stages in a person's "evolution of consciousness," that is, one's
consciousness and the consciousness of
the culture in which one is embedded.
The stages are: (1) recognizing and defining a personal myth and knowing when it
is no longer an ally; (2) identifying an opposing myth; (3) conceiving a unifying
mythic vision from the rwo opposing
myths; (4) moving from vision to commitment by testing insights; and (5)
weaving the new mythology into daily
life.
When preparing to present the initial
steps in this process, the authors call
upon rwo key concepts of Joseph Campbell's from The Hero with a Thousand
Faces: "Myth is the secret opening
through which the inexhaustible energies
of the cosmos pour into human cultural
manifestations," and "It has always been
known the prime functions of mythology
and rite supply the symbols that move the
human spirit forward."
Other self-help approaches to personal mythology involve becoming acquainted with various archetypes, such as
the Magician, Sage, Wanderer, Child,
Mother, and so on, to determine what
Mythology
395
N
Native American mysticism
See Mysticism.
Nature spirits
Various types of beings or spirits said to
dwell in the nature kingdom; they possess
supernatural powers and are usually invisible to humans, save those with clairvoyant sight. Belief in the existence of nature spirits is ancient and universal and
persists in animistic religions. Nature
spirits come in countless types, shapes,
sizes, and dispositions. Some are regarded
as benevolent toward humans, while others are mischievous and enjoy playing
tricks on them, or are malevolent and
seek to harm them. Some are human-like
in appearance, while others assume
shapes of animals, half-human halfanimals, or fabulous-looking beings.
Nature spirits usually are attached to
a thing or place in nature, such as trees,
rivers, plants, bogs, mountains, minerals,
and so on. For example, in China there
are nature spirits that watch over rice,
silk, roads, gateways, and the like. The
Shinto religion of Japan includes worship
of nature, nature forces, and nature spirits. The ancient Greeks and Romans also
worshiped nature spirits, who inhabited
every glen and pool and even the air.
Elementals, a well-known type of nature spirit, are a lo\ver order of spirit beings that exists as the life force of all
396
things in nature: minerals, plants, and animals; the four elements of earth, air, fire,
and water; the planets, stars, and signs of
the zodiac; and hours of the day and
night. They are ruled by archangels, and
are generally viewed as benevolent creatures who maintain the harmony of nature.
The Neoplatonic Greeks (c. third
century A.D.) grouped elementals according to the four elements of life. Earth elementals are gnomes, ruled by the angel
Ariel; air elementals are sylphs, ruled by
Cherub; water elementals are undines,
ruled by Tharsis; and fire elementals are
salamanders, ruled by Seraph. In the fifth
century, Proclus added a fifth group that
lives beneath the ground; and in the eleventh century, Psellus added a sixth group,
the lucifugum, which means "fly-thelight." Interest in elementals in the four
cardinal groups was revived in the Middle Ages and Renaissance, when alchemists and magicians sought to control the
forces of nature and the universe.
Elementals also include elves, who
live in the woods and along the seashore,
and household spirits such as brownies,
goblins, bogIes, and kobolds. Fairies are
sometimes included within the elemental
category, as are mannikins, which are
male fairies who also have attributes of
elves, gnomes, and brownies. In the lore
of many Native North American tribes,
water babies, nature spirits in small human form, inhabit lakes, streams, springs,
Nazca
lines
Naturopathy
See Behavioral medicine.
Nazca lines
Giant lines, geometric figures, and human
and animal drawings on the desert mesa
close to the village of Nazca and near the
Ingenio Valley, Peru. The purpose of the
markings is not known for certain. Theories advanced propose that they had astronomical functions, or once marked an
airfield for the landing of ancient extraterrestrials and their spacecraft. Research
in the 1980s suggests that the lines were
397
398
Nazca
lines
Nicholson, 1987.
Near-death
experience (NDE)
Term coined in the 1970s by the American physician Raymond Moody to describe the mystical-like phenomena experienced by individuals who appear to die
and then return to life, or who come close
to death. Until the 1975 publication of
Moody's landmark book, Life After Life,
few people would talk openly about an
NDE experience. By 1982, however, a
Gallup poll revealed that some 8 million
adult Americans claimed to have had an
NDE.
Moody, along with other NDE researchers, including Kenneth Ring, a psychologist and founding member of the International Association of Near-Death
Studies at the University of Connecticut,
identified several traits common to
NDEs, although the experiences themselves are unique to each individual. In an
NDE people generally experience one or
more of the following phenomena in this
sequence: a sense of being dead, or an
out-of-body experience in which they feel
themselves floating above their bodies,
looking down; cessation of pain and a
feeling of bliss or peacefulness; traveling
down a dark tunnel toward a light at the
end; meeting nonphysical beings who
glow, many of whom are dead friends
and relatives; coming in contact with a
guide or Supreme Being who takes them
on a life review, during which their entire
lives are put into perspective without rendering any negative judgments about past
acts; and finally, a reluctant return to life.
Despite the numbers of people who
claim to have had an NDE, the experience has not been scientifically proved.
Near-death
experience
(NDE)
399
400
Near-death
experience
(NDE)
Neo-Paganism
An eclectic mO,dern movement primarily
concerned with revived and reconstructed
pre-Christian nature religions and mystery traditions, As a movement it dates
from about the 1960s, drawing its base
from a wide spectrum of individuals interested in the occult revival, environmentalism, mythology, spiritual awareness, and comparative religions,
Neo-Paganism is loosely organized
with no central authority, and is interpreted on a highly individualistic and personal basis; it is a religion, a philosophy,
and a way of life, There are various neoPagan groups and churches, most of
which are in the United States, England,
and Canada, and also in Australia and
Europe; but it is probable that the majority of neo-Pagans-or Pagans, as some
prefer-practice
their religion on a solitary basis. For some, being a "solitary" is
necessary to protect their privacy and
jobs, as neo-Paganism often is falsely associated with Devil-worship cults. Many
neo-Pagans also are Witches.
The term "pagan" comes from the
Latin paganus, which means "country
dweller," and was applied in previous
centuries to those who still believed in
pre-Christian deities. The isolated country dwellers were among the last to be
converted to Christianity.
The first neo-Pagan organization in
the United States was Fereferia, which began in 1959 as the Fellowship of Hesperides and was incorporated as Fereferia
in California in 1967. Its founder was
Fred Adams, then a graduate student at
Los Angeles State College. Fereferia,
which comes from Latin for "wilderness
festival," was a Goddess-and-Nature system that preached an abandonment of
technology and a return to a peaceful,
loosely organized vegetarian society, a
utopia as envisioned by Adams. Fereferia
is still in existence with a small following.
In the United States, two organiza-
Neo- Paganism
tions that most influenced the early development and spread of neo-Paganism
were Pagan Way and the Church of All
Worlds. See Church of All Worlds. Pagan
Way emerged in 1970, the product of
an international collaboration between
persons in America and Britain who also
were involved in the reconstruction of
Witchcraft as a religion. Pagan Way was
organized in groves, which grew quickly
and thrived during the 1970s. No central organization was ever established,
and by 1980 Pagan Way evolved into
new groups. Pagan Way rituals, written
largely by Ed Fitch, are in the public domain and continue to be practiced.
Neo-Pagan networking is fulfilled
primarily by Circle Sanctuary, established
in 1974 near Mt. Horeb, Wisconsin, by
Selena Fox, Jim Alan, and others. It is
now run by Fox and her husband, Dennis
Carpenter. In addition to networking,
Circle offers counseling services and neoPagan and Wiccan training programs.
In Britain the Pagan Front was established in 1971 by members of the four
branches of the Old Religion, or Witchcraft. It later changed its name to Pagan
Federation, and remains active out of
London headquarters. It espouses three
principles: (1) love for and kinship with
Nature; (2) adherence to the Pagan Ethic,
"Do what you will but harm no thing";
and (3) a belief in reincarnation.
401
402
Social Responsibilities
Because of their aversion to centralized authority, and the need for many to
remain private about their religion, neoPagans have not organized on a great
scale for social causes. However, many
individuals, and some churches and
groups, work for environmentalism and
animal welfare, against nuclear weapons
and nuclear energy, and for various charitable causes. Of particular interest to
some neo-Pagans is child abuse, especially ritual child abuse, practiced by
some satanic groups and often blamed on
neo-Pagans and Witches.
In the mid-1980s, neo-Pagans began
to recognize the need to provide social
services for their own. The chief champion of this has been P. E. 1. (Isaac) Bonewits, Archdruid of Ar nDraiocht Fein
("Our Own Druidism"), a neo-Pagan
group based on reconstructed Druidic
rites. See Mysteries; Witchcraft.
Sources: Margot Adler. Drawing Down the
Moon. Rev. ed. Boston: Beacon Press,
1986; Rosemary Ellen Guiley. The Ency-
Neo-Paganism
N eo-Pentecostalism
See Charismatic renewal.
New Age
Controversial term applied to a spiritual
and social movement encompassing a
broad range of interests in religion, philosophy, mysticism, health, psychology,
parapsychology, ecology, and the occult.
It is virtually impossible to define precisely what constitutes "New Age," as no
two opinions agree; and much of what is
called "New Age" is not new, but a renewed cycle of interest and rediscovery.
The term "New Age" has replaced the
"Age of Aquarius" label used in the
1960s.
"New Age" has been used in the
past, such as for the names of various periodicals. These include the Freemasons'
journal, New Age, christened in 1914;
and a London weekly newspaper, The
New Age, founded before World War I
and which featured articles on social, political, economic, spiritual, and psychological issues.
The New Age has no organization
and no central leaders, though there are
networks of like-minded individuals, and
various people are widely regarded as
spokespersons of New Age thought.
There is no organized agenda. New Age
beliefs and activities are highly individual
and eclectic, and essentially are part of a
striving to be whole: the individuation
process described by psychiatrist Carl G.
Jung, or the self-actualization described
by humanistic psychologist Abraham H.
Maslow. See Psychology. There is a general interest in pursuing a sadhana, a spiritual path, toward self-realization; in
transforming the world through spiritual
consciousness that unifies all religions;
and in looking after planetary concerns.
New Age
The New Age is largely a phenomenon of the industrialized West, with the
greatest activity taking place in the alchemical crucible of the United States,
where it is the latest expression in a mystical and occult tradition that extends
back to the founding of the nation. J.
Gordon Melton, an American Methodist
minister, church historian, and scholar of
nonconventional religions, dates the approximate beginning of the New Age to
1971, when it was first articulated. Small
groups in the 1960s, outgrowths of the
beatnik and hippie movements, had begun to call themselves "new age," but it
was not until the 1970s that New Age
networks, organizations, periodicals, and
publications emerged.
David Spangler, one of the most eloquent observers of the essence of the
New Age, sees it as "a metaphor for being in the world in a manner that opens
us to the presence of God-the presence
of love and possibility-in the midst of
our ordinariness."
Spangler's books, Revelation: The
Birth of a New Age (1976) and Emergence: The Rebirth of the Sacred (1984),
are among the best presentations of New
Age ideals. Another is Marilyn Ferguson's The Aquarian Conspiracy (1980;
1988). However, Ferguson's accurate observations that New Age proponents are
everywhere in all levels of society, plus
her unfortunate choice of the word "conspiracy," have been seized upon by some
fundamentalist anti-New Age forces as
evidence of a massive, anti-Christian
New Age plot to dominate the world.
Among the concepts that stand out
in New Age thought are that one creates
one's own reality; that divinity exists
within; and that there is a need for renewed recognition of the feminine principle and the use of "feminine" traits
such as intuition.
New Age thought is not new in and
of itself, but new expressions of eternal
laws of the universe, mind, and heart. In
403
404
The New Age has had ample precedents. In fact, as scientist and philosopher
Pierre Teilhard de Chardin observed in
The Phenomenon of Man (1955), humankind has in every age of history declared itself to be at a turning point.
While this is in a sense true because we
advance in an upward spiral, Teilhard
said, "There are moments when this impression of transformation becomes accentuated and is thus particularly justified."
The foundation for the New Age in
America was laid in the birth of the nation, many of whose leaders were steeped
in Masonic and Rosicrucian mystical
thought, and were influenced by Confucian philosophy. "A New Order of the
Ages Begins," proclaims the reverse side
of the Great Seal of the United States. Democracy and the individual's right to selfdirection in the pursuit of life, liberty,
and happiness helped to foster a culture
more open to innovation and change than
any other culture before it. In the early
and mid-nineteenth century, the Transcendentalists became acquainted with
Eastern religions and philosophies. They
espoused a philosophy that emphasized
intuition as well as intellect and, contrary
to the prevailing scientific views, a living,
evolutionary universe. Transcendentalism
in turn influenced the subsequent movements of Theosophy, which represented
the first broad effort to disseminate Eastern teachings in the West; Spiritualism;
mental healing; Christian Science; and
New Thought, the latter of which presented a synthesis of unorthodox medicine, religion, and psychology.
Beginning in the late nineteenth century, the number of alternative religious
groups began growing in the United
States, and accelerated following World
War II. In 1965 immigration restrictions
on Asians were revised to be comparable
to quotas for Europeans, which brought a
wave of Asians to the country. The social
and political unrest of the 1960s offered
New Age
New Age
405
406
New Age
Newspaper test
An experiment attempting to prove survival after death. The newspaper test,
similar to the book test, was prevalent in
psychical research in the early twentieth
century.
The test was created in 1919 by
Feda, the spirit control of British medium
Gladys Osborne Leonard, who was successful in book tests. In the newspaper
test, a medium, working under controlled
circumstances, communicated with her
controls to give information about news
stories to be published the next day in the
London Times before it went to press.
Such information, including page numbers of stories, could not be known by
either medium or sitter.
In sittings with the Reverend Charles
Drayton Thomas, a member of the Society for Psychical Research (SPR), Leonard provided words, names, and numbers, and the locations in which they
were to appear on certain pages. Thomas
acknowledged that most of the names
were common enough to be found in virtually every issue of the London Times.
However, Feda correctly gave page positions to within one-quarter of a column.
In twelve sittings in which 104 items were
given, Thomas determined seventy-three
were accurate, twenty were inconclusive,
and nineteen were wrong. The chance
odds were eighteen successes, ten inconclusives, and seventy-six failures.
Nostradamus (1503-1566)
Ninja
See Martial arts.
Nirvana
See Buddhism; Meditation; Mystical experiences; Yoga.
Nostradamus (1503-1566)
French physician and prophet whose farreaching prophecies have caused controversy for centuries. Nostradamus, a gifted
clairvoyant, made approximately one
thousand predictions to the year 3797.
Some scholars say more than half the predictions have come true.
Nostradamus was born Michel de
Nostredame in St. Remy de Provence, the
oldest of five sons in a well-educated Jewish family. His parents converted to Catholicism, which exposed Nostradamus
to both the occult wisdom of the Kab-
407
408
Nostradamus (1503-1566)
McGraw-Hill, 1974; Jean-Charles de Fontbrune. Nostradamus: Countdown to Apocalypse. New York: Holt, Rinehart and
Numerology
Prophecies
of
Nostradamus.
Notarikon
See Gematria.
Numerology
A system of divination and magic based
upon the concept that the universe is constructed in a mathematical pattern, and
that all things may be expressed in numbers, which correspond to vibrations. By
reducing names, words, birth dates, and
birthplaces to numbers, a person's personality, destiny, and fortune may be determined.
Pythagoras is credited as the father
of numerology, due to his discovery that
the musical intervals known in his time
could be expressed in ratios between the
numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4. He also observed
that the numbers 1 through 4 add up to
10, which begins the cycle of numbers
over again, for all numbers larger than 9
may be reduced by a single digit by adding the digits together. Pythagoras reasoned that the entire universe could be
expressed numerically, creating a mystical system expanded by other early Greek
philosophers. He is quoted: "The world
is built upon the power of numbers."
Each primary number is ascribed
certain characteristics and values, and a
male or female aspect. Odd numbers are
masculine, active, and creative, while
even numbers are feminine and passive.
In the Greek mysteries, the number
888 represented the "Higher Mind." The
Greek variation of "Jesus," "Iesous,"
equals 888. The number 666 represented
the "Mortal Mind." In the New Testament, 666 is called the number of "the
Beast."
409
The early Hebrews placed great importance upon numbers, basing the letters of the Hebrew alphabet upon them
and relating them to cosmic forces. In the
Middle Ages, the teachings of the Merkabah sect of Judaism became intertwined
with numerical mysticism. In the thirteenth century, German Kabbalists developed the interpretation of the Scriptures
through a system of number mysticism.
See Gematria.
Both the Greeks and the Hebrews
considered 10 the perfect number.
Pythagoras said that 10 comprehends all
arithmetic and harmonic proportions,
and, like God, is tireless. All nations
reckon to it because when they arrive at
10 they return to 1, the number of creation. The Pythagoreans believed the
heavenly bodies were divided into 10 orders. According to the Kabbalah, there
are 10 emanations of numbers out of
Nothing. The emanations form the 10
sephiroth of the Tree of Life, which contains all knowledge and shows the path
back to God.
In the nineteenth century, when scientific discoveries were made about light,
magnetism, and electricity, the theory
that numbers were energy patterns of vibrations became popular.
In numerological divination all numbers are reduced to nine roots between 1
and 9. Each number corresponds to a letter of the alphabet:
12345
678
ABCDEFGHI
J KL MNOP
STUVWXYZ
9
QR
410
Numerology
Numerology
411
o
ad
See Universal life force.
Odic force
See Universal life force.
Odyle
See Universal life force.
am
In Hinduism, the most sacred and comprehensive expression of spiritual knowledge. am, also represented as Aum, is a
mantra, a symbol of form and a manifestation of spiritual power. am also appears in Buddhism, most notably the Vajrayana, or "Diamond Vehicle" school.
The symbol of am represents supreme consciousness, which encompasses
and reveals the physical, mental, and unconscious; the three states of consciousness (waking, dreaming, and deep sleep,
or the unconscious); and the three principles of creation as embodied in Brahma,
Vishnu, and Shiva.
412
Od
Omen
A sign, often
nature, of a
are found in
cients of East
of a supernatural or psychic
future event. Many omens
the natural world. The anand West examined the en-
unhappiness
with
human-
Oracle
plane crashes, car accidents, ship sinkings, fires, and other disasters.
The appearance
of apparitions
and
visions also is considered an omen. Joan
of Arc's soldiers were bolstered by heavenly visions of St. Michael and of the
Holy Spirit, which appeared as a dove
perched on the Maid's shoulder. In the
sixteenth
and seventeenth
centuries in
England, it was common for people to
report seeing great visions in the sky of
galloping horses, dragons, armies in battle, and angels with owls' heads. The
English Civil War (1642-1648)
was presaged by numerous
visions of armies
marching through the skies.
Vision and apparition omens are still
seen. A vision of a deceased person may
be viewed as an omen of the impending
death of a member of the family. In Ireland the banshee, or "fairy woman," heralds the death of members of old families
and great and holy persons. The appearance of spectral animals, ghostly ships,
and spirits is universal and often considered to be an omen. See Divination;
Prophecy.
Sources: Katherine Briggs. An Encyclopedia of Fairies: Hobgoblins, Brownies, Bogies, and Other Supernatural Creatures.
New York: Pantheon Books, 1976; E. A.
Wallis Budge. Amulets and Superstitions.
1930. Reprint. New York: Dover Publications, 1978; Robert Graves. The White
Goddess. Amended and enlarged ed. New
York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1966;
Michael Loewe and Carmen Blacker. Oracles and Divination. Boulder, CO: Shambhala, 1981; Charles Mackay. Extraordinary Popular Delusions and the Madness of
Crowds. 1852. Reprint. New York: Farrar,
Straus and Giroux, 1932; Keith Thomas.
Religion and the Decline of Magic. New
York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1971.
Oracle
A method of divination and prophecy in
which deities or supernatural
beings are
consulted, usually through a human me-
413
414
Oracle
Temp/ar
the Religion
of the Earth.
San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1987; Merlin Stone. When God Was a Woman. San
Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1976;
Keith Thomas. Religion and the Decline of
Magic. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons,
1971; Danah Zohar. Through the Time
Barrier: A Study in Precognition and Modern Physics. London: William Heinemann
Ltd., 1982.
415
holy struggle of Christians against the infidels. But their enormous wealth, jealously coveted by kings and popes, and
their secret rituals brought about their
spectacular downfall and the establishment of sorcery as evidence of heresy.
In A.D. 1118, about twenty years after the founding of the Kingdom of Jerusalem by Godefroy de Bouillon and
a group of crusaders, French knight
Hugues de Payns ("of the pagans") led a
group of nine other French noblemen to
the Holy Land, where they encamped
next to the alleged site of King Solomon's
Temple. Vowing to protect Christians
traveling to the holy places, especially between Jerusalem and St. Jean d'Acre, the
knights pledged chastity, poverty, and
obedience. They called themselves the
Order of the Knights of the Temple, or
Templars.
Although led by de Payns, the real
power behind the Order was St. Bernard
of Clairvaux, head of the Cistercian Order of monks and supported by Pope
Honorius II. The pope officially recognized the Templars as a separate Order in
1128, giving it unheard-of sovereignty.
The Order was exempt from local taxes,
could impose its own taxes on the community, was immune from judicial authority, could appoint its own clergy, and
answered only to the pope. Membership
was restricted to men of noble birth who
had to undergo various probationary periods and initiation rituals before acceptance. Attached to these noblemen were
various artisans and manual laborers.
The head of the Order was the Grand
Master, followed by his deputy the
Senechal, the Marshal, and the Commander.
The Order's battle standard was a
red eight-pointed cross on a background
of black and white squares called the
Beauceant, with the cross on a plain
background of white as the official symbol. Their battle cry was "Vive Dieu,
Saint Amour" ("God Lives, Saint Love"),
416
417
Orgone
See Universal life force.
Osis, Karlis.
See Deathbed visions.
418
Ouija
A board and pointer used for divination
and by some as a means to contact spirits
or entities. The name comes from the
French and German words for "yes," oui
and ja (ja is mispronounced with a hard
"j"). Critics of the Ouija, who include authorities in most denominations of Christianity, say it is dangerous and a tool of
the Devil. Advocates say that it, like other
forms of divination, is a legitimate means
to discover insight, wisdom, and selftruths and to communicate with discarnate beings.
The board includes letters of the alphabet, numerals 0 through 9, the words
"yes" and "no," and a heart-shaped
pointer on three felt-tipped legs. One or
two people place their fingertips on the
pointer, which moves to answer questions. In most cases answers probably rise
up from the subconsciousness of the users, even when "spirits" identify themselves and give messages. However, Ouija
pointers have been known to fly off the
board and spin out of control, as though
being directed by unseen forces, and some
users claim to be harassed by external
agents contacted through the board.
Precursors to the Ouija date back to
ancient times. In China before the birth
of Confucius (c. 551 B.C.), similar instruments were used to communicate with
the dead. In Greece during the time of
Pythagoras (c. 540 B.C.) divination was
done with a table that moved on wheels
to point to signs, which were interpreted
as revelations from the "unseen world."
The rolling table was used through the
nineteenth century. Other such devices
were used by the ancient Romans as early
as the third century A.D., and in the thirteenth century by the Mongols. Some Native Americans used "squdilatc boards"
to find missing objects and persons, and
obtain spiritual information. In 1853 the
planchette came into use in Europe. It
consisted of a triangular or heart-shaped
Templar
Out-of-body
experience
(OBE)
of Other-Consciousness.
Out-of-body
experience (OBE)
419
Cultural Beliefs
The belief that the consciousness can
separate from the body has been held in
many civilizations throughout history.
The ancient Egyptians described a ka, a
vehicle of the mind and soul (ba). The
mysteries of Isis and Osiris had initiation
rites that required projection of the ka.
The initiation rites of the Mithraic mysteries also centered on out-of-body projection. Plato held that the soul could
leave the body and travel. Socrates, Pliny,
and Plotinus gave descriptions of experiences that resemble OBEs; Plotinus wrote
of being "lifted out of the body into myself" on many occasions. Plutarch described an OBE that occurred to Aridanaeus in A.D. 79. The Tibetan Book of the
Dead describes a "Bardo-body," an ethereal duplicate of the physical body, in
which the deceased find themselves. The
existence of an apparitional body is acknowledged in Mahayana Buddhism. The
ancient Chinese said they could achieve
OBE during meditation. OBEs are a phenomenon of yoga, but not a goal; they,
like other phenomena called siddhis, can
be obstacles to enlightenment. See Siddhis.
Shamans in tribal cultures say they
project themselves out-of-body at will by
achieving an ecstatic state of consciousness.
The belief in doubles, phantom duplicates that appear to be real, is widespread. See Bilocation; Double.
420
reported is the existence of a second, subtle body that becomes the vehicle for
travel. The subtle body is described as a
ghostly, semitransparent double of the
physical body that is either naked,
clothed in duplicate clothing, or clothed
in other apparel. To other individuals it is
usually invisible, though its presence may
be sensed. If seen it appears to be an apparition. Some individuals report having
no form at all, or being points of light or
presences of energy. The existence of a
silvery cord connecting the astral form to
the physical body is reported seen or
sensed in a minority of cases.
In the astral form, OBE travelers report moving about the earth plane like
apparitions, passing through walls and
solid objects. They say they travel with
the speed of thought. Travel to nonearthly realms called the astral plane are
much different, with contact with objects
and beings who "feel" solid and real.
The onset of an OBE occurs spontaneously during waking consciousness; before, during, and after sleep; during severe illness; and at times of great stress,
trauma, or fear. Some individuals believe
that OBEs occur to everyone during
sleep. OBEs also can be induced by hypnosis, meditation, and other techniques.
The physical body may be lying, sitting,
or standing.
The near-death experience (NDE)
usually involves some form of OBE. Some
people who have clinically died or come
close to death report the separation of
their consciousnesses from their bodies.
They watch efforts to restore their physical forms to life, or travel into an apparent afterlife state. See Near-death experience (NDE).
The OBE is often preceded by a perception of strong and high-frequency vibrations.
Individuals report leaving
through their head or solar plexus, or
simply rising up and floating away. Reentry is accomplished by returning
through the head or solar plexus, or by
Historical Research
The most systematic, early experimentation in OBEs was conducted by
four individuals. Yram, born Marcel
Louis Forhan (1884-1917),
was a
Frenchman who believed everyone was
capable of astral travel in a variety of
bodies of various densities and dimensions, which he chronicled in his book,
Practical Astral Travel. Yram paid outof-body visits to a woman whom he later
married; the two traveled astrally together and experienced ecstatic astral sex.
Sylvan Muldoon, an American, researched OBEs from 1915 to 1950, as a
result of his spontaneous OBEs beginning
at age twelve. Muldoon was a sickly
youth who spent a good deal of time in
bed. As his health improved, his OBEs
became less frequent. Muldoon traveled
about in a double the exact duplicate of
his physical body. He remained on the
earth plane. He sometimes felt pain when
our-of-body, which runs contrary to most
descriptions. Muldoon
believed that
dreams of falling and flying corresponded
to movements during astral travel. He
wrote of his research in The Projection of
the Astral Body (1929), coauthored with
psychical researcher Hereward
Carrington.
Englishman Oliver Fox, born Hugh
G. Callway in 1885, was also a sickly
child. He did not experience OBEs until
adulthood, however, when he succeeded
in inducing them with lucid dreaming; he
experimented between 1902 and 1938.
Fox's "Dream of Knowledge" was an ef-
421
422
Out-of-body
experience
(OBE)
423
p
Palmistry
A method of divination by the shape of
the hands and the lines and mounds on
the palms and fingers. Palmistry is one of
the oldest forms of divination, and until
modern times was more commonly
known as cheiromancy or chiromancy.
The exact age and origin of palmistry are not known. Prehistorical hand
prints found on cave walls in France,
Spain, and Africa may have had a magical significance connected with the development of palmistry. As a method of divination, it is believed to have started as
early as 3000 B.C. in either China or India
and then spread westward. One theory
places its beginning at about 1100 B.C.,
when the first written works appeared on
physiognomy, the art of judging a person
based on facial features.
Palmistry was popular during the
Middle Ages. Adherents believed that the
lines upon a hand were stamped by occult
forces and would reveal character and
destiny. They looked for support to such
biblical scriptures as Isaiah 49:16, "Behold, I have graven thee on the palms of
thy hands; thy walls are continually before me"; Job 27:7, "He sealeth up the
hand of every man; that all men may
know his work"; and Proverbs 3:16,
"Length of days in her right hand, and in
her left hand riches and honor."
Most Western medieval hand-readers were village wise women, witches,
424
and Gypsies. Among the Kabbalists rabbis were skilled at it and read palms after
Sabbath to foretell the future.
In the fifteenth century, the church
forbade palmistry and other forms of divination and ordered all written works on
the subjects confiscated, merely driving
the practice underground. Intellectual interest waned of its own accord with the
advent of the age of science and reason in
the seventeenth century. Palmistry became a parlor art, popularized in the
nineteenth and twentieth centuries by
such figures as "Cheiro," the pseudonym
of "Count" Louis Harmon, an Irish fortuneteller.
In India, China, and other parts of
the East, palmistry remains part of some
esoteric teachings and continues to be
used for divination.
A palmist first looks at the shape of
the hand, which indicates physical or artistic activities. The left hand is said to
reveal destiny at birth; the right is a map
of how successfully the destiny has been
carried out. Roles of the hands are reversed for left-handed people. The palmist then observes the lines, digits, and
fleshy mounds, which have correspondences to the signs of the zodiac, sun,
moon, and planets, and indicate such factors as longevity, health, emotions, intellect, love, luck, money, psychic ability,
and so on.
In one form of Chinese palmistry,
the hand is analyzed based on the five
Palmistry
Complete
Book of Witchcraft.
Virginia Beach, VA: Edgar Cayce Foundation, 1976; Nancy MacKenzie. Palmistry
for Women. New York: Warner Books,
1973; Gershom Scholem. Kabbalah. New
York: New AmericanLibrary, 1974; Keith
Thomas. Religion and the Decline of
Magic. New York: Scribner, 1971; Doreen
Valiente. An ABC of Witchcraft Past and
Present. Custer, WA: Phoenix Publishing,
1973.
Paracelsus (1493-1541)
One of the greatest alchemists and Hermetic philosophers, whose remarkable
but unorthodox healing methods endeared him to the public and estranged
him from the medical establishment.
Paracelsus
(1493-1541)
425
426
Paracelsus (1493-1541)
sophical Research Society, 1977; Kurt Seligmann. The History of Magic and the Occult. New York: Pantheon Books, 1948;
Colin Wilson. The Occult. New York: Vintage Books, 1973.
Paranormal photography
See Spirit photography.
Parapsychology
The scientific study of psi and related
subjects. Para means "beyond" in Greek,
and parapsychology focuses attention on
the borders of psychology, essentially the
mind-body connection and on the relationship between consciousness and the
objects of its awareness.
As a science parapsychology dates
back to the late nineteenth century with
the formation of the Society for Psychical
Research (SPR) in London. In its early
days, parapsychology was called "psychical research," a term that is most commonly used in Britain today. Throughout
its history parapsychology has been met
with a great deal of skepticism and even
hostility by the general scientific community.
Before the beginnings of parapsychology, paranormal
phenomena
in
Western culture were either associated
with the divine or the demonic or were
largely ignored. The ancient Greeks and
Romans, for example, believed in clairvoyance and precognitive dreamsusually regarded as messages from the
gods-and consulted divine oracles.
The Bible contains many references
to paranormal phenomena, including apparitions, clairvoyance, levitation, precognitive dreams and prophetic visions,
and communication with spirits of the
dead. In the later Middle Ages, the Catholic church called such phenomena "demonic" unless manifested through a
saint. But earlier on St. Augustine at-
Parapsychology
427
Trends in Research
Before 1930 most psychical research
was qualitative and took place outside
the laboratory. Mediums were investigated under conditions that were controlled as much as possible. Investigation
of spontaneous phenomena, such as apparitions, depended upon reports from
individuals, followed by interviews after
the fact, and on written documentation.
The 1930s ushered in an era of controlled laboratory experiments that were
evaluated statistically. The major pioneer
of this era was J. B. Rhine. He and his
wife, Louisa E. Rhine, had undertaken
psychic investigations and were among
those who found evidence of fraud by the
celebrated Boston medium, Mina Stinson
Crandon, known as "Margery" in seances. John Thomas brought Rhine to
Duke University in North Carolina in
1927 for the summer. Rhine stayed on to
help William McDougall, the head of the
psychology department, in rat experiments for his Lamarckian research. In
1930, at the suggestion of colleagues,
Rhine began experimental ESP research
428
Parapsychology
Parapsychology
Elsewhere
Some of the roots of European psychical research go back to interest in mesmerism. In the late nineteenth century,
some attention was devoted to Spiritualist phenomena. Psychical research began
to intensify around 1900, especially in relation to psychology and abnormal psychology. In 1914 the Institut Metapsychique International was founded in
Paris, and in 1928 the Institut fur Parapsychologie was founded in Berlin.
Researchers
such as Theodore
Flournoy, Pierre Janet, Hans Bender,
Charles Richet, and others explored automatisms, telepathic hypnosis, and mediumship. See Automatic writing; Automatisms; Smith, Helene; Telepathic
hypnosis. Exposes of fraudulent mediums, however, diminished this emphasis
in the 1930s.
Following World War II, the first
Chair of Parapsychology was established
at Utrecht University in the Netherlands,
and was accepted by W. H. C. Tenhaeff.
In 1953 the university was host to the
First International Conference on Parapsychological Studies, sponsored by the
Parapsychology Foundation, an organization established in 1951. See Garrett, Eileen J.
Statistical research in the fashion of
Rhine has been conducted in Europe, but
never to the same extent as in the United
States or Britain; most research has concerned spontaneous and individual cases.
429
430
Parapsychology
Past-life recall
Parapsychology
Foundation
Past-life recall
The remembering of alleged previous
lives. Past-life recall can occur spontaneously or can be induced through various
methods such as hypnosis, bodywork, or
yoga. Whether the memories actually are
of historical past lives or are reconstructions of material from the subconscious is
a matter of controversy. Scientific investigations of spontaneous past-life memories have yielded impressive evidence in
support of reincarnation, but past-life recall remains scientifically inconclusive.
Eastern mysticism provides for pastlife recall. As early as A.D. 400, Patanjali,
credited with compiling the Yoga Sutras,
said that all details of past lives and all
impressions of karma exist in the chitta,
or subconscious mind, and can be awakened through yoga meditation.
Past-life memories also seem to bubble to the surface of consciousness spontaneously, particularly in young children
in non-Western cultures. James G. Matlock, American parapsychologist and anthropologist, hypothesizes that children
remember past lives more readily than
adults because they are physically and
psychologically less mature. With maturity past-life memories have more difficulty penetrating the waking state.
431
432
Past-life recall
Past-life recall
433
tions. Based upon the number of lives reported in each time period, Wambach extrapolated world population figures, and
found they were consistent with historical
population growth.
With the exception of eleven subjects, all descriptions
of clothing, footwear, and utensils were consistent with
historical records. Racial distribution also
conformed with history. Of those who reported going through deaths, 49 percent
said they experienced acceptance, calm,
and peace; 30 percent reported joy and
release; 20 percent said they watched the
death while floating above the body; and
10 percent said they were upset or saddened by the experience.
Past-life memories can also be induced through meditation and other techniques for achieving altered states. See
Cayce, Edgar;
Cooke,
Grace;
Grant,
Joan. Rhythmic activity, such as dancing,
drumming,
chanting,
or long-distance
running,
produces
altered
or ecstatic
states in which apparent past-life memories manifest. Bodywork,
such as acupuncture or deep massage, also has been
said to stimulate such memories. Past-life
recall induced by hallucinatory
drugs
must be discounted. Some psychics give
past-life readings, describing to clients details of the clients' past lives based on impressions received by the psychic. See
Past-life therapy (PL T); Reincarnation;
Soul mate.
Sources: Morey Bernstein. The Search for
Bridey Murphy. 1965. Rev. ed. New York:
Avon, 1975; Jonathan Cotto The Search for
Om Sety. Garden City, NY: Doubleday,
1987; Alan Gauld. Mediumship and Survival. London: William Heinemann Ltd.,
1982; Marshall F. Gilula, M.D. "Past-Life
Recall while Running." Journal of Regression Therapy 2, no. 2 (1987): 128-30; G.
M. Glaskin. Windows of the Mind. New
York: Delacourt Press, 1974; Bruce Goldberg. Past Lives, Future Lives. New York:
Ballantine Books, 1982; Rosemary Ellen
Guiley. Tales of Reincarnation. New York:
434
Past-life recall
brings relief when other methods of psychotherapy fail; phobias seem to be particularly responsive, sometimes after a
single session. "Trait guilt" (such as fears
of doom and burning in hell), which is so
deep-seated that it seldom responds to
traditional psychoanalysis, does reportedly respond to PLT. The relief achieved
by PLT is said to be achieved by the release of energy that is trapped in the past
life.
PLT presupposes belief in reincarnation, or at least the acceptance of the possibility of it. However, most past-life
therapists say positive results can be
achieved regardless of belief in reincarnation on the part of the patient; most do
not attempt to prove reincarnation or
convince their patients of the validity of
it. Therapists acknowledge that reincarnation may not be the only explanation;
psychoanalysis has long recognized that
fantasizing imaginary events can have the
same therapeutic benefits as the retrieval
of real memories. Nonetheless, many
therapists feel the experiences of their patients are not likely to be fantasy, or at
least not entirely fantasy, because most
past lives reported are dreary and humdrum, not glamorous and exciting. From
a Jungian perspective, past lives can be
explained as archetypal material, or universal character formations deep within
the psyche, which become projected into
the conscious as "past life." See Archetypes.
PLT began to take form as a therapy
in the 1960s, following the sanctioning of
hypnosis as a clinical treatment by the
British Medical Association in 1955 and
by the American Medical Association in
1958. PLT goes beyond traditional psychotherapy. Psychiatrists Carl G. Jung
and Sigmund Freud both said that the individual's worst fears, pain, and trauma
are buried deep within the unconscious
mind. Freud believed the roots of those
problems could be uncovered in early
childhood experiences. Psychoanalyst
Past-life therapy
(P LT)
435
436
Patanjali
See Yoga.
Paul, St.
Christian
apostle and mISSIOnary, and
one of the most, if not the most, influential figures in the establishment
of the
Christian religion. Paul's conversion to
Christianity
resulted from a profound
mystical experience.
Paul, called Saul in Hebrew, was
born a Jew in Tarsus of Cilicia (Anatolia)
between A.D. 1 and A.D. 10. Since major
events of his life are recorded in his own
letters and in The Acts of The Apostles,
more is known about his life than of
other principal
church.
leaders
of
the
infant
Past-life therapy
(PLT)
Paul, St.
Paul's Teachings
All of Paul's major concepts build on
his analogy of the church as the "Body of
Christ." It is used throughout his teaching of the relationship between Christ
andJas the church; it is also the foundation for his theology of justification, redemption, sacraments, and his understanding of the general dynamic of the
entire Christian life. Therefore Paul's frequent use of the phrases "in Christ" and
"with Christ" is especially significant.
However, modern controversies surround
Paul's seemingly contradictory condemnation of the flesh while he used images
of the body to praise the soul, most notably throughout his concept of the Mystical Body of Christ.
Paul's concept of justification by
faith has influenced the key notions of
contrasting philosophies of man, such as
existentialist
philosopher
Jean Paul
Sarte's unconditioned human freedom;
and psychologies such as Carl G. Jung's
individuation, and Abraham H. Maslow's self-actualization, since they each
also focus on the necessity of developing
resources, creative exercise of freedom,
and overcoming self-deception in order to
achieve meaningful existence. See Psychology.
There has been a significant revival
of interest in Paul's theology since the
1960s with the advent of worldwide
charismatic movements. Paul first introduced the word "charisma" (from the
Greek meaning "grace") into theological
terminology and explained the charisma
437
Peak experiences
Psychologist Abraham H. Maslow's term
for nonreligious quasi-mystical and mystical experiences. Peak experiences are a
sudden flash of intense happiness and
feelings of well-being, and perhaps
awareness of "ultimate truth" and the
unity of all things. They are accompanied
by a heightened sense of control over the
body and emotions, and a wider sense of
awareness, as though one is standing on a
mountaintop. Maslow described peak experiences as having a special flavor of
wonder and awe. The individual, he said,
feels at one with the world and pleased
with it; he or she has seen the ultimate
truth or the essence of all things.
438
Paul, St.
Varieties
of Meditative
Experience.
Pendulum
Pendulum
A rod-like instrument with a suspended
weight used in divination. The pendulum
is alleged to read energy patterns emanating from beings and objects, and communicate the information to the user by
swinging back and forth or in circles. The
weight is any object-a metal plumb, a
button, a coin, for example-that is hung
from a rod by a thread, string, or wire.
The precursor of the pendulum is the
divining rod or wand, used since ancient
times and referred to in the Bible as Jacob's Rod. Like the divining rod, the pendulum is said to work on the principle
that every organism has an envelope of
positive and negative energies. Each living organism must develop a means by
which it can sense these energies, so that
it can use the positive energies and avoid
the negative. The pendulum serves as a
tool that humans apparently can use to
amplify the signals. The process by which
this takes place is unknown, but users say
they "tune in," perhaps through psi, to
the energy of whatever is being sought.
Most people are able to use a pendulum
with some success, but some individuals
seem to have an innate gift for it.
Uses of the pendulum have been diverse throughout history, but the most
common are the finding of water, minerals, and objects buried in the ground, and
the finding of lost objects, thieves, missing persons, and hidden treasure. Modern
uses include medical diagnosis and treatment, geological prospecting, and military activities. In medical diagnosis, also
called medical radiesthesia, the pendulum
appears to pick up energies emanating
from every cell, tissue, and organ. Nega-
439
440
Penn, William
See Society of Friends.
Pentecostals
Members of various denominational Protestant Christian churches who seek a
personal relationship with God through
baptism in the Holy Spirit, often characterized by speaking in tongues.
Pentecostalism
arose
in
latenineteenth- and early twentieth-century
Pendulum
Pentecostals
441
442
Pentecostals
Dictionary
of Living Religions.
Movement
in the Churches.
Personal mythology
See Mythology.
Peyote
See Drugs in mystical and psychic expenences.
"Philip"
"Philip"
An artificial poltergeist created as an experiment by Canadian parapsychologists
during the 1970s. Their success demonstrates how "real" spirits can be products
of human will, expectation, and imagination.
The experiment was conducted by
eight members of the Toronto Society for
Psychical Research, under the direction of
parapsychologists A. R. G. Owen and Iris
M. Owen. None was psychically gifted.
Their purpose was to try to create,
through intense and prolonged concentration, a collective thought-form.
First, the group fabricated a fictitious identity, physical appearance, and
personal history. "Philip Aylesford" was
born in 1624 in England and followed an
early military career. At age sixteen he
was knighted. He had an illustrious role
in the Civil War, fighting for the Royalists. He became a personal friend of
Prince Charles (later Charles II) and
worked for him as a secret agent. But
Philip brought about his own undoing by
having an affair with a Gypsy girl. When
his wife found out, she accused the girl of
witchcraft, and the girl was burned at the
stake. In despair Philip committed suicide
in 1654 at age thirty.
The Owen group began conducting
sittings to try to conjure Philip in September 1972. They meditated, visualized
him, and discussed the details of his life.
No apparition ever appeared, but occasionally some sitters said they felt a presence in the room. Some also experienced
vivid mental pictures of "Philip."
After months with no communication, the group tried table-tilting through
psychokinesis (PK). This activity, made
popular in Spiritualism seances, involves
sitting around a table and placing fingertips lightly upon the surface. Spirits allegedly move or tilt the table; but a modern
theory, proposed by British psychologist
Kenneth J. Batcheldor, holds that the ef-
443
444
New Horizons Journal of the New Horizons Research Fund 2, no. 3 (June 1977):
11-15; D. Scott Rogo. Minds and Motion
...
The Riddle of Psychokinesis.
New
"Philip"
ducts a normal conversation and discovers later the person was dead at the time
of the call.
No satisfactory explanation exists to
explain phone calls from the dead, but
several theories have been put forward.
One holds that the dead do place the calls
by supernatural manipulation of the telephone mechanisms and circuitry. Another
holds that they are hallucinations caused
in part by psychokinesis done subconsciously by the recipient. A similar theory
suggests the calls are entirely fantasy. Still
another theory holds that they are tricks
played on the living by low-level spirits.
Phone calls from the dead are not
taken seriously by most modern parapsychologists. In the early twentieth century,
investigators modified the telegraph and
wireless in hopes of communicating with
the dead. Thomas Edison, whose parents
were Spiritualists, worked on but did not
complete a telephone that he hoped
would connect the living and the dead. In
the 1940s "psychic telephone" experiments were conducted in England and
America to try to reach the dead. Interest
rose in the 1960s, when Konstantin Raudive announced that he had captured
voices of the dead on electromagnetic
tape. See Electronic voice phenomenon.
Sources: Stanley R. Dean, ed. Psychiatry
and Mysticism.
Chicago: Nelson-Hall,
1975; S. Ralph Harlow. A Life after Death.
Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1961; Elizabeth McAdams and Raymond Bayless.
The Case for Life after Death. Chicago:
Nelson-Hall, 1981; D. Scott Rogo and
Raymond Bayless. Phone Calls from the
Dead. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall,
1979; Susy Smith. The Power of the Mind.
Radnor, PA: Chilton Book Co., 1975.
Piper, Leonora
E. (1857-1950)
445
446
Piper, Leonora
E. (1857-1950)
Mifflin, 1976.
Planchette
A nineteenth-century precursor to the
Ouija, designed to open the user to automatic writing and drawing. Planchette
Planetary
consciousness
Planetary consciousness
An outgrowth of the ecology movement
of the 1960s, expanded with the concept
of the Earth as a living, self-regulating organism. Planetary consciousness takes on
spiritual dimensions with an awareness of
the delicately balanced and interconnected relationships between all things
and sentient beings on the planet, not
447
448
Planetary consciousness
Planetary consciousness
449
planetary nervous system for Gaia, working in harmony with the organism.
The latter possibility lies at the heart
of the Gaia hypothesis. Technology already has turned the world into a global
village. Lovelock says that Gaia, through
human technology, has awakened and is
aware of herself, and has seen herself
through the eyes of space cameras. He
suggests that the collective intelligence of
humans constitutes a Gaian brain and
nervous system that can anticipate environmental changes. The result may be
that in the future, nationalism will disappear in the face of the need "to belong to
the commonwealth of all creatures which
constitute Gaia."
The evolutionary leap into a unified
human consciousness was envisioned by
the French priest and philosopher, Pierre
Teilhard de Chard in. Teilhard coined the
term "noosphere" (from the Greek noos,
or "mind"), to describe this "planetization of the Mind." Noogenesis, the evolutionary genesis of the mind, will culminate in the Omega Point, when the
noosphere will be created. Similarly, the
Indian mystic and philosopher, Sri Aurobindo, saw the next stage of evolution
as the "Supermind," a product of the increasing'spiritual development of individual consciousness, which would manifest
on both an individual and collective level.
Still another possibility is put forward by British physicist Peter Russell,
who hypothesizes the evolution of a completely new and planetary level of consciousness, "Gaiafield," a self-reflective
consciousness that emerges from the interactions of all the minds within the social superorganism. Gaiafield, says Russell, would have new characteristics
unimaginable to present human consCIOusness.
Whether or not any evolutionary
leap of consciousness happens will depend on changes in human behavior.
Teilhard saw the Omega Point from a
cosmic perspective, perhaps thousands or
450
even millions of years away, while Aurobindo projected the Supermind within
a century; neither, however, was living in
a time of ecological crisis. Russell and
others collapse the timeframe to decades.
The changes deemed necessary to
prevent disaster and instead make the
leap require fundamental shifts away
from self-centered consumer life-styles
and commerce. Lovelock also advocates
the establishment of a new planetary science, geophysiology, to bring all natural
sciences together in a Gaian perspective.
Berry says we must realign ourselves with
bioregions, identifiable geographical areas that are self-sustaining. Berry also
states that the European culture could
learn about the Earth from Native Americans, whose culture has retained within
its collective unconscious intimate psychic bonds with the Earth.
From a spiritual perspective, Berry
says that what is needed is a "New
Story," a creation myth for the universe
and the planet Earth in all their unfolding
levels of expression. The American mythologist, Joseph Campbell, also saw the
need for a planetary mythology of the
world as a whole, with no national
boundaries.
Russell says the individual raising of
consciousness through meditation may
have a collective effect of unifying and
raising the consciousness of humanity as
a whole. Studies of Transcendental Meditation groups have shown a synchronization of brain activity during meditation. If an increasing number of people
meditate, the effect may be felt on the human race as a whole.
Sources: Elias V. Amidon and Elizabeth J.
Roberts. "Gaian Consciousness." ReVision
9, no. 2 (Winter/Spring 1987): 3-5;
Thomas Berry. The Dream of the Earth.
San Francisco: Sierra Club Nature and Natural Philosophy Library, 1988; Thomas
Berry. "The Viable Human." ReVision 9,
no. 2 (Winter/Spring, 1987): 75-82; Peter
Borrelli, ed. Crossroads: Environmental
Planetary consciousness
1965; Anne Lonergan and Caroline Richards, eds. Thomas Berry and the New Cosmology. Mystic, CT: Twenty-third Publications, 1987; George Trevelyan. A Vision of
the Aquarian Age: The Emerging Spiritual
World View. Walpole, NH: Stillpoint,
Plants, psychism of
The theory that plants are sensitive to the
thoughts and emotions of people around
them, and have themselves emotions,
memory, and powers that enable them to
communicate with people. This notion
harks back to ancient times, when plants
were perceived to possess magical powers. Modern researchers have experimented with plant psi since the 1960s,
but results have been largely inconclusive.
Nonetheless, many people who have
cared for plants attest to their sensitivity
to their environment and caretakers.
George Washington Carver, the agricultural chemist who developed the peanut and sweet potato into scores of inde-
451
452
that plants responded to radionics treatments for the elimination of pests. The
US Department of Agriculture, however,
considered the evidence insufficient. Radionics remains illegal in most states in
the United States.
Although the psi properties of plants
remain scientifically inconclusive, researchers have discovered that plants do
have ordinary ways of communicating
with humans. Plants that do not get
enough water emit a high frequency noise
as their cell structure breaks down. Monitoring plant noise might benefit farming
by telling farmers precisely when to water
crops, and could be used by researchers
in the development of more hardy strains
of crop plants. Compare to Animal Psi.
Sources: Edgar D. Mitchell. Psychic Exploration: A Challenge for Science. Edited by
Plateau experience
See Peak experiences.
B.C.)
Plants, psychism
of
Plato
a belief in the immortality of the soul as
existing separately from the body and the
mind before and after death. These works
also offer discussions on the nature of
love, the dialectic method, the form of the
Good, and the ideal society. Phaedo has
been called "the Magna Carta of Western
mysticism." Republic contains the fullest
exposition.
According to the Theory of Forms,
given in Phaedo, the material world is an
imperfect copy of the real and true perfect world. Forms are like original
blueprints-the ideas or concepts behind
the material world. We see an object for
what it is, but its essence, its "is-ness," is
the idea of the object, which holds the
perfect vision of Beauty, Goodness, and
Love, which together constitute the One.
Form constitutes real identity, and can be
applied to concepts as well as objects.
Forms do not change and are the same
for every observer.
The ultimate reality and the source
of reality of everything else is the Form of
the Good, which Plato likened to the illuminating sun. The Form of the Good is
453
454
Poltergeist
Plotinus
See Plato.
Podmore, Frank
See Apparition; Society for Psychical Research (SPR).
Polarity
See Bodywork.
Poltergeist
A spirit, usually mischievous and sometimes malevolent, which manifests by
making noises, moving objects, and assaulting people and animals. "Poltergeist" comes from the German pol tern,
"to knock," and geist, "spirit." Some
cases of poltergeists are unexplained and
may involve actual spirits. In other cases
the phenomena seem to be caused by subconscious psychokinesis (PK) on the part
of one individual.
The most common poltergeist phenomena are rains of stones, dirt, and
other small objects; throwing and moving
of objects, including large pieces of furniture; loud noises and shrieks; strange
lights; apparitions; and vile smells. With
the development of technology, poltergeists have adapted to interfering with
telephones and electronic equipment, and
455
456
Poltergeist
Possession
Haunting.
Positive imaging
See Creative visualization.
Positive thinking
See Creative visualization.
Positive visualization
See Creative visualization.
Possession
The taking over of a person's mind, body,
and soul by an external force perceived to
be a deity, spirit, demon, entity, or separate personality.
Possession generally is unwanted and
troublesome. It has been recognized since
antiquity, and has been blamed for virtually every conceivable problem of luck,
health, wealth, love, and sanity. Some
types of possession, such as by gods or
the Holy Spirit, are desirable and voluntary. Some types of mediumship, such as
direct voice and channeling, are forms of
temporary possession by spirits of the
dead or nonphysical entities. The cure for
unwanted possession is exorcism, performed according to a specified ritual.
Voluntary possession, on the other hand,
terminates at the end of a religious ceremony, healing ritual, or sitting.
Except for possession by the Holy
Spirit, Christianity regards possession lls
the work of Satan. Medieval theologians
devoted considerable attention to demonic possession. The Devil was said to
457
458
Possession
Voluntary Possession
In many non-Western cultures, communication with spirits and deities is central to religious worship. Possession by a
god shows the possessed to be worthy of
the god's notice and protection.
In such
ceremonies, worshipers chant and dance
until they are "mounted"
by a god, becoming the god's "horse," and take on
that god's personal characteristics.
For as
long as possession lasts-perhaps
several
hours-the
worshiper exhibits the speech,
habits, and behavior of the god. He or
she becomes oblivious to pain or extremes in temperature,
and may issue
prophecies.
See Macumba;
Santeria;
Vodoun.
The most similar counterpart
in
Christianity
is voluntary
possession
by
the Holy Spirit. The origin is the possession experienced by the apostles of Christ
on the first day of Pentecost. The Book of
Acts describes
how flames appeared
above their heads, and that they spoke in
tongues unknown to them. Speaking in
Power point
(also power
place, power
center)
Exorcism;
Pentecostals.
Postcognition
See Retrocognition.
459
460
Prayer
56-62.
Prayer
An act of communing with the Divine or
the supernatural.
There are numerous
types of public and private prayers, which
are universal in religions. Prayer, said
philosopher
and psychologist
William
James, "is the very soul and essence of
religion" (Varieties of Religious Experience, 1902). Depending on the religion,
prayers may acknowledge a supreme deity; a pantheon of deities, saints, and divine personages; ancestral spirits; or the
spirits and forces of nature.
The simplest forms of prayer are petitions for oneself or for others, thanksgivings, and intercessions. These are directions
of psychic
energy
toward
accomplishment
of a goal, and involve
words, symbols, and images. Petitions
and intercessions
are enormous sources
of power and energy, and have been credited with great accomplishments
and miraculous healings. Their driving force is
love; prayers that are selfish or offered by
unbelievers are ineffective. Norman Vincent Peale is one of the best-known Christian advocates of the power of prayer.
Healer Ambrose
Worrall
said all
thoughts are prayers. The accepted idea
of prayers-memorized
phrases and verse
learned in church-are
good mind cleansers, he said, but lack the dynamism to be
effective. An effective prayer concentrates
not on the elimination of an existing condition, but on the creation of a desired
condition.
The highest forms of prayer are mystical in nature and are contemplative and
meditative; these constitute higher states
of awareness and being, the highest of
which is union with the Divine. In such
states
words,
symbols,
and
images
fall
461
462
Renaissance
in
Christian
Thought.
Prayer
Precognition
The direct knowledge or perception of
the future, obtained through extraordinary means. Precognition is the most frequently reported of all extrasensory perception (ESP) experiences, occurring most
often (60 percent to 70 percent) in
dreams. It also happens spontaneously in
waking visions, auditory hallucinations,
thoughts that flash into the mind, and a
sense of "knowing." Precognitive knowledge also may be induced through trance,
channeling, mediumship, and divination.
The majority of spontaneous precognitive experiences happen within fortyeight hours of the future event, particularly within twenty-four hours. A rare
few happen months or even years before
the actual event takes place. Severe emotional shock seems to be a major factor in
precognition. By a four-to-one ratio,
most concern unhappy events, such as
death and dying, illness, accidents, and
natural disasters. Intimacy also is a key
factor; 80 to 85 percent of such experiences involve a spouse, family member or
friend with whom one has close emotional ties. The remainder involve casual
acquaintances and strangers, most of
whom are victims in major disasters such
as airplane crashes or earthquakes.
The difference between precognition
and premonition is rather blurry. In general precognition involves knowledge of a
specific event, while premonition is a
sense or feeling that some unknown event
is about to happen. See Premonition.
While all prophecy is precognition,
not all precognition is prophecy; the latter involves an element of divine inspiration. See Prophecy.
Precognition
463
464
1982.
Prediction
A type of prophecy in which information
about future events is obtained through
psychic gifts, divine inspiration, the read-
Precognition
Premonition
A type of prophecy that is a sense of forewarning or foreboding of a probable future event, characterized by a state of
anxiety, unease, and a gut-level feeling.
Premonitions tend to occur before disasters, accidents, deaths, and other traumatic and emotionally charged events.
There is no clear-cut line between
premonition and precognition, which is
direct knowledge of the future. In general
premonition is sense-oriented, dominated
Premonition
465
466
&
Premonition
Prophecy
A divinely inspired vision or revelation of
great events to come, which are of such
magnitude as to affect races, groups of
people, and countries. All prophecies
come from precognition, or knowledge of
the future, but not all precognitive experiences are prophecies; the key difference
is the divine spark or inspired element.
Sometimes, however, little or no distinction is made between a prophecy and a
prediction. In religions prophecies are
made by prophets, gceat men :md women
divinely chosen to preach the divine message, such as Jesus, Muhammad, and Siddhartha Gautama (Buddha). In another
sense prophecies are psychic readings of
the collective unconscious, the anticipation of the manifestations of the collective
will.
In ancient times prophecies were
made by oracles, prophets and prophetesses who went into ecstatic trances and
allowed deities to speak through them.
The ecstasy was induced through various
methods, such as by inhaling the smoke
of sacred wood or drinking the blood of
a sacrificed animal. The ancient Egyptians used cult statues that spoke. The
Greeks placed great store in oracles, and
considered their prophecies unchangeable.
The ancient Hebrews had many
prophets, or navi, a term which comes
from the root for "to well up, to gush
forth." The Old Testament contains numerous prophets and prophecies; eighteen of the thirty-nine books are ascribed
to prophets. The origin and nature of
prophecy is not clear, but it is evident
from the Old Testament that men appointed by God to become prophets
could not resist doing so, sometimes becoming transformed in the process, as
was Saul, who became St. Paul. Moses,
who initially resisted his calling, was described as a prophet unequaled for his
acts and mighty deeds in Deuteronomy
Prophecy
467
468
Prophet, Mark
See Alternative religious movements.
Psi
The twenty-third letter of the Greek alphabet, generally used in parapsychology
to include extrasensory perception (ESP)
and psychokinesis (PK). In 1946 English
psychologist Dr. Robert Thouless and his
colleague, Dr. W. P. Weisner, suggested
"psi" as a designation for ESP and PK
because both are so closely related. The
term has since inaccurately expanded in
popular usage to include almost any
paranormal experience or phenomenon.
Theories
of Psi
Despite decades of research, psi continues to elude physical and quasiphysical theories of how it functions; it
operates outside the bounds of time and
space. No physical variable influences psi
test results in the laboratory. Various theories that psi is some type of wave, particle, force, or field have been proposed
and discarded. Psi is not, nor is it affected
by, the four forces of physics: strong nuclear force, weak nuclear force, gravitational force, or electromagnetic force. Psi
is not subject to the laws of thermodynamics or the law of gravity. It requires
no exchange of energy, which is particularly remarkable in the case of apparent
PK: for example, according to the mechanicallaws of physics, the dematerialization of a copper penny would require
the energy of a small nuclear bomb. Nor
is psi governed by the theory of relativity,
which holds that no particle or object can
move faster than the speed of light, or
186,000 miles a second.
Failure to explain psi in physical
terms has forced researchers to look for
alternative explanations. Some occultists
believe psi is a "vibration" that manifests
throughout the universe, but scientists regard that view with great skepticism.
Prophecy
Physiological Characteristics
Associated with Psi
Since psi is intangible, one way scientists have attempted to identify it is
through measurements of involuntary
physiological processes in the autonomic
nervous system of laboratory test subjects. The most common measures are the
galvanic skin response (GSR), which
records sweat gland activity, and the plethysmograph, which measures changes in
blood volume in the finger that are
caused by dilation or constriction of
blood vessels. Less frequently used is the
electroencephalograph
(EEG), which
measures brain-wave activity. The GSR
and plethysmograph indicate emotional
arousal, and are used in psi tests of emotionally charged versus emotionally neutral targets. Autonomic activity increases
when information that is emotionally
charged for the percipient appears to be
conveyed psychically.
Studies with ganzfeld stimulation
show that an alpha state of brain-wave
activity appears to be conducive to psi.
Psi performance also improves with positive mood and expectation and a friendly
atmosphere provided by the experimenter. It decreases with anxiety, negative mood and expectation, boredom,
and a hostile environment provided by
the experimenter. See Altered states of
consciousness; Animal psi; Decline/
incline effects; Dreams; Experimenter
effect; ESP (extrasensory perception);
Ganzfeld stimulation; Mysticism; Parapsychology; Plants, psychism of; Psychic;
Psychokinesis (PK); Sheep/goat effect.
Sources: Alfred Douglas. Extrasensory
Powers: A Century of Psychical Research.
Psychic
Handbook
Psilocybin
See Drugs in mystical and psychic experiences; Leary, Timothy; Ram Dass.
Psionics
See Applied psi.
Psychic
A person with exceptional ability to acquire information through extrasensory
469
470
Psychic archaeology
The application of clairvoyance and other
psychic skills to the field of archaeology,
especially in the location of dig sites and
the identification of artifacts. Sometimes
called "intuitive archaeology," psychic
archaeology is controversial despite some
ImpreSSive successes.
Psychic
Psychic archaeology
471
472
ledge & Kegan Paul, 1986; Jeffrey Goodman. Psychic Archaeology: Time Machine
to the Past. New York: G. P. Putnam's
Sons, 1977; David Jones. Visions of Time:
Experiments
in
Psychic
Archaeology.
Psychic attack
An allegedly paranormal assault upon
humans or animals that causes physical
or mental distress, injury, illness, or even
death. Psychic attack is said to happen by
two means: (1) the human direction, such
as by a sorcerer, of nonphysical agents
such as malevolent spirits, demons, or
thought-forms; and (2) a human assault
accomplished by out-of-body projection
of a double or astral form.
In sorcery the equivalent of psychic
attack is a curse. Some tribal sorcerers are
renowned for their alleged abiliry to magically kill others with a wasting disease
that seems to resist medical help and reportedly leaves some victims virtually
bloodless by the time of death. Some
magical rituals involve "sending," in
which the curse is fatally delivered to the
victim by an animal familiar in the form
of a snake or scorpion or other fearsome
creature. In other rituals a substitute for
the victim, such as a doll or snip of the
victim's hair, serves as a sympathetic
magical link that transmits the attacks.
The occultist Dion Fortune wrote extensively on psychic attack, and said it is
much more common than believed. In her
classic work on the subject, Psychic SelfDefence (1930), Fortune described her
own experiences combating psychic attack. The first occurred when she was
Psychic archaeology
Psychic attack
473
Varieties
of
Religious
Experience.
Psychic criminology
The use of psychics in the investigation
and jury selection of civil and criminal
cases. A controversial field, psychic criminology nonetheless has grown in the decades following World War II due to the
publicized successes of various celebrity
psychics.
Since antiquity seers and dowsers
have been sought out to help locate missing persons and solve crimes. The field of
modern psychic criminology began taking
shape in the mid-nineteenth century,
when Joseph R. Buchanan, an American
physiologist, coined the term "psychometry" and said it could be used to measure the "soul" of all things. Buchanan
further said that the past is entombed in
the present. Researchers who followed
Buchanan theorized that objects retain
imprints of the past and their ownersvariously called "vibrations," "psychic
ether," "aura," and "odic force" -that
could be picked up by sensitives. Psychics
who handled objects belonging to crime
victims were found to provide information that often could help solve the crime.
See Psychometry.
Psychic detection was used in Europe
during and after World War 1. Professor
Antal Hermann, a Hungarian sociologist,
argued for a wider acceptance of metaphysics and of "suggestive powers" and
their use in modern criminology. In the
early 1930s, the matter was taken up by
the Viennese Criminological Association
but was not decided.
In 1925 Sir Arthur Conan Doyle,
creator of Sherlock Holmes, predicted
that the detectives of the future would be
clairvoyants or, if they were not, they
474
Techniques
Most psychic detection involves psychometry of personal items belonging to
the victim-undergarments
often are preferred because they seem to yield the
strongest "vibrations" -or items found at
the crime scene. By handling these psychics say they see images or receive information pertaining to the crime. For example, they may see a reenactment of the
crime, or the location of a body or murder weapon, or the location of a suspect's
whereabouts. Some feel as though they
have entered the perpetrator's mind.
Some also receive information through
intuitive flashes, dreams, auras, automatic writing, channeling, hypnosis,
Psychic attack
Psychic reading
Psychic reading
A sitting with a psychic or medium in
which psychic ability is used to answer a
client's questions. Most people seek psychic readings for information about the
475
476
Psychic surgery
The alleged performing of paranormal
surgery with bare hands, in which the
body is opened and closed without use or
benefit of surgical instruments; or paranormal surgery done with simple objects
such as kitchen knives. Patients remain
fully conscious and allegedly experience
no pain. The surgeon reputedly uses paranormal powers or is guided by spirit helpers. While some observed surgeries remain unexplained, many have been
exposed as fraud, accomplished by
sleight-of-hand tricks known to most
stage magicians.
Psychic surgery received much Western media attention in the 1960s and
1970s, prompting thousands of people
suffering from chronic, debilitating, or
terminal illnesses to seek treatment in the
Philippines and Brazil, where psychic surgery largely is practiced by Spiritists.
Some patients have reported cures that
are supported by medical diagnosis, but
many have not been cured. Most psychic surgeons resist scientific and medical investigation, thus raising suspicion
about their purported paranormal abilities. Some practitioners have allowed
themselves to be photographed
and
filmed.
Psychic surgery is performed under
septic conditions, yet patients claim not
to suffer postoperative infections. Some
psychic surgeons say they operate only on
the etheric body, or "perispirit" of the
patient; they do not touch the flesh, but
make hand passes and motions in the air
just above the body. Others claim to penetrate the body with kitchen knives, scissors, or their fingers in order to remove
tumors and growths. Such operations are
accompanied by spurting blood and the
production of stringy or lumpy masses
said to be tumors; the incisions are closed
without stitches and leave faint or no
marks. The patient walks out and resumes normal activity.
Psychic reading
Psychic surgery
477
Psychic vampirism
See Psychic attack.
Psychokinesis
(PK)
A form of psi that is the apparent influence of mind over matter through invisible means, such as the movement of objects, bending of metal, and the outcome
of events. The term "psychokinesis"
comes from the Greek words psyche,
meaning "breath," "life," or "soul," and
kinein, meaning "to move." PK occurs
spontaneously and deliberately, indicating that it is both an unconscious and
conscious process.
What PK is and how it operates remain an enigma, though many theories
have been put forward. It cannot be explained in terms of physics, nor is it affected by any of the forces or laws of
physics. It has been held to be a supernatural ability, a human ability possessed
only by extraordinary individuals, and a
human ability possessed by all people. If
one assumes the existence of extrasensory
perception (ESP), then PK is a necessary
consequence. In physics, if information is
obtained from a system (as with ESP),
then that system is disturbed (rdulting in
PK).
478
Psychic surgery
American parapsychologist J. B.
Rhine began studying PK in 1934 with
dice tests done under controlled laboratory conditions at Duke University in
North Carolina. Rhine was by no means
the first to study PK; but his work, which
followed on the heels of his groundbreaking research in ESP, yielded significant findings. Rhine conducted an experiment with a gambler who claimed that
he had the power to influence falling dice
to turn to specific numbers or number
combinations. Early results were beyond
the probabilities of chance, which startled
Rhine, but subsequent
experiments
yielded uneven results. Rhine did not immediately publish his findings for several
reasons: PK suffered from a dubious reputation at the time; he had used himself
as an occasional subject; and the studies
Psychokinesis (PK)
479
480
Psychokinesis
(PK)
Psychokinesis
(PK)
the existence of retroactive PK, or "retroPK," in which the subject attempts to influence the event-such as a sequence of
numbers produced by a random event
generator-after it has already happened.
However, it is not possible to rule out
conclusively that either the subject or the
experimenter unconsciously exerted PK
on the generator at the time the numbers
were selected.
Beyond the laboratory some researchers have studied spontaneous or
unconscious PK, such as hauntings, apparitions, poltergeists, and physical phenomena associated with death and dying.
See Apparition; Apport; Deathbed visions; Electronic voice phenomenon;
Haunting; Levitation; Materialization;
Plants, psychism of; Poltergeist; Thoughtography.
Sources: "Body and Soul." Newsweek (November 7, 1988): 88-97; Hoyt L. Edge,
Robert L. Morris, John Palmer, and Joseph
H. Rush. Foundations of Parapsychology.
Boston: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1986;
Renee Haynes. The Society for Psychical
Research: 1882-1982, A History. London:
Macdonald & Co., 1982; H. H. J. Keil,
Benson Herbert, J. G. Pratt, and Montague
Ullman. "Directly Observable Voluntary
PK Effects: A Survey and Tentative Interpretation of Available Findings from Nina
Kulagina and Other Known Related Cases
of Recent Date," Proceedings of the Society
for Psychical Research 56, part 210 (January 1976): 197-235; Elizabeth E. McAdams and Raymond Bayless. The Case for
Life after Death. Chicago: Nelson-Hall,
1981; Edgar D. Mitchell. Psychic Exploration: A Challenge for Science. Edited by
John White. New York: Paragon Books,
1974; Sheila Ostrander
and Lynn
Schroeder. Psychic Discoveries Behind the
Iron
Curtain.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall, 1970; J. B. Rhine. The Reach
of the Mind. New York: William Sloane
Assoc., 1947; Louisa E. Rhine. Mind Over
Matter: Psychokinesis. New York: Collier
Books, 1970; D. Scott Rogo. Psychic
Breakthroughs
Today.
Wellingborough,
Northamptonshire, England: The Aquarian
481
Psychology
The science of human behavior. "Psychology" is derived from the Greek
psyche, for "breath," "spirit," or "soul."
Psychotherapy is therefore the nurturing
of the spirit or soul. The discussion here
shall focus on the emergence of humanistic and trans personal psychologies,
which emphasize human potential and
transcendence of self, and seek to blend
traditional Western therapies with Eastern philosophy, behavioral medicine, and
the experience of altered states.
Psychology did not emerge from philosophy as a separate, experimental science until the late nineteenth century. It
had been shaped by the mechanistic, dualistic ideas of Rene Descartes in the seventeenth century, that mind exists separate from body but interacts with it at a
point in the brain. The classical psychoanalysis of Sigmund Freud became established around the turn of the twentieth
century. Freud focused on pathology-his
works contain more than four hundred
references to neuroses but none to
health - and emphasized the need for a
strong ego. He also presumed that humans are forever in mental conflict that
can be reduced but never resolved. See
Freud, Sigmund.
Behaviorism, another school that
arose in the early twentieth century, emphasized measurement of observable behavior without consideration of consciousness. The chief exponent of Behav-
482
Humanistic Psychology
The "third force" of psychology, as
humanistic psychology is called, is an orientation toward the whole of psychology
rather than a school or area. It is most
identified with Abraham H. Maslow
(1908-1970). Trained as an experimental
psychologist at the University of Wisconsin, Maslow decided after the start of
World War II that he would transform
psychology into an instrument for world
peace and improvement of the human
condition.
Maslow believed that all human beings have innate spiritual yearnings to ex-
Psychokinesis
(PK)
Psychology
483
psychology
484
Psychology
Psychology
Psychosynthesis
Psychosynthesis, a humanisticltranspersonal psychology, actually preceded
Maslow; and as it developed parallel to
humanistic and transpersonal psychologies, it absorbed elements of both. Psychosynthesis is perhaps the most mystical
of modern psychologies, but is not as well
known, perhaps because its founder, Italian psychiatrist Roberto Assagioli (18881974), did not like to write.
Assagioli, a contemporary of Freud
and Jung, was raised in an intellectual
household. His father was Jewish and his
mother was a Catholic with strong mystical interests; she was the first Italian
Theosophist. Whereas Freud found an interest in Greek myths and Jung in alchemy, Assagioli gravitated to Eastern
philosophy and religion. He studied
Hindu and Buddhist mysticism, as well as
Christian mysticism. He also was particularly influenced by Plato, especially Plato's image of the soul awakening in a
dark cave and discovering that the world
that had been taken for granted is but a
shadow or illusion. See Plato.
Assagioli brought the work of both
Freud and Jung into Italy, but saw limitations in both. He felt Freud neglected
the higher consciousness, while Jung was
too preoccupied with the unconscious,
where, Assagioli said, one could get lost.
In developing Psychosynthesis Assagioli
placed emphasis on strengthening the
consciousness and putting the repressed
parts of the psyche back together. He
viewed himself as playing a role similar to
that of Gautama Buddha, dedicating himself to helping others achieve enlightenment.
Assagioli drew on various philosophies and mystical traditions, and on his
own mystical experiences, as well as on
the psychologies that preceded him. He
was vague about the exact origins of Psychosynthesis, and presented no systematic
485
framework
of it in his two books, Psychosynthesis: A Manual of Principles and
Techniques (1965) and The Act of Will
(1973), and numerous articles and booklets. (The Act of Will resulted from spiritual guidance he received while seriously
ill with a high fever. After his fever broke,
he informed his secretary that "'They'
want me to write a book.")
Assagioli believed the conscious personality is but a small part of the whole
being. The unconscious exists in four levels, including the superconscious, a reflection from the Higher Self and containing
potential. As one becomes more aware of
the superconscious, one becomes more
attuned to spiritual forces. Elements and
functions coming from the superconscious, such as intuition, inspiration, and
aesthetic, ethical, religious, and mystical
experiences, are effective in changing
both inner and outer worlds.
Assagioli also placed great emphasis
on the importance of values, and on the
strengthening and use of the will.
Psychosynthesis is a conscious and
planned reconstruction of the personality.
It makes use of a wide range of techniques, including those borrowed from
other psychologies. Critics contend that
Psychosynthesis is superficially optimistic
and not sufficiently grounded in intellectual discipline.
Sacred Psychology
This experiential psychology was developed by Jean Houston, psychologist
and past president of the Association for
Humanistic Psychology. It is based on exercises steeped in myth, the mysteries,
and archetypes, with the goal of realizing
one's full potential and knowing the High
Self.
Houston defines three realms of experience: the THIS IS ME, which is ordinary reality; the WE ARE, the realm of
the collective unconscious; and the I AM,
the realm of God, which is immanent in
486
Tarcher, 1982; Tom Greening. "The Origins of the Journal of Humanistic Psychology and the Association of Humanistic
Psychology." Journal of Humanistic Psychology 25, no. 2 (Spring 1985): 7-11;
Stanislav Grof. Beyond the Brain: Birth,
Death and Transcendence in Psychutherapy. Albany, NY: State University of New
York Press, 1985; Jean Hardy. A Psychology with a Soul: Psychosynthesis in Evolutionary Context. London: Routledge &
Kegan Paul, 1987; James Hillman. ReVisioning Psychology. New York: Harper
& Row, 1975; Edward Hoffman. The
Right to Be Human: A Biography of Abra
Psychology
Psychometry
A psychic skill in which information
about people, places, and events is obtained by handling objects associated
with them. The percipient receives impressions through clairvoyance, telepathy, retrocognition, and precognition.
The act of reading an object in this manner is called "psychometrizing." Psychics
say the information is conveyed to them
through vibrations imbued into the objects by emotions and actions in the past.
The term "psychometry"
comes
from the Greek words psyche, "soul,"
Psychometry
487
The International Association for Psychotronic Research held its first international congress in Prague in 1973.
The term "psychotronics" was coined by Czechoslovakian researchers in the
1960s as a replacement for "parapsychology." A Czech manifesto presented at a
parapsychology conference in Moscow in
1968 described psychotronics as "the
bionics of man." Psychotronics assumes
that the universe is triadic, not dualistic,
and is comprised of humankind, universe, and psychotronic energy, which is
claimed to be the aura or vital force that
emanates from all living things. This energy may be the basis for all psychic phenomena. See Universal life force.
Psychotronics includes research for
ways to apply this energy to other fields,
such as medicine, physics, biophysics, biology, psychophysiology, anthropology,
and psychology. See Applied psi. Particular attention has been devoted to finding
ways to harass cosmic energies in devices.
Psychotronics
The interdisciplinary study of the interactions of matter, energy, and consciousness. Psychotronics was developed in
Eastern Europe, but has a following elsewhere in Europe and in the United States.
488
Psychometry
Pursel, Jach
The channel since 1974 of Lazaris, said
to be a highly evolved consciousness who
has never incarnated in physical form.
Lazaris is known for wit, warmth, and
practical guidance on a wide range of
emotional and spiritual topics. He has an
international following, including many
celebrities.
Pursel, Jach
Jach Pursel
Pursel was raised in Lansing, Michigan, and met his future wife, Peny, in a
ninth-grade class. Both attended the University of Michigan and graduated with
degrees in international relations and political science. They planned to go to law
school and start their own law firm, but
instead Pursel went to work for State
Farm Insurance and entered its executive
program. By age twenty-seven Pursel was
a regional supervisor in Florida.
Pursel had little interest in metaphysics, but had learned to meditate with
Peny's encouragement. Usually, he fell
asleep. One night during a business trip
in early 1974, Pursel meditated and
found himself in a dense forest with a
brook and a thatch-roofed log cabin. He
entered the cabin and saw a man dressed
in a white robe standing next to a
counter. Behind the man there was a
blackboard, and there was a fire lit in the
fireplace. The man introduced himself as
"Lazaris" and began talking about the
universe and reality.
489
490
Pursel, Jach
Lazaris
Accorditig to ~dzaris he has never
been in physical form, nor will he ever be
so. He says that every consciousness,
early in its development, makes a choice
to grow physically or nonphysically, and
he chose to remain nonphysical. He is a
multi leveled consciousness who is aware
of his own various selves in multiple dimensions (the reason for referring to himself as "we"). He says that all consciousnesses, physical or not, have this
multidimensional quality; humans are
not yet aware of their multiple selves, but
someday will be. Lazaris is neither male
nor female, explaining that gender is
transcended at the level on which he
functions.
As a nonphysical being, Lazaris is
outside the space-time continuum, giving
him a perspective not limited by past,
present, and future and the predispositions natural to those who are physical.
He states he is not communicating to be
a guru or master, but to be a friend, to
help empower people to solve their own
problems, to create better realities, and to
reach the highest aspects of their own
Self. He seeks to remind people that pain
and fear are not the only methods of
growth, but that one may grow more elegantly through joy and love; one does
create one's own reality with no exceptions; there is a God/Goddess/All That
Is who loves us and knows our names;
and that "You love-you
love 'good
enough.'''
Lazaris describes his channeling
process:
When you turn on your television set
and watch the evening news, you don't
for a moment suspect that the anchor
person is sitting inside that little box ...
We would liken our communication to
that process. We do not enter the physical
form of the Channel [Pursel). We don't
get anywhere near that Physical Plane of
Reality, but rather, we connect energies
Puthoff, Harold
that are thoughts into a system of vibration that we then transmit through the
cosmos and the various levels. The system
of vibration then enters your reality
through the Mental Plane, then drifts
down, in its way, to the Physical Planemuch as a television signal to the
antenna-and
then is amplified and
comes out of the vocal chords, the
mouth, and the speaking structure of that
which is the Channel.
Lazaris's seminars include lectures,
guided meditations, and "Blendings,"
times when he blends his energy with that
of the participants. In longer workshops
he personally greets the participants and
gives them crystals he has charged with
energy. See Channeling.
Sources: Philip H. Friedman. "The Magic,
Mystery, and Muses of Love." New Realities 7, no. 6 (July/August 1987): 34-35;
William H. Kautz and Melanie Branon.
Channeling: The Intuitive Connection. San
Francisco: Harper & Row, 1987; Jon
Klimo. "The Psychology of Channeling."
New Age Journal (December 1987): 3240+; Lazaris: Lazaris Interviews, Book I.
Beverly Hills, CA: Concept: Synergy Publishing, 1988; Lazaris, The Sacred Journey:
You and Your Higher Self Beverly Hills,
CA: Concept: Synergy Publishing, 1987;
Katherine Lowry. "Channelers." Omni
(October 1987): 47-50+; Katherine Martin. "The Voice of Lazaris." New Realities
7, no. 6 (July/August 1987): 26-33; "New
Age Harmonies." Time (December 7,
1987): 62-72; "The Sacred Journey: You
and Your Higher Self." Body Mind Spirit 7,
no. 1 (January/February 1988): 23; Paul
Zuromski. "A Conversation with Jach
Pursel and Lazaris." Body Mind Spirit 7,
no. 1 (January/February 1988): 17-22;
Jach Pursel/Lazaris on The Merv Griffin
Show. July 25, 1986.
Puthoff, Harold
See Remote viewing.
491
Pyramids
Four-sided conical structures, the ancient
remains of which are found throughout
the world. According to prevailing scientific theories, ancient peoples used pyramids either as ceremonial structures or
burial chambers. Various occult theories
suggest they were used for initiations into
the mysteries, as repositories or transformers of cosmic energy, or as records of
the history of the Earth, including messianic prophecies.
The greatest popular attention has
been focused on the Great Pyramid
(Cheops) of Gizeh in Egypt. Pyramid
building took place primarily from the
Third to Sixth Dynasties of the Old Kingdom (3100 B.c.-2181 B.C.). Approximately eighty known major pyramids
were constructed, most of which are now
rubble. By the end of the Sixth Dynasty,
all arts and crafts were in decline. A resurgence of pyramid building occurred in
the Twelfth and Thirteenth Dynasties.
There is no evidence of any original burial in any pyramid, indicating that burials
were incidental to a primary purpose.
The Great Pyramid is believed to
have been constructed c. 2700 B.C. by
Pharaoh Khufu (Cheops in Greek). It covers 13.1 acres, has a base of 756 square
feet, and rises 450 feet in height. It is estimated to have originally been 481.4 feet
high. It is missing its capstone, if it ever
had one.
One of the most perplexing mysteries of the pyramids is how they were constructed. The blocks of the Great Pyramid's quarried stone average 2.5 tons.
Eighteenth-Dynasty tomb paintings show
construction by manual labor, hauling
the stones with ropes along wooden
planks. According to the historian Herodotus (484 B.c.-425 B.C.), 100,000 men
labored for twenty years to build the pyramid, which was a monument to Cheops.
The pyramid contains an interior room
called the King's Chamber, which has a
492
Pyramids
B.C.)
Greek philosopher
and mathematician,
best known for major contributions to astronomy,
geometry, and music theory.
His teachings influenced Socrates, Plato,
Euclid, Aristotle, and thinkers in many
disciplines down to the present day. Iamblichus listed 218 men and seventeen
Pythagoras
B.C.)
Pythagoras, by Gafurius,
Musica, 1492
Theorica
493
494
Major Teachings
Pythagoras is best known for the
fundamental geometric theorem named
for him, which states the square of the
hypotenuse of a right triangle is equal to
the sum of the squares of the sides containing the right angle. The theorem's
corollary states that the diagonal of a
square is incommensurable with its side.
Pythagoras conceived of the universe
as a living being, animated by a great
Soul and permeated by Intelligence. He
called God the Monad, the Supreme
Mind. Humankind was separate, save for
the soul, which was a spark of the Monad that was imprisoned in a mortal
body. The task of human beings was to
purify themselves in preparation for return to the Monad.
Pythagoras said all sidereal bodies
were alive and had souls; the planets
were deities. According to Aristotle
Pythagoras also believed that the Earth
had a dual rotation and circled the sun;
but this potentially sacrilegious teaching
was saved for only the most trusted disciples.
Furthermore, Pythagoras saw the
cosmos as a mathematically ordered
whole. Everything in the universe and in
nature was divided into threes. The universe had three worlds: (1) the Supreme
World, a subtle essence that was the true
plane of the Monad; (2) the Superior
World, the home of the immortals; and
(3) the Inferior World, the home of mortal gods, daimons, humans, animals, and
all material things. Living beings had a
triune nature: body, soul (which Pythagoras related to mind), and spirit. He also
said that all arts and sciences are based
on three elements: music, mathematics,
and astronomy.
Pythagoras described numbers as an
intrinsic and living virtue of the Monad.
He ascribed to each a principle, law, and
active force of the universe. The first four
numbers contain the basic principles of
B.C.)
Pythagoras
B.C.)
Harper
Pythagoras:
Lover
of
Wisdom.
York
495
Qi
See Universal life force.
496
Quakers
See Society of Friends.
Qabala
(also Qabalah)
R
Radiesthesia
See Dowsing.
Rainmaking
See Cloud dissolving.
Rajneesh Foundation
International
See Alternative religious movements.
Ramakrishna, Sri
See Hinduism.
Radiesthesia
497
Ram Dass
"Maharaji"), and settled in a small temple in the Himalayas to study yoga, meditation, and bhakti (devotional) practices.
Maharaji gave him the Hindu name
"Ram Dass," meaning "servant of God."
The following year Ram Dass returned to
the United States and continued to pursue
a variety of spiritual practices, including
Bhakti Yoga, focused on his guru and on
the Hindu deity Hanuman; Karma Yoga;
Sufism; and meditation in the Theravada,
Mahayana, and Zen traditions of Buddhism.
Soon after his return, he began sharing his spiritual insights with increasingly
large audiences. He continues to teach
widely, now emphasizing compassionate
service as a spiritual path. He trains AIDS
volunteers and works with the dying, and
is a member of the board of directors of
the Seva Foundation, a nonprofit organization that supports health, ecology, and
service projects around the world, especially in developing countries.
Although the focus of his practice
shifted away from psychedelics after he
498
Stories
about
Neem
Karoli
Baba
Awakening:
Meditator's
Guidebook.
Ramtha
See Knight, JZ.
Rapture
See Ecstasy; Mystical experiences.
(1872?-1916)
Rasputin,
Grigory
Yefirnovich
(1872?-1916)
499
he remained alive. The desperate conspirators dragged him to the frozen Neva
River, bound him, and pushed him
through a hole in the ice. When his body
was recovered, the cause of death was determined as drowning; no traces of poison were detected.
True to Rasputin's prophecy, the
royal family was murdered within two
years. The Russian Revolution and
World War I plunged the country into
chaos and threatened the old aristocratic
order. The nobiliry finally came to an end
twenry-five years later, in World War II,
at the hands of Josef Stalin.
Sources: Alex de Jonge. Life and Times of
Grigorii Rasputin. New York: Dorset,
1982; Colin Wilson. The Occult. New
York: Vintage Books, 1973.
Recurrent spontaneous
psychokinesis
See Poltergeist.
Reflexology
See Bodywork.
Reich, Wilhelm
See Bodywork; Universal life force.
Reichian massage
See Bodywork.
Reiki
See Bodywork.
500
Reincarnation
The return of the soul or essence after
death to inhabit a new physical form. Belief in reincarnation has existed for thousands of years, and the concept has flourished at one time or another in virtually
every part of the world. Roughly twothirds of the world's modern population
accepts some form of reincarnation or rebirth as a fundamental belief-most notably Hindus and Buddhists, as well as
many tribal societies. Western belief in reincarnation is low but has slowly increased since the late nineteenth century,
due largely to the influence of Theosophy, the American medium Edgar Cayce,
and the introduction of Eastern religions.
Reincarnation beliefs have varied
considerably from culture to culture. The
ancient Egyptians believed in the reincarnation of great souls whose purpose is to
lead humankind. The Egyptians modified
that belief over the years to apply reincarnation to the masses. The Egyptian
Book of the Dead includes incantations
for reincarnation.
In ancient Greece Pythagoras (c. 572
B.c.-479 B.C.) taught reincarnation. Plato
(c. 427 B.c.-347 B.C.) said that without
successive lives, life in the universe would
disappear.
In Africa deeply rooted reincarnation
beliefs are held by many tribes. Among
those tribes who believe humans reincarnate as humans, childlessness is considered a curse because it blocks souls from
being reborn.
In Australia the belief is strongest
among the central aboriginal tribes, but is
found elsewhere on the continent. With
the dying of their ancient culture, some
Aborigines believe they will reincarnate
as "Whitefellows" in the continuing evolution of their souls.
Throughout the Pacific Island cultures, reincarnation also holds strong. It
is found among the Balinese, Okinawans,
Ainu (northern Japan), Tasmanians,
Reincarnation in Islam
The concept of reincarnation was
known to ancient Persians prior to the
arrival of Islam. The teachings of the
prophet Zarathustra allude to it, and it is
explicitly taught in The Desatir, a mystical work written c. 500 B.C. In the sixth
century A.D., the prophet Muhammad received the Koran, the Bible of Islam, from
Allah. The Koran makes no direct reference to reincarnation, but some of its passages are interpreted as referring to it;
Reincarnation
Reincarnation in Hinduism
Samsara, the "wheel of rebirth," is
taken for granted by Hindus from earliest
childhood. Hindus believe reincarnation
is caused by the imperfections of the soul
when it first comes into the world. Ignorance and desire perpetuate the need to
reincarnate. The soul perfects itself by purifying and realizing itself, and shedding
earthly desires. It is able to quit samsara
when it is reunited with Brahman, the
Absolute.
Samsara is influenced by karma, the
law of cause and effect. Good is rewarded
and evil is punished. Humans may reincarnate in lower life forms. The number
of incarnations is limitless. Successive
lives are separated by a period of rest in
which the soul contemplates its progress.
See Karma.
It is not certain exactly how old the
concept of reincarnation is in Hinduism;
there are inferences to rebirth or reincarnation in the oldest sacred writings, the
Vedas, some dating to c. 1000 B.C. The
Upanishads, which elaborate upon the
Vedas, refer to reincarnation. Reincarnation is explained more fully in the
Bhagavad-Gita ("The Lord's Song" or
"Song of Krishna"), part of the Mahab-
501
Reincarnation in Buddhism
Buddhism, which prevails in parts of
India and throughout Asia, derives a doctrine of rebirth (distinct from reincarnation) from Hinduism. According to the
Pali Canon, the early scriptures of the
Theravada school, Buddha taught that
the individual has a lesser self, which
dies with the body, and a greater self,
which survives. However, Buddhism has
evolved with the concept of anatta, or
"no self" or "non-self," which holds that
there is no personality or ego which remains intact from life to life. Instead the
personality disintegrates at death into
sparks or pieces, which coalesce with
other sparks to form a new personality.
The life force, or will to live, is what survives, taking with it the good and bad
karmic attributes developed during the
life. Incarnations are caused by karma
and earthly cravings, which must be overcome in the pursuit of spiritual perfection. Prior to rebirth parents are chosen
for karmic reasons.
Liberation from rebirth is achieved
when one overcomes the "three unwholesome roots" -desire, hatred, and delusion-and
attains nirvana ("extinc-
502
Reincarnation in Judaism
Gilgul is the Hebrew term for transmigration, the passage of a soul upon
death into another body. There is no direct reference to gilgul in the Torah, unless one looks for it in allegories. It is,
however, contained in the Kabbalah, the
body of mystical works based on early
Reincarnation
Reincarnation in Christianity
Edgar Cayce once said, "I can read
reincarnation into the Bible, and you can
read it right out again!" Reincarnation is
not taught in any of Christianity's mainstream denominations. Christians who
believe in reincarnation feel there is evidence for the concept in the Bible, despite
the lack of direct reference to it. In the
Book of Matthew, Jesus says John the
Reincarnation
503
Scientific Investigation of
Reincarnation
Efforts have been made to scientifically investigate reincarnation and validate claims of past lives. Most notable of
these is the research of Ian Stevenson,
professor of psychiatry at the University
of Virginia, who began investigating
spontaneous reincarnational memories
504
Reincarnation as the
Opposite Sex
Beliefs in sex switching vary from
culture to culture. In some societies where
the status of women is very low, it is considered impossible for a man to reincarnate as a woman (as the Druse of Lebanon believe), or it is considered karmic
punishment. Some early Kabbalists maintained that gender change was unnatural,
and that a man who reincarnated as a
woman would be barren.
Western believers in reincarnation
generally accept sex change as part of the
soul's development. Stevenson and other
researchers have collected cases involving
alleged gender change.
Reincarnation of Humans in
Nonhuman Form
The belief in transmigration of humans to the lower kingdoms is held by
Hindus, Buddhists, and many African
tribes, and some Native Americans, such
as the Inuit. In Africa beliefs of rebirth
of the human soul in nonhuman forms
are more commonplace than human-tohuman rebirth beliefs. Nonhuman forms
include animals, birds, reptiles, insects,
plants, and fabulous monsters.
The ancient Egyptians believed that
the human soul could occupy animal
Reincarnation
Reincarnation
505
Sources:
Horizon
506
Dalai
Potala
Cayce
Castle
Relaxation
A state of deep rest in which the metabolism of the body slows; less oxygen is
burned, the heart and respiration rates
drop, blood pressure drops, and brain
waves slow to an alpha state. Relaxation
of both mind and body is a key factor in
the development of psychic faculties and
in the attainment of enlightened states of
consciousness. Relaxation is stressed in
all Eastern meditation disciplines. It has
been demonstrated to be a significant influence on the successful performance of
psi in laboratory experiments. Relaxation
also has been shown to enhance one's
ability to learn new information, perform
tasks, and achieve results through creative visualization. In a psychic reading,
relaxation is just as important for the client as for the psychic, in order to facilitate the flow of superphysical sense perceptions.
The first systematic study of relaxation in relation to psi was conducted in
1952 by American parapsychologist Gertrude Schmeidler. Schmeidler found that
hospitalized concussion patients scored
much higher in psi guessing tasks than
did patients suffering from other disorders, and concluded it was due to their
Reincarnation
Remote
viewing
Releasement
See Depossession.
Remote viewing
Seeing remote or hidden objects clairvoyantly with the inner eye, or in alleged outof-body travel. In the past remote viewing
was called "traveling clairvoyance" and
"telesthesia." The term "remote viewing"
was coined in the 1970s by American
physicists Russell Targ and Harold
Puthoff. Targ suggests a more accurate
name is "remote sensing," for it involves
psychic impressions of smell, sound, and
touch as well as sight.
Remote viewing is one of the oldest
and most common forms of psi, and one
of the most difficult to explain. As a shamanic skill, it has been used in Tibet, Siberia, Africa, India, and the Americas for
centuries. Perhaps the first recorded account of remote viewing was written by
Herodotus concerning Croesus, King of
Lydia, who in 550 B.C. evaluated seven
Greek oracles for accuracy. The oracles
were asked by messengers what the king
was doing at the moment on the day of
inquiry. The Delphic oracle came out the
clear winner: The Pythia reported the
sight and smell of a tortoise and lamb
boiling in a stew in a brass-lid-covered
cauldron, which Croesus himself had prepared.
In the eighteenth century, Emanuel
Swedenborg was renowned for his clairvoyance, which included remote visions.
Philosopher Immanuel Kant, who investigated Swedenborg, recorded one famous incident that took place in 1759.
507
508
Remote viewing
Retrocognition
(also postcognition)
Retrocognition
postcognition)
(also
Seeing into or sensing the past. Retrocognition occurs spontaneously but uncommonly in daily life, dreams, and in parapsychology experiments. It is claimed to
be accomplished deliberately by psychics
who seek access to past events in order to
obtain unknown information useful in
the present. Retrocognition is difficult to
test scientifically because of the possibility of clairvoyance of existing historical
records.
Spontaneous retrocognition usually
manifests as a hallucination or vision.
The present surroundings are abruptly replaced by a scene out of the past. Although the vision usually is fleeting, some
last for minutes and generally feature
movement, sounds, and smells.
Retrocognition is a phenomenon of
some hauntings and apparitions that
seem to be continual replays of events,
such as murders or suicides. Psychologist
509
510
Retrocognition
(also postcognition)
Revelation, Book of
The last book of the New Testament,
which portrays the Second Coming of
Christ, the final triumph of the kingdom
of God, and the destruction of all evil;
also called the (Book of the) Apocalypse.
The opening verse presents the book's title as meaning either "the revelation
which Christ possesses and imparts," or
"the unveiling of the person of Christ"
(1:1). The Book of Revelation is the only
book of the New Testament whose character is exclusively prophetic.
The writer of the Apocalypse has traditionally been named as John the Evangelist. Church fathers who identify him as
such include Justin, Irenaeus, Tertullian,
and Clement of Alexandria. Subsequent
scholarship has periodically questioned
the book's authorship. Part of the book
Revelation,
Book
of
511
512
olics and Eastern Orthodox churches accept certain books in their Old Testament
that Jews and many Protestants do not
consider part of the Bible.
Sources: Pat Alexander, ed. The Lion Encyclopedia of the Bible. Rev. ed. Tring,
American
Encyclopedia.
Princeton, NJ: Arete, 1980; The New Jerusalem Bible. Garden City, NY: Doubleday,
1966; The New King James Bible. Nashville: Nelson Thomas, 1979; The New Oxford Annotated Bible. New York: Oxford
University Press, 1977.
Ritual
A ceremonial act, especially for religious
or sacred purpose. All religions and spiritual, mystical, and magical traditions
have their own rituals, which are the
means to come into contact with God or
gods or supernatural forces. Rituals help
one to define oneself in relation to the
cosmos, and to mark one's progress
through life and one's spiritual unfoldment.
Psychiatrist Carl G. Jung observed
that rituals "are an answer and reaction
to the action of God upon man, and perhaps they are not only that, but are also
intended to be 'activating,' a form of
magic coercion" (Memories, Dreams, Re1961). Hsun Tzu, a Chinese
flections,
philosopher of the third century B.C., said
that rituals have three bases: heaven and
earth, the source of all life; ancestors, the
source of human life; and sovereigns and
teachers, the source of government. Rites,
said Hsun Tzu, make for harmony in the
universe and bring out the best in human
beings-they are the culmination of culture.
Rituals have various purposes, which
may overlap: placation and propitiation;
magical; initiation; invocati~ns; trans i-
Revelation,
Book
of
Ritual
fice; one comes face to face with the numinous. It culminates with one's symbolic death and rebirth into a new life, in
which one has access to new values. The
reborn one is given a new name to reflect
his or her new status.
In modern civilization the rite of initiation, where it still exists at all, has lost
much of its power. Eliade observed that
initiatory themes in the modern West are
kept alive largely in the unconscious, expressed through art and literature. Perhaps this is one reason why the subject of
mythology, and particularly the hero's
journey, has received renewed interest
through the works of Joseph Campbell.
See Mythology.
Jung said that the process of individuation, a person's becoming whole, involves initiatory types of ordeals. However, the only initiation process still alive
in the West, he said, is the psychoanalysis
of the unconscious process.
The elements of ritual include recitation, chanting, singing, prayer, and invocation; dancing, movement, or postures; costumes or special dress; incense,
smoke, candles, or fire; offerings or sacrifices; consumption of food and drink
513
514
Ritual
515
516
Rodegast, Pat
See Channeling.
Rolfing
See Bodywork.
Roll, William
See Poltergeist.
Roberts,
Jane (1929-1984)
517
Rosenkreutz,
Christian
See Rosicrucians.
Rosicrucians
The Order of the Rosy Cross, or Rosicrucianism in its many forms, claims to
be the oldest secret society in the Western
world, dating back to the ancient Egyptian and Greek mystery schools. Primarily utopian and humanist, its ideals and
practices are essentially Christian with
strong beliefs in the Great White Brotherhood of Adepts and in reincarnation.
History
According to Harvey Spencer Lewis
(1883-1939), first Imperator and founder of the Ancient and Mystical Order
Rosae Crucis (AMORC) in the United
States, Rosicrucianism dates back to
1489 B.C., when the group of mystic
scholars-both men and women-studying under Pharaoh Thutmose III decided
to make their order secret, calling it simply the Order or Brotherhood. Succeeding pharaohs continued as Grand Masters through Amenhotep IV, great-greatgrandson of Thutmose III.
Amenhotep IV has been called a man
born out of his time (1388 B.c.-1350
B.C.). He made enemies of the priests, outlawing the worship of the principal Egyptian god Ammon and establishing one supreme deity. The pharaoh even changed
his name to Akhnaton, meaning "glory to
Aton," the sun-symbol of the one true
God, as Amenhotep meant "Ammon is
satisfied." He moved the capital city from
Thebes, sacred to Ammon, to a place
called Khut-en-Aton, also known as El
Amarna, where he supposedly built a
temple for the Brotherhood in the shape
of the cross. According to Lewis Akhnaton added the cross and rose as symbols
of the Brotherhood, adopted the crux an-
518
Rosenkreutz, Christian
Rosicrucians
non to apply for membership. The brothers did not reveal their whereabouts, but
assured all petitioners .that printed inquiries would be answered.
In 1616 another anonymous pamphlet appeared, entitled, Chymische
Hochzeit, or The Chemical Marriage of
Christian Rosenkreutz, supposedly written by him in 1459. The story tells of a
royal wedding ceremony Rosenkreutz attended (not his own marriage); it is full of
occult imagery and alchemical propositions, including the creation of homunculi (artificial humans allegedly created
by magic).
These revelations created tremendous interest among the growing European occult community, and scores applied to the secret order. But no records
exist of anyone hearing from the brothers. Later scholars attribute the authorship of all three pamphlets to Johann Valentin Andreae (1586-1654), a young
German Lutheran pastor and reformer.
All three documents promoted Protestant
ethics and vilified the papacy. Apologies
for the works and silence of the Order
were written by the German count Michael Maier (1568-1622), counselor to
Emperor Rudolf II, and by the English
doctor Robert Fludd (1574-1637), both
believed to be at least dabblers in Rosicrucian philosophy; yet not one of the
three men ever admitted to membership
in the Order.
After the flurry of interest subsided,
little more was heard from the Fratres of
C-R.C. The movement blended into German Pietism, an offshoot of Lutheran
doctrine that sought perfection and the
expected return of Christ. In 1693 a
group of Pietists led by Johannes Kelpius
(1673-1708) left for Pennsylvania to accept William Penn's offer of religious
sanctuary. They arrived in Philadelphia in
1694, eventually settling farther west on
the banks of the Wissahickon River.
Staunchly millennialist and communal,
the group also practiced occult and heal-
519
ing arts. After Kelpius's death they disbanded, bur are remembered as originators of the Pennsylvania hex tradition.
Lewis maintained they brought Rosicrucianism to America.
In the early eighteenth century, various authors published several books and
manifestos claiming existence of the
Brotherhood of the Rosy Cross and outlined the Order's beliefs and practices. In
nearly all cases these publications are actually treatises for political and religious
reform, championing such causes as the
free dissemination of knowledge, universal brotherhood, support of the arts, and
the reorganization of the warring countries of Europe into one idealized commonwealth. Others-with
guilty consciences, perhaps-took the attacks as the
revenge of the martyred Templars, returned to exact punishment on the descendants and institutions that had murdered them. See Order of the Knights
Templar.
Symbols
and Beliefs
Rosicrucian ideals have changed little from those early manifestos. Through
study and practice, members still strive
for the perfection illustrated by the Masters of the Great White Lodge, with the
ultimate goal being admittance into the
Lodge and the attainment of true knowledge, or cosmic consciousness. Students
progress through twelve degrees of mastery, with the tenth through twelfth degrees conferred psychically, usually in the
Order's temples in the East. Worthy
members who have mastered nine degrees
may choose to enter the Illuminati, a
higher organization of the Order. See llluminati.
Similar to the Theosophists, such
perfection comes only after various reincarnations, each devoted to achieving a
greater oneness with the Supreme Being.
Lewis insisted that Rosicrucians do not
force members to believe in reincarnation, but that the examples of their daily
520
Rosicrucians
Rosicrucian Organizations
AMORC, founded by H. S. Lewis,
had its beginnings as the Rosicrucian Research Society or the New York Institute
for Psychical Research in 1904. In 1908
Lewis met Mrs. May Banks-Stacey, a reputed Rosicrucian who put him in touch
with the Brotherhood in Europe. Lewis
traveled to France in 1909, where he
claimed he was initiated into the Order
and given the authority to "open the
tomb of C-R.C." in America for its next
108-year cycle of activity. AMORC was
officially chartered in 1915 and held its
first national convention in 1917.
At the 1917 convention, Lewis organized the National Rosicrucian Lodge,
whereby wisdom-seekers could obtain the
elementary teachings through correspondence, with the hope of eventually
joining a Lodge. By 1926 Lewis petitioned a Rosicrucian Congress in Belgium
to allow students unable to join a Lodge
to continue their instruction via correspondence and become part of the Sanctum, or "Lodge at home." Such accommodations allowed Ai\10RC to distribute
materials worldwide. Currently, the Order claims approximately 250,000 members in over one hundred countries.
Lewis's son, Ralph M. Lewis, succeeded
him as Imperator.
In 1927 Lewis moved the Order's
headquarters to San Jose, California,
where it remains today. The Grand Lodge
at Rosicrucian Park has become a tourist
attraction, as the headquarters buildings
include a planetarium, research facilities,
and the Egyptian Museum. Reportedly
Rosicrucians
521
522
Runes
Ancient Norse and Teutonic alphabet sigils, ascribed various magical, mystical,
and divinatory properties. Various alphabets have been handed down through the
centuries;
individual runes have represented letters, deities, qualities, events,
and forces of nature. Runic inscriptions
surviving from the pagan period always
have a religious significance. The term
"rune" comes from the Indo-European
root ru, which means "mystery" or "secret."
Runic symbols have been discovered
in rock carvings dating back to the prehistoric Neolithic and Bronze Ages (c.
8000 B.c.-2000
B.C.), carved by tribes
that settled in Northern Italy. Rock carvings from the second Bronze Age, c. 1300
B.C., are common throughout Sweden. By
A.D. 100 runes were in widespread
use in
Nordic and Germanic lands. According
to myth they were created by Odin (also
Woden), god of wisdom, war, and death.
Odin
sacrificed
himself
by hanging,
pierced by a spear, upon Yggradsil, the
World Tree, for nine days and nights, in
order to gain secret wisdom. In Havamal
138, a mythological poem of the Viking
Rosicrucians
Ryerson,
Kevin
their names in runes. Herman Pohl Magdeburg, the order's first chancellor, sold
amuletic bronze rune rings to soldiers in
World War I as protection in battle. Another occultist, 5eigfried Adolf Kunner,
reached the extreme of rune mania with
the creation of rune exercises, yoga-like
postures that mimicked rune shapes.
While contorting, the student was supposed to yodel, which would release mysterious, magical forces. Kunner also advocated meditating upon runes to cure
illness.
The Nazis perhaps ruined forever
two runes: the swastika, originally Thor's
hammer and the symbol of the Earth
Mother and the sun; and the 5 sigil, used
by the 55.
Runes were popularized as an oracle
in the 1980s. Rune tiles are drawn from
bags and meditated upon, cast in lots like
the I Ching, or laid out in crosses or
wheels like Tarot cards. Like the I Ching
and Tarot, runes do not provide answers,
but provide the means to answers; they
are considered keys to self-transformation. Like Tarot cards runes can be used
as meditational tools.
Sources: Ralph Blum. The Book of Runes.
New York:
Press, 1987;
Van Nuys,
1987; Ralph
Ryerson, Kevin
5ee Channeling.
523
s
Sacred pipe
A long-stemmed, elaborately decorated
pipe sacred to Plains and Woodlands Native Americans. In ritual tobacco smoke
from the pipe is the equivalent of visible
breath or incense; it is both offering to
the spirits and forces of nature, and
means of communication with them.
Smoking a sacred pipe also is a means to
having a spiritual vision.
The sacred pipe also is called a "calumet," from the French chalumet, which
means "a reed." The name was given by
white settlers in North America to ceremonial pipes whose stems were hollow
reeds. Early calumets were made of two
separate pieces, a bowl carved of clay or
stone, sometimes in the effigy of a bird,
man, or animal, and a stem of reed, decorated with eagle feathers and symbols.
Some calumets were enormous: The
bowls were so large they had to be placed
on the ground, and the stems reached up
to four feet in length. The smoker squatted on the ground to hold the stem. Such
calumets eventually gave way to shorter
long-stemmed pipes, which were stored
in separate pieces but fitted together for
smoking. They were held in forked sticks
stuck in the ground.
According to myth the sacred pipe
originated with the Pawnee and spread to
other Plains and Woodlands tribes. The
Pawnee and other tribes attribute the
original sacred pipe to White Buffalo Calf
524
Maiden, a representative of the Great Spirit. White Buffalo Calf Maiden appeared
one winter long ago and delivered seven
gifts, the first of which was the pipe. She
said the bowl of the pipe, carved in the
likeness of a buffalo calf, represented the
Earth and all the four-legged creatures
who walked upon her. The wooden stem
represented all that grows upon the
Earth. The decorative eagle feathers represented all the winged creatures. By
smoking the pipe, humankind would join
its voice with all these other beings in addressing the Great Spirit.
White Buffalo Calf Maiden's other
six gifts were rites in which the sacred
pipe was to be used: purifying the souls
of the dead; purification in sweat lodges;
having visions; dancing the Sun Dance;
peacemaking; initiating girls into womanhood; and playing a ball game that symbolizes human life.
Other mythical givers of the first
pipe are Duck (Arapahoe), Thunder
(Blackfoot), and the prophet Sweet Medicine (Cheyenne).
Sacred pipes are used in a wide variety of clan, society, social, council, and
personal affairs; decorations reflect the
function. Pipes are used in pipe dances,
in which dancers dance with decorated stems, or offer their whole pipes to
other dancers or spectators. See Sun
Dance.
The use of sacred pipes has had a
revival among many North American
Sacred pipe
The
Sacred psychology
See Psychology.
Sadhu
See Fakir.
525
was thought to have no business attempting to be a man of God. Sai Baba nevertheless predicted that one day he would
be surrounded by huge crowds of followers. By the 1970s that prediction had
borne out. Thousands of people regularly
camp outside his ashram, Prashanti
Nilayam ("Abode of Great Peace") in
Puttaparti, hoping to get a glimpse of
him, receive an apport, obtain an interview, touch him, or listen to a sermon.
Sai Baba's Sathya Sai Educational Trust
runs five colleges established in India as
of 1986, including a boys' college in Brindavan, his second home, an estate near
Whitefield, about fifteen miles south of
Bangalore (according to legend, Krishna
had lived in a "Brindavan").
Sai Baba is best known for his apports; some 75 percent of his devotees
claim to have seen or received them. He
produces a steady stream of apports with
a wave of his hand. They include huge
quantities of vibuti, holy ash made from
burnt cow dung, which is smeared on the
body; foods and liquids; religious statues
and objects made of gold; precious jewelry; photographs; business cards; even
stamps bearing his likeness, which have
not been officially issued by the government. He reportedly fills empty bowls
with hot, steaming Indian food of most
unusual flavors, and produces enough to
feed hundreds of people at a time. He
opens his fist and drops sticky sweets into
the palms of others, yet his own hands
are dry. He also produces amrith, a
honey-like substance. On outings to the
nearby Chitravati River, he has reached
into sand and pulled out food free of
sand. He has plucked apples, pomegranates, mangoes, and other fruits from a
tamarind tree. All nonfood objects materialized are bright, fresh, and new. Jewelry includes valuable precious gems.
Rings requested by followers fit them perfectly; if a person does not like a particular ring, Sai Baba takes it back and
changes it instantly. Business cards bear-
526
Saint Germain
Sanathana Sarathi, 1969; Howard Murphet. Sai Baba: Man of Miracles. New
York: Samuel Weiser, 1976; Samuel H.
Sandweiss. Sai Baba: The Holy Man and
the Psychiatrist. San Diego, CA: Birth Day
Publishing, 1975; Arthur Schulman. Baba.
New York: Viking Press, 1971.
Saint Germain
Ascended Master considered by some the
greatest adept since Jesus Christ. As part
of the Great White Brotherhood of adepts, Saint Germain protects the wisdom
of the ages, only revealing it and himself
to those he completely trusts. He administers the Seventh Ray in the theosophical
universe, controlling ceremony and ritual.
According to legend Saint Germain's
first stay among humankind supposedly
occurred more than 50,000 years ago, in
a paradise located where the Sahara Desert is today. He led his people in the
knowledge that they were part of the
great cosmic Source, represented by the
Violet Flame Temple, of which Saint Germain was high priest. But some people
were tempted by the pleasures of the
senses, and he withdrew, leaving them to
their fates.
527
528
Saint Germain
Saint Germain
ifornia
Press,
1980;
Robert
Ellwood.
Theosophical
Publishing House,
1986;
529
Samadhi
See Meditation;
Yoga; Zen.
Mystical
experiences;
Sankara
See Hinduism.
Santeria
Syncretic religion based on ancient African rites and Catholicism. Santeria is related in ritual and practice to Vodoun.
"SanterIa" comes from the Spanish word
santo, meaning "saint." Practitioners are
called santeros and san teras. Yoruba is
the liturgical language.
Like Vodoun, Santeria came to the
Americas with West African slaves, principally from the Yoruban tribes along the
Niger River. Forced to convert to Catholicism, the slaves practiced their religion in
secret, using Catholic saints as covers for
their own gods and blending the two religions. The Spanish and Portuguese masters eventually became fascinated with
Yoruban magic and began to practice it
themselves. Santeria today is practiced
530
The Orishas
In the Yoruban language, orisha literally means "head-calabash" and is the
term for god. The orishas are archetypal
forces and are the equivalent of the
Vodoun loa and the Greek megaloi theoi.
According to Yoruban wisdom, a person
"chooses a head" at birth, that is, one is
furnished with a bit of cosmic essence.
The essence manifests in the forces and
world of nature, which are embodied by
the orishas. Like the loa, the orishas exhibit complex human personalities, with
strong desires, preferences, temperaments, and various sexual orientations.
When the orishas possess their "children," the devotees assume their personalities, performing feats of superhuman
strength, eating and drinking huge quantities of food and alcohol, and divining
the future with great accuracy.
The oldest ancestor and the first orisha is Obatala, the father of the gods.
Santeros, like Vodounists, believe in a supreme being as creator, but he is incomprehensible and too remote for daily worship. Obatala is personified as a white
man dressed in white and on horseback.
He represents peace and purity. Oddudua, his wife, is a black woman usually
depicted breastfeeding an infant and represents maternity. According to myth
ObataJa and Oddudua had two children,
a son Aganyu and a daughter Yemaya.
Aganyu and Yemaya married and had a
son, Orungan. Orungan was supposedly
so handsome that Aganyu died from
envy. When he matured Orungan forced
himself on his mother, who then cursed
him and he died. Yemaya, depicted as a
beautiful yellow-skinned woman and the
goddess of the moon and womanhood,
Saint Germain
Santeria
est order of priest is the omnipotent babalawo ("father of secrets"), who has
power not only to heal the sick and punish the unjust but to divine the future
through the Table of Ifa. All babalawos
are male, since Orunla, the guardian of
the Table, is male. Within the order of
babalawo are various degrees, ranging
from high priest to the one responsible
for a particular orisha's sacrifice. Following the babalawos are the priests of orishas who govern the sick or healing; and
the priests or priestesses of Orisha-Oko,
the god of agriculture. Priests consecrated
to lesser oris has or human deities also fall
in this third category.
The babalawo's second most important duty is sacrificing the animals as offerings to the orishas. Common sacrificial
animals include all types of fowl, goats,
pigs, and occasionally a bull. The practice
is opposed by animal rights activists in
the United States.
Divining the future by reading the
seashells (ios caracoles) of the Table of
Ifa is paramount in Santeria. Santeros
who specialize in Table readings are
called italeras and are often babalawos
dedicated to serving Orunla. Reading the
Table is also called diloggun or mediloggun. Eighteen shells make up the Table,
but the italero only uses sixteen. The
smooth shells may be bought in a botanica (store where Santeria and Vodoun
paraphernalia and herbs are sold) by anyone, but uninitiated users, called aleyos,
may use only twelve. The unbroken sides
of the shell are filed until the serrated
edges appear, showing what look like
tiny mouths filled with teeth. The shells
are the "mouthpieces" of the orishas.
During a consultation, called a registra, the italero prays to the orishas, rubs
the sixteen shells together, then throws
them onto a straw mat called an estera.
The shells are read according to how
many of them fall with their "mouths"
uppermost. Each pattern of up and down,
called an ordun, has a corresponding con-
531
trolling orisha and accompanying proverb. The italero interprets the proverbs to
fit the particular situation, since otherwise the oracles sound more like the wisdom found in fortune cookies.
Very often the babalawo finds the
questioner has been put under an evil
spell, or bilongo, by an enemy. Such action requires the victim to place a counteracting spell, called an ebbo, on the
guilty party. If the ebbo does more damage to the enemy than the original
bilongo, it merely enhances the babalawo's prestige, reputation, and clientele.
Remedies range from herbal baths to
complicated spells involving various oils,
plants, and intimate waste products of
the intended victim. A common prescription is for the questioner to wear a resguardo, or protective talisman bag filled
with various herbs and dedicated to an
orisha.
Another popular divinatory method,
normally used to consult Eleggua, is
called "darle coco al santo" ("give the coconut to the saint"), or reading coconut
meat. Coconuts are used in all major
SanterIa ceremonies and form the main
ingredient in several spells. To prepare a
coconut for divination, the reader must
break its shell with a hard object, never
cracking the nut on the floor, as that
would offend Obi, the coconut's deity.
The meat, which is white on one side and
brown on the other, is then divided into
four equal pieces. The pieces are thrown
on the floor, and one of five patterns results. Each pattern has a meaning and
must be interpreted for the situation at
hand.
Readings of the Table of Ifa by the
babalawo help determine all of the important characteristics of a person's life
and how he or she should deal with each
event in life as it occurs. Upon the birth
of a child, the parents consult the babalawo to find the infant's assigned orisha, plant, birthstone, and animal. In
SanterIa stones traditionally associated
532
Santeria
Satori
See Mystical experiences; Zen.
Saying
Schmeidler, Gertrude
See Sheep/goat effect.
Scientology
See Church of Scientology.
Scrying
A method of divination done by gazing
upon an object such as a crystal ball or
mirror until clairvoyant visions are seen
on the surface or in the mind's eye. Scrying is an ancient art dating back to the
early Egyptians and Arabs. Scryers attempt to look into the future in order to
answer questions, solve problems, find
lost objects and people, and identify or
find criminals.
"Scrying" comes from the English
word "descry," which means "to succeed
in discerning" or "to make out dimly."
The tool of scryers, called a speculum,
can be any object that works for an individual, but usually is one with a reflective surface. The oldest and most common speculum is still water in a lake,
pond, or dark bowl. Ink, blood, and
other dark liquids have been used by
Egyptian scryers for centuries. The
French physician and astrologer Nostradamus scryed with a bowl of water set
upon a brass tripod. His preparatory ritual consisted of dipping a wand into the
water and anointing himself with a few
drops, then gazing into the bowl until he
saw visions. See Nostradamus.
Other specula include glass fishing
floats, polished metals and stones, and
precious gems. Gypsy fortune-tellers
made crystal balls the stereotype of the
trade. American psychic Jeane Dixon uses
a crystal ball. John Dee, the royal magician to Queen Elizabeth I, used a crystal
egg and a black obsidian mirror. In Arab
countries scryers use their own polished
thumbnails. Dr. Morton Prince, a medi-
533
534
Seance
Event in which a medium contacts the
spirit world. The medium enters an altered state of consciousness and reaches a
spirit, called a control by psychical researchers and "spirit friend" or "spirit
helper" by many modern mediums. The
control, communicating mentally with
the medium or speaking directly through
his or her vocal cords, conveys information from other spirits for the benefit of
the sitters. The spirits may also assist in
healing or manifesting physical phenomena such as apports.
Seances from the mid-nineteenth
through early twentieth centuries were
dominated by physical phenomena, some
of which was exposed as fraud. Most
modern seances involve mental mediumship, in which the medium relays messages.
In the early days of Spiritualism, seances traditionally took place in darkened rooms. The medium and otherscalled "sitters"-sat
around a table and
held hands or placed their hands down
on the table. Hands were accounted for
in this way to show that any phenomena
produced during the seance were not due
to sleight of hand. Researchers held or
tied down the medium's feet and knees.
Scrying
Sedona,
Arizona
Sedona, Arizona
Area
in central
Arizona
said
to be a
535
Sedona, Arizona
Seiki
Seth
Seiki-jutsu
Shah, Idries
See Bodywork.
Self-actualization
See Psychology.
Sensitive
See Mediumship; Psychic.
Serios, Ted
See Thoughtography.
536
See Sufism.
Shakers
American religious sect. Also called the
United Society of Believers, the Shakers
flourished in nineteenth-century America.
They lived communally yet stressed complete celibacy to counter sex, the root of
all sin.
The Shakers were founded by Ann
Lee, a native of Manchester, England. Lee
was poor and uneducated. Following her
marriage to Abraham Standerin, also
called Stanley, she bore four children,
Seiki
Shakers
537
Shaker women
physical abuse. Although the Shakers did
not plan to live together, they chose communallife for protection. Neighbors were
hostile toward a group who would not
fight in the Revolution, worshiped God in
such unorthodox manners, spoke in
tongues and received revelations, and followed a woman as church leader. Mother
Ann's statements that she was nearly divine, was equal to men, and that women
did not have to "be fruitful and multiply"
branded her as a witch. Abraham eventually left Ann for another woman, and
Ann reverted to her maiden name.
Mother Ann died in 1784, without
seeing her church well established. Her
spiritual presence apparently remained
with the Shakers, however. She had believed in communication with the spirit
world and had claimed to talk to Jesus,
angels, and Shaker founders who had
preceded her. At her death Mother Ann
538
Shakers
Shakers
539
vard Common Press, 1987; Lawrence Foster. Religion and Sexuality. New York and
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1981;
"Psychic Manifestations Among the Shakers (Part II)." Journal of the American Society for Psychical Research 32, no. 11
(November 1938): 339-50; F. E. Leaning.
"The Indian 'Control.'" Journal of the
American
Society
for Psychical
for ritual
Research
Shamanism
Magico-spiritual systems in which an
adept enters an altered state of consciousness and travels to nonworldly realities in
order to heal, divine, communicate with
the spirits of the dead, and perform other
supernatural feats. The term "shamanism," from the Tungusic term saman,
originally applied to societies found in Siberia and Central Asia, then was extended to similar systems found elsewhere around the world. It has also been
suggested that the term derives from the
Sanskrit saman, meaning "song," referring to the shaman's magical songs and
chants. Shamans belong to the same class
of individuals as mystics, in that they are
540
Java shaman
Shakers
Shaman and assistants become horses in trance dance and reenact a battle for
onlooking villagers
magi co-religious life of the society centers
around the shaman, while in other societies shamans share the stage with priests
and other adepts. The ecstatic trance sets
shamans apart from other religious and
magical adepts: shamans cannot become
shamans without experiencing ecstatic
trances, and they perform all of their
functions in trance. They are assisted by
tutelary and helping spirits.
Shamanism
541
~
&
1;
cestral spirit, or the spirit of a dead shaman. The candidate is initiated into his
power in trance by ritual death, dismemberment, and resurrection. He becomes a
new person and takes a new name. In
some societies he is considered to be literally dead, and resurrected as a ghost.
The shaman acquires an assortment
of helping spirits, which take the form of
animals, birds, insects, fish, plants, or
spirits of the dead. Each has a specific
function and helps him in performing his
duties. Shamans also may have a guardian spirit, usually the representative of a
genus, such as Bear or Coyote, from
which he derives his power. See Guardian
spirit.
Some shamans, such as among the
Australian Aborigines and Native North
Americans, receive objects of power, such
as crystals, shells, or stones, which are
symbolically inserted in their bodies in
initiation rituals. See Medicine societies.
-f
542
Powers
The shaman lives in two worlds: ordinary reality and nonordinary reality,
also called the "shamanic state of consciousness." Nonordinary reality is a
unique altered state of consciousness in
which the shaman has access to the three
zones of most cosmologies: earth, sky,
and underworld, which are connected by
a central axis represented by a"World Pillar, World Tree, or World Mountain. The
shaman remains lucid throughout his altered state, controls it, and recalls afterward what transpired during it. In the
shamanic state, the shaman sees other,
nonworldly realities, perhaps multiple realities simultaneously. He has access to
information that is not accessible in the
ordinary reality.
The ability to enter the shamanic
state at will is essential to shamanism.
Techniques for doing so include drumming, rattling, chanting, dancing, fasting,
sexual abstinence, sweat baths, staring
Shamanism
Functions
Universally, the shaman's primary
function is to heal and restore the individual's connectedness to the universe.
Shamans make no distinction between
body, mind, and spirit; they are all part
of the whole. Shamanism, unlike Western
medicine, is not necessarily concerned
with the extension of life, but rather is
concerned with protecting the soul and
preventing it from eternal wandering.
Certain life-threatening health hazards of
primitive living, such as contaminated
water, are accepted as risks of daily life.
The diagnosis of illness generally
falls into two categories: the magical "insertion" of a disease-causing object in the
body of the patient by a sorcerer or displeased or evil spirit; or "soul loss," in
which the patient's soul has wandered off
into the land of the dead, been frightened
away by a ghost or traumatic experience,
or been kidnapped by spirits of the dead.
The shaman makes the diagnosis by communicating with his helping spirits.
In the case of "insertion," he
"sucks" the offending object from the patient's body. The illness is absorbed by
the spirit helpers, who also protect the
shaman from becoming ill himself. If the
Shamanism
543
Publishing House, 1987. Ruth M. Underhill. Red Man's Religion. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1965; Alberto
Villoldo and Stanley Krippner. Healing
States. New York: Fireside/Simon &
Schuster, 1986.
Shambhala
Legendary Tibetan kingdom symbolic of
spiritual enlightenment. Tantric texts discuss the kingdom, its spiritual significance, and the path leading to it. Many
Tibetans, including both laypeople and
lamas, believe Shambhala is a real place,
hidden in a secret location deep within
the Himalayas. Some Western scholars,
544
Shamanism
Shambhala
545
546
Sheep/goat effect
A phenomenon discovered in psychical
research that demonstrates that people
who believe in psi tend to score positively
in psi tests, and people who do not believe in psi tend to score negatively. The
phenomenon was discovered in the 1940s
by American parapsychologist Gertrude
Schmeidler, who named it the "sheep/
goat effect." Sheep are believers and
goats are nonbelievers.
Schmeidler and other researchers
found that "sheep" are more likely to
score "hits" in laboratory psi guessing
games. "Goats" are more likely to miss
Shambhala
London: Victor Gollancz Ltd., 1976; Martin Ebon. Psychic Warfare: Threat or Illusion? New York: McGraw-Hill, 1983;
Gertrude Raffel Schmeidler and R. A. McConnell. ESP and Personality Patterns.
New Haven, CT: Yale, 1958; Gertrude
Schmeidler, ed. Extrasensory Perception.
Shinto
New York: Atherton Press, 1969; Benjamin B. Wolman, ed. Handbook of Parapsychology. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1977.
Shiatsu
See Bodywork.
Shinto
Indigenous polytheistic, animistic, and
shamanic religion of Japan. Shinto links
living Japanese to their ancestral spirits,
ancient gods, and elemental energies of
the land and nature in a mysterious and
shared cosmos. All natural phenomena
are considered manifestations of the diVIlle.
547
548
Shinto
Shinto
549
purify the body, mind, and spirit, thus facilitating spiritual growth.
Influence of Shinto on Japanese
Way of Life
Central to Shinto is the appreciation
of the ability of nature to awaken in human beings a sense of the divine in the
cosmos. Four elements of Shinto stand
out as influential on the Japanese outlook
on the world: (1) an exceptional understanding of creativity, and a sense of the
interconnectedness of all things in a collective unconscious; (2) a belief in the innate power, beauty, and goodness of life,
which fosters cultural attitudes of cooperation and harmony; (3) pragmatism
and ability to adapt to change; and (4)
universal beliefs, which enable coexistence with other faiths.
Sources: Ichiro Hori. Folk Religion in
Japan. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1968; Yong Choon Kim. Oriental
Thought. Totowa, NJ: Rowman and Little-
Shroud of Turin
A yellow strip of linen bearing bloodstains and the brownish image of the
body of a bearded man, which for centuries was believed to be the shroud in
which Jesus was buried. Measuring about
fourteen feet in length and four feet in
width, the cloth has been the subject of
controversy, debate, and analysis since it
came to light in a French church in 1353.
550
Shinto
Shroud of Turin
551
Siddhis
Paranormal and extraordinary powers attained through spiritual development, especially in Tantric and yogic practices.
Siddhis is Sanskrit for "perfect abilities"
or "miraculous powers."
In Hindu yoga siddhis include such
abilities as clairvoyance, telepathy, mindreading, levitation, materialization, rendering one's self and things invisible, projecting out-of-body and entering another
body, superhuman strength, and knowing
the moment when one will die. These
abilities are not to be sought for themselves because they are part of the phenomenal world and thus are obstacles to
the realization of the Absolute. Siddhis
are inevitable but must be renounced and
overcome. If they are not, the yogi becomes merely a magician trapped in the
phenomenal world of siddhis, and will
not obtain the highest form of samadhi,
union with the Absolute.
Book III of Patanjali's Yoga Sutras is
devoted to siddhis, which are attained
through the practice of samyama.
Samyama is a self-control in the final
three phases of Raja Yoga, which is the
control of the mind through concentration, breath control, posture, meditation,
and contemplation. Meditation upon objects or ideas enables the yogi to possess
them magically, that is, to understand
552
Sidgwick, Eleanor
See Society for Psychical Research (SPR).
Shroud of Turin
Sidgwick, Henry
See Society for Psychical Research (SPR).
Sitting
See Seance.
Smith, Helene
The pseudonym of Catherine Elise
Muller, a late-nineteenth-century medium
from Geneva, Switzerland, who aroused
considerable controversy over her alleged
astral visits to Mars. Smith never worked
as a paid medium, but gave seances to
friends and admirers for entertainment.
She earned a living holding a high position in a large store in Geneva.
Smith's seances were characterized
by trances, automatic writing in Arabic,
and glossolalia, or speaking in tongues.
She hypnotized herself into a trance, and
allowed her control, Leopold, to speak
and write through her.
Smith claimed she had been a Hindu
princess and Marie Antoinette in previous lives. Her present humble life was repayment of a karmic debt for her transgressions as Antoinette. One of the spirits
she claimed to channel in trances was
a contemporary
of Antoinette, the
eighteenth-century Italian sorcerer Cagliostro. When the spirit of Cagliostro appeared, Smith's appearance changed
markedly to drooping eyelids and a double chin. The spirit used her vocal cords,
speaking in a deep bass voice.
Leopold, who controlled a bevy of
spirits around Smith, had been transported to Mars, Smith said. The spirits
were able to take Smith to Mars while
she was in trance. The results of these
journeys were crude pictures of Martian
landscapes, including plants, houses, and
city streets, and automatic writing of a
Martian language. Many people believed
her.
In the late 1890s, Smith was re-
Research
(SPR)
Harper
umship
Survival.
Medi-
London: William
553
554
Research
(SPR)
See Cross correspondence; Piper, Leonora E. Eleanor Sidgwick became president of the SPR in 1908-1909, and in
1910 became honorary secretary until
1931. She was appointed president
d'honneur in 1932.
Since the 1940s the SPR has devoted
more attention to mass experiments evaluated by statistical methods, though less
so than the American Society for Psychical Research and institutional parapsychology in general.
The SPR defines its current fields of
study as:
555
556
Research
(SPR)
Quaker meeting
and tongue borings. Nonetheless, their
influence quickly spread throughout England and to her colonies in America.
Quakerism's appeal came from the idea
that anyone-no
matter whether they
were man or woman, black or white, rich
or poor, educated or illiterate-could experience Christ and spread his word.
Such notions were great class levelers and
looked on with abhorrence by many.
Quakers practiced "hat honor" and
"plain language," refusing to doff their
hats except in prayer or use titles acknowledging superiors. The use of "thee"
and "thou" flew in the face of seventeenth-century convention. In those days
"you" was the plural, polite form of the
second-person pronoun, used for superiors, and the others were the familiar, singular forms.
Fox believed that true conversion depended on a changed life, and that by
striving for a pure heart, human beings
could be perfect. This idea fell under the
influence of Pietism and the Holiness
Society
of Friends (Quakers)
557
558
TN: Abingdon Press, 1981; Daisy Newman. A Procession of Friends. Garden City,
NY: Doubleday, 1972; D. Elton Trueblood. The People Called Quakers. Richmond, IN: Friends United Press, 1971.
Society
of Friends (Quakers)
Soul mate
A soul's ideal counterpart, which must be
found for true happiness and fulfillment.
The search for the counterpart may consume multiple reincarnations. Soul mates
are largely a popular Western phenomenon, especially in the United States. So
many definitions of soul mates have been
put forth that there is no definitive soul
mate and no definitive explanation as to
their origins. The notion of searching for
one's long-lost soul mate gained great
popularity in the 1970s and 1980sperhaps as a reaction to the sexual freedom of the 1960s-and
has become
highly romanticized.
A popular theory says soul mates began in a remote time when a cleavage in
human spiritual and physical nature occurred, leaving the soul imperfect and in
need of searching for its other half. The
imperfect halves are reflected in the doctrine of complements of the Platonists,
who said that man could find in woman
the virtues he lacked. According to the
soul mate theory, the two halves may be
reincarnated many times before finding
each other. At last they join together and
fulfill their purpose. The theory assumes
that a soul mate is of the opposite sex,
and provides a perfect relationship of
love and bliss.
Another theory holds that a soul
mate is not necessarily a missing half, but
a soul with whom one has spent many
lives and for whom one has developed a
strong affinity. Such soul mates gravitate
together again and again to further develop their relationship and help each
other reach the highest potential. They
are completely in tune with each other
and can communicate without words.
They love each other unconditionally,
cannot bear to be separated from each
other, and suffer great misery should
their partner die and leave them behind.
During the course of many lives together,
they may change sex roles.
Soul mate
559
True Accounts
of Reincarnation.
560
Soul mate
David Spangler
At Findhorn another presence manifested. Called Limitless Love and Truth,
it was a source of prophetic revelations
that had first appeared some years earlier
to another man in Britain. Limitless Love
and Truth was of great interest to many
who were connected with Findhorn, but
disagreements over how to define this being and make use of its statements led to
splits among followers. The transmissions
of Limitless Love and Truth were published in Spangler's first book, Revelation: The Birth of a New Age (1976). See
Findhom.
Spangler left Findhorn in 1973 and
returned to the San Francisco area. He
traveled extensively, doing public speaking and consulting. With a group of
friends from Findhorn who also returned
to the United States, including Glines and
his wife-to-be, Julie Manchester (they
married in 1981), Spangler set up the
Lorian Association, an umbrella organization for projects in publishing, education, and the arts. In 1980 Spangler
moved to Madison, Wisconsin, where he
561
562
Spirit guide
A nonphysical entity, usually perceived as
the Higher Self, an angel, a highly
evolved being or group mind, or a spirit
of the dead. The purpose of a spirit guide
is to help and protect an individual, assist
in spiritual development, or provide a
source of inspiration. Beliefs about spirit
guides vary and are widespread in all cultures.
It is widely believed around the
world that every individual has one or
more spirit guides from birth who remain
close during the person's entire life. At
death they assist in crossing the threshold
to the afterlife. In addition to the primary
guides, an individual can be aided by var-
Spiritism
Child's
Natural
Psychic
Abilities.
Spiritism
The philosophy of Allan Kardec, known
as Kardecism (Kardecismo in Brazil) in
his honor, that originated with the Spiritualist movement that swept Europe in
the 1850s.
Writing under the pseudonym of
Kardec, the French writer and physician
Hippolyte Leon Denizard Rivail (18041869) published his seminal work, Le
Livre des Esprits (The Lives of the Spirits), in 1857. In it Kardec outlined his be-
563
564
Spiritism
565
raphy, anymore than for thoughtography, because the spirit, being a pure reality, transcends the physical laws of light
and acts directly upon the (film) plate,
without going through the camera."
Images of extras found on film not
exposed in a camera are actually known
as scotographs, another example of spirit
photography. Closely related is psychography, messages written on film in the
hand of a dead person.
Spirit photography is used by some
ghost hunters in their investigations of
haunted sites. When the film is developed, the photographer looks for anom:: alous lights, shadows, and shapes that
~ were not visible to the naked eye. As eve idence of paranormal phenomena, spirit
~ photography remains controversial. See
J Thoughtography .
...,
Sources:
Spirit photograph
566
Spiritual emergence
A range of non ordinary states of consciousness which, though transformative
and healing in nature, can be unsettling
because of their sudden or dramatic onset. These can include sudden arrivals at
new levels of awareness or states of consciousness, transformational
energies,
and psychic phenomena such as visions of
nonphysical beings, clairvoyance, clairaudience, clairsentience, telepathy, and
so on.
The term "spiritual emergence"
evolved from "spiritual emergency," a
term coined in the late 1970s by transper-
Spirit photography
(also paranormal
photography)
Spiritual emergence
energies, emotions, and inner experiences. Rather than trying to quell them,
she learned to work through them.
As a result the Grofs and Rita Rohan
founded the SEN as an alternative to help
others "find their way through unexpected and often unsettling mystical and
psychic openings" rather than stop them
through traditional psychotherapy. SEN
also provides networking, referrals, and
information.
The Grofs identified six patterns that
are followed in any combination during a
spiritual emergence: (1) opening to life
myth, an interaction with the archetypal
realm of the collective unconscious; (2)
shamanic journey; (3) kundalini awakening; (4) emergence of a karmic pattern,
such as in past-life recalls; (5) psychic
opening, the manifestation of extrasensory abilities; and (6) possession by predatory entities.
Spiritual crises happen both intentionally and unintentionally. They may
last seconds, minutes, hours, or weeks.
Curiously, the opening to life myth usually lasts forty days, perhaps as a parallel
to the forty days Jesus spent in the desert.
Spiritual emergence is most likely to occur during times of great physical stress
or crisis, such as childbirth, surgery, sex,
or near-death; during times of emotional
stress and crises; during spiritual practices such as meditation; and during transitional stages of life. Frequently, spiritual
emergence temporarily disrupts a person's ability to carryon a normal life.
Spiritual emergences are common in
natural human development, and need to
be integrated, not suppressed or ignored.
Integration, which can go on over a period of years, leads to spiritual growth
and enhanced creativity, compassion, relaxation, inner peace, and desire to be of
service to others. Failure to integrate
them can lead to a deterioration of
mental health. See Archetypes; Kundalini; Psychology; Near-death experience
(NDE); Past-life recall; Shamanism.
567
Sources: Emma Bragdon. The Call of Spiritual Emergency: From Personal Crisis to
Personal Transformation.
San Francisco:
Harper & Row, 1990; Stanislav and Christina Grof. "Spiritual Emergency: The Understanding and Treatment of Transpersonal Crises." ReVision 8, no. 2 (1986);
Charles T. Tart. 0pen Mind, Discriminating Mind. San Francisco: Harper & Row,
1989; Keith Thompson. "Navigating the
Hero's Journey in Tandem: A Profile of
Stan and Christina Grof." The Common
Boundary 6, issue 6 (NovemberlDecember
1988): 8-11+.
Spiritualism
Religious movement that began in 1848
in the United States and swept both
America and Britain, peaking by the early
twentieth century but still in existence today. Its original appeal lay in the purported evidence it provided of survival after death, manifested through mediums
who communicated with spirits and performed paranormal feats.
Public receptivity to Spiritualism was
made possible by the psychism-based
movements that preceded it, Swedenborgianism and mesmerism, both of which
started in Europe in the late eighteenth
century and were exported to the United
States.
The concepts of eighteenth-century
Swedish philosopher Emanuel Swedenborg, while quite popular in parts of Europe, had a limited following in America.
Bur mesmerism fascinated the masses
with its trances in which "somnambules"
saw visions of the spirit world, became
mediums for spirits of the dead, and exhibited various psychic abilities.
One of the most important figures in
America who paved the way for the transition from mesmerism to Spiritualism
was Andrew Jackson Davis, a student of
Swedenborg who at age seventeen became a successful mesmeric subject in the
psychic diagnosis of illness and in proph-
568
Spiritual
emergence
The success of the Fox sisters inspired others to discover their own mediumistic powers. While many mediums
worked for free, many more discovered
there was money to be made from a public hungry to witness spirit manifestations. In 1852 Spiritualism was exported
to Britain by a Boston medium, Mrs.
Hayden, who astonished the British by
charging money for her seances. By 1855
Spiritualism claimed 2 million followers
and appeared to be a new religion in the
making. Spiritualists claimed that the immortality of the soul would at last be
proved.
The movement, however, began to
suffer. It was condemned by leaders of
organized religion, who attempted to get
laws passed banning Spiritualism. Many
mediums, most of whom were women,
found themselves ostracized by family
and friends. Investigations of mediums,
beginning in the 1850s in Britain and in
the 1880s in the United States, exposed
numerous frauds, although some gifted
mediums remained impressive under the
scrutiny. There was increasing internal
dissension; and the mediumistic phenomena claimed as proof of survival were
never validated by science. By the turn of
the century, Spiritualism was virtually
finished as a widespread cohesive movement.
The Fox sisters themselves fell victim
to their own success. By 1855 both were
alcoholics. Maggie became disillusioned
with Spiritualism and converted to Catholicism. She attempted to leave the act,
but family pressure kept her in until Leah
abandoned her younger sisters in 1857
following her marriage to a wealthy businessman.
Katie continued to perform irregularly, achieving new heights with mirrorwriting, or backward automatic script,
which had to be held up to a mirror to be
read. In 1861 she allegedly manifested the
spirits of the dead in materializations. In
1871 she went to Britain, where re-
Spiritualism
569
570
Modern Spiritualism
Spiritualist churches continue to
have followings in America, Britain,
Brazil, and other countries. Many of the
churches are modeled on Protestant
churches, although there is no organized
priesthood.
Spiritualist phenomena fall into three
main categories: mental mediumship,
spiritual healing, and physical mediumship. Mental mediumship includes trance
work, automatisms, psychometry, and
clairvoyance. (Psychometry generally is
not employed in Britain because it is still
an offense under the Vagrancy Act as
"pretending to tell fortunes.") Spiritual
healing takes two forms: contact healing,
which is a laying on of hands; and absent
Spiritualism
Spiritualism
it investigates and classifies spirit phenomena. From a philosophical standpoint, Spiritualism studies the laws of nature of both the physical and spirit
worlds, and maintains that mediumship
and parapsychology have proved that
mediums
may
obtain
information
through channels besides the five senses.
Spiritualists are divided on reincarnation. Most accept preexistence of the
soul and believe in life after death, but
consider reincarnation a matter of free
will, not a spiritual law. The Spiritists of
Allan Kardec, a branch of Spiritualism
more popular in Latin America, accept
reincarnation as a central doctrine.
The incidence of mediumistic fraud
in Spiritualism has declined greatly with
stricter controls on mediums, and remedial measures taken in the wake of exposes. Most of the fraud in earlier times
involved physical mediumship.
Many Spiritualists attend summer
camps for lectures, classes, psychic readings, consultation of mediums, and mediumistic training. The camps began in
the United States in the nineteenth century, and were based on the popular Chatauqua camps.
Spiritualism enjoys a larger following in Britain than in the United States,
with thousands of churches. The religion
had no legal status prior to 1951, when
the last Witchcraft Act (of 1735) was repealed. Under the Witchcraft Act it was
possible to charge a medium with witchcraft. In the same year, the Fraudulent Mediums Act was passed, which
amended the Vagrancy Act of 1824. The
Vagrancy Act had been used since 1874
to prosecute mediums. Spiritualists argued that mediumship was essential to
their religious worship and practice. Controversy exists over Christian elements in
some Spiritualist churches. See Mediumship; Spiritism.
Sources: Roger 1. Anderson. "Spiritualism
Before the Fox Sisters." Parapsychology
Review 18, no 1 (January/February 1987):
571
Ur-
Spiritualist Association
Great Britain
of
See Spiritualism.
Spiritualists National
Union
See Spiritualism.
572
Spiritualism
him. Chris Bonington, who led the expedition, offered two theories about the
companion: that it may have been the
spirit of a Sherpa who had worked
closely with Estcourt in 1972, and who
was killed in an avalanche in 1973 at a
spot near where Estcourt was climbing;
or that Estcourt may have had a premonitory extrasensory experience related to
the death of a member of the expedition,
which happened soon after Estcourt's expenence.
The ecstatic experiences in sportsthe sense of oneness with the universe,
illumination, ecstasy, and joy-are similar to those experienced in yoga and Eastern philosophies and martial arts disciplines. In sports and in martial arts, such
experiences make possible superior, peak
performances. The attainment of this
state of being requires a stillness of mind,
relaxation, and a letting go that frees the
performer from the anxiety of performing
and winning, and allows him or her to
"be in the moment"; it is "right-brain"
thinking. What often follows is a superior
performance that seems effortless, encased in a timeless envelope of space, in
which the performer allows the mind and
body to do what they have been trained
to do. Many describe this moment as
trancelike or being on automatic pilot.
"Left-brain" thinking-anxiety, analysis, judgment of performance as good or
poor, negative thoughts, fear of mistakes,
excessive verbalization during performance-cause a paralysis that leads to inferior results or defeat.
Cultivating "the zone" has become
increasingly important in sports psychology, especially in the West, which previously lagged in applying Eastern concepts
to training. Athletic training now includes biofeedback, meditation, relaxation, and creative visualization techniques. Athletes who can enter "the
zone" most easily tend to be the best in
their fields. Research with subjects in
problem-solving shows that during in-
573
574
Weiser, 1979; Corinne McLaughlin. "Tuning in to the Best Channel." New Realities
7, no. 6 (July/August 1987): 37-42; Janet
Oppenheim. The Other World: Spiritualism and Psychical
Research
in England,
Starhawk
See Witchcraft.
Sports, mystical
in
In 1879 Steiner went to the Technische Hochschule in Vienna to study mathematics and science, which, as he later acknowledged, gave him a better basis for a
spiritual conception of the world than he
could have obtained from a study of humanities. He also studied the philosophies of Kant, Fichte, and Hegel and the
natural scientific writings of- Goethe. At
age twenty-two he was invited to edit the
definitive edition of Goethe's natural scientific writings.
In 1886 Steiner was hired by the
Specht family to tutor four boys, one of
whom was autistic. His exceptional tutoring enabled the boy to attend high
school, college, and medical school and
become a doctor.
Steiner earned his doctorate at the
University of Rostock in 1891. His thesis,
"Truth and Knowledge" (also entitled
"Truth and Science") on the scientific
teaching of German philosopher Johann
Gottlieb Fichte was followed in 1894 by
his major philosophical work, Die Philosophie der Freiheit (1894), which has
been translated into English as The Philosophy of Spiritual Activity and The Philosophy
of Freedom.
Steiner, Rudolf
(1861-1925)
Rudolf Steiner
the Masters; anyone who did so was
bound to make mistakes.
By this stage in his life, he had accumulated a great deal of experience in
nonphysical realms. Through profound
and concentrated meditation, he learned
to bridge the physical and nonphysical
realms, and to test repeatedly what he experienced in the nonphysical and relate it
to the physical. He believed the Hermetic
axiom that humankind is the microcosm
within the macrocosm of Creation and
we have within us the clues to the secrets
of the universe. These secrets could be revealed by discovering the true nature of
humankind.
Steiner claimed to be able to access
the Akashic Records, from which he
learned the true history of human evolution. He said that at one time humankind
was more spiritual and possessed supersensible capabilities, but lost them in a
descent to the material plane. At the nadir of human descent, Christ arrived and
provided the opportunity to reascend to
higher spiritual levels. For Steiner the life,
575
576
audience willing to follow his own esoteric research. In 1913 he left the Society
and formed the Anthroposophical Society
as a vehicle to continue his work. Steiner
described Anthroposophy as a path for
spiritual growth on four levels of human
nature: the senses, imagination, inspiration, and intuition.
The same year that he formed the
Anthroposophical Society, Steiner designed and established the Goetheanum,
a school for esoteric research, at Dornach
near Basel, Switzerland, where he intended to produce Goethe's dramas and
his own mystery plays. The Goetheanum
opened in 1920 and was burned down in
1922. A new building was designed and
constructed, and now serves as the international headquarters for the General
Anthroposophical Society, which Steiner
reorganized as an international organization with himself as president in 1923.
Steiner died at Dornach on March
30, 1925.
During his last twenty-five years,
Steiner traveled around Europe, Scandinavia, and Great Britain to give more
than six thousand lectures on spiritual
science, the arts, social sciences, religion,
education, agriculture, and health. His
published works include more than 350
titles, most of which are collections of
lectures, as well as books, articles, reviews, and dramas. His key works outlining his occult philosophy are Knowledge of the Higher Worlds and Its
Attainment
(1904-1905);
Theosophy:
An Introduction to the Supersensible
Knowledge of the World and the Destination of Man (1904); and An Outline of
Occult Science (1909). The foundation
for his views on Christ and Christianity
are in more than a dozen lecture cycles on
the Gospels.
One of Steiner's greatest legacies is
the Waldorf School Movement, an approach to the education of children,
which he developed from his spiritualscientific research concerning child devel-
Scientist
of the Invisible.
1954.
Rochester, VT: Inner Traditions International, 1983; Leslie A. Shepard, ed. Encyclopedia of Occultism and Parapsychology.
Stevenson, Ian
See Reincarnation; Xenoglossy.
Stigmata
Stigmata
The spontaneous discharge of blood from
wounds on the body, generally replicating those of Christ on the cross. Stigmatics have been measured bleeding as little
as a half-pint to as much as a pint and a
half a day.
The first recorded stigmatic was
Francis of Assisi (who later became
St. Francis) in September 1224. He reportedly began to bleed from his palms
and feet following an extended fast and
contemplation on the crucifixion of
Christ.
Although the actual number of stigmatics is not known, Dr. A. Imbert
Goubeyre, a French medical professor,
catalogued over 320 cases in a twovolume book, La Stigmatisation, l' ecstase
divine, les miracles de Lourdes, reponse
aux libres penseurs, published in 1894. In
577
Most stigmatics have been deeply religious individuals, often associated with
religious orders where they lived contemplative lives. Similarly, the appearance of
stigmata is generally preceded by lengthy
meditations on the crucifixion of Christ,
frequently following a deep personal crisis or grave illness. And, in just about every case, the stigmatic had been deeply
focused on a favorite religious item, such
as a crucifix or statue of Christ on the
cross, prior to the onset of spomaneous
bleeding.
Ian \:S;7ilson,a British researcher who
conducted one of the most comprehensive studies of stigmatics, The Bleeding
Mind (1988), has argued that the bleeding is self-induced by individuals undergoing some form of personal stress. Seeking shelter from their personal suffering,
these stigma tics turn to prayer and contemplation.
He also drew parallels between the stigmatic and individuals who
develop multiple personalities:
What is evident is that stigmata and
multiple personality seem to be so closely
linked that they could be two different
aspects of the same phenomenon.
Both
seem to be stress induced, seemingly as a
response to a metabolism tortured to the
end of its tether. In both we find the individual caught up in a flight from reality, providing some sort of release or escape from the constraints on the everyday
self, and on the other into an established
fantasy world of religious figures and a
personal dramatization
of the events surrounding the death of Jesus.
Wilson also suggested that the mind,
in addition to bringing on the stigmata,
can manifest the nail-like formations on a
person's flesh. In hypnosis experiments
have shown that the body has the ability
to make wans and other skin disfiguremems disappear.
Other experiments
have shown the
reverse effect of spomaneous
bleeding.
Under self-hypnosis
hemophiliacs
have
578
from bleed-
Stonehenge
One of the most famous ancient megalithic sites in the world, located on the
chalk plain of Salisbury in Wiltshire, England. The remains include a henge and a
horseshoe arrangement of standing sandstones and bluestones
weighing up to
twenty-six tons apiece. Some of the sarsens are topped by limels, thus suggesting
to the Saxons the name "Stonehenge,"
which means "Hanging Stones."
The original purpose of the site is
unknown. It has no associations with the
Druids, despite the antiquarian
theories
of John Aubrey and William Stukeley.
Aubrey also believed the site to be a repository of psychic power, a belief which
remains popular to the presem.
Stonehenge served astronomical purposes and likely had religious, social, and
political functions as well. Fifty-six burial
pits, named "Aubrey Holes" after their
discoverer, contain the remains of cremated human bones, flint and pottery
chips, and animal bones. It has been suggested that these holes were associated
\vith entry points to the Underworld.
Stonehenge was built in three major
phases from about 3500 B.C. to 1100 B.C.
by different peoples. Over the course of
construction,
ponions
were left unfinished, were dismantled, and were rebuilt.
The arrangemem
essentially assumed its
present shape by about 2000 B.C.
The construction
of the trilithons,
the lintel-topped sarsens, represents a stupendous engineering
feat for primitive
Stigmata
Stonehenge
times. According to one legend, a double
circle of giant bluestones was erected
with magical help from Merlin, the Celtic
wizard of the Arthurian court. Merlin
supposedly transported the stones, which
were magical healing stones, from Ireland, where they had been delivered by
giants. The stones were for a monument
to the slain soldiers of Aurelius Ambrosius, who had fought off a Saxon invasion. See Merlin. The bluestones, which
are believed to come from the Preseli
mountains in South Wales, probably
were transported over land and sea by a
slow process that took up to one hundred
years to complete.
In the eighteenth century, Stukeley
observed astronomical alignments between four burial stones, the so-called
Heel Stone (named by Aubrey because it
bears a mark shaped like a heel imprint),
and the sun and moon. Sir Norman Lockyear, a British astronomer at the turn of
the twentieth century, determined that
Stonehenge was constructed to point to
the summer solstice. He also theorized
that observations of the stars were made
Stonehenge
579
580
Sufism
A branch of Islam that teaches personal,
mystical worship and union with Allah,
or God. Sufism arose in opposition to the
formal, legalistic theology of the early
Moslems in the ninth century A.D. It derives its doctrines and methods from the
Koran and Islamic revelation.
Stonehenge
Sufism
581
582
Sufism
law at age thirty-three, Ghazzali despaired of finding God in dry study and
abandoned his career, wife, and family to
seek the truth of his religion. He wandered as a mendicant dervish for twelve
years, learning that human beings must
rid themselves of evil thoughts, clear their
minds, and commune with God through
the dhikr. In his books The Revival of the
Religious Sciences and The Niche of the
Lights, Ghazzali managed to explain the
theology of Islam in connection with humankind's mystical relation to God,
bridging the gap between Sufi heresies
and Islamic orthodoxy.
Another great medieval Sufi writer
was Mohieddin ibn-Arabi (1165-1240),
a Spanish Moslem and mystic. Ibn-Arabi
described the Prophet Muhammad as the
manifestation of the Perfect Man, the
man God created to exemplify the divinity of God in man. He also wrote of Muhammad's ascent to Paradise, telling of
the Prophet's journey through the infernal regions and purgatory, and his travels
through the heavens accompanied by a
beautiful guide and serenaded by angelic
choirs. Such stories had a powerful influence on Dante Alighieri's The Divine
Comedy.
Other medieval Christian writers
and thinkers influenced by Sufism included Friar Roger Bacon, Cervantes,
Averroes, St. Francis of Assisi, Avicebron,
and Chaucer. The Kn.ights Templar also
took inspiration from the Sufis, sharing
esoteric knowledge of alchemy, masonry,
and the Jewish Kabbalah. The name of
Hugues de Payns, founder of the Knights
Templar in 1118, means "ofthe pagans."
His father was known as "the Moor,"
originating from southern Spain. See Order of the Knights Templar.
Sufis claim that Freemasonry actually began in the medieval period with the
teachings of Spanish Sufi Ibn Masarra
(883-931). Idries Shah sees Masonry as a
metaphor for rebuilding, or reedification,
of the spiritual human being, and says
Sufism
that the three tools in the Masonic emblem symbolize the three Sufi postures of
prayer. He also notes that Freemasons
honor Boaz and Solomon, the latter the
son of David, as the builders of King Solomon's Temple in Jerusalem, and explains that these two men were actually
Sufi architects who built the Temple of
the Dome of the Rock on the ruins of
King Solomon's temple. The architectural
measurements for the temple were allegedly numerical equivalents of Arabic root
words that conveyed holy messages, each
part relating to every other part in definite proportion. See Freemasonry.
Modern Sufism reached its peak under the Mogul and Ottoman empires, in
the 1500s to 1800s. Sufis swelled the
ranks of Moslem armies during Islamic
expansion in the Middle and Far East
during the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, infiltrating local trade unions and
marrying royal princesses. Sufis fought
fiercely against European expansion on
Islamic soil, becoming mujahidin ("holy
warriors") in the jihad ("holy war").
By the twentieth century, however,
Sufism had lost much of its influence.
Members of the Wahhabi sect, a large puritan revivalist movement in Islam,
scorned the Sufis for their mystical excesses and worship of sheikhs and other
holy men. Many of today's Muslims continue to practice Sufism, but their brotherhoods are usually secret societies keeping mainly to themselves. Sufism still
attracts a wide following in India, and
has large groups of devotees in England
and the United States. See Muhammad;
Mysticism.
Sources: Keith Crim, gen. ed. Abingdon
Dictionary of Living Religions. Nashville,
TN: Abingdon Press, 1981; Jacques De
Marquette. Introduction to Comparative
Mysticism. New York: Philosophical Library, 1949; Gaetan Delaforge. "The Templar Tradition Yesterday and Today."
Gnosis no. 6 (Winter 1988): 8-13; Emile
Dermenghem. "Yoga and Sufism: Ecstasy
583
584
Sufism
Sun Dance
Sun Bear
the Bear Tribe Medicine Society." Shaman's Drum no. 3 (Winter 1985): 20-22;
Robert Neubert. "Sun Bear: Walking in
Balance on the Earth Mother." New Realities 7, no. 5 (May/June 1987): 7-14; Sun
Bear. "Native Prophecies: Earth Changes
Essential for Cleansing." Venture Inward
4, no. 3 (May/June 1988): 12-17+; Sun
Bear. Sun Bear: The Path of Power. Spokane, WA: The Bear Tribe, 1984.
Sun Dance
Ceremony of Plains Native Americans for
health, fertility, and plentiful food. The
Sun Dance, one of the most sacred of Native American rites, was at one time outlawed by the US federal government because its elements of self-sacrifice were
misunderstood and considered barbaric.
Traditionally, the dance is performed
annually during the summer, at a time
when the moon is full, by tribes in the
North American Plains and prairie west
585
586
Sun Dance
Super-ESP
A hypothesis that negates survival after
death by attempting to explain how apparitions of the dead and communications from the dead are the result of ex-
Super-ESP
587
588
Super-ESP
Sutphen,
Richard
(b. 1937)
Richard
Sutphen
a Rewere
14-18.
589
Suzuki, D. T.
See Zen.
Swaffer, Hannen
See Spiritualism.
Sweat
A rite of purification of the body and
spirit in the ceremonies of many Native
Americans. Sweats take place in a small,
circular lodge or tipi in which a central
pit has been dug in the earth. Rocks are
heated on an outside fire and brought inside to be placed in the pit. Water is
thrown on the rocks to create steam,
which becomes scented with herbs, such
as sagebrush, carried in by the participants. The herbs also serve to protect the
face against the intense heat.
There are different kinds of sweats
with varying intensities of heat. Baby
sweats, the equivalent of a christening,
are the mildest, while healing sweats are
the hottest. Sweats are undertaken before
all sacred ceremonies, rites of passage,
and vision quests. In most sweats prayers
and petitions are made on behalf of others. There is chanting and self-blessing,
in which participants pat themselves.
Thanksgiving sweats give thanks to the
spirits for the blessings received.
The sweat ceremony is efficiently organized and conducted by a leader. No
one may enter or leave the lodge, or drink
water, without his permission. Other individuals have specific responsibilities,
such as tending the fire and heating the
rocks, or singing the chants.
Sweats are conducted in rounds. At
the end of a round, the flaps to the lodge
are opened and water is brought in for
those who desire a drink. More hot rocks
are brought in for another round. At the
end of the sweat rounds, there is a round
of smoking a sacred pipe.
590
Swedenborg, Emanuel
(1688-1772)
Swedish scientist and scholar who turned
mystic and medium in his later years,
communing with spirits to develop a
highly detailed description of the structure of the afterlife and universal laws.
Swedenborg's views were far ahead of his
time, and many of his contemporaries
dismissed him as mad. But his works endured, creating a profound impact on
Western spiritual beliefs outside the context of religion, the effects of which have
lasted to the present. Swedenborg was a
major influence upon the secret societies
of his time, and on the development of
Spiritualism in the nineteenth century.
Today's New Age spiritual concepts and
philosophies borrow heavily from his
work.
For nearly two-thirds of his life, Swedenborg led a creative but unremarkable
existence. He was born the second son of
the Lutheran bishop of Skara, and exhibited an early talent for science and mathematics. From age eleven to twenty-one,
he studied at the University of Uppsala,
learning Greek, Latin, several European
and Oriental languages, geology, metallurgy, astronomy, anatomy, mathematics,
Suzuki,
D. T.
591
592
Symbol
Usually, an object or visual image that
expresses a concept or idea beyond the
object or image itself. Author J. E. Cirlot
Symbol
593
594
Symbol
Synchronicity
Synchronicity
The unifying principle behind "meaningful coincidences." Psychiatrist Carl G.
Jung termed synchronicity "an acausal
connecting principle" that links seemingly unrelated and unconnected events.
The concept is integral to Eastern
thought, but in Western thought runs
contrary to cause and effect. In the West
"coincidences" are popularly discounted
as chance happenings.
The concept of synchronicity was developed largely by Jung, who credited Albert Einstein as his inspiration. Einstein
and Jung met on several occasions during
Einstein's professorships in Zurich, Switzerland, in 1909 to 1910 and 1912 to
1913. At that time Einstein was developing his theory of relativity; Jung was inspired to consider a possible relativity of
time as well as space.
Later, in the mid-1920s, as Jung was
probing the phenomena of the collective
unconscious, he encountered numerous
synchronicities he could not explain.
They were, he said, '''coincidences' which
were connected so meaningfully that their
'chance' concurrence would represent a
degree of improbability that would have
to be expressed by an astronomical figure" (Synchronicity, 1952). As an example he cited incidents that happened to
the wife of a patient: Upon the deaths of
her mother and grandmother, birds gathered outside the windows of the deathchamber. Jung noted the connection of
birds to the soul or to messengers of the
gods in various mythologies.
In 1930 Jung first used the term
"synchronicity," in his memorial address
for Richard Wilhelm, who translated the
I Ching into German. (Jung was fascinated by the patterns found in divination
systems such as the I Ching, astrology,
numerology, and the like.) Years later
Jung equated synchronicity with Tao.
In further developing the concept,
Jung was greatly aided and influenced by
595
596
Synchronicity
universal harmonies and complementariness, even where none was once thought
possible. The resulting openness to alternative worldviews could lay a philosophical foundation, if not also a theological
framework, for new political, cultural,
and even ecumenical unities. See Jung,
Carl Gustav.
Sources: David Bohm and F. David Peat.
Science, Order and Creativity. New York:
Synchronicity
London: Routledge
597
T
T'ai Chi Ch'uan
See Tai Ji Chuan.
598
Talisman
Talisman
An object, drawing, or symbol believed to
be endowed with supernatural or magical
power, which then confers its power
upon its possessor. In occult lore talismans also attract good luck, success, fortune, health, fecundity, virility, love, and
power. The use of talismans has been universal throughout history.
Talismans are active objects-they
are transformers and lightning rods. Talismans often are confused with amulets,
which protect and ward off, and are passive. An example of a talisman is the
magic hat, which renders the wearer invisible, or transports the wearer wherever
he or she wishes in the blink of an eye.
Magic swords, such as King Arthur's Excalibur and Siegfried's Nothung, are talismans, as are magic wands and magic
599
Row, 1979.
Taoism
System of mysticism and philosophy, and
the only indigenous religion of China,
based on the Tao Teh Ching, a slim work
attributed to the legendary mystic, Lao
600
Talisman
Taoism
This key principle of Taoism is expressed in its symbol, the Tai Ji Tu ("Diagram of the Supreme Ultimate"): two
fishlike figures, one black and one white,
contained in a circle. The white figure
represents yang and the black figure represents yin. Within each figure is a dot of
the opposite color, the lesser yang and
lesser yin, demonstrating that each opposing force contains its opposite. The
figures are separate yet originate from
each other and flow into each other in a
perpetual cycle. The Tai Ji Tu shows that
these fundamental forces are in continual
opposition and interaction, which nourishes all things. The Tai Ji Tu also represents the human being, who is comprised
of light and dark.
According to legend, the symbol
originated in prehistoric times, though
there is no evidence to support that contention. The earliest written description
of yin and yang is found in the divinatory
book the I Ching, which tells of the Great
Primal Beginning generating two primary
forces, which in turn generate four images, which in turn generate the eight trigrams upon which the I Ching is based.
See I Ching.
Diagrams to express the concept appeared by the Sung Dynasty. An important work was the Tai Ji Tu Shuo ("The
Diagram of the Supreme Ultimate Explained") of the neo-Confucian philosopher Chou Tun-i (1017-1073), who said
the diagram symbolized the production
and evolution of all things.
Teh, the virtue or power of Tao, is
expressed in wu wei, which is nonaction
in terms of noninterference. Nature is
spontaneous and effortless, and Wu-Wei
constitutes going with the flow. Thus in
Taoism one avoids aggression and challenges, and instead seeks passivity.
Toughness and aggression may be overcome with softness, gentleness, meekness
and humility: yang is countered and balanced with yin.
601
602
Tarot
A type of card deck used for divination,
self-help, spiritual growth, and the cultivation of intuition and psychic ability.
The term "Tarot" is a French derivative
of the Italian tarocchi, meaning "triumphs" or "trumps."
The Tarot deck consists of seventyeight cards divided into two parts, the
twenty-two-card
Major
Arcana,
or
Trumps, and the fifty-six-card Minor Arcana, which has four suits of ten cards
each and resembles today's deck of playing cards. The four suits traditionally are
wands (which correspond to clubs in
playing cards), swords (spades), cups
(hearts), and pentacles (diamonds). Each
suit has one additional court card not
contained in playing cards, the page.
The original purpose and the development of the Tarot are unknown. Numerous theories, many of them fanciful,
have been advanced. The earliest surviving records of cards of any type date to
the early fourteenth century. Cards that
may have been Tarot were created in
1392 for King Charles VI of France by a
painter, Jacquemin Gringonneur. The
earliest known Tarot cards date to the
early fifteenth century in Milan and were
designed for the Visconti and ViscontiSforza families. These early decks were of
only the Major Arcana, whose unnumbered images, possibly allegories, represented death, fortune, wisdom, virtues,
sciences and arts, and so on. At some
Taoism
~
";;
~
-;
~
Tarot
603
Tart, Charles T.
See Altered states of consciousness.
(1881-1955)
Theologian, philosopher, and paleontologist, whose religiously oriented concepts
of cosmic evolution are influential in
New Age thought. His key concept is that
the universe has its own evolutionary history, and that an increasingly complex
consciousness is an integral part of the
evolution.
604
Tarot
I
1.
[
I
ber 1951. In 1954 he sought but was denied permission to return to France permanently. He suffered a stroke and died
on April 10, 1955.
Among his other major works are
The Divine Milieu (1957); The Future of
Man (1959); Human Energy (1962); The
Activation of Energy (1963); Hymn of
the Universe (1964); and Christianity and
Evolution (1969).
The church's opposition to his writings continued posthumously, and in
1962 the church issued a monitum (warning) against the uncritical acceptance of
his views. Teilhard also has been challenged by scientists and philosophers.
As a young man Teilhard was profoundly influenced by Henri Bergson's
Creative Evolution, which argued against
dualism in favor of an evolving universe.
Teilhard was first to perceive of a cosmic
evolution in four phases: galactic, Earth,
life, and human. Central to his concept of
evolution is the integration of the psychic
with the physical. Evolution implies the
law of complexification, which means
that as physical matter becomes more
complex, so does consciousness, which is
intrinsic to all life forms. Thus the human
race has arisen from, and is connected to,
all other life forms on Earth, both physically and psychically. In its human form,
evolution becomes conscious of itself.
The convergence of various human
groups progressively will shape the ultrahuman, a process now underway. The
ultimate goal is a convergence toward
Christ, the "Omega point" at which human consciousness finds the ultimate integrity and unity.
Teilhard used such phrases as "cosmogenesis," for the development of a
world with humankind at its center;
"noosphere," a collective human consciousness within the biosphere of the
Earth; "noogenesis," for the growth of
the human mind; "hominization" and
"ultra-hominization,"
for the future
stages of humankind's transcendent hu-
manization. According to Teilhard the increasing numbers of humans, and the improving communications, are fusing all
parts of the noosphere together. As a result humankind will achieve more integrated and intense mental activity. This
will facilitate the upward climb to higher
stages of hominization. However, Teilhard said, the evolutionary process requires more intense psychic energy than
that exerted during most of the twentieth
century.
One of Teilhard's greatest contributions was his emphasis on the cosmic
Christ, a shift from the dominant redemption orientation of Christianity to a
creation orientation. He identified the
cosmic Christ as a dimension of the
evolving universe. He termed humankind's psychic identity with all forms of
life the "cosmic sense," with which human beings see their function in the evolutionary scheme. As a conscious cocreator, people can direct renewed energy to
the developmental process.
Teilhard also saw science as an essentially mystical discipline, and perceived the need for science and religion to
reconverge.
Despite his great vision, Teilhard did
not see beyond the prevailing thought of
his day that human exploitation of the
planet was essentially a good thing.
Rather, he saw the subordination of the
Earth to humankind as the fulfillment of
the Earth's true meaning, and necessary
to the glorious fulfillment of human evolution to ultrahuman. Teilhard showed
a certain disdain for those individuals
who advocated living in harmony with
the Earth. In Teilhard's view the advances
of technology, and the growth of the industrial state, provided good energy to be
harnessed. He was confident that the industrial sources would find solutions to
whatever problems arose with the Earth's
shrinking resources.
Nonetheless, Teilhard's thought can
be applied to modern ecological con-
605
cerns. If humankind
is psychically connected to all other life forms and has the
power to become a cocreator in the evolutionary process and direct further upward development,
then it behooves the
human race to cease the wanton exploitation of the Earth, its resources, and
other life forms-the
very basis of humankind's
present evolutionary
status.
To destroy these things is to destroy an
intrinsic part of ourselves, and perhaps
prevent the attainment
of the Omega
point. Teilhard did perceive modern humanity to be at a biological turning point,
"where it must either lose all belief in the
universe or quite resolutely worship it."
See Creation spirituality; Planetary conSClousness.
Sources: Thomas Berry. Teilhard in the Ecological Age. Monograph, Teilhard Studies
No.7. Chambersburg, PA: ANIMA Books,
1982; Donald P. Gray. The One and the
Many: Teilhard de Chardin's Vision of
Unity. New York: Herder & Herder, 1969;
John and Mary Evelyn Grim. Teilhard de
Chardin: A Short Biography. Monograph,
Teilhard Studies No. 11. Chambersburg,
PA: ANIMA Books, 1984; Teilhard de
Chardin. The Divine Milieu. 1957. Rev. ed.
New York: Harper & Row, 1968; Teilhard
de Chardin. The Future of Man. 1959.
New York: Harper & Row, 1969; Teilhard
de Chardin. The Phenomenon
of Man.
1955. New York: Harper & Row, 1965.
Te Kwon Do
A combination
of telepathy and hypnotism, in which a person may be induced
into a hypnotic trance by the projection
606
Teilhard
See Martial
arts.
Telekinesis
See T eleportation.
de Chardin,
Pierre (1881-1955)
,
f
I
I
l
~
l
t
Telepathy
The
mind-to-mind
communication
of
Telepathy
607
608
Theories of Telepathy
Although various theories have been
advanced over the centuries to explain
how telepathy works, none is adequate.
Telepathy, like other psychic phenomena,
transcends time and space. The ancient
Greek philosopher Democritus advanced
wave and corpuscle theories. William
Crookes, a nineteenth-century British
chemist and physicist, believed telepathy
rides on radio-like brain waves. Much
later, in the twentieth century, Russian
scientist L. L. Vasiliev proposed an electromagnetic theory. American psychologist Lawrence LeShan proposes that every
person has his or her own reality, and
that psychics and mystics share different
realities, which enable them to access information not available to others. See Ap-
Telepathy
I
I
I
,
Teleportation
(also telekinesis)
1982.
Teleportation
(also telekinesis)
609
610
Teleportation
(also telekinesis)
Theosophy
of Mysticism
and the
Thanatology
See Deathbed visions.
Theosophy
A philosophical system that teaches that
one can gain knowledge of a transcendent
reality through revelation or through
practice of the occult tradition. The term
"theosophy" comes from the Greek
words theos, "god," and sophia, "wisdom." As practiced in modern times,
Theosophy claims that all religions stem
from the same roots of ancient wisdom,
611
612
Cycles of Evolution
In The Secret Doctrine, HPB conceived of a great cosmic evolutionary
plan in which divine potential is unfolded
through an orderly progression, moving
down from Spirit to matter and back up
again. While science sees evolution as the
product of external forces and factors,
Theosophy views it as the urge to release
the potential of consciousness, which becomes more and more defined. Humankind is "the masterpiece of evolution,"
and all nature tends toward evolving the
human potential.
HPB's evolutionary scheme divides
stages into Chains, Rounds, and Races,
each of which has its own complete cycle.
Reincarnation, governed by karma, is a
tenet of Theosophy. See Karma; Reincarnation.
Theosophy
Theosophy
613
614
Theosophical Publishing House, 1986; Michael Gomes. The Dawning of the Theosophical Movement.
Wheaton, IL: The
Theosophical Publishing House, 1987;
Marion Meade. Madame Blavatsky: The
Woman Behind the Myth. New York: G. P.
Putnam's Sons, 1980; J. Gordon Melton.
Encyclopedic Handbook of Cults in America. New York and London: Garland Publishing Inc., 1986; Leslie Price. Madame
Blavatsky Unveiled? London: Theosophical
Theosophy
Therapeutic Touch
See Bodywork.
Third eye
See Chakras.
615
Thought-form
In occultism a nonphysical entity created
by thought that exists in either the mental
plane or astral plane. Every thought is
said to generate vibrations in the aura's
mental body, which assume a floating
form and colors depending on the nature
and intensity
of the thought.
These
thought-forms
can be perceived visually
by clairvoyants; they may also be sensed
on an intuitive level by others. Thoughtforms radiate out and attract sympathetic
essences.
According to Theosophists and clairvoyants Annie Besant and C. W. Leadbeater,
thought-forms
fall into three
classes: (1) the image of the thinker (see
Bilocation);
(2) an image of a material
object associated with the thought; and
(3) an independent image expressing the
inherent qualities of a thought. Thoughts
that are low in nature, such as anger,
hate, lust, greed, and so on, create
thought-forms
that are dense in color and
form. Thoughts of a more spiritual nature
generate forms that have greater purity,
clarity, and refinement.
Thought-forms
can be directed at individuals. To have an effect, they must be
able to latch on to similar vibrations in
the aura of the recipient. If they are unable to do so, according to occult tradition, the thought-forms
boomerang back
to the sender. Thus one who directs evil
thoughts toward another
having them return.
616
Thomas
it Kempis
(1380-1471)
Thoughtography
A type of paranormal photography in
which images are projected psychically
onto photographic film, with or without
the aid of a camera. The term "thoughtography" was coined by Tomokichi
Fukarai, president of the Psychical Institute of Japan, who conducted the first serious study of it during the early 1900s.
Previous research had focused on spirit
photography, images of dead people and
phantom objects captured on film.
Fukarai stumbled onto the phenomenon while conducting a series of experiments with a Japanese medium, Mrs.
Nagao. To test her clairvoyance, Fukarai
wanted to see if she could discern three
Japanese characters that he had photographed on an undeveloped film plate.
Although it had been wrapped in paper
to seal out any light, Fukarai discovered
that the entire surface of the plate had
been exposed, not just the area containing the Japanese characters. Fukarai hypothesized that the exposure was caused
or influenced by the psychic activity of
Nagao. In follow-up experiments with
Nagao and other mediums, Fukarai obtained actual images on film, or "thoughtographs."
In recent years research into thoughtography was done under the direction of
such leading parapsychologists as psychiatrist Ian Stevenson of the University of
Virginia and Denver psychiatrist Jule
Eisenbud, who attracted national attention in the 1960s for their work with psychic Ted Serios, who created images on
film by staring into the lens of a Polaroid
camera.
Serios was a native of Kansas City,
Missouri, with a penchant for drama and
liquor. He realized his psychic ability in
1955, when working as a bellhop in a
Chicago hotel. A fellow employee discovered Serios was a good hypnotic subject
and possessed remote viewing ability.
During one hypnotic trance, Serios said
I
I
Thoughtography
617
618
Thoughtography
Tobacco
Plant sacred to Natives of the Americas.
Tobacco is believed to be endowed with
supernatural powers to heal, hurt, bring
luck, cause ill fortune, and promote affection between husband and wife. It is
smoked, snuffed, eaten, mixed in drinks
and fermented concoctions, and burned
as incense for rituals of harvest, war, puberty, death, initiation, purification, visions, communication with the spirits and
gods, and as part of pledges and oaths.
Tobacco, along with pipes, is buried with
the dead. According to tradition it should
be used only for sacred purposes, never
for recreation.
The term "tobacco" is a Spanish
adaptation from the Arawak term for
"cigar." Columbus discovered tobacco
among the Arawaks of the West Indies.
From archaeological data tobacco was
used extensively in Precontact times and
Tobacco
619
mune with ancestors and spirits and produce visions. See Drugs in mystical and
psychic experiences; Shamanism.
Sources: Ake Hultkrantz. The Religions of
the American Indians. 1967. Berkeley: Uni-
On File, 1985; The Museum of the American Indian, New York City; the American
Indian Archaeological Institute, Washington, CT.
Totem
History
Trance
See Altered states of consciousness; Mediumship; Shamanism.
Transcendental
conSCIOusness
Transcendental
Meditation
(TM)
A system of meditation taught by the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi (b. 1918?) in which,
through use of a personal mantra, one
achieves a fourth state of consciousness:
transcendental consciousness. Transcendental Meditation, or TM, as it is called,
gained a wide following in the West in
the 19605 and 1970s. It does not require
620
Tobacco
Technique
TM is different from other meditation techniques in that it involves neither
concentration nor contemplation. According to Maharishi TM can be taught
only through personal instruction from a
qualified teacher. The student is given a
personal mantra and is instructed in how
to use it while meditating twice a day for
about twenty minutes or so. The mantra
has no meaning or associations and, contrary to other Eastern techniques, is not
chanted either verbally or mentally;
621
Effects
622
Differences
TM differs from Eastern teachings
that are considered traditional. There is
no espousal of renunciation or withdrawal from the daily world in order to
achieve enlightenment. Rather, Maharishi
acknowledges the importance of well-
T ranspersonal psychology
See Psychology.
Tree of Life
See Kabbalah; Magic.
Trungpa,
Chogyam
(1939-1987)
623
624
Tulku
See Lama.
Trungpa,
Chogyam
(1939-1987)
Tulpa
Twitchell, Paul
See Thought-form.
See ECKANKAR.
Tutelary spirit
Tyrrell, G. N. M.
See Apparition.
Tyrrell, G. N. M.
625
u
See Alternative religious movements.
Universal consciousness
Prana
UFOs (unidentified
flying objects)
See Ancient astronauts, theory of; Encounter phenomenon; Extraterrestrial encounters; Men in Black.
Ullman, Montague
See Dreams.
Unification Church
626
Qi
The Chinese term Qi literally means
"breath," "gas," or "ether"; it has never
been clearly defined. Qi was developed
as a metaphysical principle, as the source
of vitality, harmony, creativity, and
moral courage, by various philosophers,
including Lao-tzu (e. 604 B.c.-531 B.C.),
the legendary author of the Tao Teh
Ching, Confucius (c. 551 B.c.-479 B.C.?),
Mencius (fourth century B.C.), Huainantzu, and Kuan-tzu. Lao-tzu conceived of
it as a dualistic principle, which evolved
into the concept of yin and yang-yang
being light, the sun, and the active/dry/
masculine principle and yin being dark,
the Earth, and the passive/wet/feminine
principle. From this dualistic concept
arose the Five Elements theory of Chinese
medicine, and the basis for the I Ching.
Yin and yang are seen as in constant
ebb and flow, and must be in balance for
optimum health. Yang energy enters the
body by flowing downward from the
heavens, while the yin flows upward from
the earth. They converge at a point in the
lower belly called the hara, which is located about two inches below the navel
and is deep within the body. The hara is
likened to a stove or furnace where the
627
Ki
Ki is the Japanese term for qi. The
metaphysical principle of Chinese qi
was introduced into Japan in the Nara
period (710-794) and Heian period
628
(794-1185). The concept of ki was absorbed into Shinto beliefs about nature,
and many compound words were formed
relating nature to spirit.
Concepts of ki began to undergo
dramatic change with the rise of the samurai class, beginning in the late Heian period and peaking in the mid-nineteenth
century. Ki became part of the warrior's
discipline of courage, willpower, vigor,
conserving energy, and even prolonging
breathing as a matter of life and death. Ki
was seen as twofold in nature: the unifying principle between the individual and
the universe, and the expression of
breath-power. Victory depended on ki.
These principles of the samurai have carried over into modern-day martial arts.
Mana
"Mana" is a term used in the Huna
of Hawaii. Mana has three primary
forms, each of which functions in one of
the three selves which comprise every person. Mana, the basic life force, operates
in the Low Self (Unihipili), the subconscious. It has the power to build and
maintain forms, including the physical
body. Mana-mana operates in the Middle
Self (uhane), the conscious. It is creative
willpower and manifests thought and
emotion. Mana-loa operates in the High
Self (Aumakua), the superconscious. It is
a high-voltage energy that can be harnessed for instantaneous healing and miracles. It contains the power of compasSIOn.
Od
Baron Karl von Reichenbach (17881869), a German chemist, metallurgist,
and expert on meteorites, used the term
"ad" (also "Odic Force," "Odyle") to
describe a subtle substance that he said
emanates from all things in the universe,
including the stars and planets; it streams
from crystals. Reichenbach said ad can
be observed by clairvoyants as luminous
radiations similar to an aurora borealis
and can be sensed as hot or cold. He also
believed it is affected by the breath and
fluctuates during the day and night, and
before and after meals.
Goethe anticipated his observations
of the luminosities of plants by about
twenty-five years, but Reichenbach was
the first to make a scientific case for the
universal life force by conducting hundreds of experiments with sensitives (but
who were not Spiritualist mediums).
In 1845 Reichenbach published his
findings in the first part of his Researches
on Magnetism, Electricity, Heat and
Light in their relations to Vital Forces. At
the time mesmerism was declining in popularity, and his work was viewed as an
attempt to revive it. He was rejected by
the scientific establishment, but endorsed
by mesmerists, magnetic healers, and
Spiritualists. See Mesmer, Franz Anton.
Reichenbach was a supporter of mesmerism, though he thought the term "animal
magnetism" was inappropriate.
The complete edition of Researches
appeared in 1850. The term "Odyle" was
created by a translator who thought it
sounded more scientific than "ad."
One of the first tasks of the Society
for Psychical Research (SPR) upon its formation in London in 1882 was to study
"Reichenbach Phenomena." The SPR's
study validated many of Reichenbach's
claims. See Society for Psychical Research
(SPR). Nevertheless, Reichenbach was
shunned by the scientific establishment.
He spent his last years in retirement and
Orgone
The term "orgone" was coined by
Wilhelm Reich (1897-1957), a native of
Austria, a student of psychiatrist Sigmund Freud, and a psychoanalyst. In developing the work of Freud between 1936
and 1940, Reich hypothesized on the existence of orgone, a vital force or primordial cosmic energy, as the basis of sex and
psychosomatic neuroses. He agreed with
Reichenbach that it: permeated all things
and existed as a biological energy; was
blue in color; and could be demonstrated
visually, thermically, and electroscopically in the atmosphere with a Geiger
counter. Reich published his theory in
1942 in The Discovery of the Orgone:
The Function of the Orgasm; SexEconomic Problems of Biological Energy
and in 1948 in The Cancer Biopathy.
Reich practiced in the United States
and found himself in legal trouble when
he developed a device called the "orgone
accumulator," a metallic box covered
with organic material, which was supposed to concentrate orgone for therapeutic uses. He used the device on cancer
patients and reported positive results.
The Food and Drug Administration
tested the device and deemed it worthless.
Reich was enjoined from manufacturing,
distributing, and using the device, and
from using the term "orgone" in his writings. When he refused he was fined and
sent to jail, where he died. The orgone
accumulators were destroyed and his
books were burned.
Bioenergy
Bioenergy is an Eastern European
concept of the universal life force, which
is seen to tie all things together, and
which may be controlled and directed by
629
at a distance.
Sources: W. Y. Evans-Wentz, ed. The Tibetan Book of the Great Liberation. London: Oxford University Press, 1954; Milton Friedman. "From Poland with Prana."
New Realities 7, no. 6: 10-15; Richard
Gerber. Vibrational Medicine. Santa Fe,
NM: Bear & Co., 1988; Henry Gris and
William Dick. The New Soviet Psychic Discoveries. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall, 1978; Enid Hoffman. Huna: A Beginner's
Guide.
Rockport,
MA: Para
Research,
1976; Dolores Krieger. The
Therapeutic Touch. New York: PrenticeHall Press, 1979; C. W. Leadbeater. The
Chakras. Wheaton, IL: Theosophical Publishing House, 1927; Solange Lemaitre. Ramakrishna and the Vitality of Hinduism.
Woodstock,
NY: The Overlook
Press,
1984; Da Liu. T'ai Chi Ch'uan and Meditation. New York: Schocken Books, 1986;
Ormond McGill. The Mysticism and Magic
of India. Cranbury, NJ: A. S. Barnes &
630
Co., 1977; Edgar D. Mitchell. Psychic Exploration: A Challenge for Science. Edited
by John White. New York: Paragon Books,
1974; Ajit Mookerjee and Madhu Khanna.
The Tantric Way: Art, Science, Ritual. Boston: New York Graphic Society, 1977;
Sheila Ostrander and Lynn Schroeder. Psychic Discoveries Behind the Iron Curtain.
Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1970;
Ikuko Osumi and Malcolm Ritchie. The
Shamanic Healer: The Healing World of
Ikuko Osumi and the Traditional Art of
Seiki-Jutsu. London: Century, 1987; Karl
von Reichenbach. The Odic Force: Letters
on Od and Magnetism. 1926. Secaucus,
NJ: University Books, 1968; Kisshomaru
Ueshiba. The Spirit of Aikido. Tokyo:
Kodansha
International,
1984; Vivian
Worthington. A History of Yoga. London:
Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1982.
Upanishads
See Hinduism;
Yoga.
Universal
life force
phy, and religion in a holistic cosmological structure. It seeks to address all religions, but a major section of it is
essentially an expansion on the story of
Christianity, as seen from a different, cosmic perspective. It contradicts some parts
of the Bible, which it says have been distorted, and also presents new information. The book is written in the sexist language of the 1930s and sees the cosmos
organized and administered by the male
principle: God the Father, Paradise Sons,
Planetary Princes, and so on. In content,
however, it emphasizes the equality of the
sexes. The local universe, Nebadon, is
ruled by both Christ Michael and the
Universe Mother Spirit celebrated by a
"Proclamation of Equality."
Urantia, or Earth, is one of 10 million inhabitable planets (when completed) in the local universe of Nebadon,
which, along with other similar universes,
makes up the superuniverse of Orvonton.
The commission of beings that claims authorship of The Urantia Book comes
from all sections of the grand universe.
The authorization of the book was given
by the Ancients of Days, who are the administrators of Orvonton and reside in its
capital, Uversa. The book further states
that "Orvonton is one of seven evolutionary superuniverses of time and space
which circle the never-beginning, neverending creation of divine perfection-the
central universe of Havona. At the heart
of this eternal and central universe is the
stationary Isle of Paradise, the geographic
center of infinity and the dwelling place
of the eternal God."
The seven superuniverses, along with
the central and divine universe, are called
the "grand universe," which is part of the
"master universe," the latter of which
"embraces the uninhabited but mobilizing universes of outer space."
According to the book, God, the
Universal Father, sent out a supreme
mandate, "Be you perfect, even as I am
perfect," which was carried throughout
631
632
sense of his origin and mission. His socalled "missing years" were spent primarily as the head of a large and poor family
following the death of his father. In his
twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth years, he
undertook a tour of the Mediterranean
world, and spent time in Alexandria,
where he visited the great library and
learned about the world's religions.
Following his crucifixion Jesus was
resurrected neither in flesh nor as a spirit,
but in the likeness of resurrected ascendant beings of the local Satania system.
His corpse remained behind in the tomb
and was decayed to dust in a natural but
accelerated process by celestial hosts. After a number of appearances to the faithful, Jesus ascended, returning to his status
as Michael, now having earned his universe sovereignty as a Paradise Creator
Son.
The Urantia Book applauds Christianity for being "one of the greatest powers for good on earth," but laments its
descent into politics and commerce. It has
become a religion about Jesus rather than
the religion of Jesus (the Gospel of the
Fatherhood of God and the brotherhood
of man). Christianity is handicapped because it has become identified with the
local system, industrial life, and moral
standards of Western civilization: "thus
has Christianity unwittingly seemed to
sponsor a society which staggers under
the guilt of tolerating science without idealism, politics without principles, wealth
without work, pleasure without restraint,
633
v
Vision quest
Ritual common to tribes throughout
North America, with the exception of the
southwestern United States, for acquiring
a guardian spirit or soliciting supernatural guidance. It is most important east of
the Rockies and in some parts of western
North America. The vision quest provides the average person, not just the
medicine man, with access to the spiritual
realms for help.
The vision quest, or "crying for a vision," as it is sometimes called, is preceded by sweat-bath purification rites.
The individual goes into the wilderness to
a sacred place and fasts, thirsts, smokes
tobacco, prays, and meditates for a vision. The vigil may last several days and
nights. Self-mortification or mutilation,
such as cutting off a finger joint, is practiced by some Plains tribes. Some tribes
use hallucinogens; small groups in southern California traditionally ingested a
drink containing jimson weed, and medicine societies along the Missouri used
mescal. See Medicine societies. In a successful vision quest, the seeker falls into a
trance or experiences a vivid dream in
which his guardian spirit manifests, or he
receives the sought-after advice from the
spirits or Great Spirit.
Vision quests are usually sought by
males, sometimes beginning in childhood
but usually not until at least puberty.
They are a powerful force in the matura-
634
Vision quest
Sources: Edward S. Curtis. "Medicine Practices of the Lakota Sioux." Excerpted from
The North American Indian, 1908. Shaman's Drum no. 16 (Mid-Spring 1989):
25-31; Michael Harner. The Way of the
Shaman. New York: Bantam, 1986; Ake
Hultkrantz. The Religions of the American
Indians. 1967. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979; Ake Hultkrantz. Native Religions of North America. San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1987; Lame Deer,
John (Fire), and Richard Erdoes. Lame
Deer: Seeker of Visions. New York: Washington Square Press/Pocket Books, 1972;
Ruth M. Underhill. Red Man's Religion.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1965; Carl Waldman. Atlas of the North
American Indian. New York: Facts On
File, 1985.
Visualization
See Creative
visualization.
Vivekananda, Swami
See Hinduism.
635
636
The two main rites of Vodoun worship are Rada and Petro (also Pethro),
both characterized by drumming, dancing, chanting, and ecstatic trance. Rada
rites follow more traditional African patterns and emphasize the gentler, more
positive attributes of the loas. Devotees
wear all-white clothing for the ceremonies. Animals sacrificed-Danbhalah
exhorted his followers to partake of sacred
blood-include
chickens, goats, and
bulls.
Petro rites have their origins in
Arawak and Carib ceremonies that existed in Haiti during the slavery days. The
name "Petro" allegedly comes from Don
Juan Felipe Pedro, a Spanish Vodoun
priest and former slave who contributed a
more violent style of dance. The Caribfrom which the word "cannibal" derives-worshiped
their gods more violently, emphasizing death and vengeance.
Petro ceremonial clothing is red, and the
loas are predominantly more menacing,
deadly, and ill-tempered; many of their
names simply have the appellation GeRouge ("red eyes"), after a Rada name to
signify the Petro form. Pigs are sacrificed
to them.
Guinee, or Ian Guinee or Ginen,
symbolizes the homeland of the Africans
in diaspora. The sacred city of Guinee is
He, the Mecca of Vodoun. An actual He
exists in southern Nigeria, but the He of
Vodoun is a legendary place where the
revelations of the loas descended unto the
first faithful. Vodoun devotees refer to
themselves as sons or daughters of
Guinee: ti guinin. Vodounists believe everything in life- administrative, religious,
social, political, agricultural, artisticcomes from He, but most especially the
art of divination. Since Africa is east of
the New World, He represents the celestial position of the sun. All spiritual
strength comes from He; when the sacred
drums need divine refreshment, they are
"sent to He" in a very solemn ceremony
signifying death, burial, and resurrection.
,I
637
638
I
I
,
and helps them depart when their business is finished. The houngan and mambo
serve as healers, diviners, psychologists,
musicians, and spiritual leaders.
The most important symbol of the
houngan's or mambo's office is the asson,
a large ritual rattle made from the calabash, a type of squash with a bulbous end
and a long handle. Symbolically, the asson represents the joining of the two most
active magic principles: the circle at the
round end and the wand at the handle.
The handle also symbolizes the poteaumitan, or vertical post. Inside the dried
calabash are sacred stones and snake vertebrae, considered the bones of African
ancestors. Eight different stones in eight
colors are used to symbolize eight ancestor gods; eight signifies eternity. Chains
of colored beads, symbolizing the rainbow of Aida-Wedo, or more snake bones
encircle the round end of the calabash.
When the vertebrae rattle, making the asson "speak," the spirits come down to
the faithful through Danbhalah, the oldest of the ancestors.
Other important members of the
worship service include la place or commandant la place, the master of ceremonies, who orchestrates the flag-waving
ceremonies, the choral singing and chanting, and the drum-beating. La place carries a ritual sword made of the finest iron
and sometimes decorated with geometric
designs and symbols. The sword's name
is ku-bha-sah, which means "cutting
away all that is material." Brandishing
his sword from east to west during the
ceremonies, la place cuts away the material world, leaving the faithful open for
the divine presences. La place's sword
also symbolizes the loa Ogou, god of iron
and weaponry.
The chorus or canzo, composed of
fully initiated Vodoun members called
hounsihs or hounsis, performs under the
direction of the hounguenicon or hounguenikon, usually a woman and the
second-most powerful member after the
639
rificing a bull to Ogou climaxes the celebration; as the houngan slices its throat
with a machete, the animal's life force becomes part of the loa. Participants collect
the bull's blood in a calabash and drink it
all around, taking for themselves part of
Ogou's divine energy.
640
York: Warner Books, 1985; Melita Denning and Osborne Phillips. Voudou Fire:
The Living Reality of Mystical Religion. St.
Vodoun
(also Voodoo)
w
Walk-in
See Montgomery, Ruth.
I
,
Walk-in
641
642
ology from the Seabury-Western Theological Seminary in 1948 and his doctor
of divinity from the University of Vermont in 1958. He then journeyed to California, where he took up residency in
Mill Valley and studied Chinese calligraphy. From 1951 to 1957, he was professor of philosophy at American Academy
of Asian Studies in San Francisco, and
served as dean from 1953 to 1956. From
1951 to 1953, he was a research fellow of
the Bollingen Foundation.
But he had not abandoned Buddhism
and Taoism. Rather, he wanted to, as he
said, bring to Christianity "a form of that
mystical and perennial philosophy which
has appeared in almost all times and
places." To this end, during two-year research fellowships in 1962 through 1964,
one at Harvard University in the Department of Social Relations, and a second at
the Bollingen Foundation, he traveled in
both Europe and the Far East. Watts's
ideas on the mystical experience are put
forth in Behold the Spirit: A Study in the
Necessity of Mystical Religion (1947),
which was widely praised by reviewers.
Critics called it "creeping pantheism,"
which Watts shrugged off in his preface
to the 1972 edition of the book by observing that "all doctrines of God are ultimately false and idolatrous, because
doctrines are forms of words which can
never be more than pointers to mystical
vision ... " He defined pantheism as "the
conception of God as the total energyfield of the universe, including both its
positive and negative aspects, and in
which every discernible part or process is
a sort of microcosm or hologram."
Watts is recognized for his efforts to
find a common meeting ground between
Western psychotherapy
and Eastern
schools of thought, including Buddhism,
yoga, Taoism, and Vedanta. The fruits of
his efforts were published in Psychotherapy East and West (1963), in which he
observed that the two sides have some
parallels, in that they attempt to trans-
Alan Watts
form consciousness and one's inner feelings of one's own existence, and release
the individual from conditioning that has
been imposed by social institutions. The
parallels are not exact, Watts wrote, because Eastern schools do not categorize
the mind as a clinical entity, nor separate
mind and matter, soul and body, as do
Western schools.
In his autobiography, In My Own
Way (1972), Watts said that his first
mother-in-law, Ruth Everett, was very
knowledgeable about Zen and influenced
him a great deal. Watts married Everett's
daughter, Eleanor, in 1936, after she became pregnant with the first of their two
daughters. Their baby-sitter, Dorothy De
Witt, became Watts's second wife in
1950; the two had five children. Watts
was excommunicated upon his second
marnage.
In 1963, after moving to California,
he married Mary Jane Yates. He once
commented, "I have had three wives,
seven children, and five grandchildrenand I cannot make up my mind whether
I
..
643
644
York: Houghton Mifflin, 1986; Gene Kieffer, ed. Kundalini for the New Age: Selected Writings of Gopi Krishna. New
York: Bantam Books, 1988; Alan Watts.
"Letting Go: The Art of Playful Living."
East West journal 13, no. 4 (April 1983):
306; Alan Watts. In My Own Way: An Autobiography 1915-1965. New York: Pantheon Books/Random House, 1972; Alan
Watts. The Essence of Alan Watts. Millbrae, CA: Celestial Arts, 1974; Alan Watts.
Psychotherapy East and West. New York:
Vintage Books/Random House, 1961; Alan
Watts. Behold the Spirit: A Study in the
Necessity of Mystical Religion. 1947. New
York: Vintage Books/Random House,
1972; Alan Watts. The Way of Zen. New
York: Vintage Books/Random House,
1957.
(1873-1946)
American occultist, psychical researcher,
and author, whose exploration of alternate realities with his wife, Betty, resulted
in the occult nonfiction classic, The Betty
Book, and several other works.
White was born March 12, 1873, in
Grand Rapids, Michigan. He studied at
the University of Michigan, where he
earned an undergraduate degree in phi-
645
646
II
1
I
hour of her death, White sensed her invisible presence, an experience he would
have frequently for the rest of his life. Six
months after Betty's death, White had a
seance with Finley and her husband and
received communication from Betty, who
wished to describe the afterworld. White
published her messages in 1940 in The
Unobstructed Universe, the first full,
first-person account of life after death
since the alleged communications of British psychical researcher Frederic W. H.
Myers about twenty-five years earlier.
The three "Betty books" elicited
such a response that White went on to
write other books on the occult. He
served as president of the San Francisco
chapter of the American Society for Psychical Research. He also was a member
of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, and a Fellow of the
Royal Geographical Society. He died September 18, 1946, in Hillsborough, California. White's other books include The
Road I Know (1942), Anchors to Windward (1943), The Stars Are Still There
(1946), and two published posthumously,
With Folded Wings (1947) and The Job
of Living (1948). See Channeling; compare to Roberts, Jane.
Sources: Arthur Ford as told to Jerome Ellison. The Life Beyond Death. New York:
G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1971; "Excursions
into the World of Other Consciousness."
Journal of the American Society for Psychical Research 31, no. 12 (December 1937):
373-79; Leslie A. Shepard, ed. Encyclopedia of Occultism and Parapsychology. 2d
ed. Detroit: Gale Research Co., 1984;
Stewart Edward White. Across the Unknown. Columbus, OH: Ariel Press, 1987;
Stewart Edward White. The Betty Book:
Excursions into the World of OtherConsciousness. New York: Berkley Medallion Books, 1969.
Witchcraft
Magical art and, in the West, both a system of magic and an organized religion.
As a magical art, witchcraft usually is re-
I
Witchcraft
647
648
Witchcraft
I
1
i
1
1
A
Witchcraft
649
of Myths
and Secrets.
(1899-1972)
Gifted British-born
clairvoyant
and
healer who became famous for healing
with his American wife, Olga Ripich
Worrall. Ambrose Worrall was born on
January 18, 1899, in Barrow-in-Furness,
England, on the coast of the Irish Sea. His
father was employed for a while in the
munitions and military supplies industry,
and then ran a stationery store. Worrall
was a gifted psychic from early childhood, seeing the glowing forms of spirits
of the dead in his bedroom every night.
As a youth he discovered that he involuntarily projected himself out-of-body to
visit others at night. A customer of the
stationery store once complained to his
father that she could see him in her room
every night when she turned off the light.
Worrall worked in an English munitions plant during World War 1. He began to see impending deaths clairvoyantly: a small, thin skeleton floated over
someone's head, accompanied by a number that indicated the length of the remaining lifespan. The omen applied either to the person or someone known to
him or her. Worrall predicted the death
650
Witchcraft
Worrall,
Olga (1906-1985)
1965.
651
Worrall's healing ability also manifested early. As a young child, she responded to other people's distress by impulsively placing her hands on them. Her
mother discovered that she could banish
headaches, and used her frequently for
that purpose. As a child Worrall cured
her mother of a floating kidney, thus
avoiding surgery, and saved the life of a
neighbor who miscarried.
In 1925 Worrall went to see a psychic who described her future husband
and predicted Worrall would work as a
clairvoyant. She met Ambrose Worrall in
1927; they were mutually relieved to discover both had psychic gifts. Ambrose
visited her at night out-of-body, and she
in turn learned to do the same to him.
They were married on June 7, 1928.
In December 1928 Ambrose's company transferred him to Baltimore, Maryland, where they lived the rest of their
lives. Their only children, twin boys, were
born on June 10, 1929, but became ill
and died two months later in August.
Some time later the Worralls were visited
one night by the spirit of Ambrose's dead
sister, Edith, who carried the infants and
communicated that they were in her care.
Prior to the twins' deaths, the Worralls had performed healings upon request, as others heard of their remarkable
abilities. Their grief prompted them to
devote themselves to healing, especially
of children. They worked out of a healing
room they set up in their home. Ambrose
retained his full-time job, and healed in
his spare time. They refused payment.
They always insisted that their efforts be
accompanied by traditional medical help.
In 1950 Olga was invited by a Methodist minister, Albert E. Day, to establish
with him a spiritual healing clinic. They
operated the New Life Clinic for nine
years out of the Mt. Vernon Place Methodist Church in Baltimore. Later the
clinic was moved to the Mt. Washington
Methodist Church, and Worrall worked
with Rev. Robert Kirkley.
652
Worth,
Patience
1985): 9.
Worth, Patience
One of the most famous cases of automatic writing is that of Patience Worth,
an alleged discarnate being who manifested through a Ouija board in 1913 to
a St. Louis housewife, Pearl Curran. Curran, who had dropped out of school at
age fourteen, was persuaded to use the
Ouija by a friend, Emily Hutchinson.
Curran had little interest, but participated in a number of sessions for more
than a year. On July 8, 1913, the pointer
spelled out the message, "Many moons
ago I lived. Again I come. Patience Worth
my name." The announcement marked
the beginning of a long friendship and literary partnership between Curran and
the mysterious spirit.
During subsequent sessions Patience
Worth, speaking in archaic dialogue, revealed herself as an Englishwoman, born
to a poor country family in Dorsetshire in
1649. A spinster, she emigrated to the
American colonies late in life and was
killed in an Indian massacre. She declined
to say more about herself.
Hutchinson and Curran discovered
that Curran alone could contact Worth
through the Ouija, but not Hutchinson
alone. Worth began to dictate an enormous volume of 2,500 poems, plus plays,
short stories, allegories, epigrams, and six
full-length novels, all in diverse historical
settings-a total of 4 million words in
five years, filling twenty-nine bound volumes. Her works were published and enjoyed great commercial and critical success, especially her first two novels, The
Sorry Tale, a 300,000-word epic about
the life of Jesus, and Hope Trueblood, set
in Victorian England. The Sorry Tale
took over two years to dictate through
653
the Ouija.
poetry on demand.
Curran used the Ouija for seven
years. After five years she discovered she
could anticipate the letters before they
were spelled out, then began reciting the
letters while the pointer circled the board
aimlessly. In 1920 she discontinued use of
the Ouija and simply recited the dictation
as it came to her in automatic speech.
The relationship began to decline in
1922, when Curran
became pregnant
with her first child at age thirty-nine, and
then suffered the deaths of her husband
and mother. By the mid-1920s, public interest in Worth began to diminish, and
Curran and Worth communicated
less
and less frequently. Curran died in 1937.
The writings of Worth have been analyzed by scholars and found to be authentic in detail of various historical periods, and well-constructed
in plot and
characterization.
Controversy remains as
to the real identity of Patience Worth.
Some experts
maintain
that
Curran,
though uneducated, was merely channeling material from the depths of her subconscious or a collective human memory.
The vocabulary
used by Worth had a
654
Wrekin Trust
See Planetary
consciousness.
Worth, Patience
x
Xenoglossy
The ability to speak in an unlearned
foreign language. Xenoglossy is a phenomenon associated with some cases of
past-life recall, and altered states of consciousness such as trance, delirium, sleep,
and mediumship.
"Xenoglossy" was coined around
the turn of the twentieth century by
French physiologist Charles Richet, from
the New Latin term xeno ("strange, foreign") and the Greek term glossa
("tongue"). Documented cases of true xeno glossy are rare. In many instances the
"unlearned foreign language" proves to
be learned but forgotten phrases dredged
up from the subconscious, or pseudolanguages that are partly gibberish. In a
few cases, it appears to be the result of
telepathy between two people, such as a
hypnotist and a subject. Xenoglossy is
not to be confused with glossolalia, or
"speaking in tongues." See Glossolalia.
There are two types of xenoglossy:
recitative and responsive. Recitative xenoglossy, in which a person recites words
or phrases of a foreign language without
understanding their meaning and being
able to converse, is more common. Usually, such phrases were learned earlier in
life and then forgotten. See Cryptomnesia. In responsive xenoglossy the person is
able to carry on a conversation in an unlearned language.
Xenoglossy
A famous case of recitative xenoglossy in past-life recall is that of Swarnlata Mishra, a Hindu girl born in 1948
and researched by Ian Stevenson in 1961.
Between the ages of four and five, Swarnlata sang Bengali songs and performed
Bengali dances without ever having been
exposed to Bengali language or culture.
She said she had been a Bengali woman
in a previous life, and had learned the
songs and dance from a friend.
One of the earliest recorded cases
of responsive xenoglossy was reported
in 1862 by Prince Galitzin, a mesmerist
who magnetized an uneducated German
woman. The woman told of a life in
eighteenth-century France, and spoke
French fluently. In her waking state, she
knew no French.
The Jensen case, a hypnotic regression of a thirty-seven-year-old Philadelphia housewife, "T.E.," who was hypnotized by her physician husband, took
place in a series of sessions from 1955 to
1956. The personality which emerged
was "Jensen," a male peasant farmer who
spoke an early form of Swedish in a deep,
masculine voice. He was never fluent, but
spoke with some effort, sometimes repeating phrases almost automatically.
Nevertheless, he conversed in seventeenth-century colloquial Swedish. In
deep trance T.E. denied that she ever
studied any Scandinavian tongues. No
subconscious knowledge of Swedish man-
655
656
Xenoglossy
y
Yantra
See Mandala.
arts; Taoism;
Yoga
Various systems of spiritual discipline
and liberation from the senses. "Yoga" is
a Sanskrit term derived from the root yuj,
"to harness horses to a chariot." In yoga
one seeks to become bound to divine reality. Yoga has been developed into a philosophy, but its origins and essence are
nonintellectual, even anti-intellectual, and
entirely experiential. It is meaningful only
if practiced. In yoga the search for the
mystery of the universe is undertaken in a
search for one's own true self.
Types of Yoga
There are different types of yoga,
each of which is based on a specific
path of liberation, such as physical action, meditation, concentration, mantras,
Yantra
657
Some yogas combine these yogas. Integral Yoga is a synthesis of yogas emphasizing the whole being, created by Sri
Aurobindo. See Aurobindo, Sri. Kundalini Yoga utilizes posture and mantra
to raise the primal kundalini force. See
Kundalini. Laya Yoga utilizes meditation,
breath control, mantras, visualizations,
and postures to cleanse the chakra system
and raise kundalini. See Chakras. Tantric
Yoga focuses on the arousal of sexual energy, which is converted to kundalini. Alchemical rites involve the transmutation
of kundalini to achieve longevity. See Alchemy. Buddhist Tantrism cultivates supernormal powers and the use of magic.
658
Yoga
Yoga
heat, used to keep warm; and dream recall. See David-Neel, Alexandra; Milarepa.
Yoga was exported westward first
by the Sufis, during the Moslem invasions
of India between 1200 and 1700, but
never reached Europe. That was accomplished largely through the colonialism of
Britain. Beginning in the nineteenth century, major influences on the spread of
yoga west were the Theosophical Society
and various Indian mystics, among them
Ramakrishna (1836-1886), Aurobindo
(1872-1950), Ramana Maharshi (18791950), and Yogananda (1893-1952). Yogananda was ordered to the United States
by his guru in 1922. He settled in California and remained the rest of his life,
spreading yoga teachings. His widely
read Autobiography of a Yogi (1949) is
considered a classic of yoga literature.
More recently, yoga teachings and training were spread by Swami Sivananda and
Swami Muktananda, the latter of whom
became renowned for his reputed siddhi
powers.
Yoga does have pitfalls and dangers,
as does any occult study. The serious student ideally should work under the supervision of a guru or other teacher. The
dangers of yoga are extreme introversion,
spiritual hedonism, regression (especially
with unprepared novices), and emotional
fixation on the guru. See Drugs in mystical and psychic experiences; Guru;
Mandala; Mantra; Meditation; Mystical
experiences; Zen.
Sources: Bernard Bromage. Tibetan Yoga.
1952. Wellingborough, Northamptonshire,
England: The Aquarian Press, 1979; Mircea Eliade. Yoga: Immortality and Freedom. 1958. 2d ed. Princeton, NJ: Princeton
University Press, 1969; W. Y. EvansWentz, ed. The Tibetan Book of the Dead.
3d ed. London: Oxford University Press,
1960; W. Y. Evans-Wentz. Tibetan Yoga
and Secret Doctrines. 2d ed. London: Oxford University Press, 1958; Willard
Johnson. Riding the Ox Home: A History
659
of Meditation
from Shamanism
to Science.
660
York: Harper & Row, 1975; Vivian Worthington. A History of Yoga. London:
Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1982.
Yogic flying
See Levitation; Transcendental
Medita-
tion.
Yoga
z
Zeitoun
See Marian apparitions.
Zen
Sect of Buddhism that developed in China
and Japan, and perhaps the best-known
Buddhist sect in the West because of its
appealing, highly mystical nature. "Zen"
is the Japanese pronunciation of the Chinese term Ch'an, an abbreviation of
Ch' an-na, the Chinese approximation of
the Sanskrit term dhyana, or meditation.
The Way of Zen is the Way of Meditation.
Like Buddhism in general, Zen has
virtually no theology. It is almost entirely
philosophy, yet it is more than philosophy. It cannot be conceptualized by intellect and logic; it must be experienced.
Enlightenment is the sudden awakening
to the nature of one's own being. It is
the responsibility of the individual and
cannot be obtained through faith in a
deity or savior, through intercession or
through education. Zen stresses the development of an intuitive wisdom that
sees the oneness of all.
Buddhism began penetrating into
China in the first century A.D. Zen developed through the teachings of Bodhidharma, an Indian monk who arrived
in China sometime during the early
sixth century and disseminated teachings,
Zeitoun
661
662
Zen meditators
anese Zen masters and is considered a bodhisattva (enlightened one who helps others attain enlightenment). The Rinzai sect
adopted the Lin-chi emphasis on koan,
while the Soto sect adopted the Ts'aotung sect emphasis on silent meditation.
In Japan little of substance was
added to the teachings of the Chinese, but
Zen nonetheless took on its own unique
Japanese character. It flourished and permeated the Japanese culture, remaining a
vital force to the present. It has especially
influenced the arts and is the basis of the
tea ceremony (Dogen imported the first
tea from China). See Martial arts; Sports,
mystical and psychic phenomena in.
Zen, other forms of Buddhism, and
Hinduism were introduced to the West in
the nineteenth century, and captured the
interest of the Trancendentalists. In 1893
Zen was represented at the World Parliament of Religions in Chicago in 1893.
Zen teachers and masters were among the
Asians who began immigrating to the
West, where they taught Zen to an increasing audience. Perhaps the greatest
influence on the spread of Zen in the
West have been the writings of D. T. Suzuki (1870-1966), Japanese scholar and
philosopher; Christmas Humphreys, British journalist and founder of the Buddhist
Society; and Alan Watts (1915-1973),
British-born theologian and philosopher
who, after coming to America, became
identified with Zen but never considered
himself a Zenist. See Watts, Alan.
Zen
Zen
663
664
Zener cards
See ESP cards.
Zombie
A dead person supposedly brought back
to a robot-like life, through the magical
offices of a bokor, a Vodoun sorcerer, to
perform as a slave. Zombification has
been described as the African slave's ultimate nightmare, since not even death releases the slave from unending labor. A
natural explanation exists for this seemingly supernatural creature.
The word "zombie," also spelled
"zombi," probably comes from the
Congo word nzambi, which means "the
spirit of a dead person. " Yet a truly dead
person-one who has lost all bodily func-
Zen
tion, whose brain has ceased operatingcannot be returned to life. In his studies
of Haitian Vodoun and zombies, ethnobiologist Wade Davis reasoned that the
zombie was a person buried alive, who
only seemed dead through extensive drug
intoxication. Davis's investigation with
various Vodoun priests, or houngan, and
two people who claimed to be zombies,
confirmed that zombies are created by
giving the victim a powerful poison, administered topically through an open
wound or ingested in the victim's food.
The poison, usually a powder, contains
various toxic plants and animals and often human remains. ThG poison puts the
victim into a death-like state; the bokor
revives the victim with other drugs.
One of the most important ingredients of making a zombie is gland secretions from the bouga toad, bufogenin and
bufotoxin, compounds fifty to one hundred times more potent than digitalis, and
which cause death by rapid heartbeat and
eventual failure. The secretions also contain bufotenine, a hallucinogen.
Other ingredients are ground millipedes and tarantulas; the skins of poisonous white tree frogs; and four types of
puffer fish, which contain tetrodotoxin,
one of the most poisonous substances in
the world-five
hundred times more
toxic than cyanide, and 150,000 times
more potent than cocaine. The powder
also contains various plant products:
tcha-tcha seeds from the albizzia lebbeck
tree, a poisonous plant that causes pulmonary edema; consigne seeds from a
type of mahogany tree with no known
toxic properties; leaves from the pomme
cajou, or common cashew (Anacardium
occidentale), and the bresillet tree (Comocladia glabra), which are related to
poison ivy and cause severe skin irritations; maman guepes (Urera baccifera)
and mashasa (Dalechampia scandens),
which belong to the stinging nettle family
and inject a chemical similar to formic
acid into the skin; Dieffenbachia seguine,
Zombie
665
666
Zombie
REFERENCE/ METAPHYSICS
Harper's
[N[Y[l~r[~I~
of Mystical
& Paranormal
Experience
Destined
to
perience-a
Painstakingly
seeking
in the
comprehensive,
practical
With
be a classic
lavishly
researched,
and fascinating
a deeper
more
understanding
reviewed
reference
understanding
of mystical
illustrated,
A-to-Z
by top experts
is an invaluable
entries,
guide.
resource
of the mystery
ex-
for anyone
of alternate
realities.
Harper's Encyclopedia
encyclopedia
of its kind
in more
than
and
twenty-five
years.
A browser's delight and an indispensable
resource, Harper's Encyclopedia of Mystical and Paranormal Experience features:
MAJOR FIGURESIN THEFlELD-Blavatsky,
Huxley,
Krishnamurti,
Merton,
Dowsing,
Freemasonry,
Huna, Christianity,
Shakers, Shinto, Taoism, Zen;
Avebury,
PHENOMENA-Apparitions,
Hauntings,
Levitation,
much, much more.
mystical
Gurdjieff,
and divinatory
Magic,
Sufism,
tech-
Palmistry,
MYSTICAL TRADITIONS-A
PLACEs-Ashrams,
Cayce, Castaneda,
Kabbalah,
Tran-
Science,
Quakers,
Poltergeists,
vu,
Exorcism,
Possession,
Firewalking,
Xenoglossy,
and
of The Encyclopedia of Witches and Witchcraft and The Mystical Tarot, as well as
in subjects
numerous
related
to the paranormal.
other books.
HarperSanF rancisco
ISBN
USA
CANADA
$22.00
$29.50
0-06-250366-9